
 

 
 
 
 <_^v/l£*3 
 
 HaaMBnan 
 
 LIBRARY OF TK 
 
 Hniversity of California. 
 
 UL A TING B R A N C II . 
 
 _ Pvf 
 
 Return in two week* ; or a week before the end <k trS^raL 
 
GERMAN GRAMMAR 
 
 \7 
 
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 By CHARLES FOLLEN, 
 
 PROFESSOR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE 
 IN HARVARD UNIVERSITY. 
 
 THIRD EDITION. 
 
 BOSTON: 
 
 HILLIARD, GRAY, AND COMPANY 
 
 1835. 
 
Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1832, 
 
 by Hilliard, Gray, and Co. 
 
 in the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the District of Massachusetts. 
 
 CAMBRIDGE: 
 CHARLES FOLSOM, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY. 
 
PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 
 
 The language, of which this grammar contains the practical 
 rules, is frequently designated by the name of the High Ger- 
 man. This epithet was originally applied to the language in 
 order to distinguish it from the Low German, which compre- 
 hends all those dialects that are spoken in the level coun- 
 tries of the north of Germany. But as the language which is 
 called the High German, diners from the dialects of the south 
 of Germany, as well as from those of the north, this name is 
 now applied exclusively to that general language, which is 
 spoken and written by all wellbred Germans. Accordingly 
 it is more properly called the German language, without any 
 other epithet. 
 
 Among the various dialects which have existed and still 
 exist in different parts of Germany, there is a characteristic 
 difference between those of upper and of lower Germany. The 
 dialects of the north of Germany are in general softer than 
 those of the south, and the vowels are more protracted ; while 
 the southern dialects are characterized by greater variety 
 and energy. In all these various dialects we discover the 
 distinct traces of one common and original language, of which 
 each dialect may be considered a more or less perfect 
 copy. But of the time when this original language may 
 have been used as the common instrument of speech by the 
 whole German race, we have as little knowledge, as of the 
 primeval history of the nation itself. If we examine the his- 
 tory of Germany, and particularly the remaining documents 
 of its language from the fourth century to the fifteenth, we 
 find that at different periods one of the various dialects was 
 more than the other employed for literary productions. Such 
 
 a" 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 a temporary ascendency was owing partly to the fact, that 
 sometimes one of the German tribes happened to possess a 
 greater number of superior minds, and partly to political 
 circumstances. As Germany was an elective kingdom, its 
 government sometimes devolved on men of different German 
 tribes, who had it in their power to increase the influence of 
 their native dialect, particularly if they promoted literature 
 and science. Thus in the reign of the emperors from the 
 house of Hohenstaufen, the Suabian dialect gained the ascen- 
 dency, and became the classical language of the polite or, 
 as it is commonly called, the romantic literature of Germany, 
 in the twelfth and thirteenth centuries. 
 
 In the fourteenth and fifteenth centuries, when the spirit 
 of poetry died away, and writings in prose increased, the 
 language also assumed a more prosaic character. This 
 change was effected by various causes, as, by the language of 
 the laws or customs, which were at that time committed to 
 writing ; moreover by translations, and novels, and particu- 
 larly by the writings of those religious philosophers, who are 
 known by the name of mystics. Tauler, who lived in the 
 fourteenth century, and whose works still belong to the most 
 interesting documents of ancient German prose, is particular- 
 ly celebrated among the German mystics. These thinkers 
 in theology, although they were frequently led into error by 
 their imperfect knowledge of natural objects and an aversion 
 to the examination of facts, on the other hand distinguished 
 themselves by their independence of established prejudices, 
 and by intense thought, by which they strove to sound the 
 essence of religion. Their merits in developing the German 
 language cannot be doubted. They arose in different parts 
 of Germany, and seem to have intentionally avoided such 
 provincial expressions, as might have prevented their writings 
 from being generally diffused ; and these writings could not 
 but impress the minds of others with the difference between 
 the general substance and the local ingredients of the Ian- 
 
$$ 
 
 PREFACE, , N^5'i2 V ^ 
 
 guage. Thus one writing corrected another, and the language 
 gained in generality, as well as in philosophical and grammati- 
 cal exactness ; while it lost by degrees its ancient poetical flow 
 and richness. 
 
 This prosaic language, thus formed, is essentially the same 
 which prevailed at the time of the Reformation in the six- 
 teenth century, and which at present, with few alterations, is 
 spoken and written by all wellbred Germans. It is a false 
 notion which was first spread by Adelung,* that Luther, in 
 his writings, and particularly in his translation of the Bible, 
 availed himself of his native dialect of the Electorate of Sax- 
 ony, which by the signal success of his books became the 
 general language of Germany. Luther cannot be considered 
 as the father of the general language of his country ; no 
 more than he can be regarded as the father of the Reforma- 
 tion. He found them both already existing, and promoted 
 and modified them according to his own views. With re- 
 spect to the language, he says himself, " I have not a distinct, 
 particular, and peculiar kind of German, but I use the com- 
 mon German language, in order that the inhabitants of both 
 the upper and lower countries may understand me." But 
 even without these express words of Luther, the above 
 statement would be sufficiently evident from a considerable 
 number of books which were published before, and at the 
 same time with those of Luther, in all of which we find 
 essentially the same language used for various subjects ; as, 
 for example, by the painter Albrecht Diirer for laying down 
 the principles of geometry, drawing, and fortification. But 
 the merit of Luther consists in his having written the com- 
 mon language with particular propriety and grammatical pre- 
 cision, and in having extended it more than any other author 
 among the people at large. 
 
 * This error has lately been repeated by Noehden in the Preface 
 to his Grammar, 
 
Vlll PREFACE. 
 
 The poetic powers of this common language, which had 
 been formed principally by prose writers, were developed 
 by some eminent minds in the seventeenth century, among 
 whom we mention particularly Frederic a Spee, and Martin 
 Opitz, the founder of the Silesian school of poets. But in 
 the course of the seventeenth and the beginning of the eigh- 
 teenth century, the language was adulterated by French ex- 
 pressions and modes of speaking. From this debasement 
 the language, as well as the literature of Germany, was re- 
 deemed by the great authors who have distinguished themselves 
 during the last eighty years. They have shown its suffi- 
 ciency for every branch of literature and science, and have 
 restored to it that most precious of all its properties, the 
 power of being developed and increased out of its own sub- 
 stance. 
 
 The works of these authors, the history and the genius of 
 the language, and the manner in which it is used by wellbred 
 people in different parts of Germany, are the true standards 
 for speaking and writing it correctly. There is no part of 
 Germany where the whole population speak the language 
 correctly. Neither the public of Dresden or Meissen, nor 
 that of Hanover or Gottingen, can be looked to as filling the 
 place of an academy of the classical German language. 
 Slight shades of provincial dialects enter into the manner of 
 speaking even of the best educated persons. Some faults in 
 pronunciation, which are peculiar to different parts of Ger- 
 many, may be mentioned here. Sometimes b is confound- 
 ed with p, and d with t; a and 6 are pronounced like e, 
 and u like i; g in the beginning of words is pronounced by 
 some Germans like k t and by others like j. Sometimes s 
 before t and p is pronounced like sh in English ; and sch 
 when it stands before a liquid consonant is sounded like s ; 
 final syllables in c (with or without other letters) are 
 pronounced too short, and sometimes with a nasal sound. 
 A gross grammatical fault consists in using the accusative 
 
PREFACE. IX 
 
 instead of the dative, and the dative instead of the accusa- 
 tive case. 
 
 After these observations on the history and actual state of 
 the German language, I will add a few on German gram- 
 mar. It is reported of Charlemagne, that among other plans 
 for the advancement of knowledge he conceived also that of 
 inducing the learned men of that age to compose a grammar 
 of the German language. But this project remained unexe- 
 cuted. Some German grammars were published in the six- 
 teenth century ; but none of great eminence until the eigh- 
 teenth. During the first half of the eighteenth century, 
 Gotsched wrote his grammar, which held the highest rank 
 till, in the last half of the same century, that of Adelung ap- 
 peared. Although the bad taste of Gotsched did great injury 
 to the literature of his country, yet his merit as a German 
 grammarian cannot be denied. He was however far surpass- 
 ed by Adelung, the author of the most complete dictionary 
 of the German language in German. After that of Adelung 
 a great number of German grammars were published in 
 Germany, of which I shall notice three, viz. the historical 
 grammar by Grimm, the grammar by Harnisch, and that by 
 Heinsius. The grammar of Grimm exhibits a profound 
 grammatical inquiry into the gradual formation of the Ger- 
 man language. The grammar of Harnisch is characterized by 
 its metaphysical investigation of the German language ; it 
 abounds in deep and ingenious remarks, but sometimes runs 
 into a sort of philological mysticism. The grammar of 
 Heinsius, although it contains many general observations on 
 the philosophical importance of each part of speech, is chiefly 
 of a practical nature, and has on this account been introduced 
 as a guide into most German schools. 
 
 With respect to German grammars written in foreign lan- 
 guages, I shall mention only two which are commonly used 
 in England, and which have been employed in composing 
 this grammar. I mean the grammar of Noehdcn (the fifth 
 
X PREFACE. 
 
 4 
 
 edition of which was published in 1827), and that of Rowbo- 
 tham (printed in 1824). These grammars contain many 
 valuable rules and useful directions, most of which are derived 
 from German grammars, particularly that of Adelung. Noeh- 
 den indeed not unfrequently pretends to originality ; but 
 those passages of his grammar in which he speaks as the 
 philosopher of the German language, and even those practi- 
 cal parts which he most boasts of, as being of his own in- 
 vention, are certainly the weakest in his book. While the 
 rules are better expressed in the grammar of Noehden than 
 in that of Rowbotham, the latter is more useful on account of 
 the exercises which are joined to each rule. The principal 
 defect of Rowbotham consists in particularizing too much ; 
 of which method the natural consequence is, that many cases 
 which belong together under the same general rule remain un- 
 decided. 
 
 In the Grammar which I now offer to the public, I have 
 endeavoured to preserve all that is valuable in the two last 
 mentioned grammars. I have altered wherever I thought it 
 necessary, and will mention here some of the most impor- 
 tant changes that have been made. 
 
 1. In the third chapter of Part First, Book First, I have tried 
 to arrange the sounds of the German language in their natural 
 order. In this arrangement I was guided by the excellent 
 treatise of Mr. Duponceau on Phonology * in which he has 
 laid down general directions for analyzing the sounds of every 
 language, and then applied them to the English. In a few in- 
 stances I have ventured to differ from the opinion of my learned 
 friend, particularly with respect to the distinction between 
 palatals and linguals, and in regard to the consonants d and 
 t, which I have not ranked with the lingua-dentals, or dentals 
 (as the grammarians commonly do), but with the palatals. 
 
 * Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, at Phila- 
 delphia. Vol. I. New Series, No. xvu. 
 
PREFACE. XI 
 
 r 
 t 
 
 I have thought it best to found the distinction between palatals 
 and linguals on the simple fact that some consonants are 
 formed by a particular part of the palate being touched by the 
 tongue, while others are produced by the position of the 
 tongue when brought near the palate without touching it. 
 Accordingly I and n have been ranked with the palatals, and r 
 with the linguals. In regard to d and t, it may be observed, 
 that they are pronounced as well by persons who have lost 
 their teeth, as by those who retain them. The tongue may in- 
 deed touch the teeth in sounding these consonants, but if this 
 circumstance had any influence upon their pronunciation, it 
 would add a hissing sound to that of d and t, and consequently 
 spoil the utterance of these letters. Accordingly I have 
 ranked d and t among the palatal consonants. 
 
 The limits of this grammar have not allowed me to give 
 more than a general analysis of the sounds of the German lan- 
 guage ; while a more minute investigation would have led to 
 more satisfactory results.* 
 
 2. In representing the German declensions (which have 
 cost so much trouble to all German grammarians) I have been 
 principally guided by Heinsius, whose arrangement I have en- 
 deavoured to render more complete and systematic ; so that 
 there should remain no exception to the principles laid down.t 
 
 * English students of the German language, as well as German 
 students of the English, may be surprised to find, that the only 
 sound which Walker, in his Critical Pronouncing Dictionary, 
 characterizes as a German sound (I mean the broad German a, as 
 he calls it), does not exist in the German language ; that this 
 sound is confined to some dialects, and is never heard from the 
 mouth of a wellbred German. 
 
 f There is no part of Noehden's Grammar of which the author 
 boasts more than of his arrangement of the German declensions. 
 To satisfy the reader in regard to the foundation of these preten- 
 sions, it is sufficient to observe, that Noehden mentions only one 
 
Xll PREFACE. 
 
 I have added a mode of signifying by two letters tne manner 
 in which each noun is declined ; which method I should 
 think would be of still greater use to the student, if in the 
 dictionary also every noun were marked in this manner. 
 
 3. With respect to the German verb, I have thought it best 
 to treat first of its original parts, i. e. of those which are form- 
 ed by the addition of letters to the radical syllables ; and 
 afterwards of those supplementary parts of the verb which are 
 formed by means of auxiliary verbs. This distribution is 
 evidently most congenial with the real nature of the German 
 verb and its inflections ; but it presents the additional advan- 
 tage, that the distinction between regular and irregular verbs 
 can, according to this method, be placed at the head of this 
 doctrine , instead of having the regular forms of the verb 
 preceded by the irregular auxiliary verbs. Moreover this 
 difference between regular and irregular verbs affects only 
 the original parts of the verb, and has no influence upon 
 those, which are formed by means of auxiliary verbs. But 
 according to the common mode of mixing together the origi- 
 nal and supplementary tenses (in order to make the German 
 verb appear as complete as the Latin or Greek verb), the 
 distinction between regular and irregular verbs is carried also 
 through those parts of the verb which are not at all affected 
 by this difference. 
 
 4. As the German language in this country, as well as in 
 England, is studied by many persons particularly on account of 
 the polite literature of Germany, I have wished to contribute 
 to the enjoyment of lovers of poetry by giving (in the Third 
 Book) as full an account of German versification as the limits 
 of this elementary work would admit. I have availed myself 
 of the opinions of Voss and Schlegel on German prosody, as 
 
 characteristic of the fourth declension, viz. that it " comprehends 
 all those masculines and neuters which are not included in the 
 two foregoing declensions." 
 
PREFACE. Xlll 
 
 far as they coincided with those to which I was led in pursuing 
 this study with particular and continued interest. 
 
 To facilitate the pronunciation, I have marked the princi- 
 pal accent on every word in this grammar ; and experience 
 has already convinced me of the eminent usefulness of this 
 method. This idea was suggested to me by my friend, 
 Mr. Folsom, to whose excellent judgment I am gratefully 
 indebted for a great number of valuable suggestions in the 
 definition of principles and choice of expressions. 
 
 In regard to orthography, which in some points is a matter 
 of dispute among German writers, I have in general followed 
 the principle of writing the words as they are pronounced, — 
 a principle, which is generally acknowledged as correct, 
 though with more or fewer exceptions. I have not adopted 
 any mode of spelling in which I am not supported by some 
 distinguished modern author. With regard to the letter X) (y), 
 and the compound $ (sz), which some authors use more or less 
 frequently, while others entirely reject them, I have made a 
 few remarks on the former letter, on pages 6 and 8. As to 
 %, it is to be observed, that whenever the \ (z) modifies the 
 sound of the f (s), it is not pronounced as J, but as an addi- 
 tional f, rendering the sound stronger and more acute. Ac- 
 cordingly in this Grammar, whenever the J has no effect on the 
 pronunciation of the f, the J is omitted ; but whenever it modi- 
 fies the pronunciation of that letter, ff is used instead of ji, 
 except at the end of words, where fj is retained instead of ft?, 
 in the same manner as 6 is used instead of f.* 
 
 I will conclude this preface by adding a few observations 
 on the manner in which I think this (or any other) grammar 
 may be used to the greatest advantage by beginners. The 
 
 * The $ seemed preferable to f£, which is used by Harnish, sim- 
 ply because the latter has rather an unusual typographical appear- 
 ance. — In those German writings which are printed in Roman 
 type, ss is generally used instead of sz. 
 
 b 
 
XIV PREFACE. 
 
 pronunciation ought, of course, to be first attended to.* 
 Then the beginner should acquaint himself thoroughly with 
 all the ordinary inflections of articles, nouns, adjectives, pro- 
 nouns, and verbs. I do not think it advisable to attend in 
 this first study of the grammar to all the principles and minute 
 observations which are contained in those chapters in which 
 the grammatical forms are stated. It is sufficient, that the 
 learner should be able to translate correctly and easily all the 
 exercises which are added to illustrate those forms. — After 
 having acquired this elementary knowledge, he ought to be- 
 gin to translate some easy German book. For this purpose 
 I published about two years ago a collection of extracts from 
 the best modern German authors, under the title, " Deutsches 
 Lesebuch fur Anfanger," German Reader for Begi?iners, 
 Cambridge, University Press, 1826. This collection was 
 made with the advice of my respected friend, Mr. Ticknor, 
 who, being at the head of the department of modern langua- 
 ges in Harvard College, has introduced and most effectually 
 promoted the study of the German language and literature at 
 this University. 
 
 As the student is making progress in translating, he will 
 himself feel the necessity of a more minute study of grammar. 
 This study ought to consist, partly in the teacher's referring the 
 learner to that particular passage in the grammar which will 
 explain any difficulty he has met with in translating, — and 
 partly in a gradual, thorough study of the grammar from the 
 beginning to the end. During this study, the translating should 
 be continued, and be accompanied with exercises in writing, 
 in addition to those contained in the grammar. 
 
 After having in this preface offered some views of the 
 history and actual state of the German language and German 
 
 * A correct pronunciation cannot be acquired by self-instruc- 
 tion ; since all the means which are used to explain the sounds of 
 one language by those of another, cannot effect more than an ap- 
 proximation to the true pronunciation. 
 
PREFACE. XV 
 
 grammar in general, and of the characteristics of this Gram- 
 mar in particular, I present it to the public, with the assur- 
 ance, that its severest critic cannot be more fully convinced 
 
 of its imperfections, than 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 Harvard College, 10 May, 1828. 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 
 
 The increased number of students of the German language 
 in this country has called for a new edition of this Grammar. 
 In preparing it I have availed myself of the suggestions of 
 others, as well as of those of my own experience in teaching, 
 to improve the work, or at least to correct its defects. Every 
 part of the Grammar in its present form will, I hope, bear 
 witness to the earnest endeavour of the author to make it a 
 more thorough, correct, and practical book. In the " Ele- 
 ments," the German Verb in particular has been presented 
 and explained in a somewhat different and, it is believed, more 
 satisfactory manner. In the " Syntax," the combination of 
 that part of it which treats of the agreement and government, 
 with that which teaches the arrangement of words, will cer- 
 tainly meet with the approbation of instructers. 
 
 Before this edition of the Grammar could be prepared, a 
 new edition of the " German Reader," was called for, and 
 published, in German type, carefully revised and improved.* 
 About the same time an excellent collection of German 
 and English Phrases and Dialogues was published by 
 Mr.' F. Graeter.f This book has ably supplied a want which 
 was equally felt by teachers and students. 
 
 Some alterations in this edition have been suggested by a 
 perusal of the German Grammar of C. F. Becker (published 
 
 * German Reader for Beginners, — ©attfcljftf ScjVblldj fftV 
 Zfttfdnget. Boston. Hilliard, Gray, Little, & Wilkins. 1831. 
 
 f German and English Phrases and Dialogues, &c, collected by 
 Francis Graeter. Boston. Hilliard, Gray, Little, & Wilkins. 1831. 
 
PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. XVU 
 
 in London, 1830), a work, which must be interesting and use- 
 ful to those who, having acquired a competent knowledge of 
 German, wish to extend their inquiries further, to the whole 
 structure and philosophy of the language. 
 
 C. FOLLEN. 
 Cambridge, 10 Dec. 1831. 
 
PREFACE TO THE THIRD EDITION. 
 
 In preparing the third edition of this Grammar, I have en- 
 deavoured to render it more valuable by such improvements as 
 could be derived from a constant philosophical investigation of 
 the language, combined with daily experience in teaching, 
 from a continual study of the wants of learners, and from the 
 observations of other instructers. Those who may take the 
 trouble to compare this with the previous edition, will find 
 here a number of corrections, and additional rules and illustra- 
 tions, which I trust will prove useful both to students and 
 teachers. 
 
 I am now preparing for the press the Gospel of St. John in 
 German, with a literal interlinear translation for beginners, on 
 a plan somewhat different from the Hamiltonian method. I 
 hope that this book, together with the Grammar and Reader, 
 will form a sufficient preparatory course to enable the faithful 
 student to enter upon a thorough and extensive study of Ger- 
 man literature. 
 
 C. FOLLEN. 
 
 Cambridge, July, 1834. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 BOOK I. ELEMENTS. 
 
 PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Page 
 
 CHAPTER I. THE ALPHABET ... 1 
 
 CHAPTER II. USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. . 3 
 
 CHAPTER III. GENERAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION 4 
 
 CHAPTER IV. THE SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE . 4 
 
 § 1. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS . . .4 
 
 § 2. CONSONANTS 7 
 
 PART II. PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 CHAPTER I. ARTICLE . . . . . .11 
 
 CHAPTER II. SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN . . 12 
 
 § 1. GENDER 12 
 
 § 2. DECLENSION '..... 13 
 
 A. Declension of Common Nouns . 14 
 
 B. Declension of Proper Nouns . 25 
 
 CHAPTER III. ADJECTIVES . . . . .34 
 
 § 1. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES . . 34 
 
 § 2. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES . . 44 
 
XX 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. NUMERALS 
 
 48 
 
 I. 
 
 Cardinal Numbers .... 
 
 48 
 
 II 
 
 . Ordinal Numbers .... 
 
 50 
 
 in. Numerals of Proportion 
 
 52 
 
 i\ 
 
 r . Numerals of Distribution 
 
 52 
 
 v. 
 
 Collective Numbers .... 
 
 53 
 
 CHAPTER V. PRONOUNS 
 
 54 
 
 §1. 
 
 PERSONAL PRONOUNS .... 
 
 54 
 
 §2. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 56 
 
 §3. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 59 
 
 §4. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 61 
 
 §5. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS . 
 
 62 
 
 §6. 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS 
 
 63 
 
 §7. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 65 
 
 CHAPTER VI. VERBS ..... 
 
 69 
 
 General Remarks ..... 
 
 69 
 
 *■>■ 
 
 REGULAR VERBS .... 
 
 72 
 
 §2. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS .... 
 
 74 
 
 §3. 
 
 MIXED VERBS .... 
 
 75 
 
 §4. 
 
 REFLECTIVE VERBS .... 
 
 98 
 
 §5. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS 
 
 101 
 
 §6. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS 
 
 104 
 
 §7. 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS .... 
 
 A. Supplementary Tenses of Active and 
 
 114 
 
 
 Neuter Verbs .... 
 
 127 
 
 
 B. Supplementary Tenses of Reflective 
 
 
 
 Verbs ..... 
 
 136 
 
 
 C. Supplementary Tenses of Impersonal 
 
 
 
 Verbs ..... 
 
 137 
 
 
 D. Supplementary Tenses of Compound 
 
 
 Verbs 
 
 138 
 
 § 8. PASSIVE VERBS 
 
 139 
 
CONTENTS. XXI 
 
 CHAPTER VII. ADVERBS ..... 150 
 
 § 1. DIFFERENT KINDS OF ADVERBS . 151 
 § 2. FORMATION OF ADVERBS . . .156 
 
 A. Adverbs derived from Nouns or 
 Adjectives .... 156 
 
 B. Compound Adverbs . . . 157 
 
 § 3. COMPARISON OF ADVERBS . . 159 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. PREPOSITIONS .... 159 
 
 CHAPTER IX. CONJUNCTIONS .... 160 
 
 CHAPTER X. INTERJECTIONS .... 161 
 
 CHAPTER XI. ON THE MODE OF FORMING NEW WORDS 161 
 
 § 1. MODES OF ENRICHING THE LANGUAGE 
 
 FROM WITHIN ITSELF . . . 162 
 
 § 2. INTRODUCTION OF FOREIGN WORDS INTO 
 
 THE LANGUAGE .... 170 
 
 BOOK II. SYNTAX. 
 
 CHAPTER I. THE ARTICLE .... 174 
 
 CHAPTER II. NOUNS ...... 180 
 
 CHAPTER III. ADJECTIVES .... 195 
 
 CHAPTER IV. PRONOUNS ..... 201 
 
 CHAPTER V. VERBS 210 
 
 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT . . 210 
 
 A. Persons and Numbers . . 210 
 
 B. Tenses 212 
 
 C. Moods 215 
 
 D. The Passive Voice . . .223 
 
r • 
 
 XXll CONTENTS. 
 
 E. The Auxiliaries . . . 224 
 
 F. The Verb governing Cases . . 225 
 
 § 2. ARRANGEMENT .... 234 
 
 A. Indicative Mood .... 234 
 
 B. Subjunctive Mood . . . 237 
 
 C. Imperative Mood .... 238 
 
 D. Infinitive Mood . . . 238 
 
 E. Participles .... 239 
 
 F. Compound Verbs . . . 241 
 
 CHAPTER VI. ADVERBS . . . * . 242 
 
 CHAPTER VII. PREPOSITIONS .... 245 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. CONJUNCTIONS .... 251 
 
 CHAPTER IX. INTERJECTIONS . . . 259 
 
 BOOK III. PROSODY. 
 
 CHAPTER I. DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES 260 
 
 CHAPTER II. QUANTITY 261 
 
 CHAPTER III. ACCENT ..... 263 
 
 CHAPTER IV. GERMAN VERSE .... 266 
 
 § 1. RHYTHM 266 
 
 1. The Ancient Metres . . . 266 
 
 2. The German Rhythm . . 268 
 
 <§> 2. consonance 273 
 
 1. Rhyme ..... 273 
 
 2. Assonance ... . 274 
 
 3. Alliteration .... 274 
 

 CONTENTS. 
 
 tt 
 
 XXUI ^ 
 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 i. acts ix. 1-28, (in the German version of 
 
 Van Esz) 
 
 II. FAMILIAR DIALOGUES 
 
 III. GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS 
 
 275 
 
 . 277 
 
 282 
 
NOTICE 
 
 In this Grammar, the principal accent in each word of 
 several syllables has been marked by the sigjn (') ; as, 
 ^evg'roerf/ mine. In German books in general, no ac- 
 cent is marked. ^| 
 
 In translating the* English Exercises, th ^udent should 
 omit the accents in writing. -d| ^* 
 
 In the Exercises, those words which, thojgdi expressed in 
 English, are to be omitted in German, are m Bed in common 
 type and enclosed in parentheses ; thus/^which). Those 
 which are omitted in English, but expressjpif in German, are 
 printed in Italics : thus, (which). In those cases in which a 
 different form of expression is substituted in German, the 
 German idiom in a literal translation, enclosed and italicized, 
 is added to the English text. $ 
 
 The figures over the English words indicate their position 
 in German. Words without figures over them stand in the same 
 place as in English ; they sometimes separate one series of 
 figures from another, in the same sentence. Example : Had 
 you been 2 patient 1 , you would have 4 known 3 the 1 truth 2 . The 
 words in German are thus arranged, Had you patient been, 
 you would the truth known have. 
 
 In studying the Elements of the Adjective and the Numeral 
 (before attempting to translate the exercises on pages 46, 47, 
 and 53) the beginner should acquaint himself with the rules 
 concerning the use of the declinable and indeclinable forms 
 of them, contained in Book II. Ch III. § 1. Rules i, n, in, and 
 iv. In the same manner, together with the Elements of the 
 Pronoun, the rules concerning the use of the different relative 
 and interrogative pronouns, should be studied, in Book II. 
 Ch. IV. § 1. Rule i. Obs. 6 and 7. 
 
GERMAN GRAMMAR. 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 ELEMENTS. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 Simple Letters. 
 
 Letters. Uaual Names. English. 
 
 %, a, . . . . ah, A, a. 
 
 %, d/ . . . the French ai, . . A, a. 
 
 25, b, . . . . bay, .... B, b. 
 
 £, C, ... tsay, C, c. 
 
 2), t>, .... day, D, d. 
 
 K/m^ f \ f • • • • Cl« • • • « i-J« C» 
 
 g, f, . . . ef, F, f. 
 
 ©/ 9/ .... ghay, . . . . G, g. 
 
 J£j, fy, ... hah, .... H, h. 
 
 <o/ */ . . . . e, i, l. 
 
 3/ h • • • • yot, .... J, j. 
 
 8, f, .... kah, K, k. 
 
 1 
 
ORTHOGRAPHY. [BOOK I. 
 
 if It ... el, • L, 1. 
 
 SDt, m, ... em, M, m. 
 
 01, n, ... en, N, n. 
 
 0/ 0, .... o, O, o. 
 
 0, b f ... the French eu y . O, 6. 
 
 sp, p, ... pay, . . . . P, p 
 
 &, ((, ... koo, . ... Q, q. 
 
 §H ; t/ . . . . err, R, r. 
 
 @, f (6), . . ess, .... S, s. 
 
 $, t, . . . . tay, T, t. 
 
 U, U, ... oo, .... U, u. 
 
 II, U, . . . . the French u, . U, u. 
 
 ^5, t), ... . fow, .... V, v. 
 
 OB, », . . . way, W, w. 
 
 jC/ l"/ • • • • 1a.o« • • • • .aY. . X, 
 
 09, ty, .... ipsilon, ... Y, y. 
 
 ^5/ *z .... iseit, . . . . s *-* , z. 
 
 Letters. 
 
 A), 
 
 a, 
 
 ft 
 
 W/ 
 
 W, 
 
 ft 
 ft 
 ft 
 
 Compound Letters, 
 
 Usual Names. 
 
 . tsay-hah, . . 
 
 tsay-kah, . . 
 . ef-ef, 
 
 pay-ef, . . . 
 . pay-hah, . . 
 
 ess-tsay-hah, 
 . ess-ess, . 
 
 ess-tay, 
 . ess-tsett, . . 
 
 tay-hah, . 
 . tay-tsett, . . 
 
 English. 
 
 ch. 
 
 ck. 
 
 ff. 
 
 pf. 
 
 ph. 
 
 sch. 
 
 ss. 
 
 St. 
 
 sz . 
 
 th. 
 tz. 
 
 Instead of f X most authors write ct ; and §, instead of }}. 
 
 g is used only at the end of words, either separate or in 
 composition. 
 
 J3 is used in this Grammar only at the end of words, instead 
 of f£. (For the reasons, see page 8.) 
 
PART I. CH. 2.] USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 3 
 
 • The following letters, from the similarity of their form, may 
 be easily mistaken for one another. 
 
 Capitals. Small Letters. 
 
 25 and 33, b and tj, 
 
 2) and 0, f and f, 
 
 (£ and £, m and n>, 
 
 (*5 and ©, t and %, 
 
 8, St, and SK, i) and l> 
 9K and OB, 
 and &. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 USE OF CAPITAL LETTERS. 
 
 With respect to the use of capital letters, it is to be 
 observed : 
 
 1. All substantives, as well as all words used substantively, 
 begin with capitals, and also all sentences ; as, 
 
 t>ev $(13, the day. fcie SBodj'e, the week, 
 
 fcer 'SBei'fe, the wise man. t>ie SDTeftligCtt/ my family. 
 
 M$ Wlci'xu, mine (my- prop- t>a£ ic'fcn, the reading. 
 
 erty.) 
 @o[>a(t>' t>U bOU UClt ik'btU As soon as you learn any 
 
 SDTei'niojCU et'rMS Steu'eS news about my dear 
 
 erfdfyt'jV, gieb mil' fcgicicl)' friends, send me word im- 
 
 Sflaclj'vicfet. mediately. 
 
 2. The pronouns answering to you, your, &c. must begin 
 with a capital, when they refer to the person whom we address; 
 as, @te, you ; 3tyr, Sty'tige, your ; 2)u, thou ; 3>in, thine, 
 &/C. ; but the pronoun id), I, is never written with a capital but 
 at the beginning of a sentence, or when it is used as a sub- 
 stantive, as, t>a£ %d), one's self. 
 
 The pronoun fte, when it answers to the pronoun they, or 
 she, is written with a small letter, unless it begin a sentence. 
 
 3. Every word begins with a capital, when a stress 
 is laid upon it; as, the numeral till in the sentence, (5£ 
 gic&t XiUt gi'nen ©fyaffpcavc, There is but one Shakspeare.* 
 
 * Leaving a space between the letters answers the same 
 purpose ; thus, C i It C It. 
 
4 GENERAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION. [BOOK I. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 GENERAL RULES OF PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 § 1. In the German language each letter is pronounced in 
 every word. 
 
 Some exceptions to this rule are mentioned in Chapter IV. 
 Part I. ; particularly with respect to double vowels, e (e) after 
 i (i), and I) (A) in some cases. 
 
 § 2. Each sound is constantly represented by the same 
 letter, and each letter has only one sound. Thus the letter 
 a (a), which has in English four different sounds, has in Ger- 
 man only one, and this one sound is never represented by any 
 other letter than d. 
 
 A few exceptions are marked in Chapter IV. Part I., par- 
 ticularly in regard to the letters g (g), t (t), i) (v), and \) (y), 
 in words taken from foreign languages. 
 
 § 3. Words that belong to foreign languages preserve in 
 German their original spelling and pronunciation. Thus the 
 word Cambridge ((Eamblifcge) is sounded in German as in 
 English. 
 
 The dead languages are pronounced according to the Ger- 
 man idiom. The letters 1) (v) and t (t) form exceptions : for 
 which see Chapter IV. Part. I. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 THE SOUNDS OF THE LANGUAGE. 
 
 § 1. VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 A. Vowels . 
 
 The vowels in German are either long or short; which 
 distinction does not (as in English pronouncing dictionaries) 
 imply a difference in the sound of the vowel, but merely 
 determines its relative duration. 
 
PART I. CH. 4.] VOWELS. 5 
 
 The vowels are 
 a... an intermediate sound between a in father \ and a in 
 water ; it is 
 
 long in (2>va$, grass ; fya'ben, to have ; 
 short in QTiann, man ; ^at'jc, cat. 
 0* . . . nearly like a in fat ; it is 
 
 long in 33&1T/ bear ; (Sld'fer, Glasses ; 
 
 short in dl'ter, older ; Zty'fM/ apples. 
 C .. nearly like a in fate; yet closer, and without the sound ot 
 an e which is slightly heard at the end of long a in 
 English ; it is 
 
 long in @ce, sea; gc'fyen, to go ; 
 short in 53ctt, bed ; ef fen, to eat. 
 This vowel is in some words frequently pronounced like 
 short e in English. But elegant pronunciation in Germany 
 seems to prefer in every instance the close and acute sound 
 which is heard in @CC, and fen'Oen, to send. 
 
 The e after i in the same syllable is not sounded, but 
 merely protracts the sound of the i, as in iit'bt, love, 
 i, X) . . . like e in bee ; it is 
 
 long in mil*, to me ; Sci'lill'/ Berlin ; 
 short in gifrf), fish ; SDIit'te, middle. 
 . . . like o in promote ; it is 
 
 long in ©front/ river ; SHo'fc, rose ; 
 sAortf in §Kof3, horse ; €>p'fcr, sacrifice. 
 6* . . . like the French eu in pewr, which has no corresponding 
 sound in English ; it is 
 
 long in fd)6n, fine ; ^6'ttC, sounds ; 
 
 short in Step'fe, heads ; Of ittmg, aperture. 
 U . . . like oo in moon, and u in y#// ; it is 
 
 long in gut, good ; ^hl'ttte, flower; 
 
 short in @d)ll£, protection ; Sftut'tfr, mother. 
 
 * That d, 6, and ft, are simple sounds, and not diphthongs 
 composed of (U, OC, and tte, is evident ; for it is impossible 
 to produce these three sounds, by any combination of other 
 vowels, however rapidly pronounced. It is therefore better 
 
 to write ll^]([ f apples ; £>DC, solitude; tuning/ exercise; in- 
 stead of 2(cpfcf, £>eoe, Ucbung: and ©otlje, instead of (Boctfyc. 
 Two dots on the top of a, o, U, viz. a, 0/ u\ or a, b, it, 
 signify the same sounds as the small c on the top of the same 
 letters, d, b, ft. 
 1* 
 
6 DIPHTHONGS. [BOOK I. 
 
 tV, l).. .like the French u in vu, to which there is no corre- 
 sponding sound in English ; it is 
 
 long in %[)\\V, door ; miVfcC, tired ; 
 
 short in burnt; thin ; Jpltt'tC, cottage. 
 Observation. The letter V), which some German authors 
 retain in more or less words, and others entirely reject, has no 
 peculiar sound of its own. It has the force of i in all words 
 that are originally German, as well when sounded by itself, 
 ex. 'iil'Ir;, Tilly, a proper name, as in the diphthongs, (see 
 B.) ex. femt, to be ; CDTai;, May. In words derived from the 
 Greek, in which t) represents the letter v, it is commonly 
 sounded like ft, as in ©rjflcnV/ which is pronounced as if 
 written ©uftem' '•> ana " this mode of writing is also preferred 
 by several modern scholars. — Some grammarians retain this 
 letter wherever it serves to distinguish different words, which 
 are spelled alike in every other respect, as fttjtt, to be ; and 
 ffitt/ his. But this reason seems insufficient, as the significa- 
 tion of all such words is determined by the sense they have in 
 the sentence in which they occur. Therefore, according to 
 the general rules above stated, (Chap. III. § 1. and 2.) it seems 
 proper to retain the X), only 
 
 1. In proper names, particularly names of persons, where 
 the mode of writing them has an importance of its own 
 separate from that which consists in their sound, as in Jpeti'UC, 
 
 ietj'fceu ; 
 
 2. In words derived from foreign languages, where the l) 
 has the sound of the foreign letter it represents ; for example, 
 ©UUOUV/mtf, pronounced @UU0UlVmt£; ^OV?, pronounced 
 3ovf. (The sound of the consonant 3> is given, § 2. A. 4.) 
 
 In all other cases the t) should be given up, and the simple i 
 substituted, as in fciu, to be ; SDfar;, May. 
 
 B. Diphthongs. 
 
 All diphthongs are long, 
 ci, (et)) . . .like i in fine; ex. ^vci'fycit, freedom ; mciu, mine, 
 at, (at)) . . . nearly the same sound as d, only a little more 
 open ; ex. Jpaiu, grove ; 90?ai, May. 
 
 * See note on preceding page. 
 
PART I. CH. 4.] SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 7 
 
 oi, (09) . . . nearly as oi in moist ; it occurs only in a few words, 
 
 particularly proper names, as, £or/CV. 
 lit/ (ut;) . . . nearly as we ; it very seldom occurs ; ex. pflti ! fy ! 
 (W. . .nearly as ou in mouth (as the Scotch pronounce it) ; ex. 
 
 J^autf/ house; ftvaut, herb, 
 ett. . . has no corresponding sound in any modern language ; it 
 
 comes nearest to the sound of oi in voice, ex. §CU'Cl*, fire ; 
 
 gmtnfc/ friend. 
 a\l. .. nearly the same sound as en, only a little more open ; ex. 
 
 ipdu'fci', houses ; ftrau'tCl*, herbs. 
 There are no triphthongs in German. 
 
 § 2. CONSONANTS. 
 
 A. Simple Consonants. 
 
 There are in German five sorts of consonants, according to 
 the different orgaus which are particularly employed in form- 
 ing them. 
 
 1. Labials. 
 
 p ... like p ; ex. sptv'U, pearl ; phimp, clumsy. 
 
 b . . .generally like b ; as in SSut'tfl*/ butter; but at the end of 
 
 words like bp, as in iaub, foliage. 
 tn . . . like m ; ex. 3D?amt, man ; ft amm, comb. 
 XD . . . nearly like w, (omitting the sound of oo with which w 
 begins); ex. QGDint>, wind; ttc'fycn, to blow. 
 
 2. Labio-dentals. 
 
 f, t), ptj...like/; ex. %tU, rock; jUtf, stiff; botf, full; 
 
 spfyilofopt)', philosopher. 
 
 Spt) is not originally German, but chiefly intended to 
 
 represent the Greek qp, for which some modern authors 
 
 substitute f, and accordingly write §t(ofof, instead of 
 
8 SIMPLE CONSONANTS. [BOOK I. 
 
 S8 and f have in all genuine German words the same 
 sound.* 
 
 SB has the English sound of v only in words belonging to 
 foreign languages, i n which this letter is sounded as in 
 English. 
 
 3. Palatals. 
 
 t . . . like t; ex. ^itv'tcltaubc, turtle-dove; matt, faint. 
 
 £> . . . generally like d; as in ^Dn'fcclfatf, bagpipe ; but at the end 
 
 of words it sounds like dt ; as in 25a0, bath. 
 tt...like n; ex. ncin, no. — 9t becomes a nasal sound, when 
 
 followed by g or % (as in English): ex. ©cfang', song; 
 
 3)anf, thanks, 
 (...like I; ex. il'ixt, lily; 33aU, bail. 
 
 4. Linguals.i 
 
 I*... like the Irish r; ex. vof'fcn, to roll; jtaff, motionless. 
 f (g) . . . like s ; ex. ©ci'tC, side ; SKeiS, rice. 
 
 @ is never pronounced like z, neither has it the sharp 
 hissing sound of the English s, as this is commonly pro- 
 nounced. 
 
 The J is sometimes used as an addition to the f (ft), but 
 then the 2 is never pronounced ; it is sounded in some in- 
 stances like f£, as in -Jpajj, hate, or like a simple f, as in «£auf$, 
 house. Some authors, therefore, never use ft, but substitute, 
 according to its pronunciation, either f$, (ss) as in $&]$, or 
 $, as in J$au& 
 
 * As f and t) have the same sound, they seem to require 
 only one sign, and f has already taken the place of t) in sev- 
 eral words, as in DCjt, ©vat), which are now written fcft, firm ; 
 ©Vaf, count. But it seems as yet too bold a step, to dispense 
 with the \> altogether. 
 
 f The organic difference between Unguals and palatals 
 consists in the latter being formed particularly by that part of 
 the palate to which the tongue is applied, while the former are 
 produced by the position of the tongue, brought near the roof 
 of the mouth without touching it. 
 
^^Qffl^ 
 
 PART I. CH. 4.] SIMPLE CONSONANTS. 9 
 
 fcf) . . . like sk ; ex. &d)l\'U, school ; 23ltfc(), bush. 
 
 The soft sound zh is heard only in words taken from the 
 
 French language ; as (Scute' genius; ^Pa'ge, page, 
 d) . . . when it is preceded by e, t, d, 6, It, or a consonant, is 
 
 not a guttural, but a lingual, formed in the fore part of the 
 
 mouth. There is no sound corresponding to it in English. 
 
 Ex. 35ac()'e, rivulets; ibdycv, holes; >3h'd)ZX, books; 
 
 SKcc()t, right; id), I; OMcl), milk, 
 j . . . like y in year; ex. ja, yes ; Qtotyt/ year. 
 
 5. Guttural. 
 
 ff, q, and in some instances, c, and c() . . . are pronounced like 
 k; ex. Kai'I, Charles; £>ttel'(c, source. 
 
 £ is pronounced like k. when it stands before a, 0, U, 
 or a consonant, as in SvUlO'nicitS, prebendary ; (Evefcit'/ 
 credit. 
 
 (Et) also, is in some cases pronounced like f, as in (Efya- 
 Vac'ter, character ; (Tfyvo'ltif, chronicle. 
 
 Many German authors make use of f, instead of C and 
 d), when these letters are sounded like f, particularly in 
 those foreign words which are considered as naturalized in 
 German. Accordingly they write ^rcfctt, RwaHtV* 
 
 a, ... in the beginning of words, like g hard ; as in ©aft, guest ; 
 at the end, and sometimes in the midst of a word, it has 
 an intermediate sound between 0, hard and the lingual d) ; 
 ex. %%, day ; SKc'ont, rain ; after it, at the close of a 
 syllable, it sounds like g in singing; ex. finO/Ctt, to sing. 
 
 d) . . . when preceded by a, 0, or it, is formed in the throat, and 
 sounded like ch in the Scotch word Loch ; ex. 23ad), rivu- 
 let ; iod), hole ; $5ud), book. 
 
 fy . . . like h, when it begins a syllable, as in ^6'fyc, height ; after 
 a vowel, in the midst or at the end of a syllable, the b is 
 silent, and merely protracts the sound of the preceding 
 vowel, as in ?0?O^U, poppy ; frofy, joyful ; and it is silent 
 and entirely lost, after t or X, as in ttytm, to do ; 0tfycin, 
 the Rhine. 
 
 
• 
 
 10 COMPOUND CONSONANTS. [BOOK I. 
 
 B. Compound Consonants. 
 
 The most remarkable are 
 
 f, ?$, or cf$, and sometimes d)£. . . like ks, (never like gz) ; ex. 
 2tyt, ax; jfracte, straight on. £1)6 is sounded like jr, 
 when it belongs to a word in its simplest form, as in t>er 
 3)acb5, the badger. But when the final $ is added merely 
 by a change of termination, as in t>a$ 2)ad), the roof, 
 genitive, t>e£ 2)ad)j?, of the roof, the original sound of d) 
 is preserved. 
 
 I, %, ttf, and in some instances C and t . . . are pronounced like 
 ts (not dz) ; ex. $at)n, tooth ; btttitG', already. 
 
 £ is pronounced like J (ts), when it precedes e, i, &, 6/ 
 ft, or X) ; ex. O'cean, ocean ; SafvlV, Csesar. 
 
 $ is commonly pronounced like J, in words of Latin 
 origin, when the t is followed by i and another vowel ; 
 ex. Station', nation. 
 
 Many authors write J, instead of C or t, when these let- 
 ters are pronounced like J, particularly in words which are 
 considered as naturalized in German ; as Station', 0'£C<Ut. 
 
 fit . . . both letters are sounded ; as in SCua'frc, boy* 
 
 gn . . . both letters are sounded ; as in (Sna'fcC, mercy. 
 
 pfl. . . the three letters are sounded: as in $Pffan'£C/ plant. 
 
 fd)(...the two sounds of fd), and I are pronounced, as in 
 @d)lcu'fc, sluice. 
 
 fdjtt) . . . the two sounds, fd), and tt), are uttered ; as in ©cftt&afc 
 bt, swallow. 
 
 Observations. The doubling of vowels, when it does 
 not create two syllables, protracts the sound, as in ©cc, 
 sea. 
 
 The doubling of consonants renders the sound stronger 
 and more acute, as in 3)on / ncvtt>ettei*, thunderstorm. 
 
 There is a slight difference in the manner in which cer- 
 tain sounds which are essentially the same in both lan- 
 guages, are pronounced in German and in English. Those 
 German sounds which correspond to the English t, d, l y 
 r, 5, sh, viz. t, t>, (, V, f, $i\), are formed in the forepart 
 of the mouth, i. e. nearer the teeth than in English ; also 
 g (g) hard and k (f) are not formed so deep in the throat 
 as in English. 
 
 t 
 
PART II. CH. 1.1 PARTS OF SPEECH. 11 
 
 PART II. 
 
 PARTS' OF SPEECH. 
 
 There are ten parts of speech, viz. Article, Substantive or 
 Noun, Adjective, Numeral, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposi- 
 tion, Conjunction, and Interjection. Several of them, viz. the 
 Article, the Substantive, the Adjective, some of the Numerals, 
 the Pronoun, and the Verb, admit of inflection, that is, of a 
 change of termination, indicating the principal relations of 
 that which is expressed by the word inflected. The other 
 parts of speech are not inflected. 
 
 The inflection of Articles, Substantives, Adjectives, Nu- 
 merals, and Pronouns, is called Declension, and that of Verbs, 
 Conjugation. Declension comprehends two Numbers, the 
 Singular and the Plural, and each number four Cases, or re- 
 lations, which are indicated by certain changes of termina- 
 tion. While in English the Accusative or Objective case is 
 generally like the Nominative, and the Genitive and the 
 Dative are commonly indicated by the Prepositions of and to, 
 the German language expresses the same relations by chang- 
 ing the termination of the Nominative case. 
 
 That relation which in the Latin Grammar is denominated 
 the Ablative case, is in German expressed by the Dative, and 
 is generally preceded by the Preposition Doit, from ; as, fcOU 
 &em ^a'tCV, from the father. The Vocative is nothing else 
 than the Nominative, as used in an address or exclamation ; 
 ex. Wn'UV ! O father ! 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 ARTICLE. 
 
 There are two articles, viz. the indefinite, till, a or an, and 
 the definite, t>ev, the ; which are declined in three genders, 
 masculine, feminine, and neuter. 
 
12 
 
 
 NOUN. 
 
 GENDER. 
 
 
 [bo 
 
 
 ©in, a, is 
 
 thus declined 
 
 • 
 • 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 em, 
 
 ci'ne, 
 
 tin, 
 
 a. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 er'nes, 
 
 ei'ner, 
 
 ti'neg, of a. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ri'nem, 
 
 ei'ner, 
 
 ei'nem, to a. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ei'nen, 
 
 ei'ne, 
 
 em, 
 
 a. 
 
 
 2)CV, the, is thus declined 
 
 i: 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 t>er, 
 
 t>ie, 
 
 MS, 
 
 the. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 i>e$, 
 
 fcer, 
 
 fce£, 
 
 of the 
 
 Dat. 
 
 tern, 
 
 fcer, 
 
 fcem, 
 
 to the. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 bn\, 
 
 Me, 
 
 MS, 
 
 the. 
 
 • 
 
 Plural, for 
 
 a// Me genders. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 t>te, the. 
 
 
 
 
 Gen. 
 
 t>et*, of the. 
 
 
 
 
 Dat. 
 
 i>en, to the. 
 
 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 fcte, the. 
 
 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE, or NOUN. 
 
 § ]. GENDER. 
 
 All substantives, or nouns, are either masculine, or feminine, 
 or neuter. 
 
 The gender of most nouns is determined by the following 
 rules. 
 
 1. Of the masculine gender are 
 
 The names of male animals, and most nouns which convey 
 the idea of superior power and energy ; as t>Ct* SDtoim, the 
 man ; t>et* ^a'tCV, the father ; fcet* kb'Wt, the lion ; t>ev 33aitm, 
 the tree ; fcet* £am'tttcr, the hammer ; feci* SQTutfy, courage. 
 
 2. Of the feminine gender are 
 
 a. Most of the names of female animals, and most nouns 
 which express what is tender and delicate ; as, t>ie §V(IU, the 
 lady, or wife ; t>ie SDmt'ter, the mother ; i>te %m'bt, the dove ; 
 
PART II. CH. 2.] GENDER. 13 
 
 tic SBfa'mc, the flower ; tic SU'tcf, the needle ; tic ik'bt, 
 love. 
 
 6. All proper names of countries and places made by the 
 affix ei ; as, Die %Mti', tic QBallacljci' ; and the following, 
 Die *an'ft§, tic spfalj, tic ©efcweij. 
 
 3. Of the neuter gender are 
 
 a. The letters of the alphabet ; as, tag 11, tag 23. 
 
 b. All diminutive nouns ending in c()Clt or (cin ; as, b<X$ 
 spfcvb'cljcn, the little horse ; tag 35itd)'fcin, the little book. 
 
 c. All infinitives used as substantives ; as ta£ (Sf'fcit/ the 
 eating ; tag ^riiif en, the drinking. 
 
 d. The proper names of countries and places, which are 
 not comprehended under 2. 6., and the gender of which is not 
 otherwise determined by the following rule. 
 
 4. The gender of compound substantives is determined by 
 the last word which enters into the composition, expressing 
 the general idea of the word ; as, tag spia'ttnabcrgrocvf, the 
 platina mine; from tic spia'tina,/. platina, tcr SScrg, m. the 
 mountain, and tag < 2Ucrf, n. the work ; —tic -Hkt'tcrfatync,/. 
 the weathercock ; from tag ^DBct'tcr, n. the weather, and tic 
 Safy'nc, f. the banner ; — tcr ©teu'ermann, m, the steersman ; 
 from tag ©tcit'er, n. the helm, and tcr SDlaiUl/ m. the man. 
 For the same reason all proper names compounded with iant, 
 n. land, and with SHctcl)/ n. kingdom, are neuter ; such as, 
 ©cntfdj'fant, Germany ; (gno/lant, England ; granf'rcicf), 
 
 France; Ojt'rcicf), Austria. 
 
 Some nouns vary their gender, according to their significa- 
 tions ; as, 
 
 tcv 25ant, the volume, tag 25ant, the ribbon ; 
 
 tec 23unt, the alliance, tag 35unt, the bundle ; 
 
 tcr (Sx'bt, the heir, tag &bt, the inheritance ; 
 
 tcr ©ci'fcl, the hostage, tic (Sci'fcf, the scourge ; 
 
 tic SDlavf, the mark, boundary, tag €0tarf, the marrow ; 
 
 tcr SKeig, the rice, tag SHeig, the twig ; 
 
 tet* @ee, the lake, tic ©ee, the sea ; 
 
 tet* ^tyor, the fool, tag SEfyor, the gate. 
 
 § 2. DECLENSION. 
 
 In many cases, a, 0, and n are, in the plural number, 
 changed into the corresponding vowels ft, e, and u : and the 
 
 2 
 
14 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [BOOK I. 
 
 diphthong au into the corresponding ail', as, %§&[, valley, 
 plur. %fflkv, valleys ; ©ofyn, son, plur. ©ofy'UC, sons ; 33ru's 
 &cr, brother, plur. 23nV&CV, brothers ; ^attS, house, plur. 
 ^dlt'fcr/ houses. 
 
 The endings of the nominative singular are various, and 
 cannot be brought under certain rules. 
 
 The nominative, genitive, and accusative plural, have the 
 same ending in all the declensions, and are distinguished only 
 by the article ; as, fc»ic 35nYDCV, the brothers, gen. t>Cl* 23vu'Dev, 
 of the brothers, ace. fcic SSrft'fcet; the brothers. 
 
 The dative plural, in all the declensions of nouns and ad- 
 jectives, as well as of the article, ends in n; ex. %&n'bt, dove, 
 dot. plur. $au'ben ; SDfanfel), man, dot. plur. SERen'fcfeen ; 
 
 %$m, animal, dat. plur. Xtyl'XtW, 
 
 All those nouns, which make the nominative plural in n, 
 or en, retain the same termination in all the other cases of the 
 plural number, without an additional it in the dative plural ; 
 as, ^aw'ben, doves ; &ua'6en, boys ; 2ht'gCtt, eyes. 
 
 The mode of declining common nouns is different from that 
 of nouns proper. 
 
 A. Declension of Common Nouns. 
 
 The principal changes of termination in common nouns, 
 are comprehended under three declensions. 
 
 The characteristic of each declension is the genitive case 
 singular. In this case some nouns retain the ending of the 
 nominative, as, &ic 95Ut'mc the flower, gen. Dcr SSllt'mc, of the 
 flower; while other nouns receive an additional n, as t>Cl* 
 &na'be, the boy, gen. t>CS SCna'bcn, of the boy ; and others take 
 an additional $, as, fcaS *C'bcn, the life, gen. bt$ ie'bentf, of the 
 life. 
 
 First Declension. 
 
 The first declension comprehends all those nouns which 
 remain unchanged in the genitive singular. 
 
 These noun3 retain the termination of the nominative 
 through all the cases of the singular number ; but they differ 
 in the nominative plural, where some of them keep the ending 
 of the singular, as, Die fOlllt'UX, the mother, nom. plur. Me 
 
PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 15 
 
 SOTiit'ter, the mothers ; while others add e, as, Die SSefora'nifi, 
 the apprehension, nom. plur. Die SScfotNJ'nifle, the apprehen- 
 sions ; others U, as, Die SBhl'tttC, the flower, nom. plur. Die 
 SBltl'meil, the flowers ; others en, as, Die gtatt, the lady, nom. 
 plur. Die grau'eu, the ladies ; others nen, as, Die gveun'Din, the 
 female friend, nom. plur. Die gmtn'Dinnen, the female friends. 
 
 Accordingly the first declension contains only one form of 
 the singular, but five forms of the plural number. 
 
 All nouns of the first declension are feminine ; and all femi- 
 nine nouns belong to the first declension. 
 
 Second Declension. 
 
 The second declension comprehends all those nouns which 
 form the genitive singular by adding to the nominative a final 
 It, cither with or loithout another letter. 
 
 If these nouns in the nominative singular terminate in t, 
 they receive only an additional u in the genitive, as, Dei* 
 ftna'be, the boy, gen. DeS fttta'ben, of the boy ; but if they end 
 in any other letter, the genitive is formed by adding en to the 
 nominative, as, Dei* §el£, the rock, gen. DeS gcl'fCtt/ of the 
 rock. 
 
 With the exception of the nominative singular, all the cases 
 of the singular and plural are like the genitive singular, and 
 therefore always end in en. 
 
 Accordingly, the second declension comprehends only one 
 form of the plural, but two forms of the singular number : the 
 genitive singular being formed by the addition sometimes of 
 n, and sometimes of en. 
 
 All nouns which belong to the second declension are mascu- 
 line ; and all masculine nouns belong either to this or to the 
 third declension. 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 The third declension contains all those nouns which form 
 the genitive singular by adding to the nominative a final 6, 
 either with or without other letters. 
 
 This declension comprehends four forms of the singular, 
 and five of the plural number. 
 
 Singular. Some nouns receive in the genitive case merely 
 
16 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [BOOK I. 
 
 an additional $, as, t>n 333 an' t> cm, the traveller, gen. fceS 
 SJOBail'&em'S/ of the traveller ; others C6, as, taS spfevfc, the 
 horse, gen. DCS spfcr'&CS, of the horse; others \\$, as, t>er 
 (gcfcanN, the thought, gen. U$ ©cDanf'CttS, of the thought ; 
 and one noun, tul£ £evj ; the heart, makes the genitive in cn£, 
 H& #Zt!ym&, of the heart. 
 
 Plural. Some nouns retain the termination of the singular 
 nominative, as, fcer f 2Ban / t>cm , / nom. plur. tie QOBan'fcCfCr ; 
 other nouns add C, as, &a$ spfcvb, the horse, nom. plur. t>ie 
 spfcr'&e ; others n, as, tier ^e&attf'e, the thought, nom. 
 plur. tic ©cfcanf'cn; others en, as, t>ci' @taat, the state, 
 num. plur. tic @tiUVteil ; and others et*, as, M$ §clt>, the field, 
 nom. plur. £)tC ^cl'DCf. 
 
 All neuter nouns are of the third declension. 
 
 The following table exhibits the endings of nouns in each 
 declension in all the cases except the nominative singular. 
 The different declensions are marked by the figures, 1, 2, 3: 
 the different forms of the singular by Roman letters, a, b, 
 c, d, and those of the plural by German letters, a, b, C, t> C. 
 
TABLE 
 
 OF THE 
 
 DECLENSION OF GERMAN COMMON NOUNS 
 
 2* 
 
O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 W 
 O 
 
 fa 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 I— I 
 
 m 
 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 • 
 
 - vj 
 
 i>© ** 
 
 
 SQ 
 
 O 
 
 w 
 
 O 
 fa 
 Q 
 
 Eh 
 
 QQ 
 
 fa 
 
 
 <fc. 
 
 "*o 
 
 Cb 
 
 55 so 
 
 •to 
 E 
 
 o ♦ 
 
 '-* '—* <^ '— r 
 
 60 * m Cfj *X> <£> 
 
 o 
 
 *8 <- 
 C/J <W 
 
 § « 
 
 co ^jn 
 C 8^ 
 
 a 8 
 
 •«. SO 
 
 • p*» ^^ 
 8 £ 
 
 W 
 
 P< 
 
 3 
 
 < 
 
 in f<i w <i u <5 "Ct 
 I I I I 
 
 >•*> « <* <s <s 
 l i I I 
 
 Crf c* <^ <^ 
 
 tt S £J « 
 
 ► ^ » » si a 
 
 i i i i 
 
 O^l ■!_► -t_> <_» -l_k 
 
 *> .«-.*—«-. J5 
 
 J? ^^ £^ «-^ ^* ^— • 
 
 H *U* O <^» C^ 
 
 I I I I 
 
 <~* <_. <^. '_^ 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 c^ <» <J» c* 
 
 t-» «-» <irf c* 
 
 %S3 «s co «a 
 
 *<S ^^i <*S »rs 
 
 i I I I 
 
 i— ( 
 m 
 
 ^> *k i-» 
 
 ^ ^> >=» ^ 
 
 <s <s <s « 
 
 I I I I 
 
 ^_ ^. <_, '^, 
 
 H S H H 
 I i I i 
 
 '—r <^ '_ •w. 
 
 i i i i 
 
 j-> >* j- j-> 
 ^_, ^^ -^ <_. 
 
 v£2 w*^ ^^ w ^* 
 
 t* u s o 
 ■« A /» ^O 
 
 fei ci ei ^ 
 
 < 
 
 PS 
 
 p 
 
 02 
 
 p 
 
 ^ tf q ^ 
 
 «^ ^ '^* <^ c^ 
 *^ ^* *^ ^* 
 
 ^* «i» <i* «J# ^» 
 
 C^s: « 8 « 
 
 •£>*»• ^» s <>* 
 
 faD 
 
 a 
 
 QQ 
 
 £;^ ^^ sg; 
 
 O <D CD 
 
 ■5 ^3 ,£3 
 
 ■*-> -*j -*j 
 
 m co tw 
 
 rt cd efl 
 
 -a -5 
 
 CO 
 
 CO 
 
 QQ 
 
 03 
 
 9p 
 s 
 
 e 
 
 K 
 
 s 
 
 So 
 
 55 
 
 O 
 
 i— i 
 
 m 
 fa 
 
 fa 
 Q 
 
 Q 
 
 O 
 
 fa 
 
 c72 
 
 C ' 
 
 a 
 
 "w ^ C^ 
 
 ""C ►'-' ,"-* , ,_ * 
 
 8 
 
 02 
 
 Ph 
 
 - a 
 
 
 
 •«« 
 8 
 
 -8 
 
 8P 
 
 h— i 1 ' ^ — .— <— ► 
 
 Gx ^> *^ ^^ t^ 
 
 i i i 
 
 t* ^ a a 
 
 C^ W ^ ^-^ 
 A* A* £* 6J 
 
 o 
 
 8 
 
 PS 
 < 
 
 P 
 
 o 
 
 sz; 
 t— * 
 
 m 
 
 ■^ '~* <-r 
 
 
 e 
 
 =8 
 
 a 
 
 a a a 
 
 ^^'C;^ 
 
 ^^q^i ^c^' Q 
 
st st st st 
 
 ^, '_, -_, -_, 
 
 ^ -^ <■* *_ * 
 
 !_i r i 
 
 «^ *■* S5 SS 
 
 ^ 2 2 S 
 
 o ^ S o 
 •«-» ^* ^* -<— . 
 
 A A A A 
 
 < 
 
 - 
 
 St St St St 
 
 «•* <•* <-+ <-r 
 
 « st e st 
 
 StfcH 
 
 
 o 
 
 st 
 
 3 
 
 .s 
 
 § 
 
 Hi 
 
 st ^ 
 o * o 
 
 ^ X rt 
 
 .1 
 
 OS 
 
 a^ at, *- *-* o-> 
 
 O J-i C2 i— ^* •— ■» 
 
 £ . o o o o 
 
 I I I I 
 
 
 
 «» C* 
 
 02 
 
 W 
 
 3 ^<£^^^ 
 
 co ^> ^ sj "u> 
 
 fS «rf «^ <S 
 
 A A A /j 
 
 -_^ -_^ ■*-- -_, 
 
 - O i_, a_> i»-> iJ-k 
 
 *e°0 ♦"" *~* JS tS 
 
 So 55-s < 
 
 2 A AAA 
 
 I I I I 
 
 *> ~ ^ 
 
 — 
 e 
 
 •.O £> i 
 
 o _Q S3 S5 St St 
 
 I- «V_* *L-» €*» «*k 
 
 '.^ '— • 
 
 c0 eo&s&oeo 
 i i i i 
 
 • 2"- «° sT J - 
 
 < . }_► V> C £* 
 
 CO ** <>* <-» <i» 
 A A A A 
 
 o 
 
 l-H 
 
 x 
 
 "O 
 
 St S JC3 
 
 
 •>!> ^ — 
 
 St ** ~ 
 
 02 
 
 o 
 
 I— c 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 m 
 «3 
 
 ctf 
 
 
 2 m 
 
 ^ ^' ci ^' 
 
 '^ '_ v» --» 
 
 •ii_» ^u. ii- ^t* 
 
 vO vO <A ■'<■> 
 
 I I I I 
 
 St St St St 
 
 •-. '-, ■-, '-^ 
 
 e^O *^*C) *■*© ♦^iO 
 
 "i* !-► l-> i* 
 
 0^ '_» '—* '—r 
 
 I I I I 
 
 '^. '^- '-^- ^ 
 
 >2-» ^- il-> 4^ 
 
 5 5 5 5 
 
 r-. r-. /^. r- 
 
 i i i i. 
 
 o «* ««► <>* 
 
 /o >o /=, /j 
 
 '-^ '.^ '-^ ^> 
 
 I I I I 
 
 ts^ *3j '3; rst> 
 
 «* ^ s « 
 
 6*AA 
 
 
 . • • • 
 
 ^ ^> t> st ^ 
 
 >_^ <i* «* 5-> ^* 
 
 iO ~ = s 
 
 ^^ 64 w 6* 
 
 ^ ^ *■* ^ *^ *^ 
 
 s£» «^ '-* 
 
 
 05 
 
 
 «« 
 
 fe- 
 
 — ^3 *j 
 
 9 
 
 st^ 
 
 co to 
 
 tn 
 
 ■ • • * • 
 
20 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [BOOK I. 
 
 Observations on the Jirst Declension. 
 
 1. ft. — There are only two nouns which retain in the nomina- 
 tive plural the termination of the singular, viz. %2l\\t'ttX, 
 mother, and ^ocb'tiT, daughter. 
 
 1. b. — The plural in C occurs particularly in those words 
 which end in ft, ft, and nig ; as, fttraft, power ; ftmtft, 
 art; SSctl'ut'ttijJ, sorrow. 
 
 1. C. — The plural in n belongs to feminine nouns which end 
 in e, el, and er; as, Qtyve, honor; ^i'bel, bible; @d)n>ef; 
 ter, sister ; plur. (Styvm, SSt'bcln, @c()n>cftent. 
 
 1. t>. — The plural in en is to be found in most words which 
 end in ci (ct)), cut), fyeit, feit, fdjftft, ling, It, andl't; as, 
 gifdjerei', fishery ; £tt'fl|Cn&, virtue ; gm'fycit, freedom ; 
 (5'ttUgfrtt, eternity; gmm&'fdjftft, friendship; Wtung, 
 esteem ; Q33clt, world ; 2tvt, manner ; &,c. 
 
 1. e. — The plural form netl is peculiar to those feminine 
 nouns, which end in in, and have the accent not on their 
 final syllable ; as, (Sat'tilt, wife ; $6 ttHtl, lioness. This 
 form was originally no other than the preceding 1. t>., the 
 nouns in in being formerly written with final tut/ as, 
 (Bat'ttmt, &c. But this practice of doubling the it in the 
 singular, is retained by few modern authors. 
 
 Some nouns of the first declension, as, grait, lady; 
 ©Olt'lte, sun ; ©ee'fe, soul ; gr'fce, earth ; are, according 
 to an old usage, still sometimes inflected in the genitive 
 
 singular, as, grftu'eit, ©on'tten, ©ee'Ien, (Sv'&en. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 To the actions, J^anb'hmg. 
 
 Of the Grecian women, (Srie'djilt. 
 
 The forks, (Sft'bef. 
 
 To the sciences, QODtffenfdjaft. 
 
 The daughters, ^octj'ter. 
 
 Of the balls, £n'ge(. 
 
 To the pens, ge'bev. 
 
 Observations on the Second Declension. 
 
 2. a. — The termination of the genitive in n is common ia 
 masculine nouns which end in e ; as, bet $6'tt>e, the lion ; 
 
PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 21 
 
 fc(T 55o'tC, the messenger. The names of nations which 
 end in C, are inflected in the same manner; as, fcCV (Sfic'clK, 
 the Greek ; frcr Scut'fcfoc, the German. 
 2. b. — The genitive in en is common in masculine nouns not 
 ending in c; as, fccr 90?C.nfcl), man; fccv 23dr r the bear. In 
 some cases euphony demands the omission of the C ; as, 
 t>Cf £cfr, the master, gen. t>c£ JpclTlt. 
 
 In poetry the dative and accusative singular are some- 
 times formed like the nominative ; as, t>cm §efc/ and Den 
 
 gefe. 
 
 Almost all the nouns of this declension signify living 
 beings. Exception, t>cv §cl£, 2. b. the rock. 
 
 Observations on the Third Declension. 
 
 3. a. & b. — It depends on euphony whether the genitive sin- 
 gular ends in & or c£. Nouns of more than one syllable, 
 which end in one of the unaccented syllables cf, Clt, CV, 
 and (cin, take only an $ ; as, glu'gcf, wing ; SCKd&'cijcn, 
 girl ; SJa'tet, father ; SDTdnn'fetn, little man. But all 
 those nouns of the third declension which end in 6 or J, 
 make their genitive singular in C6 ; as, $Ko|3, steed, gen. 
 SHef fc£, of a steed ; ©a£, sentence, gen. @a§'c$/ of a 
 sentence. Those nouns of one syllable which terminate 
 in any other letter, make their genitive singular in the same 
 manner, by adding c£ ; but this is frequently contracted 
 into $ ; as, Det 2Bc$, the way, gen. t>c6 ^Bc'gcS, or QQBcgS, 
 of the way. 
 
 These rules apply also to some proper nouns ; as, 2)c= 
 ctmbtc, 3. a. a. ; t>cr 9tl)cm, 3. b. 6., the Rhine. 
 
 It depends on euphony whether the c which is added to 
 nouns of the second form of the singular in order to form 
 the dative case, be omitted or retained. Ex. t>cm (Sol'DC, 
 or (Bolt), to the gold ; bent ©tnv'mc, or ©titvm, to the 
 storm. The C is generally omitted when the noun, pre- 
 ceded by a preposition, and without an article or adjective 
 or pronoun before it, is used in a general and indefinite 
 signification, in the place of an adjective or an adverb, to 
 express either the material of which a thing consists or the 
 manner in which something is performed. Ex. cin Sting 
 Von (Soli), a ring of gold ; mtt @tnrm cin'uctjmcn, to take 
 by storm. But if the noun be rendered more definite by 
 
22 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. [BOOK I. 
 
 an adjective or pronoun before it, the regular ending in C is 
 used, unless euphony should require its omission, par- 
 ticularly for the purpose of avoiding the monotonous re- 
 currence of the same sound. Thus we say, ciu Sting fcOlt 
 fcic'fem (Sol'be or Q5o(D, a ring of this gold; in bem Cf'jtcn 
 ©tttr/me or @tnnn, in the first storm. 
 
 The accusative of those nouns which have g or eg in the 
 genitive, is always like the nominative case. 
 3. c. — The addition of ng in the genitive is peculiar to those 
 nouns, the nominative of which formerly ended in en, but is 
 now commonly spelled without the final n, as, gvie'be 
 (gric'bcn), peace ; gunf'e (gnnt'en,) spark ; gng'jtapfe 
 (gttg'jtapfcn), footstep; (Stau'bc (©lau'ben), belief; £an'fe 
 (J^au'fen), heap ; sfta'me (Sfta'men), name ; ©aa'mc 
 
 (@aa'men), seed ; @cl)a'be (@ct)a'bcn)/ damage. But the 
 old termination in en is not yet entirely out of use. 
 
 Some nouns of the second declension are sometimes, 
 though not properly, inflected according to the form 3. c. ; 
 as, bev $M'bt, the boy, gen. U$ Stna'bcng ; properly, t»Cg 
 
 £na'ben. 
 
 If the genitive is formed by adding ng to the nomina- 
 tive, the dative and accusative singular always end in en. 
 3. d. — The substantive £evj, heart, is the only noun which 
 forms its genitive by adding eng to the nominative. 
 
 The nominative formerly was bag ^Cf'jC, which is still 
 used in poetry. 
 
 ^udj'jtab/ letter, is declined either according to 3. b. b., 
 or according to 3. c. C., and in this case the nominative is 
 
 23ud)'|tabe. 
 
 3. a. — The nominative plural is like the nominative singular 
 in almost all those nouns masculine and neuter, which end 
 in el, en, ev, and lein; as, Rv ©djluffef, the key; MS 
 SOtdt) ct)CU, the girl ; bet* llljv'macljcv, the watchmaker; bag 
 gfdnlein, the young lady. 
 
 The plural form, SQiab'riKW?, gran'teing, is incorrect, 
 though sometimes used by good authors in derision of bad 
 taste. 
 
 3. b. — The addition of e to the nominative singular is the 
 most common plural form of nouns of the third declension ; 
 as, bag $f)ier, the animal; bev 93aum, the tree; ber 
 ©tein, the stone ; &c, 
 
 3. C. — All those nouns which make their genitive singular in 
 
J»ART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 23 
 
 n£ (see p. 21, under 3. c), form their nominative plural by 
 adding U to the nominative singular. 
 
 o *—■* 
 
 3. t>. — There are comparatively only a few nouns of this de- 
 clension, which form their plural by adding en ; as, t>a£ 
 SjWlt tne heart; t>ct* ©tviat, the state; t>ev @trat)l, the 
 ray ; Datf 01)1*/ the ear. 
 
 3. e. — The singular of those nouns, which make their nom- 
 inative plural by adding et', is declined according to the 
 second form of the singular, 3. b. ; as, fcev ^Baft), the 
 wood, gen. sing, t>c6 ^at'fcCS. In the same manner- are 
 declined, £lctb, dress ; (Belt), money ; tiib, body ; (&ti\\, 
 spirit. 
 
 The nominative plural cannot always be determined by 
 the genitive singular. Ex. &a$ Tlll'M, 3. a. C, the eye, 
 gen. sing. t>c£ 2Ui'geS, nom. plur. l'\Z Ztll'gcn. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 The travellers, ^DBan'bercr. 
 Of the footstep, gnS'ftapfe. 
 Of the swords, SDc'gcn. 
 Of the floweret, SSlum'fcht. 
 The horses, Spfevb. 
 The sparks, gimf'e. 
 Of the treasure, @c()a§. 
 
 Some nouns have no plural number; for example, many 
 infinitives which are used as substantives. This peculiarity 
 is, in this Grammar, marked by omitting the German letter by 
 which the form of the plural is indicated ; as, t>a£ $ad)'cn, 3. 
 a., the laughing ; fcaS QBci'lten, 3. a., the weeping. 
 
 Other nouns have no singular. This peculiarity is marked 
 by omitting the Roman letter which indicates the form of the 
 
 singular; as, tk 2M'tcrn, 3. C, the parents; fcic kll'tc, 3. 6./ 
 people ; t>ie ©elunV&cr, 3. a., the brothers. 
 
 Some nouns have two plural forms; as, t>a£ $ullt>, 3. b. 6. &> 
 e., the land, nom. plur. frie Utl'be and t>ic Sdll'fcCV, the lands; 
 bi\$ (ScrcanD', 3. b. b, & c, the dress, nom. plur. Die ©ciiKvn'&C 
 and bie (Scwdn'fcer, the dresses. 
 
 The compounds of Sftantt (man) change SDiann into UWtt 
 (people) in the plural ; as, frcv itUrt'nunU/ the countryman, 
 
24 
 
 DECLENSION OF COMMON NOUNS. 
 
 [BOOK I. 
 
 plur. Die JflnMctttC, country people ; t»Ct* gufyv'mamt, the wag- 
 goner, plur. Die ^ufyr'kute. So form the plural of lie? evmann, 
 husbandman; (5'Dtimanu, nobleman; Jpaitpt'maun, captain; 
 SCaufmaun, merchant. But the plural of t>CL* Qjfyemann, the 
 husband or married man, is Die (S^emannev, the husbands 
 or married men ; (S'fyeleute, means married people. 
 
 In some nouns the different formation of the plural, or the 
 change of a, 0, XX, into a, b, and u, expresses a different signi- 
 fication ; as, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Dev 4 25anD, the volume, or t>ie ^San'De, the volumes, 
 binding. 
 
 DaS 23anD, the ribbon. 
 M$ 35anD, the bond. 
 Die $5anF, the bench. 
 Die SBanf, the bank. 
 Dei* 35au'CV, the peasant. 
 DaS S5au'Cf, the cage. 
 
 Die SSan'DCV, the ribbons. 
 
 Die SSan'&f/ the bonds. 
 
 Die S5dnf'C/ the benches. 
 
 Die SSanf'cU; the banks. 
 
 Die 23au'evn, the peasants. 
 
 Die S5au'et*/ the cashes. 
 
 Der 950'geil/ the sheet of paper. Die 25ogCU, the sheets of paper. 
 
 Dev 23o'geu, the bow. 
 Da6 (Scfic()t', the vision. 
 MS ©cfidjt', the face. 
 Dei* ia'Den, the shutter. 
 Dev Ja'Dcn, the shop. 
 Der ©cl)tlD, the shield. 
 &a£ @e()ilD, the sign. 
 Det* @tvatt6, the ostrich. 
 Dev <&tti\Xl$, the nosegay. 
 Del* $1)01*, the fool. 
 Da$ %i)VV, the gate. 
 
 Die 256'gcit/ the bows. 
 
 Die (Scfictyte, the visions. 
 
 Die (Seficlytev, the faces. 
 
 Die id'DCtt, the shutters, 
 
 Die ia'btXX, the shops. 
 
 Die ©elril'DC, the shields. 
 
 Die ©clni'Dev, the signs. 
 
 Die ©tvaufen, the ostriches. 
 
 Die ©trau'fc, the nosegays. 
 
 Die 'Jtyo'ven, the fools. 
 
 Die S^o'v, the gates. 
 
 With respect to those common nouns which are derived 
 from foreign languages, the following particular rules are to 
 be observed. 
 
 These nouns either retain their original termination, as, 
 gif'CUS/ S^e'ttta, 5)0'fl$; or take a German one. This is 
 done, either by retrenching their foreign ending, as in £VcevUi 
 (oceanus), ocean ; ©iplom' (diploma) ; or by transforming it 
 into another more idiomatic termination ; as, Die SHc'gel (reg- 
 ula), rule; Die ©l)l'bc (syllaba), syllable. 
 
 The rule is, — that all those foreign common nouns, the 
 endings of which bear a similarity to German nouns, are de- 
 clined like these, in the regular way. Thus : 
 
PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 25 
 
 1. All foreign common nouns feminine belong to the first 
 declension, and add in the nominative plural either U or CU ; 
 as, tikll'vic, 1. C, the tune; bit gov'mef, 1. C, the formula; 
 
 &ic spoeftc', 1. t>., the poetry; t>ic spevfon', 1. b. ; Die Stqnt* 
 
 biilt i 1. 0. ; bt« %X)K<mm', I. t>., the tyranny. 
 
 2. Most of those foreign nouns masculine which end in ant, 
 (IV d), at, Ct, it, and Og, are of the second declension, 2. b. ; 
 as, %V)\xu\\\t', spatviavd)', Zttwocat', Spoct', ©vcmit', ^colog/. 
 
 3. Most of the foreign nouns neuter or masculine which end 
 in cv, ti, al, an, in, on, av, at, cm, am, amm, cm, ov, belong 
 to the third declension; as, £t)avac'tcv, 3. a. t\; (Tapt'tcl, 
 3. a. a., chapter ; spovtal', 3. b. b. ; gapettan', 3. b. b., chap- 
 lain ; Kamitt', 3. b. b., chimney; spottilioiV, 3. a. b. ; (Srcm* 
 
 plav', 3. b. b., specimen ; SDfoigijtvat', 3. b. b. ; Sttabem', 3. b. 
 b.; 35al'fam, 3. b. b. ; Spigvamm', 3. b. 6. ; Siplorn', 3. b. b. ; 
 spvofcffov, 3. a. o. 
 
 B. Declension of Proper Nouns. 
 
 Proper names terminating in one of the unaccented sylla- 
 bles as, es, is, os, or wo, such as S&ox'Hs, Scv'ves, (£ (is, 
 
 21'tttOS, Sopcv'niCUS, do not change their termination in any 
 case of the singular or plural. If the connexion in which 
 they occur does not indicate the case or number in which they 
 are used, the definite article, or a preposition is used to express 
 the relation in which they stand. Ex. $)<i$ ©rijtcm' OCS £o= 
 pcv lltCUS, or Don Sopcv'lUCltS, the system of Copernicus; t>aS 
 (Scfdjlcdjf Oev 23avtaS (plur.), the family of (the) Barcas. 
 
 Most proper nouns,* particularly names of persons and coun- 
 tries, are declined either with or without the article ; and this 
 circumstance has an influence upon the declension of the 
 singular number. 
 
 Singular. If the proper name is declined with the definite 
 or indefinite article, the article alone is inflected, the noun 
 itself remaining unaltered; as, per @cl)le'gct, gen. PCS @cl)(e's 
 gel, &c ; t>te %n'm, gen. pcv 2ln'na, &c; cm (Ea'to, gen. 
 ci 'lies £a'to. 
 
 If proper nouns are declined without the article, they com- 
 monly take, in the genitive singular, an additional S or CS. 
 
 * Some proper nouns are declined like common nouns. 
 Page 20, under 2. a. ; and page 21, under 3. a. & b. 
 
26 DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. [BOOK I. 
 
 In some nouns, particularly those which end in g, g, £, fd), £, 
 and feminines in e, the genitive singular is formed by adding 
 ett£ or n$ to the nominative. In the dative and accusative 
 they commonly remain unaltered, or take n or Ctt. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. @c()[c'ge[ 2(n / iia Seib'nifc Ca'to 
 
 G. ©dtfc'gete %\\'\\*$ ieib'nifcett* Sa'tos 
 
 n ( @d)(e'gc( or ) ( Ttn'.na or { i ietb'nifc or > ff ,, 
 
 ■"• i ©cble'gcln J tfln'ncii M *eifc'ni§en ( ^ at0 
 
 f @d)(c'gcl or ) ( 2iu'na or i ( icib'nifc or \ ~.. 
 
 4 \ ©cfelc'gcfo J tfln'ncii JUei6'm&en f eat0 
 
 Uli'fc and other nouns in e, are declined like $eib'ni§, with- 
 out an additional e ; as, hti'fc, gen. htt'fCUS, dat. & ace. Sui'fe 
 
 or hti'fen. 
 
 Even the genitive, dative, and accusative cases of those 
 nouns which end in a are sometimes formed in en£, and en, 
 the a being dropped : as, ^Dta'na, gen. Sta'naS or SM&'nCttS/ 
 dat. & ace. SMa'na or 2)uVuen. It seems better not to change 
 the ending of the noun in the dative and accusative, except 
 for the sake of distinctness. Thus we say, CDTavi'C faf) iui'fe, 
 Mary saw Louisa ; but if the order of the nouns be inverted, 
 we say, hti'fen fal) SITavi'e, Mary saw Louisa. 
 
 Names of countries compounded with $ant>, land, or SKeid), 
 kingdom, are declined only in the genitive case, in which they 
 take an additional g ; as, 2)eutfd)'lant>$, of Germany ; gratify 
 VCid)£, of France. 
 
 Plural. In the plural number, proper names are generally 
 declined like common nouns, whether they be preceded by 
 the article or not ; sometimes they preserve their foreign ter- 
 mination entirely or in part, as, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. Die ©cfcfe'gel 2Ctt'nen ieib'nige j zwm* } 
 
 G. t>er @d)(e'get Tfn'nm Seib'ni&e { f Jf^ * } 
 D. fcen @d)(e'ge(n Hn'nra ieib'nigen (Eato'nen 
 A. i>ie ©dtfe'gef lln'mn *eib'ni|e { |^ n or } 
 
 Observations. I. The mode of declining proper nouns with 
 
PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF PROPER NOUNS. 27 
 
 the article, is the same, whether the noun stands alone, or is 
 preceded by an adjective or pronoun. 
 
 Accordingly we say, Da6 SBcrDicnfV SEBaffj'ingtonS, the merit 
 of Washington; but Das SBcvfcicujV Des 3Bafl?'ington, or, Des 
 gro'fen (of the great) SXBafb'mjtfon: and Die %)mt , bathxt 
 iitat'aS, the gratitude of Mary; but tie 3)anf'barfcit Dct* 
 fvom'mcn (of the pious) SOlavi'a. 
 
 If the name of a person is immediately preceded by a com- 
 mon noun, expressing the office or character of that person, 
 the proper noun alone is declined, if the common noun is not 
 preceded by the definite article; as, ©oc'tor granHinS Qfrs 
 fht'Dungett, the discoveries of Doctor Franklin ; ^o'ltio, i\\X>'; 
 roigS c £oD, the death of King Louis ; but if the definite article 
 precedes, the common noun is declined, and the proper noun 
 remains unaltered; as, Dcr ^oD De£ fto'nigS SttD'tttg ; Die (Si** 
 ftn'Dungen Dct? 2)oc'tov$ gvavd'lin. The same is true of 
 names of places, towns, or countries, being used without the 
 article and preceded by a common noun which serves to define 
 the proper name or is defined by it ; as Die (Scfcl)ic()'te DcS 
 ^o'nigieicftg Stea'pcf, the history of the kingdom of Naples. 
 
 If the name of a person is preceded by one or more chris- 
 tian names, none of these is declined, if they have the definite 
 article before them ; as, Die @d)rif ten DeS SiOtyamt' 3<L'M 
 SRoilf fCiltt, the works of John Jaques Rousseau : but when 
 they are not preceded by the article, the family name of the 
 person is declined, the christian names remaining unaltered ; 
 as, ^oljamt' Sfyriftopf) 2CDe(ung6 ©pradylcfyrc, the Grammar 
 of John Christopher Adelung. 
 
 But there is an exception to this rule, when the family name 
 is separated from the christian name (or names) by a prepo- 
 sition, particularly by V>0U (being commonly the mark of noble 
 descent) : in this case the christian names alone are inflected ; 
 as, Die (SeDtdyte £em'l*icf)6 fcon OftevDingen, the poems of 
 Henry of Ofterdingen ; Dcr Dp'fm<rt Ztr'nolDS ©tnttt' tjanS 
 ben 3Binr v elrieD, the sacrifice of Arnold Strutthan of Winkel- 
 ried. But even in this case, if the genitive precedes the sub- 
 stantive by which it is governed, the family name alone is 
 inflected ; as, Sofycm'neS UOU SQiul'lcrS SQBcv'f C, the works of 
 John of Muller. 
 
 II. It was formerly usuaj to decline nouns of Roman origin 
 according to the rules of the Latin Grammar ; but this mode 
 of declining has gone out of use, except in a few instances ; 
 as, £l)vif ti (SebttVf, the birth, of Christ. 
 
28 
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 [BOOK I. 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises on the Declensions of Nouns. 
 
 The following list of nouns possesses the advantage of having 
 the gender and declension marked, the former by the let- 
 ters, m.f. ».., and the latter by the numbers, 1, 2, 3; with 
 the different forms of the singular and the plural number, 
 those of the singular being denoted by Roman, and those of 
 the plural by German letters. The asterisk (*) prefixed to 
 a noun in the singular, signifies that a, 0, U, are in the plu- 
 ral changed into d/ 6/ U. If more than one of these letters, 
 or any one of them more than once, should occur in the 
 same noun, that one alone is changed which occurs last ; 
 as, TlltAV', plur. '#ltate : the diphthong Alt excepted, in 
 which the a, and not the U, is changed, whenever an aster- 
 isk is prefixed to the noun. 
 
 Of the eels, 
 
 The evening, (Ace.) 
 
 To the abbots, 
 
 Of the field or acre, 
 
 Of the fields, 
 
 The shoulders, 
 
 Of the nobility, 
 
 To the ape, 
 
 To the apes, 
 
 Of the altars, 
 
 To the age, 
 
 Of the antiquities, 
 
 To the blackbirds, 
 
 The offices, 
 
 The ants, 
 
 The nurses, 
 
 Of the devotion, 
 
 The preparations, 
 
 To the replies, 
 
 Tlai, m. 3. b. b. eel. 
 21 bent)/ in. 3. b. b. evening. 
 *2lbt, m. 3. b. b, abbot. 
 *%t'Ht,\ m - 3. a. a. field or acre. 
 
 2tc()'fef,/. 1. C. shoulder. 
 21'fccl, m. 3. a. nobility. 
 if fe, m. 2. a. ape. 
 ........... 
 
 *WW, m. 3. b. k altar. 
 2U'tcr, n. 3. a. a. age. 
 *2U / tevtfyum, n. 3. b. e. antiquity. 
 %m'fd,f. 1. C. blackbird. 
 *7lmt, n. 3. b. c. office. 
 21'mcife, /. 1. C. ant. 
 %\\\'m,f. 1. C. nurse. 
 %n f pQ$t f f> 1- devotion. 
 7l\\'\1<\\t,f. 1. t>. preparation. 
 ilnt'WOVt,/. 1. t>. reply. 
 
 f The beginner must not forget that the asterisk being pre- 
 fixed to a noun signifies that a change of vowels takes place 
 only when the noun is in the plural number, as, of the acres, 
 t>ev Ztcf CV ; but not when it is the singular number, as, of the 
 acre, t>e£ 2fcfcr£. 
 
PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 29 
 
 Of the labors, 
 
 To the eves, 
 
 Of the oyster, 
 
 The brooks, 
 
 The path, 
 
 Of the ball, 
 
 To the ribbons, 
 
 To the ideas, 
 
 Of the mountain, 
 
 To the bed, 
 
 To the beds, 
 
 Of the proofs, 
 
 To the pictures, 
 
 Of the pears, 
 
 Of the flowers, 
 
 To the letters, 
 
 The breasts, 
 
 To the books, 
 
 The books, 
 
 To the canals, 
 
 To the cardinals, 
 
 To the roofs, 
 
 Of the badgers, 
 
 The dikes, 
 
 To the thumbs, 
 
 Of the swords, 
 
 To the poets, 
 
 To the villages, 
 
 To the heirs, 
 
 The eggs, 
 
 To the fables, 
 
 Of the threads, 
 
 Of the barrels, 
 
 To the fists, 
 
 Of the enemies, 
 
 To the fields, 
 
 Of the rocks, 
 
 To the fetters, 
 
 Of the plains, 
 
 To the rivers, 
 
 The wives, 
 
 Of the female friends, 
 
 To the feet, 
 
 3* 
 
 Tiv'UiUf. 1. t>. labor. 
 
 siu'cic n - 3. a - f« e y e - 
 
 lill'pt, /. 1. C. oyster. 
 *25aci)/ m. 3. b. b. brook. 
 25atju,/. 1- &« path. 
 *25atl, m. 3. b. b. ball. 
 *£5<Ulb/ n. 3. b. C. ribbon. 
 
 SScguMf'/ m - 3. b - &• idea - 
 S5CVCJ, m. 3. b. b. mountain. 
 s 33ctt, n. 3. b. t>. bed. 
 
 35eroei$'/ m. 3. b. b. proof. 
 25tlb/ n. 3. b. e. picture. 
 Vd'xxW/f. 1. t>. pear. 
 251u'mc,/. I.e. flower. 
 25ricf, m. 3. b. b. letter. 
 *23nt|i,/. 1. b. breast. 
 *25ucl), n. 3. b. c. book. 
 
 *£ana(', m. 3. b. b. canal. 
 *£av&iiival / , m. 3. b. b. cardinal. 
 *S)ac(') / n. 3. b. e. roof. 
 *3)acl)6, m. 6. b. b. badger. 
 *3)amm, m. 3. b. b. dike. 
 2)ati'mcu, m. 3. a. a. thumb. 
 2)c'flcn, m. 3. a. a. sword. 
 SDiciytcr, m. 3. a. a. poet. 
 *2)orf, n. 3. b. c. village. 
 (St'bc, m. 2. a. heir. 
 G£i, n. 3. b. c. egg. 
 
 ga'bel,/ l. c. fable. 
 
 *§a't»en, w. 3. a. a. thread. 
 *§ilf$, ». 3. b. c. barrel. 
 *§aufl,/. 1. b. fist, 
 gtiut), m. 3. b. b. enemy. 
 gcli>, w. 3. b. c. field. 
 §c(«?, «?. 2. b. rock, 
 gcf'fcf,/. 1. C. fetter, 
 glur,/. 1. t). plain. 
 *§luf$, m. 3. b. b. river. 
 grau,/. 1. &. wife, 
 gxcun'fciu,/. I.e. (female) friend. 
 *§U$, m. 3. b. b. foot. 
 
30 
 
 DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 The forks, 
 The geese, 
 To the guest, 
 The prayers, 
 Of the dangers, 
 The countries, 
 The spirits, 
 Of the money, 
 The ghosts, 
 To the conversation, 
 To the limbs, 
 The gods, 
 The graves, 
 Of the count, 
 The property, 
 The cocks, 
 Of the -hands, 
 Of the skins, 
 Of the heroes, 
 Of the master, 
 To the wood, 
 To the fowl, 
 Of the hats, 
 Of the islands, 
 To the year, 
 Of the Jew, 
 Of the boy, 
 To the calves, 
 To the children, 
 Of the churches, 
 To the coats, 
 The cloisters, 
 Of the buttons, 
 To the heads, 
 Of the salmon, 
 To the countries, 
 Of the burdens, 
 To the holes. 
 
 (Sa'btU f. 1. c. fork. 
 *(£an£, f.l.b* goose. 
 *C8ft|t/ w. 3. b. b. guest. 
 (Scbct'/ n. 3. b. b. prayer. 
 ©cfatyv'/ /. 1. t>. danger. 
 ©e'getlfc/ f. 1. t>. country. 
 (£cijt, m. 3. b. e. spirit. 
 (Sell), n. 3. b. e. money. 
 (Sefpenff, n. 3. b. e, ghost. 
 (Sefpvdd)', n. 3.b.b. conversation. 
 CBliefc/ n. 3. b. e. limb. 
 *<8ott, m. 3. b. c. God. 
 *©fab/ n. 3. b. c. grave. 
 (Sl*af, m. 2. b. count. 
 *@5ltt, rc. 3. b. C. property. 
 *£afyn, »». 3. b. b. cock. 
 *£aut>,/. 1. b. hand. 
 *J?aut, /. 1. b. skin. 
 Jxll), m- 2. b. hero. 
 JfpClT, m. 2. b. master. 
 *£o(j, n. 3. b. e. wood. 
 *J?Ut)tt, w. 3. b. C. fowl. 
 *jj?Ut, m. 3. b. b. hat. 
 Stt'fef, /. 1. C. island. 
 3<tljt:, w - 3. b. b. year. 
 ^U'fce, ro. 2. a. Jew. 
 3un<j'e, »i. 2. a. boy. 
 *£alb, n. 3. b. e. calf. 
 £mt>, n. 3. b. e. child, 
 ft'tv'cbe, /. 1. C. churcn. 
 £(eit>, rc. 3. b. e. coat. 
 *&lo'|Uv, n. 3. a. a. cloister. 
 *Sfrtopf, wi. 3. b. b. button. 
 *kopf, w. 3. b. b. head. 
 $ad)6, m. 3. b. b. salmon. 
 *$anfc/ n. 3. b. b. & C.t country, 
 iftjt/,/". 1. t>. burden. 
 **od), ?i. 3. b. e. hole. 
 
 f The a in $ant> is changed into d, and the £> in Ott into 
 
 £> (in the plural number), only when these nouns are declined 
 according to 3. b. e. ; but they preserve their original vowels, 
 when declined according to 3. b. b. 
 
PART II. CH. 2.] DECLENSION OF NOUNS. 
 
 31 
 
 Of the maids, 
 
 To the almonds, 
 
 Of the mice, 
 
 Of the mothers, 
 
 To the nightingales, 
 
 Of the fools, 
 
 The nuts, 
 
 Of the places, 
 
 To the popes, 
 
 Of the path, 
 
 The plants, 
 
 Of the jaw, 
 
 The borders, 
 
 Of the rank, 
 
 The spaces, 
 
 The riches, 
 
 To the judge, 
 
 To the juices, 
 
 To the songstresses, 
 
 The troops, 
 
 Of the shadow, 
 
 The treasures, 
 
 To the ships, 
 
 The shields, 
 
 To the serpents, 
 
 The castles, 
 
 The debts, 
 
 The swallows, 
 
 Of the soldier, 
 
 Of the looking-glass, 
 
 The storks, 
 The stockings, 
 Of the actions, 
 To the daughters, 
 To the dreams, 
 The cloths, 
 Of the virtues, 
 Of the watches, 
 The nations, 
 To the forests, 
 
 ii 
 
 SDTagt), /. 1. b. maid. 
 SDton'&ef, /. 1. C. almond. 
 *99?au$,/. 1. b. mouse. 
 *SJtot'tev, /. 1. a. mother. 
 DTadytigatt, /. 1. 1>. nightingale. 
 Statt, m. 2. b. fool. 
 *SJlug, /. 1. fc. nut. 
 *£)rt, m. 3. b. b. &l C.t place. 
 *spap|t, m. 3. b. b. pope. 
 SPfat), m. 3. b. b. path. 
 SPffon'je,/. 1. C. plant. 
 $tad}'en, m. 3. a. a. jaw. 
 *9tant>, m. 3. b. e. border. 
 SHattg, m. 3. b. rank. 
 *3 f taum / m. 3. b. b. space. 
 *SHcic()'t^um / m. 3. b. e. riches. 
 dti&yttv, m. 3. a. a. judge. 
 *©aft, m. 3. b. b. juice, 
 ©anjj'evin,/. 1. C. songstress. 
 
 ©djaar,/. 1. t>. troop. 
 
 ©djat'tcn, m. 3. a. a. shadow. 
 *©d)a£, m. 3. b. b. treasure. 
 @d)iff, w. 3. b. b. ship. 
 @cl)ilt>, m. 3. b. b. shield, 
 ©djfang'e,/. 1. c. serpent. 
 *©d}Io|3, ?i. 3. b. c. castle. 
 @d)ul&,/. 1. &. debt, 
 ©dntnafbc,/. 1. c. swallow. 
 <£?olt>at', m. 2. b. soldier, 
 ©ptegct, w». 3. a. a. looking- 
 glass. 
 *©tord), m. 3. b. b. stork. 
 *©ti*imipf, w*. 3. b. b. stocking. 
 ^tyxtff. 1. t>. action. 
 *^od)'ter,/. 1. 0. daughter. 
 *%VCmm, m. 3. b. b. dream. 
 ^ud), n. 3. b. c. cloth. 
 Itt'geilt,/. ]. t>. virtue. 
 Ut)V,f. 1. t>. watch. 
 *35otf, w. 3. b. e. nation. 
 *3B«fo, m. 3. b. c. forest. 
 
 f See note on preceding page. 
 
32 
 
 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 
 
 [BOOK I. 
 
 Of the walls, 
 Of the women, 
 Of the worlds, 
 Of the wind, 
 The wishes, 
 The worms, 
 Of the numbers, 
 To the tooth, 
 To the times, 
 To the tents, 
 Of the circle, 
 The tolls, 
 The aims, 
 Of the onion, 
 
 Of Catherine, 
 
 Of the Hague, 
 
 Of Huss, 
 
 Of the Indies, 
 
 To the Netherlands, 
 
 Of the Sibyl, 
 
 *2DanD,/ 1. 6. wall. 
 
 ^tib, n. 3. b. e. woman. 
 SBelt,/. 1. D. world. 
 ^tnD, m. 3. b. 6, wind. 
 *2Bunfd 7 \ m. 3. b. b. wish. 
 *3£uvm, m. 3. b. e. worm. 
 $<xtyl,f. 1. D. number. 
 *£al)n, m. 3. b. b. tooth. 
 jScit,/. 1. D. time. 
 j3c(t, n , 3. b. b. tent. 
 jJiv'M, m. 3. a. a. circle. 
 *3oil, m. 3. b. b. toll. 
 jBroctf, m. 3. b. b. aim. 
 SttW'fccl,/. 1. c. onion. 
 
 ^atfyavi'na, Catherine. 
 
 £>Cf £aag, the Hague. 
 
 £tt£, Huss. 
 
 3u'Dien, n. India. 
 
 SDtC STie'DcrlanDC, the Neth- 
 erlands. 
 
 ©tool'If, Sibyl. 
 
 Recapitulatory Exercises. 
 
 Sic S336^cf fltc'gcn in Dev fafc 
 
 £>ie gifciye fcfjimrn'men in Dcm QQBaffetr. 
 
 2)ie 33ldt'tcr fdu'feln in tern SBin'De. 
 
 3)ie ©cljmet'rerftnge flat'teni urn tie 25fa'men. 
 
 £>tc 25tc'ncn fam'mefa J^o'nig Don Den SSfa'men unD tva'gen 
 ifyn nacl) Den SSie'nentfafccn fur tfy've jSef'len. 
 
 2)ie ©per'iinge Ic fen £afme auf unD bau'm Stefter fur 
 ify're S3rut. 
 
 3>ie Sn'genD ifl Die griifj'ftngtfjeic Dc6 ie'ben^. 
 
 *25o'ge(, m. 3. a. a. bird. 
 
 jtte'gen, fly. 
 
 in, in. (Bat.) 
 *iuft,f. 1. b. air. 
 gifct), m. 3. b. b. fish. 
 
 fcfcnum'men, swim. 
 Gaffer, n. 3. a. a. water. 
 *23fott, w. 3. b. e, leaf. 
 
 fdu'fefa, rustle. 
 ^BinD, m. 3. b. {\ wind, 
 ©clnnet'tcrltng, m. 3. 
 butterfly. 
 
 ftat'tent, flutter. 
 
 Um, about. (Ace.) 
 33 fame,/. 1. c. flower. 
 fBie'ne,/. 1. c. bee. 
 
 b. 6. 
 
PART II. CH. 2.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 33 
 
 fanVmelu, collect. ©pcv'liug, m. 3. b. b. sparrow. 
 
 ^O'uig, m. 3. b. b. honey. le'feit-auf, pickup, 
 
 fcon, from. (Bat.) Jpalm, m. 3. b. b. straw. 
 
 ttnt>, and. bau'cn, build, 
 
 tva'gen, carry. 9tc|t, ?*. 3. b. e» 
 
 tfjtt, it. S3vut, /. 1. brood, 
 
 nacb, to. (Dot.) tue Su'gcnD,/. 1. youth. 
 
 •SSie'ncnforb, wi. 3. b. b. bee- ift, is. 
 
 hive. Svulj'IingSjeit, /. 1. b. spring- 
 
 fuv, for. (Ace.) time. 
 
 tfy're, their. t>a£ k'bcit, ». 3. a. a. life. 
 3el1c,/. 1. C. cell. 
 
 The hen sees the kite in the air, and gathers her chickens 
 under her wings. 
 
 Fire has its uses and its dangers ; we call it a good servant, 
 but a cruel master. 
 
 The Thebans, under the command of Pelopidas and Epami- 
 nondas, freed themselves from the yoke of the Spartans. 
 
 By a sloop we understand a boat with one mast, and four or 
 five sails. 
 
 Truth triumphs over superstition and skepticism, by means 
 of investigation and reflection. 
 
 The whole earth appears, to the philanthropist, as one fam- 
 ily mansion. 
 
 hen, J^cn'nc,/. 1. c. we, nut\ 
 
 sees, ftet)t. call, nen'nen. 
 
 kite, (Sei'cv, m. 3. a. a. it, c$. 
 
 in, in. (Dat.) good, gu'tcn. 
 
 air, *iuft, f. 1. L\ servant, SMe'ner, m. 3. a. 0. 
 
 and, ttnb. but, a'ber. 
 
 gathers, foerfam'meft. cruel, grau'famen. 
 
 her, itf'tt, master, QtXX, m. 2. a. 
 
 chickens, £ud)'[ettt, n. 3. a. a. Theban, ^bctnVnetr, m. 3. a. 0. 
 
 under, tui'tcr, (Dat.) command, iftt'fufyntUg, /. 1. 
 
 her, ifyttn. of, def. art. sing. 
 
 wing, glu'gel, m. 3. a. 0. freed, bcfvet'teu. 
 
 fire, ba£ gcu'ey, n. 3. a. a. themselves, ftd). 
 
 has, t)<Xt from, fcon. (Dat.) 
 
 its, fet'ne. yoke, ^ocb, n. 3. b. b. 
 
 use, ^or'tfyeif, m. 3. b. b. Spartan, ©pavta'uer, m. 3. a. 0. 
 
 danger, ©efafjv', /. 1. D. by, uu'ter. f-Da*.,) 
 
34 ADJECTIVES. [BOOK I. 
 
 sloop, ©djafap'pe,/. 1. C. by means, mit feet* Jpftl'fc. 
 
 we understand, tov\Wt}tn ttUt. of, fcou. (Dat.) 
 
 boat, gafyr'jeug, w. 3. b. 6. investigation, Untevfu'djung, 
 
 with, mit. (Dat.) f. 1. t>. 
 
 one, ei'nem. reflection, 9tad)'t>enfrn, /i. 3. a. 
 
 mast, S0?a|t, w*. 3. b. fc. whole, gan'jf. 
 
 four, Diet:. earth, (Ev'&e, /. 1. c. 
 
 or, o'fcet*. appears, erfefoeint'. 
 
 five, fftttf. to, (Dat.) 
 
 sail, @e'gef, rc. 3. a. a. philanthropist, £D?en'fd)en= 
 
 truth, t>ie QODafyv'fyeit,/. 1. t>. fmmt>, *». 3. b. 6. 
 
 triumphs, triumph iff. as, afc. 
 
 over, u'bei*. (Ace.) one, Sin. 
 
 superstition, WbtV&liMlbt, m. family mansion, *@tamm's 
 
 3. c. fyau£, n. 3. b. e» 
 skepticism, ^rcei'feffucljt,/. 1. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The Adjective appears in its simple or adverbial form, when 
 its termination is not affected by gender or declension ; as, 
 2)ie 33fu:'gcv, gut UUt> frei, The citizens, good and free. 
 
 § 1. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Adjectives are declined by adding certain letters to their 
 simple form. 
 
 For the use of the simple and the declinable forms see Book 
 II. Chapter 3. § 1. Rules i. n. and m. 
 
 Every adjective is declined in three different forms. 
 
 First Declension. 
 
 Adjectives are inflected according to the first declension, 
 when they are not preceded by an article or a pronoun. The 
 form of this declension is nearly like that of the article, t>Cl*, 
 fcie, fca£. The adjective gut, good, for example, is thus 
 declined : 
 
PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 35 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 N. gu'ter, gu'te, gu'teg, good. 
 
 G. gu'tes, or gu'teu'* gu'ter, gu'tetf, or gu'teu,* of good. 
 
 i>. gu'tem, gu'ter, gu'tem, to good. 
 
 A. gu'teu, gu'te, gu'tes, good. 
 
 Plural for the three genders. 
 
 gu'te, good, 
 
 gu'ter, of good, 
 
 gu'teu, to good, 
 
 gu'te, good. 
 
 The following is an example of an adjective in the first de- 
 clension, as joined to nouns of different genders : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. 
 
 N. gu'ter 'vXBciu, good wine. 
 
 G. gu'teu or gu'tes 3£ei'ue$, of good wine. 
 
 D. gu'tem ( 2Dei / ne, to good wine. 
 
 A. gu'teu 3Bettt, good wine. 
 
 N. gu'te grucfjt, good fruit. 
 
 G. gu'ter gruel) t, of good fruit. 
 
 D. gu'ter grucfjt, to good fruit. 
 
 A. gu'te grudjt, good fruit. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N. gu'tetf 95ro&, good bread. 
 
 (r. gu'tes or gu'teu 35ro'&e$, of good bread. 
 
 D. gu'tem 35ro&e, to good bread. 
 
 A. gu'tem S5ro&, good bread. 
 
 Plural for the three genders. 
 
 N. gu'te < 2Dei / ne, grucvVte, 23rot>e, good wines, fruits, 
 
 G. gu'ter <2Bei'ue, grucfj'te, SSro'&e, of good, &c. [loaves. 
 
 D. gu'teu SOBci'ueit, gruct'teu, SBro'&eu, to good, &c. 
 
 A. gu'te QODei'ue, gnWte, 33ro't>e, good, &c. 
 
 So decline gro'fer *9D f tontt, 3. b. e., great man ; toatytt @e* 
 f(t)tc()'te, 1. C., true history ; Ue'beS ftiuD, 3. b. e., dear child. 
 
 * The use of the one or the other of these two forms 
 (gu'tem, gu'teu,) depends on euphony alone. 
 
36 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [BOOK I. 
 
 Second Declension. 
 
 Adjectives are inflected according to the second declension, 
 when they are preceded by the definite article, Der, Die, $>&$ ; 
 or by a demonstrative or relative pronoun ; as, Die'fer, this ; 
 je'ltev, that; Der'jenige, that; Derfef'fce, the same; ml'tfwx, 
 who : or by the indefinite pronouns, je'Der, jeg'ltdKV, jeD'tt>eDer, 
 every, (the last three having no plural.) Ex. 
 
 Singular. 
 Masc. Fern. Ncut. 
 
 N. Der gu'te, fete gu'te, b<\$ gu'te, the good. 
 
 G. Des gu'ten, Der gu'ten, Des gu'tcn, of the good. 
 
 D. Dem gu'ten, Der gu'ten, Dem gu'ten, to the good. 
 
 A. t>en gu'ten, Die gu'te, Das gu'te, the good. 
 
 Plural, for the three genders. 
 
 N. Die gu'ten, the good. 
 
 G. Der gu'ten, of the good. 
 
 D. Den gu'ten, to the good. 
 
 A. Die gu'ten, the good. 
 
 2)et* gu'te, with a masculine noun, is thus declined : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. Der gu'te SDfann, the good man. 
 
 G. DeS gu'ten SDTau'neS, of the good man. 
 
 2>. Dem gu'ten SOTan'ne, to the good man. 
 
 A. ten gu'ten 50Zann, the good man. 
 
 2)ie gu'te, with a feminine noun, is thus declined : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. Die gu'te §rau, the good woman. 
 
 G. Der gu'tcn $va\l f of the good woman. 
 
 D. Der gu'ten gran, to the good woman. 
 
 A. Die gu'te grau, the good woman. 
 
 2)a£ gu'te, with a neuter noun, is thus declined : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. DaS gu'te QOBerf, the good work. 
 
 G. DeS gu'ten 9Ber'frg, of the good work. 
 
 D. Dem gu'ten ^cr'f e, to the good work. 
 
 A. Das gu'te QBerf, the good work. 
 
PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 37 
 
 Plural for the three genders. 
 
 N. tie gu'ten 93?dn'uev, gvau'en, QOBev'fe, 
 
 the good men women, works. 
 
 G. t>er gu'ten SDTdn'ner, grau'eu, < 3Bcv / fc, of the good, &c. 
 D. t>en gu'ten SDTdn'ncrn, grau'eu, IBer'feu, to the good, &c 
 ^4. Die gu'ten SDTdn'ner, grau'en, 333ev te, the good, &c. 
 
 So decline, t»Ct* ffet'ne Snb'U, 2. a., the little boy ; tue Htt'ge 
 grait, 1. t>., the prudent woman ; M$ Uu'nt 93?dt>'c()en, 3. a. 
 0., the little girl. 
 
 * 
 
 Third Declension. 
 
 Adjectives are inflected according to the third declension, 
 when they are preceded by the indefinite article, cilt, ei'UC, Ctn ; 
 or by a personal or a possessive pronoun, as, id), I ; Ml, thou ; 
 (V, he, &,c. ; mein, mine ; fccin, thine ; fein, his, &c, or the 
 indefinite pronoun hill, none. This declension is like the 
 first in the accusative and nominative singular, and like the 
 second in the genitive and dative singular and in all the cases 
 of the plural. 
 
 The declension is as follows : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 N. mein gu'ter, mei'ne gu'te, mein gu'tes, my good. 
 
 G. tnei'nes gu'ten, mei'ner. gu'ten, met'nes gu'ten, of my good. 
 
 D. mei'nem gu'ten, mei'ner gu'ten, mei'nem gu'ten, to my good. 
 
 A. met'nen gu'ten, mei'ne gu'te, mein gu'tes, my good. 
 
 Plural for the three genders. 
 
 N. mei'ne gu'ten, my good, 
 
 G. mei'ner gu'ten, of my good. 
 
 D. met'nen gu'ten, to my good. 
 
 A. xmi'm gu'ten, my good. 
 
 CDtein gu'tev, with a masculine noun, is thus declined : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. mein gu'ter 23nt'fcer, my good brother. 
 
 G. mei'ueg gu'ten ^ru'fcert?, of my good brother. 
 
 D. mei'nem gu'ten 33vu'fccr, to my good brother. 
 
 A. met'nen gu'ten 23vu't>ev, my good brother. 
 4 
 
38 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [BOOK I. 
 
 SDTci'tte gn'te, with a feminine noun, is thus declined : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. mei'ne gn'te ©cfrwef'tet, my good sister. 
 
 G. mei'net* gn'ten ©clwcf tev, of my good sister. 
 
 D. met'nev gn'ten ©cljrocf'tcr, to my good sister. 
 
 -4. mei'ne gn'te ©cljrocf'tCV, my good sister. 
 
 £D?ciu gtl'teS/ with a neuter noun, is thus declined : 
 
 N. mcitt gll'teS £illt>, my good child. 
 
 G. mct'HCS gn'ten fttn'beS, of my good child. 
 
 Z>. mct'nem gn'ten ft'in'fce, to my good child. 
 A. metn gn'tes ftinfc, my good child. 
 
 Plural for the three genders. 
 
 N. mei'ne gn'ten 25nVt>er, ©djroef'tcnt, £in't>ei*, 
 
 my good brothers, sisters, children. 
 
 G. mei'nev gn'ten 2$nV&ev, ©cftrcef tent, £in't>cr, of my, &c. 
 D. mei'nen gn'ten SSnVfccnt, ©ctjraeftern, £tn't>evn, tomy,&c. 
 A. mei'ne gn'ten 25nV&er, ©cftrcef'tern, ftin'fcev, my, &c. 
 
 So decline, ein roei'fev *93tami, 3. b. e., a wise man ; ei'ne 
 fcl)6'nc gvau, 1. t>., a fair lady ; ein Hti'MG JpanS, 3. b. e., a 
 small house ; fcet'ne tVCtt'C grcun'&tn, 1. e., thy faithful (female) 
 friend. 
 
 The following table exhibits the terminations of the adjec- 
 tives, according to the three declensions. 
 
First Declension, like gu'tet*. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 er 
 
 C 
 
 eg 
 
 e 
 
 Gen. 
 
 e^ or en 
 
 er 
 
 eg or en 
 
 ev- 
 
 Dat. 
 
 em 
 
 er 
 
 em 
 
 en 
 
 Ace. 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 
 eg 
 
 e 
 
 Second Declension, like fcer gll'te. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 jPem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 en 
 
 Nom. 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 c 
 
 Gen. 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 Dat. 
 
 en 
 
 en en 
 
 en 
 
 Ace. 
 
 en 
 
 « 1 ' 
 
 en 
 
 Third Declension, like mcin gn'ter. 
 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ev- 
 
 e 
 
 eg 
 
 en 
 
 Gen. 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 Dat. 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 en 
 
 Ace. 
 
 1 en 
 
 e 
 
 eg 
 
 en 
 
40 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [BOOK I. 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises on the Adjectives and Nouns. 
 
 Of the fine children. 
 
 To a fine child. 
 
 Of happy days. 
 
 Of good men. 
 
 The ignorant people. 
 
 The liquid air. 
 
 The industrious maid. 
 
 An easy work. 
 
 Of hard labor. 
 
 My frugal meal. 
 
 Tall firs. 
 
 Of the hard oak. 
 
 A shady elm. 
 
 Of hard iron. 
 
 The early lark. 
 
 An unknown land. 
 
 Of the Trojan hero. 
 
 Of civilized Europe. 
 
 Free America. 
 
 To the fiery Hecla. 
 
 Of the fair Helen. 
 
 The chaste Diana. 
 
 The geographical miles. 
 
 Terrible thunder. 
 
 The Olympic games. 
 
 Of distant valleys. 
 
 Of fine flowers. 
 
 To my pious father. 
 
 To fresh butter. 
 
 To a red coat. 
 
 Black bread. 
 
 Observation I. When several adjectives are, one after 
 another, joined to the same substantive, they are generally 
 declined as each of them would be, if it stood alone, according 
 to the above rules. Thus, in the example, mcin gu'tcr al'cer 
 gTCUUD, my good old friend, both adjectives, gu'tCl* and ai'UV, 
 are inflected according to the third declension ; in oie rrcit'C 
 jdrt'ltelK SDfatt'tcr, the faithful, tender mother, both adjectives 
 are inflected according to the second declension ; only when 
 adjectives are put together without being preceded by an 
 
 fcl)5tt. 
 
 £iut>, n. 3. b. e. 
 
 gtftcf'lid). 
 
 $ag, m. 3. b. b. 
 
 gut 
 
 *2D?ann, m. 3. b. e. 
 
 xm'w tjfcno. 
 
 itu'te, m. 3. b. 
 
 Pffig. 
 
 **ufc, /. 1. b. 
 
 jlei'fig. 
 
 •saragD, /. i. &. 
 
 leicl)t. 
 
 lix'beit, f. 1. *. 
 
 fcljroer. 
 fpav'fam. 
 
 
 SDiafjCjctf, /. 1. &. 
 
 erfya'bcit. 
 
 giclyte, /. 1. c. 
 
 fyart. 
 
 ei'cfee, /. 1. c. 
 
 f&)<\t'ti$. 
 
 XM'm, f. 1. c. 
 
 (javfc 
 
 (Ei'fcn, n. 3. a. a. 
 
 frul). 
 
 kv'd)e, f. 1. c 
 
 tm'fceftmnt. 
 
 **an&, n. 3. b. b. & e 
 
 troja'nifcfj. 
 
 Jjpcfb, »». 2. b. 
 
 geftt'tet. 
 
 (Suro'pa, n. 
 
 fret. 
 
 ^mc'nr'a, n. 
 
 feu'stg. 
 
 J£cHa, m. 
 
 fctjen. 
 
 %t'imb,f. 
 
 fcufd). 
 
 SMa'na, /. 
 
 gcogva'pfyifd). 
 
 mti'U,/. j. c. 
 
 fdjrctf'ttcl). 
 
 ©on'ncr, ™. 3. a. a. 
 
 oli;m'pifc(). 
 
 ©picl, w. 3. b. b. 
 
 cnrfmtt'. 
 
 *Xt)<tl, n. 3. b. c. 
 
 fit on. 
 
 231u'me, /. 1. c. 
 
 fro mm. 
 
 *33a'tcr, »i. 3. a. a. 
 
 frifefc 
 
 SSut'tcv, /. 1. 
 
 rotl;. 
 
 £(cio, n. 3. b. e. 
 
 fdjroarj. 
 
 23100, n. 3. b. b. 
 
lil 
 
 41 
 
 PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 article or pronoun, as, gu'tcr ro'tfycr ^CtU, good red wine ; 
 gu'te ro'tfye gar'be, good red color ; glt'tCS ro'tfycS ^ud), 
 good red cloth, the first adjective is inflected according 
 to the first declension, while the subsequent adjectives may 
 be inflected either according to the first or third; except 
 the genitive case singular of the masculine and the neuter 
 genders, in which the subsequent adjectives must be inflected 
 after the third declension. The following examples exhibit 
 these two modes of declining. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. gu'tcr ro'tfyer SBctn, 
 
 G. gu'tes or gu'ten* ro'tben ^ci'nee?, 
 
 D. gu'tem ro'tfyemor ro'ttyen SBei'ne, 
 
 A. gu'ten ro'tfyen \85cin, 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. gu'te ro'tfye gar'be, 
 
 G. gu'tcr ro'tfycr or ro'tfycn gar'fce, 
 
 D. gu'tcr ro'tfycr or ro'tben gar'fcc, 
 
 4. gu'te ro'tfye gar' be, 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. gu'tcr ro'tfyes ^uc^, 
 
 G. gu'tcr or gu'ten* ro'tfyen ^u'efjes, 
 
 D. gu'tcm ro'tfyem or ro'tfyen ^u'ebe, 
 
 A. gu'tcr ro'tfyes ^luc^, 
 
 good red wine, 
 of good red wine, 
 to good red wine, 
 good red wine. 
 
 good red color, 
 of good red color, 
 to good red color, 
 good red color. 
 
 good red cloth, 
 of good red cloth, 
 to good red cloth, 
 good red cloth. 
 
 * The difference between e£ and en in the genitive singular 
 of the first adjective masculine or neuter, has nothing to do 
 with the two modes of declining here exhibited, but is a matter 
 of euphony, as has been before observed, page 35. But the 
 genitive of the subsequent adjectives never ends in c£, accord- 
 ing to the first declension, but always in CU, according to the 
 third. Thus we cannot say, gtt'tC6 V 0' t f) C g Seines, but 
 
 we must say, gu'tetf (or gu'ten) r o' t fy e n ^Bci'uetf. 
 
 4* 
 
42 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. [BOOK I. 
 
 Plural for the three genders. 
 
 N. gn'te vo'tfye or vo't&en SBci'nc, gar'ten, Xft'djtt, 
 good red wines, colors, cloths. 
 
 6r. gn'terro'tfyerorro'tfycn^ei'nc, gav'fccn, ^tVcfeer, of, &c. 
 D. gn'ten vo'ttjm QQBei'ncn, gav'fcen, ^it'djew, to, &c. 
 
 A. gn'te ro't^e or ro'tfyen 'JBci'nc, gav'ben, £iVd)ev, fine, &c. 
 
 In good writing and speaking, the choice between these 
 two modes of declining an adjective when subsequent to an- 
 other, though frequently depending on euphony, is sometimes 
 determined by the degree of importance assigned to the sub- 
 sequent adjective. Thus, in speaking of " good domestic 
 cloths," we may design either to distinguish good domestic 
 from good foreign cloths, or good domestic from bad domestic 
 cloths. The first meaning is expressed in German by inflect- 
 ing the subsequent like the preceding adjective, according to 
 the first declension ; as, gti'ttt cin'fycimtfdjcr Stft'cbci*, of good 
 domestic cloths ; but in order to express the last mentioned 
 meaning we decline the subsequent adjective according to the 
 third declension ; as, gn'tCl* cin'fyeimifdjcn $u'c!)ev, of good 
 domestic cloths. 
 
 The above observation concerning the declension of an 
 adjective subsequent to another, applies also to adjectives pre- 
 ceded by the indefinite pronouns, mcfy'VCre, several ; ei'nige, 
 some ; et'lidjc, some ; ttcl'dK, some* ; man'dje, some ; rot'- 
 ntge, few ; toie'le, many ; ctf'Ic, all. Thus to distinguish " all 
 good men," from all that are not so, we say, <xi'U gn'te Often'* 
 fefcen; but in order to distinguish " all good men" from some 
 good ones, we say, al'k gn'ten 9ftcn'fd)Cn. 
 
 Observation II. When indeclinable words precede, wheth- 
 er numerals, adjectives, or adverbs, they have no influence 
 upon the adjective ; as, 
 
 (St'iMS gn'tcr QOBdtt, some good wine. 
 
 33iel frifctye Sfttfdj, much fresh milk. 
 
 < 2J3e / nig fai'm IB^n, a little cold water. 
 
 <3ef)r gn'te 9ften'fd)cn, very good men. 
 
 * This indefinite pronoun is not to be confounded with the 
 relative, Wtl'fitt, Wet'dje, wcl'djftf, who, which. If the latter 
 precedes an adjective, this is always inflected according to 
 the second declension, as has been remarked, page 36. 
 
a 
 
 PART II. CH. 3.] DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 4 
 
 ^tcv baa've XtjU'Uv, four dollars in cash. 
 
 Siinf lang'e 3»afy're, five long years. 
 
 §Ucl) jcfyn lang'en ^afy'vcn, after ten long years. 
 
 But the adjective is declined according to the above rules 
 concerning subsequent adjectives (Obs. I.), when it is pre- 
 ceded by jroei or t>m, as these two numerals may be declined 
 in the genitive and dative. Examples : 
 
 G. jSroet'er. Ung'er. or fang'en 'ia'ge, of two long days. 
 
 G. Sbrei'eu baa'mor baa'ren Scaler, of three dollars in cash. 
 
 D. SH'ei'en gu'tcn SDfan'fctjen, to three good men. 
 
 Observation III. If an adjective in its simple form is put 
 before another adjective, the termination of which agrees with 
 the following substantive, in gender, number, and case, the 
 first adjective is not to be considered as denoting a quality 
 of the substantive, but as an adverb, qualifying the adjective 
 after it. The following examples will explain this difference. 
 
 Sin gan'jetf ncu'cS §Mi$, a whole, new house. 
 
 Sin ganj ncu'e^ JpauS, a house wholly or quite new. 
 
 Sin neu'etf ein'gebuntmeS 25 net), a new book, bound up. 
 Sin lieu ein'gebunoncj? SBuct), a book newly bound. 
 Stll t)al'6e6 gCblM'tCUC^ £ltl)n, half a roasted chicken. 
 Sin tyalb gcbra'tcneS £ut)n, a chicken half roasted. 
 
 Observation IV. In familiar language, and in poetry, the 
 termination of an adjective, when it precedes a neuter noun, 
 is sometimes dropped in the nominative and accusative case 
 singular, and its simple form alone is retained ; as, fd)btl 
 QGBet'ter, fine weather, instead of fdj&'netf 333et'ter ; ein fro I) 
 ©C'jtdjt, a cheerful face, instead of eill fvo'ljcS ©eftcl)t'. 
 
 Observation V. When two adjectives of the same termina- 
 tion come together, coupled by the conjunction unt>, and, it is 
 usual in familiar discourse, to drop the termination of the first; 
 as, eill rotty* UllD roeiffeS @eftel)t', a red and white face ; eill 
 gcnug's UU0 ar'bcitfvimci* 90?enfef), a contented and industrious 
 man. 
 
 Adjectives may be used as substantives, both in the singular 
 and plural ; as, t>Cf ^Beife, the wise man ; Ote ^GBci'fe, the 
 wise woman ; tie ^Betfcn, the sages ; Pas? Svtya'bene, the 
 sublime ; bet* (ScUfyt'tt, the learned man ; t>ic @d)6 lie, the 
 fair woman ; oer Skfailit'te, the male acquaintance ; Me SSc- 
 rNlllll'te, the female acquaintance ; t>ev Skvroano'te, the male 
 
44 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 relative ; fctC 33ertMnt)'tC, the female relative ; tttt'fcre 25c- 
 fruui'ttn UUt> ^JerwanD'tCtt, our acquaintances and relations. 
 
 § 2. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 The degrees of comparison are the positive, the compara- 
 tive, and the superlative. The comparative is formed by 
 adding t* or er, and the superlative by adding \\ or e|t, to the 
 end of the simple word, or positive ; as, 
 
 Positive. 
 5\Iein, little ; 
 Q&ei'fe, wise ; 
 £>tei|t, bold ; 
 
 Comparative. 
 Heftier; less ; 
 roci'fet*/ wiser ; 
 t>m'|ter, bolder ; 
 
 So form : 
 
 Superlative. 
 fteinft, least, 
 irjci'fcjt, wisest. 
 mi'pft,* boldest. 
 
 tjOtjl, hollow, 
 ratify, rough. 
 bfatt, blue. 
 fd)Iec()t, bad. 
 fanft, soft. 
 rmVfcC, weary. 
 
 lafym, lame, 
 jtolj, proud. 
 vol), raw. 
 fcjt, firm. 
 jal}m, tame, 
 fdjlanf; slender. 
 
 The preceding adjectives do not change their vowels in the 
 comparative and superlative, but most adjectives change the 
 vowels a, 0, it, into a, b, ft, in the comparative and superla- 
 tive : as. . 
 
 Positive. 
 alt, old ; 
 VOtfy, red ; 
 fttrj, short 
 
 Comparative. 
 after, older; 
 ro'tfyer, redder ; 
 ft'trjcr, shorter ; 
 
 So form : 
 
 *arm, poor. 
 *6ana/e, fearful. 
 *&umm, stupid. 
 
 Superlative. 
 aPtejt, oldest. 
 r6'tt)Cjt, reddest, 
 fftr^ejt, shortest. 
 
 *faft, cold. 
 *ftug, prudent. 
 *nag; wet. 
 
 * The superlative degree is seldom used in its simple form, 
 but is commonly made to agree, in gender, number, and case, 
 with the noun to which it refers, by adding to the superlative 
 such endings as the declension of adjectives requires (see page 
 
 39); ex. Heinle (Sa'bc, smallest gift; t>er roei'fejte SKatt;, the 
 wisest counsel ; fetn fcrei'jtejtctf Unterncfy'men, his boldest 
 enterprise. 
 
PART II. CH. 3.] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 45 
 
 *gvo6, coarse. *fdjroadj, weak. 
 
 *3V0£/ great. *jtwf, strong. 
 
 Some adjectives form their comparison irregularly ; as, 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 gut, good ; fcef'fet, better ; 6e|t, best, 
 
 ijoci), high ; tyb'tjn, higher ; t)bd)\l, highest. 
 
 Ma'fyc, near ; ua'tyev, nearer ; nart)|t, nearest, 
 
 tnef, much ; metyf, more ; mcijt, most. 
 
 Tlie comparative and superlative of adjectives are declined 
 like the positive. 
 
 The adjective vein, pure, comparative rci'nct*, superlative 
 VCiltjl, is thus declined in its comparative degree : 
 
 First Declension : 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 vei'nem, rei'nere, vei'neves, purer, &c. 
 Second Declension : 
 
 fcer rei'nere, Me rei'nere, M$ xti'nttt, the purer, &c. 
 
 Third Declension : 
 mem rei'uerer, mci'ne rei'nere, mcin rei'nere^, my purer, &c. 
 
 In the same manner is declined the superlative of rein ; viz. 
 
 First Declension : 
 
 mn'jUr, rein'fte, rcin'jJcs, purest, &c 
 
 Second Declension : 
 
 t>cv rcin'fte, Die rein t^e, fcae? rein'fte, the purest, &c. 
 
 Third Declension : 
 
 mein tein'jter, tnei'ne rein'fie, mcin rein'jtcs, my purest, &c. 
 
 Thus inflect through the three declensions : 
 
 Sin ett'tcver *9Q?aun, 3..b. c, a more noble man. 
 
 SBcfttt gl*eun&, 3. b. i\, best friend. 
 
 2)tc rcar'mere *htft, 1. b„ warmer air. 
 
 SCftetn jwig'creS Sviltt*, 3. b. e., my younger child. 
 
 2)aS fvei'jU *ian&, 3. b. c, the freest country. 
 
46 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. [bOOK I. 
 
 Observations on the Comparison of Adjectives. 
 
 I. The e is often dropped in the comparative of adjectives 
 ending in el, en, and ev ; as, 
 
 Positive. Comparative. 
 
 Cfcef, noble ; et'let*, nobler, (for e'telet*.) 
 
 ftdj'er, safe; ftcl)'m, safer, (for ftdyem.) 
 
 feoilfom'men, perfect ; VOllfomm'ncr, more perfect, 
 
 (for vMtfom'mcncv.) 
 
 II. Most primitives change their vowels in the comparative 
 and superlative ; as, jtavf, strong ; ftarter, stronger ; tCX 
 jMff'ltC, the strongest ; fnrj, short ; ftVjer, t>CV tttr'jejte. But 
 the following are exceptions, as well as some others previously 
 noticed, (page 44) ; falfdj, false ; gei\Vte, straight ; fyott, 
 affectionate ; [ryfe, loose ; glatt, smooth ; matt, faint ; natft, 
 naked ; runt, round ; jtumpf, dull ; p(att, flat ; fatt, satiated ; 
 fd){aff, slack. Derivatives never change their vowels ; as, 
 faf tevtjaft, vicious ; U\[ tevfyaftcr, more vicious ; fret* laf tetfyaf; 
 tCjU, the most vicious. 
 
 Recapitulatory Exercises on Adjectives. 
 
 2Me STatuV jctgt m\€ fcfjo'ncve ©e'gcntfanfce ate tie £un|t. 
 
 £>te 6cvg'td)ten ©e'genten ftnt au'genefymer ate Me e'beuen. 
 
 2)ie SBol'te Dcr fddyftfdnni @d)aa'fe i|t fei'net* ate Me ( 2Bo[(e 
 tei* eng'lifcben. 
 
 2)ie SDton'&efa fya'ben cineu fei'neveu ©cfefemarf 7 ate Me 
 Sdftffe. 
 
 2)ie giguf tee; 3if fete ijt Me fcotfforo'mentte untcr ten ge-- 
 ome'trifefoen gigu'ren. 
 
 2Me ©rie'efcen roa'ren ein geMt'tetereS ^oll? ate tie sjtS'mer. 
 
 2)ev tvetf (ic()e SDtann fant un'ter < 2Bit / Den et'ne freunt'lic&ere 
 Hufnaljme ate in tern gefit'tcten Suro'pa. 
 
 tie SRatitr, nature. f(nt, are. 
 
 jetgt, exhibits. angenefyttt, pleasant. 
 
 im£, to us. cben, plain, 
 
 fdj&n, fine. SBolie, wool. 
 
 *©egen|tant, object. fdd)ftfd), Saxon. ' 
 
 ate, than. ©efjaaf, sheep, 
 
 tie £un|t, art. i|t ; is. 
 
 6cvgici)t, mountainous. fetn, fine. 
 
 Regent, country. engtifel), English. 
 
PART n. CH. 3.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 
 
 47 
 
 SDtanfcel, almond, 
 fyaben, have, 
 feefdjmacf, taste. 
 Sflug, nut. 
 gigW, figure. 
 Jtvfef/ circle. 
 Vodfommcn, complete. 
 ItntCl', among, 
 gcometrifdj, geometrical. 
 t>cr (5ried)e, the Greek, 
 irarcit/ were. 
 
 gclnffcct, cultivated, 
 ^olf, people, 
 fcct* SK&mcr, the Roman. 
 tt'Cfflicl), excellent. 
 SDfann, man. 
 fanfc, found. 
 tt>i(fc, savage, 
 fmmfclirt), friendly. 
 2(ufnaf)mc, reception, 
 gcftttct, civilized. 
 
 The English and the German are kindred languages. 
 
 These little things are great to little men. 
 
 His style, though uncultivated, is the richest and boldest in 
 (the) modern literature. 
 
 The strange man gave the cloak to me, poor forsaken child. 
 
 This gentleman possesses the choicest collection of ancient 
 and modern historical works. 
 
 You find in this public library a smaller number of volumes, 
 but a larger number of excellent old manuscripts than in the 
 other. 
 
 To whom belongs the glory of this wonderful discovery ; 
 to Leibnitz, or to Newton? 
 
 English, en'gdfdj. 
 
 and, ttnb. 
 
 German, t>eittf(f). 
 
 are, ftut>, 
 
 kindred, fceWNUtbt'. 
 
 language, @pva'd)e,/. 1. C. 
 
 these, fcic'fe. 
 
 little, ftcin. 
 
 thing, SMng, n. 3. b. 6. 
 
 are, ftttfc. 
 
 great, gvo$. 
 
 to, fur. (Ace.) 
 
 man, ^OTcufct), m. 2. b. 
 
 his, fei'ne. 
 
 style, @d)rcifc'att, /. 1. 1>. 
 
 though, nue'roofyf. 
 
 uncultivated, un'gelnfoct. 
 
 is, i|t. 
 
 rich, rcicf). 
 
 bold, fftfjtt. 
 
 in, in. (Dat.) 
 
 modern, nett'Ct'. 
 
 literature, Mteratltr',/. I. fc. 
 
 strange, frcmD. 
 
 man, *2D?cmn, m. 3. b. c. 
 
 gave, gab. 
 
 cloak, *SDtan'tel/ m. 3. a, 0. 
 
 to me, mil*. 
 
 poor, arm. 
 
 forsaken, focrfaf fctt. 
 
 child, £int>, n. 3. b. e. 
 
 this, fcic'fer. 
 
 gentleman, J^CIT. m. 2. b. 
 
 possesses, beft^t'. 
 
 choice, aus'crfefen. 
 
 collection, ©amnvluna,, /. 1. 1>. 
 
 of, (Gen.) 
 ancient, (lit. 
 
48 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 historical, gefcfcic&t'fid). 
 work, OBevf, n. 3. b. b. 
 
 you, ifyr. 
 find, fin'fcet. 
 
 in, in. (Dat.) 
 
 this, fcie'fer. 
 
 public, offcnflicl). 
 
 library, SSibtiOtfyef",/. 1. D. 
 
 small, gcrtng'. 
 
 number, Sln'Jdf)!,/. 1. 
 
 of, fcon. (Z>otf.) 
 
 volume, *23ant>, m. 3. b. 6. 
 
 but, a'bev. 
 
 large, *gro$. 
 
 excellent, tufiid). 
 
 old, aft. 
 
 manuscript, £ant>'fd)rift,/. 1. t>. 
 
 than, al£. 
 
 in, in. (Dat.) 
 
 other, cm'&er. 
 
 to whom, n?cm. 
 
 belongs, gefyiwt'. 
 
 glory, SKitfym, m. 3. b. 
 
 of, (Gen.) 
 
 this, t>ic'fa\ 
 
 wonderful, rounder to. 
 
 discovery, Qsntfccd'ttng, /. 1. fc. 
 to, (Z>a£.) 
 or, O'fcCf 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 The numbers are divided into cardinal, ordinal, proportion- 
 al, distributive, and collective. 
 
 I. The cardinal numbers are as follows : 
 
 (SlttU or $t'X0, nothing.) 
 (£in or ein£, one. 
 3roci (or tmi)), two. 
 £>vei (or tvci;), three, 
 ■^tcv, four, 
 guilf, five. 
 @ed)6, six. 
 ©ic'bcn, seven. 
 7ld)t, eight. 
 SfUittt, nine. 
 3e'l?en or $cfyn, ten. 
 £lf (or cdf), eleven. 
 3n?6tf, twelve, 
 jfevci'jcfyn, thirteen. 
 SBier'jJctyn, fourteen. 
 
 gunf jcijn or fiinfjetjn, fifteen. 
 
 ©edj'jctyn, sixteen. 
 
 @tc'ben$cj;n or ftcb'jcfyn, sev- 
 enteen. 
 
 ZCdjt'jeljn, eighteen. 
 Sftetm'jcljn, nineteen. 
 3ir»an / £ig, twenty. 
 (£in nn& jroan'jig, one and 
 
 twenty, 
 groct tint) jroan'^ig, two and 
 
 twenty, &c. 
 SH-ei'jtg, thirty. 
 Sin nnt) fcrei'ftg, thirty-one, 
 
 &c. 
 SJicr'jig, forty, &,c. 
 gitnf Jig or giinfjtg, fifty, &c. 
 ©cdj'jig, sixty, &c. 
 ©ie'bcnjig or ftcb'jtg, seventy, 
 
 &C. 
 
 2ld)t'Jtg, eighty, &c. 
 SRcim'jig, ninety, &c. 
 Jgwn'&evt, a hundred. 
 
PART II. CH. 4.] NUMERALS. 49 
 
 Jpun'fcevt unt> em or eins, a $ttyn tau'fenfc, ten thousand. 
 
 hundred and one. St'ne SDTtKion', one million, 
 
 ^itn'fcert U\Xt> jrcci, a hundred $voa SOiidtO'nen, two millions. 
 
 and two, &c. 2)vet 93itUtO'nen, three mil- 
 3n>ei fytm'fcert, two hundred, lions, &c. 
 
 &c Sin tau'fcut) acf)t Imn'&evt unt> 
 
 £au'fent>, a thousand. ein uut> ta-ei'ftg, 1831. 
 
 Some of the cardinal numbers are declinable. 
 
 The numeral ein, one, when put before a substantive, is 
 commonly declined like the article ein, a ; but, when it stands 
 by itself, it is inflected according to the three declensions of 
 adjectives ; as, 
 
 1. (St'ner, ei'ne, ei'ne$ one; gen. et'netf, ti'ntx, ti'nt$, of 
 one ; &lc. 
 
 2. 2)er ei'ne, fcie ei'ne, M$ ei'ne, the one ; gen. t>es ei'nen, 
 t>ct* ei'neit/ t?e^ ei'nen, of the one ; &c. 
 
 3. SDtein ei'ner, mei'ne ei'ne, mem ei'uc^, my one ; gen. 
 mei'nes ei'nen, tnei'ner ei'nen, mei'nes ei'nen, of my one ; &c. 
 3»ci* and t>rci make jwet'ev and fcrei'er in the genitive, jroet'en 
 and fcvet'en in the dative (see page 43) ; most of the other 
 numerals admit of declension in the dative only, by adding en, 
 
 as, tue'ren, fim'fen, &c 
 
 Observations on the Cardinal Numbers. 
 
 1. Sin is joined to the noun ; as, ein SDUnit/ one man ; ei'ne 
 §rau, one woman ; and in order to distinguish it from the 
 article, it is pronounced with a stronger accent. Qsi'nev is 
 used when the noun is understood ; as, fytev tft et'nev, here is 
 one, (that is, one man, or one thing, understood) &c. ; fytev 
 t|t ei'ne, here is one, (that is, one woman) Sic. Sin'nuil ein£ 
 ijt ein£, once one is one. £a'ben @ie em SDtef fer, have you 
 a knife? t)M ijt ei'nen, here is one, (that is, one knife.) 
 
 2. The cardinal numbers are converted into substantives, 
 by the addition of ft, and in ; as, ein gfmf jigCV, a man of 
 fifty ; ei'ne 3X*ei'ftgerin, a woman of thirty. 
 
 3. The ordinal numbers are formed by adding tt to the 
 cardinal ; except, t>er er'jte, the first ; t>er fcrit'te, the third ; but 
 after the number nineteen, jte is added. 
 
 * The cardinal number, $tt?et, two, admits of three genders ; 
 as, Masc. jrocen, Fern, jroo, Neut. jwei, two. But, in modern 
 German, jwet is commonly used for all the genders. 
 
 5 
 
50 NUMERALS. 
 
 II. The ordinal numbers are as follows 
 
 [book i. 
 
 2>et* ev'jte, the first. 
 
 £>Cr imi'U, the second. 
 
 3)cf fcrit'tc, the third. 
 
 3)et* bicr'tC, the fourth. 
 
 2)er fttnfte, the fifth. 
 
 2>ctr fcd/Jte, the sixth. 
 
 S)er fte'bCtttC, the seventh. 
 
 Set* adyu, the eight. 
 
 l X>Cl* nctm'te, the ninth. 
 
 2)Cf je^tt'te, the tenth. 
 
 2>Ct* clftc or ctffte, the elev- 
 enth. 
 
 S)cr Jtt>SIf te, the twelfth. 
 
 2)cf fcm'jefyltte, the thirteenth. 
 
 SDer fctcr'jcfyntc, the four- 
 teenth. 
 
 £>cr funf jefynte or funf jefjnte, 
 
 the fifteenth. 
 
 2)cv fccfo'jefyntf, the sixteenth. 
 
 3)cr ftc'knjctjnte or ficb^efyutc, 
 the seventeenth. 
 
 2)cv actjt'jcfyntc, the eigh- 
 teenth. 
 
 3)et* UCim'jetyntC, the nine- 
 teenth. 
 
 3)ev jroan'jigjte, the twentieth. 
 
 3)cr em unfc &n>an'&ig|te, the 
 one and twentieth. 
 
 2)er jrcei unt> jwan^tgjU, the 
 
 two and twentieth. 
 
 2>cir fcrei tint) jn>an'jig|te, the 
 
 three and twentieth. 
 3>er t>m'ftg|te, the thirtieth. 
 
 Set* ein tint) Dvct'ftgiU, the 
 
 one and thirtieth, &,c. 
 2)CI* tncr'jigfU, the fortieth. 
 
 2)cr funf jtgjle or fimfjigfte, 
 
 the fiftieth. 
 3)cr fcdVjigjfe, the sixtieth. 
 £>cr fte'bcnjigjtc or ftefc'jtgjte, 
 
 the seventieth. 
 
 3)cr adjt'jigjU/ the eightieth. 
 
 SDer ncun'jigjtC; the ninetieth. 
 
 2)cr ^lin'tettftc, the hun- 
 dredth. 
 
 2)er jroet fyuu'fecvtfU, the two 
 
 hundredth. 
 
 SDcv torci fyun'&CVtfU, the three 
 hundredth, &x. 
 
 2)CV tau'fen&jte, the thou- 
 sandth. 
 
 2\t jroet tau'fent^e, the two 
 
 thousandth. 
 £>cr fcvci t<Ul'fenbffe# the three 
 
 thousandth, &c. 
 
 In compound numbers the last only assumes the form of an 
 
 ordinal ; as, &ei* tau'fenb ad)t fyun'fccvt uut> fcici* ttnb jwan'jigjtc, 
 
 the one thousand eight hundred and twenty-fourth. 
 These adjectives may be declined in all three forms. 
 
 1. Without the article ; as, 
 
 G. 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 jwei'ter, poti'tt, 
 
 } i mi ' tc * I wetter, 
 \ or jwci'ten, S * ' 
 
 Neut. 
 
 jroci'tctf, 
 jroet'tcS 
 or jwci'ten 
 
 ,i 
 
 second. 
 
 of a second, 
 
 &c. 
 
PART II. CH. 4.] NUMERALS. 51 
 
 2. With the definite article ; as, 
 
 N. tar jroci'tc, tic jrcci'tc, MS jmci'tc, the second. 
 
 G. tas groci'tcn, tat* groci'ten, tat? jroci'tcn, of the second, &c. 
 
 2)cv an'tafC, the other, is used as synonymous with tar 
 JttKt'tc, where there are only two persons or things spoken of. 
 
 3. With the indefinite article ; as, 
 
 N. tin jwei'ter, ei'nc groei'tc, eiti gwci'tcs, a second. 
 G. ei'itc* groci'tcn, ci'ncr gttai'tcn, ci'nctf jvoci'tcn, of a second, 
 
 &,c. 
 
 The Germans always say, Ctn lint) groan'jigtU/ one and 
 twentieth ; jroci tint) taci'flg|t"C/ two and thirtieth, and the like ; 
 but never, as in English, jwan'jig tt'fit, twenty-first; tact 'fig 
 gtrci'tc, thirty-second, &lc. 
 
 Observations. Partitive and fractional numbers are formed 
 by a composition of ordinal and cardinal numbers, with various 
 words or letters. 
 
 1. Withljafo (half), thus: 
 
 Itn'tartfyaib,* (for jroci'tctyalfc,) one and a half. 
 
 2)rtt'tcbalb, two and a half. 
 
 ^Bicr'tcfyalb, three and a half. 
 
 gunf tebalb, four and a half. 
 
 ©ccl)'|tcf?a(b, five and a half. 
 
 ©ic'tantctjalfc, or ftcb'tcMb, six and a half, 
 
 ^efyn'tcfyalb, nine and a half, &c. 
 
 Examples. "330V au'tartbalb 3afy'rcn, a year and a half 
 ago; in taiftC&alb ©tun'taU/ in two hours and a half; but in 
 speaking of the hour of the day, the Germans say, fyalb ciuS/ 
 half past twelve ; fyalb jvcci, half past one, &,c. 
 
 2. With tfyctt (part), as : 
 
 £>a£ SDrit'tfjcil, the third or third part. 
 
 3)a$ 'SSicr'tfycU, the quarter or fourth part. 
 
 £Vt6 gitnf ttjcU, the fifth or fifth part. 
 
 £as 33icr'tfycU ipuntart, or M$ 33icr'trt £un'tart, the 
 
 quarter of a hundred, &,c. 
 
 * This mode of compounding seldom exceeds Jtt>Mf tcfyrtlb/ 
 eleven and a half. 
 
52 NUMERALS. [BOOK I. 
 
 In the above compound words, tfycif is frequently contracted 
 into td ; as, 
 
 Sin SH'it'td, a third part, or one third. 
 
 Sin SBtCf'tcl, a fourth part, or quarter. 
 
 Sin gftnf te(, a fifth, or one fifth. 
 
 Sill ©Ccl/ffcf, one sixth. 
 
 Sin jSctyn'tef, one tenth. 
 
 Sill jJttMn'jigjM, one twentieth, &c. 
 
 So in the plural, as : 
 
 gwei ©vit'tcl, two thirds. 
 
 3)rei ^3icr'tel, three fourths. 
 
 Witt ( &u'bn\ttl, four sevenths, &c. 
 
 These are regarded as substantives, and of the neuter gen- 
 der; but Xljtii, when used separately, is masculine. 
 
 III. Numerals of proportion are : 
 
 Sin'fad) or ttn'fftftig, single, 
 groei'fadj or jwet'faftig, double. 
 
 2)l*ci'fad) or DVCi'fattig, treble. 
 
 93tcr'faclj or \nct w fa(tig, fourfold, &c. 
 
 Jpun'fceufacl) or f)UU / &evtfa(tici, centuple, or a hundredfold. 
 
 ^au'fcilt^ad) or tau'fci^fdltig, a thousand fold, &c. 
 
 The above numerals, in fvxcl), or ftU'tig, are regularly de- 
 clined, like other adjectives. 
 
 IV. Numbers of distribution are thus formed : 
 
 Sr'ftCUS, or evfHtd), firstly, or in the first place. 
 3roci'ten$, or jum an'fcmt, secondly. 
 Srit'tcns, or jum fcvit'ten, thirdly. 
 3$ier'ten$, or jum feiev'tcn, fourthly. 
 Sin'jchl, singly, or etn Ultt) Cin, one by one. 
 $X0ti tint) jn?Ct/ two and two, or two by two. 
 3)rci tint) itti, three and three, &c. 
 spaav'weife, in pairs, &c. 
 
 To denote the same thing, or different sorts of things, Ct'lci 
 is added to the cardinal numbers ; as, 
 Si'ncvlct, of one sort, or the same. 
 jmti'tttti, of two sorts, or two different things, &c. 
 3>e einS, je jroci, )t £>VCi, one, two, three, at a time. 
 
 
PART II. CH. 4.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 53 
 
 V. Collective numbers are : 
 
 SMe £ctffte, the half. 
 
 G£h\ spaar, a pair, or couple, a few. 
 
 (£in 2)ut / JCtt&, a dozen. 
 
 G£in fyaCbcS (or fyalb) 2)ut'$cn&, half a dozen. 
 
 (gi'ne Wlan'btl, fifteen, &,c. 
 
 The English word, time, or times, is expressed by the ter- 
 mination mal* ; as, 
 
 Qjilt'maf, once. SDtancb'maf, many a time. 
 
 $mi'\m[, twice, &c. £>ft'ma(, oftentimes. 
 
 (Sill an'Dennaf, another time, 35icfmal, many times. 
 
 S)te'f*$ttKlfr this time. SIBic fctcfmal?how many times ? 
 
 50?a( is also used in multiplying ; as, jrcct mat jrcci flub tncr, 
 twice two are four (that is, literally, two times two are four) ; 
 U'Ct mat t>rei futt> nam, three times three are nine, &c. 
 
 Recapitulatory Exercises on the Numerals, &c. 
 
 One and one make two. 
 
 Ten times ten make a hundred. 
 
 A Roman legion consisted of six thousand six hundred and 
 sixty-six soldiers. 
 
 Germany was divided 4 into 1 ten 2 circles 3 . 
 
 America was discovered by Christopher Columbus in the 
 fifteenth century after the birth of Christ. 
 
 Vienna, the capital of Austria, lies in the sixteenth degree 
 of (the) longitude, and forty-eighth degree of (the) latitude. 
 
 Your friends live seven miles and a half from this place. 
 
 The meat weighs four pounds and three quarters. 
 
 One half of this apple is mellow, but the other is still hard. 
 
 He wore a treble coat of mail. 
 
 I saw three kinds of roses on one bush. 
 
 times, maf. consisted, l>cftant>'. 
 
 make, madjt. of, au$. (Dat.) 
 
 Roman, r&'mtfcf), soldier, £ne'$cr, m. 3. a. a. 
 
 legion, icgion'//. 1. fc. Germany, £)eutfct)'fan&. 
 
 * The word mat, in old German, signifies time. 
 
 5* 
 
54 pronouns. [book I. 
 
 was, tt>ar. live, ttJofy'nettt 
 
 into, in. (Ace.) mile, SDTct'Ie,/. 1. C. 
 
 circle, £m£, m. 3. b. b. from, bon. (Dat.) 
 
 divided, getfyetft'. this, Dtc'fem, 
 
 America, TJLmt'vifa. place, *spia§, m. 3. b. 6. 
 
 was, ronv'fre, meat, g(eifcl), n. 3. b. 
 
 discovered, entfcfrft'. weighs, mt^t. (Ace.) 
 
 by, fcon. pounds, spfitttt). 
 
 Christopher Columbus, Serifs of, (Gen.) 
 
 topi; <Eofam'fcu$. this, bie'fes. 
 
 in, in. (Dotf.) apple, *2(r/fc(, m. 3. a. 0. 
 
 century, 3<\t)X$)M\'H?t f n.S.b.k. is, tjt. 
 
 after, nad). mellow, roeid). 
 
 Christ, £f)rif tlt£. but, a'kr. 
 
 birth, ©ebuvt', /. 1. t>, (See other, an'OCr. 
 
 page 27^] is, ijh 
 
 Vienna, "SBint. still, nod), 
 
 capital, $aiiyt'\UM,f. 1. i\ hard, fyavt. 
 
 of, 4) On. „ he, Ct\ 
 
 Austria, £>|Vvetd). wore, tvng. 
 
 lies, liectf. coat of mail, span'jet*, m. 3. 
 in, in. (Dat.) a. a. 
 
 degree, (5vat>, »». 3. b. 6. I, id), 
 
 longitude, $dng'C,/. 1. C. saw, fafy. 
 
 latitude, ^Bvei'te,/. 1. C. rose, ^Hofe, /. 1. C. 
 
 your, %tyte. on, an. (Z>«£.) 
 
 friend, gvennb, m. 3. b. b. bush, *25ufd), 3. b. 6. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 There are seven kinds of pronouns, viz personal, possessive, 
 demonstrative, relative, interrogative, indefinite, and substan- 
 tive. 
 
 § 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 In German, as in English there are five personal pronouns ; 
 viz. id), I ; bit, thou ; ev, he ; fie, she ; e$, it ; with their 
 plurals, ttuv, we ; ifyv, you ; fte, they. 
 
 The personal pronouns are declined as follows : 
 
PART II. CH. 5.] PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 First 
 
 Person. 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 N. 
 
 id), 
 
 I. 
 
 N: 
 
 It) if, 
 
 we. 
 
 G. 
 
 mei'ner or mein, 
 
 of me. 
 
 G. 
 
 un'fcr, 
 
 of us. 
 
 D. 
 
 mix, 
 
 to me. 
 
 D. 
 
 un^, 
 
 to us. 
 
 A. 
 
 mid), 
 
 Singular. 
 
 me. 
 Second 
 
 A. 
 
 Person. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 us. 
 
 N. 
 
 t>U, 
 
 thou. 
 
 N. 
 
 tyx, 
 
 you. 
 
 G. 
 
 fcei'ucr or t>ciu, 
 
 of thee. 
 
 G. 
 
 cu'cr, 
 
 of you. 
 
 D. 
 
 t>ir, 
 
 to thee. 
 
 D. 
 
 cud), 
 
 to you. 
 
 A. 
 
 Sid), 
 
 thee. 
 Third 
 
 A. 
 
 Person. 
 
 cud), 
 
 you. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Ncut. 
 
 N. tX, he. ftc, she. e£, it. 
 
 G. fci'nci* or fciu, of him. ify'vCf, of her. fei'nci* or fein, of it. 
 
 D. ifym, to him. iljr, to her. itjxa, to it. 
 
 A. iljtt, him. ftc, her. e£, it. 
 
 Plural, for the three genders. 
 
 N. flC, they. 
 
 G. ify'm, of them. 
 
 D. illicit, to them. 
 
 A. ftc, them. > 
 
 The personal pronouns, in the genitive, dative, and accusa- 
 tive cases, are used also as reflective pronouns, particularly 
 with reflective verbs, as, id) lic'bc ttttct), I love myself; £>u 
 flci'fc>C|t t>id), thou dressest thyself. The personal pronouns 
 when used with reflective verbs, are declined in the same 
 manner, except in the dative and accusative cases, singular 
 and plural, of the third personal pronoun. In these cases the 
 reflective pronoun fid) takes the place of the datives, ifym, 
 it)V, it)m, and ify'ncn, and of the accusatives, tyn, ftc, C£, 
 and ftc. Ex. er, ftc, or, C6 Cffaubt' ftd) (dat. sing.), he, she, 
 or it permits himself, herself, or itself; ftc Ctlau'fccu ftd), 
 (dat. plur.) they permit themselves; tt, ftc, or c£ iitbt fid) 
 (ace. sing.) he, she, or it loves himself, herself, or itself: f(C 
 
56 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 [BOOK I. 
 
 Ite'b CU fid) (ace. plur.) they love themselves. — In the plural 
 number, reflective pronouns are also used to signify a recip- 
 rocal relation. Thus, fie (ie'bcn fid), may mean, they love 
 themselves (reflective), or they love one another (reciprocal). 
 But in order to prevent confusion of ideas, the adverb 
 einau'fcctr, one another, is frequently put instead of ftd) ; as, 
 fie [U'bm etnan'fcCt*, they love one another. 
 
 Sometimes, to give a greater stress to the meaning of a 
 personal pronoun, or noun, one of the indeclinable words, 
 fclbft, or fel'fcet*, is added; as, id) fclbjt (or fcl'bcr), I myself; 
 fti'tltV fetofi; of himself ; roil* fetbft, we ourselves ; fid) fc(b|t, 
 to himself, or, himself; to themselves, or, themselves, (as the 
 sentence may require) ; Sa'frtV felbjt, Caesar himself. 
 
 § 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Possessive pronouns are either conjunctive, or absolute. 
 
 Conjunctive Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 The conjunctive possessive pronouns, which are formed 
 from the personal pronouns in the genitive (or possessive) case, 
 are as follows : 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fern. 
 
 mcin, mei'ne, 
 
 fccin, fcei'ne, 
 
 fein, fei'ne, 
 
 il)t, ify're, 
 
 uu'fev, uu fere or un'fve, mt'fev, 
 
 en'er, eu'eve or eu've, 
 
 itft, ify've, 
 
 These pronouns are declined in the singular like the article 
 titi, a, and in the plural like the adjective gut, good, in the 
 first declension ; as, 
 
 Neut. 
 
 M.F. # 
 
 N. 
 
 
 mcin, 
 
 mei'ne, 
 
 
 my. 
 
 t>cin, 
 
 fcei'ne, 
 
 
 thy. 
 
 fcin, 
 
 fei'ne, 
 
 
 his, its. 
 
 it)t, 
 
 ify're, 
 
 
 her. 
 
 uu'fer, 
 
 ttn'fere or un'fre, 
 
 our. 
 
 cu'eu, 
 
 eu'eve or eu've, 
 
 your. 
 
 tyr, 
 
 ify've, 
 
 
 their. 
 
 
 
 Si 
 
 ngular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 M. F. $ N. 
 
 N. 
 
 mein, 
 
 
 mei'ne, 
 
 mein, 
 
 mei'ne, my. 
 
 G. 
 
 mei'ne^, 
 
 
 met'nev, 
 
 mei'ne^, 
 
 mei'nev, of my 
 
 D. 
 
 mei'nem, 
 
 
 mei'nev, 
 
 mei'nem, 
 
 mei'nen, to my 
 
 A. 
 
 mei'nen, 
 
 
 mei'ne, 
 
 mein, 
 
 mei'ne/ my. 
 
PART II. CH. 5.] POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 57 
 
 These possessive pronouns are called conjunctive, because 
 they are joined to substantives. The pronouns fctH, itjV, CU'Ct, 
 &c, agree in gender, respectively, with the possessor ; but the 
 termination must agree in gender, number, and case, with the 
 thing possessed. 
 
 According to this rule, the following examples may be easily 
 declined ; mcin 25ru'ber, m. 3. a. a., my brother ; met'UC 
 @cl)rr>cfter, /. 1. C, my sister ; mein *25ucl), n, 3. b. c, my 
 book ; fccin ^Ct'tCV, m. 3. a. C, thy male cousin ; fei'UC ^3a'fc, 
 /. 1. C, his female cousin ; i()V gmmb, m. 3. b. l\, her friend ; 
 mt'fci* 91 ef fc, m. 2. a., our nephew ; tu'tt $flid)'tt,f. 1. C, your 
 niece ; it)X *£ait£, n. 3. b. c, their house. 
 
 Absolute Possessive Pronouns. 
 
 They are called absolute possessive pronouns, because they 
 stand for some noun, which precedes them, expressed or 
 understood, and with which they must agree in gender, num- 
 ber, and case. They are inflected like adjectives. In most 
 cases they are preceded by the definite article, and on this 
 account inflected according to the second declension, like bCV 
 glt'tc, Me gu'tc, fcciS gu'tc. So decline the following : 
 
 Masc. 
 
 bet* ntci'nigc, 
 bcr. bci'nigc, 
 bcv fei'nigc, 
 bcr ify'vigf, 
 bet* mi'fvige, 
 bcv cu'rige, 
 bev ifytige, 
 
 Fern. 
 
 bic mci'nigc, 
 
 bic bci'ntgc, 
 
 tic fei'nigc, 
 
 t>ic ity'vige, 
 
 bic nn'fvige, 
 
 bic cn'rige, 
 fcie ify'rigc, 
 
 Neut. 
 
 MS mci'nigc, 
 bag bei'nigc, 
 bag fci'njge, 
 tvi^ ify'rigc, 
 bag nn'frigc, 
 bag cn'vigc, 
 bag ify'rige, 
 
 mine, &c. 
 thine, &,c. 
 his, its, &c. 
 hers, &c. 
 ours, &/C. 
 yours, &c 
 theirs, &C. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 bie mct'nigcn, 
 biz bei'nigen, 
 bie fct'mgcn, 
 bic ify'rigcn, 
 bic nn'frigen, 
 bie cn'vigcn, 
 tic ify'vigcn, 
 
 mine, &,c. 
 thine, &c. 
 his, its, &lc. 
 hers, &c. 
 ours, &c. 
 yours, &x. 
 theirs, &c. 
 
58 
 
 POSSESSIVE mONOUNS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 The substantive §\\t, hat, with a conjunctive possessive pro- 
 noun before it, and an absolute possessive pronoun after it, 
 is thus declined : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. fcin %\\t nnD Der mri'ttige, 
 G. fei'nes s*>u'tt$ nnD Des mei'nigen, 
 D. fei'nem J^u'tc nnD Dem mei'nigen, 
 A. fei'nen £nt unt> Den mei'nigen, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. fei'ne £ft'te nnD Die mei'nigen, 
 G. fei'ner £ft'te nnt» Der mei'nigen, 
 D. fei'nen J^iVten nnD Den mei'nigen, 
 A. fei'ne Jfpn'te nnt> Die mei'nigen, 
 
 So decline : 
 
 mem grennD nnD Der fei'nige, 
 fei'ne grenn'Din nnD Die mei'nige, 
 
 his hat and mine, 
 of his hat and mine, 
 to his hat and mine, 
 his hat and mine. 
 
 his hats and mine, 
 of his hats and mine, 
 to his hats and mine, 
 his hats and mine. 
 
 my friend and his. 
 
 his {female) friend and 
 
 mine, 
 their brother and thine, 
 my brother and yours, 
 my sister and his. 
 his sister and hers, 
 her mother and mine. 
 my book and his. 
 our country and theirs, 
 their country and ours. 
 
 tt)r 23rn'Der nnt> bet: Det'nige, 
 mein 23rn'Der nnl> t>ev en'rige, 
 mei'ne @c()rcef'ter nnt> Die fei'nige, 
 fei'ne @c()roef'ter una Die ify'rige, 
 tfy're SDlut'tcr nnD Die mei'nige, 
 mein S5ucl) nnD Das? fei'nige, 
 nn'fer SSa'tertanD nnD Das il)'rige, 
 \\)x ^a'tertanD nnD Das nn'frige, 
 
 Instead of the pronouns, Der mei'ntge, Die mei'nige, Dasmei'* 
 
 Jttge, mine, the Germans make use, also, of the pronouns, Dei* 
 mei'ne, t>k mei'ne, DaS mei'ne, as synonymous terms, declined 
 in the same manner. In the same way the pronouns, Der 
 Dei'ne, Der fei'ne, Der ifyxt, Der nn'fere, Dei* en're, Der ify're, are 
 used instead of the complete forms, Der Dei'llige, Der fei'nige, 
 Der ify'rige, Der nn'frige, Der en'rige, Der ify'rige. 
 
 There are also absolute possessive pronouns, not preceded 
 by the article, and consequently inflected according to the first 
 declension. Such are the following : 
 
 Masc. 
 
 mei'ner, 
 Dei'ner, 
 
 Singular. 
 Fern. 
 
 mei'ne, 
 Dei'ne, 
 
 Ncut. 
 mei'nes, 
 Dci'netf, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 31. F. $ N. 
 
 mei'ne, 
 Dei'ne, 
 
 mine, 
 thine. 
 
FART II. CH. 5.] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 59 
 
 fei'ner, fei'ne, fci'ncs, fei'ne, his, its. 
 
 ityxtv, ityn, ityxts, ify've, hers. 
 
 itnfem or ) ttn'feve or ) im'fewS or ) uu'fetre or ) ourg 
 
 cu'cm* or ) eu'cre or ) eu'eves or ) eu'euc or ) 
 eu'ver, ) eu're, j eu'vcs, J eu've, j y 
 ityxtv, ify're, ifj'ves, itj'rc, theirs. 
 
 The absolute possessive pronouns are always used without 
 a noun, the noun being understood or referred to ; as, That 
 is my hat, 2)a6 i|t mcin Jput; No, it is mine, SRcin, CS ift 
 mci'ner, or, t>ei* mei'ne, or, &ev met'nige. 
 
 The pronouns, mci'UCr, mine ; fcet'ltev, thine, &c., are de- 
 clined like gtt'tev, $ll'tt, gU'teS, according to the first declen- 
 sion ; and t>cr met'ne, l>ct* Mi'nt, &c. like t>ev gu'te, t>ic glt'te, 
 fcttS gu'te, according to the second declension. 
 
 Observation. In addressing a person, where in English the 
 pronouns, you, your, and yours, are used, the Germans, in 
 speaking to intimate friends, make use of t>U, thou; fcetn, thy ; 
 bti'MX, thine ; but in addressing others they employ the plural 
 of the third person, @ie, which in this case does not mean 
 they but you. This alteration of the original meaning of the 
 pronoun, is denoted by writing it with a capital letter (see p. 
 3.) in all its cases; as, Nom. fy Ace. ©ic, you ; Gen. ^fy'vei', 
 of you ; Dat. ^fy'NCU, to you. The same remark applies to 
 the corresponding possessive pronouns, 3t)v, %tyxt, 3»t)V, your ; 
 
 Styxtx, Sty're, 3t?'re$, or t>ev 3fy'rtge, t>ie 3t)'vige, t>a$ Sfy'vige, 
 or frcr 31) re, Die 31} 're, fcae> 3b'i-e, yours. Ex. @ie you fuifc 
 are 3l)v your ei'genev own J5etT master. 
 
 In the old German language, the pronouns ^t)X, you, Qsu'Cl*, 
 your, were used to address a person in a dignified manner, 
 and this mode (which corresponds to the English), is still 
 sometimes used in poetry. But in common life this mode of 
 addressing persons is rarely used, except in speaking to infe- 
 riors in rank, for which purpose, also, the third person singu- 
 lar, ev, he, or ftC/ she, is sometimes employed. 
 
 § 3. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The demonstrative pronouns are those which point out the 
 persons or things spoken of. They are declined generally 
 like adjectives ; and as most of them are not preceded by the 
 
60 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. [BOOK I. 
 
 definite article, they are inflected according to the first de- 
 clension. Ex. 
 
 Singular. 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 N. fcie'fcr, Me'fC/ fcie'fcs or fcies, this, &c. 
 
 Plural, for the three genders. 
 N. fcte'fC/ these. &c. 
 So decline the following : 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. Plural. 
 
 je'ner, je'ne, je'nes, that ; je'ne, those. 
 
 fct'Hgev, fcl'bige, fel'MfleS, fcl'bigc, the same, 
 
 fol'cfeev, fol'etie, fol'efoes, fol'clje, such. 
 
 The demonstrative pronouns, like adjectives, are joined to 
 substantives with which they must agree in gender, number, 
 and case. So decline the following : 
 
 SMc'fev ^ttci'k, m. % a., this boy. 
 3e'ne6 50?at>'cl)en, n. 3. a. a., that girl. 
 c^c'UCt* *25nt'&er, m. 3. a. a., that brother. 
 ©OPdje SKacb'ridjt, /. 1. t>., such a report. 
 ©ot'djcS ( 2Bct / tcr / n. 3. a., such weather. 
 
 The pronoun t)Ci*'jcnigC, he that, is declined like t»et* gtt'te, 
 according to the second declension of adjectives. 
 
 Singular. 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 N. fcer'jenige, fcic'jenigc, fcas'jcnige, he, she, it, or that, &c. 
 
 Plural, for the three genders. 
 N. tic'jcnigen, they or those, &c. 
 
 So decline : 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. Plural. 
 
 fcerfcl'fce, fcicfel'fcc, ^ajfcl'bc, fricfct'fccn, the same, or he, 
 
 she, it, — they 
 fecrfct'bige, fcicfet' Inge, fcaftH'lugc, fciefel'tugen, the same, &c. 
 
PART II. CH. 5.] RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 61 
 
 So decline the following : 
 
 2)crfef'6c *2ttaim, m. 3. b. c, the same man. 
 SDer'jcnige *33?ann, that man. 
 ^tC'jCUtgC itt'gettb,/. 1. fc>., that virtue. 
 SMffePbe ^fctt'genb, the same virtue. 
 Satf'jenige, *23ud), rc. 3. b. e., that book. 
 Sajfel'fcc, *23uri), the same book. 
 
 The demonstrative pronoun t»CV, that, is declined in a 
 peculiar manner, nearly like the article t>Ct*, the : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Masc. Fern. Ncut. 
 
 
 N. 
 G. 
 D. 
 A. 
 
 Dev, fcie, M$, 
 t>cg or bcffett, t>er or frc'ren, fccg or fcef'fcn, 
 Dem, t>er, t>cm, 
 fcen, i>ie, Da^, 
 
 that, 
 of that 
 to that, 
 that. 
 
 Plural, for the three genders. 
 
 N. Die, those. 
 
 G. fce'm* or Dc'VCU, of those. 
 
 D. fce'ncn, to those. 
 
 A. tuc, those. 
 
 § 4. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Relative pronouns relate to some word or phrase going 
 before, which word or phrase is called the antecedem . 
 They are declined in the following manner. 
 
 ^GBcl'ctKt:, who, is declined according to the first declension 
 of adjectives : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 N. ml'd)tx, WCl'd)t, \Ml'd)t$, who, which, or that, &c. 
 
 Plural, for the three genders. 
 
 N. wl'd)t, who, which, or that, &c. 
 6 
 
62 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. [BOOK I. 
 
 The relative pronoun, fccr, Me, M$, that, is declined like 
 the demonstrative pronoun, t>er, t>te, t>a£, that. 
 
 93}er, who, and roaS, what, as relatives, are used in the 
 singular only, and are thus declined : 
 
 Masc. fy Fern. Ncut. 
 
 N. WV, who, whosoever, which, N. IMS, what. 
 
 he who, she who. 
 G. rocffeu, »ef, of whom, of G. wef'fcn, roeg, of what. 
 
 whomsoever, of which, dec. 
 D. VMm, to whom, to whomso- D. Vt>Cttt, to what. 
 
 ever, &c. 
 A. rDCU, whom, whomsoever, &,c. A. U?a£, what. 
 
 Observations. ^OBcv and VE»a6 are sometimes relative and 
 sometimes interrogative pronouns. 
 
 ^Cf, is sometimes Englished by he who, or whoever ; as, 
 QQBci* ifyn hunt, [kbt ityn, whoever knows him, loves him. 
 ^aS, is sometimes Englished by that which ; as, ^aS id) 
 gefagt' fya'be, ift tr-afyr, That which, or what, I have said, is 
 true. 
 
 The ancient relative fo, which, who, is indeclinable ; ex. 
 3)ic grnm&'fcbaft fo ifyr mix benrie'fen fyabt, The friendship 
 which you have shown me. 
 
 For the use of the different relative pronouns, see Syntax, 
 Book II. Chapter 4. § 1. Obs. 6 and 7. 
 
 § 5. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The interrogative pronouns are, tt»er, who? rM6, what? 
 Wd'cfjcr, who? which? tMg fur Cut, what sort of? or, V0a$ 
 fur, what? 
 
 The interrogative iKfcfyer, is declined like the relative XOtV* 
 d)Ct\ QGDcr, n>a$, are thus declined : 
 
PART II. CH. 5.] INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 63 
 
 Singular and Plural. 
 Masc. fy Fern. Neut. 
 
 N. wer, who? N. V&a$, what? 
 
 G. weffeu, weft, whose ? G. fcon roa£ or wobon', of what ? 
 
 2>. wcm, to whom ? Z>. ju roa£ or wont', to what ? 
 
 -4. wen, whom ? A. wag, what ? 
 
 ^vttf fur tin, what? or, what sort of? is thus declined : 
 
 Singular. 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 N - ™VJ" (in or \ »*« * **» I ww , $ cin S r , ri T f* 
 
 erncr. J ' ( what? or what sort of? 
 
 G. roaS fuv ei'ueg, wag fur ti'ntt, was fur ei'ncg, of what? 
 Z). n>a^ fur ei'ncm, vo*$ fur ci'ucr, wag fur ei'nem, to what ? 
 A. wag fuv ei'nen, wa^ fuv ci'ne, wag fitv cin or ci'neg, 
 
 what? 
 
 Plural, for the three genders. 
 
 N. l»a$ fur, what? or, what sort of? 
 
 No genitive. 
 
 D. voa$ fur, to what ? 
 
 A. voa$ fur, what? 
 
 Instead of wag fur ciu, the synonymous pronoun wcfcl) cin 
 is used, and declined like the former ; ex. tJBdd) ci'ue ^fyat ! 
 what a deed ! deleft ei'nen 2D?cn'fd)Ctt fya'bc id) geliefct', what a 
 man have I loved ! 
 
 § 6. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns are so called, because they refer to 
 things in an indefinite manner. Some are numeral; as, ei'ner, 
 
 * 333a£ fur Ciu is always used before a noun with which it 
 agrees; roa^ fuv ei'ner, and \X>A$ fill* ei'UCg (or cing), are used 
 by themselves, with reference to a preceding noun. Ex. 
 Quest. Jpa ben @ic M$ ©emal'fce gefe't)cu ? Have you seen 
 the picture? Ans. ^ag fill* cin (Semal'&C? What picture? 
 or simply, ^vlg fur ci'neg ? Which one? 
 
64 
 
 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 one; M'ner, no one, &c. ; others distributive; as, je'oei*, 
 each, every, &c. 
 
 These pronouns are generally declined like adjectives, in 
 the first, the second, or the third declension, according to the 
 general rules. 
 
 So decline the following 
 
 Masc. 
 
 h'x'mx, 
 
 folder, 
 cinjigcr, 
 
 ei'nigcr, 
 
 man'djer, 
 
 atleir, 
 
 je'oer, 
 
 jeo'roeoev, 
 
 jeg'iidjei*, 
 
 ei'ner, 
 
 fold) ei'ner, 
 
 ri'nev Don kt'oen, 
 
 Fern. 
 
 fei'ne, 
 
 fol'ck, 
 
 ei'ntge, 
 
 mait'ck, 
 
 al'fe, 
 
 je'fce, 
 
 jco'voeoe, 
 
 jes'lidje, 
 
 et'ne, 
 
 fold) ei'ne, 
 ei'ne Don kt'oen, 
 
 hi'iw Don kt'oen, fci'ne Don kt'oen, 
 
 Neut. 
 
 £et'ne£, no one or 
 
 none. 
 fo('d)C6, such. 
 ein'£tge6, only. 
 Ci'ntge£, some or any. 
 man'djctf, many a one. 
 aVk$, all. 
 
 JC'0C6, every or each. 
 JCD'I&C&CS, every. 
 jeg'lid)e£, every. 
 Ct'ne6, one or some one. 
 fold) ei'ncS, such a one. 
 ei'ncs Don ki'oen, ei- 
 ther, 
 fci'nes Don ki'oen, 
 
 neither. 
 
 Plural for the three genders. 
 
 Mm, 
 
 none. 
 
 fo('d)e, 
 
 such. 
 
 ein'jige, 
 
 only. 
 
 ei'ntge, 
 
 some or any 
 
 man'd)e, 
 
 many. 
 
 al'le, 
 
 all. 
 
 3e'oev, jeo'roeoev, jttfli&tt, ei'ner, et'nev Don kt'Oen, and 
 
 Ui'MK Don ki'oen, have no plural. 
 
 The plural, ki'oe, both, is declined like that" of fei'ner. 
 The singular of that pronoun is used only in the neuter gen- 
 der ; viz. N. ki'oetf, both ; G. ki'octf, of both ; D. bet'Oem, 
 to both ; A. ki't>e6, both. 
 
 Some of these pronouns are declined as adjectives, with ein 
 ort>ei\ Thus, ein je'oer, ci'ne je'Oe, ein je'Octf, each, is inflected 
 according to the third declension, and in the singular number 
 
PART II. CH. 5.] SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 65 
 
 only. S)cr ei'ne, tit ei'ne, t>(l6 ei'ne, is inflected according 
 to the second declension, singular and plural. 
 
 So decline : 
 
 Masc. Fern. Neut. 
 
 cin an'bttx, et'ne an't>ve, eitt an'fcvetf, another. 
 
 fc>ei* an'fcre, tne an'tore, t>a6 an'fcve, the other. 
 
 tin ein'jiger, ei'ne ein'jige, etn ein'jigeS/ an only one. 
 
 fcer ein'jige, Me em'jigc, $a$ ein'jige, the only one. 
 
 ein ei'niger, ei'ne ei'nige, eiu ci'niges, an only one. 
 
 t>ev ei'nige, fcie ei'nige, i>a6 ei'nige, the only one. 
 
 etn jeb'roefcev,* ei'ne jeb'roebe, ein jcfc'roefces, every. 
 
 tin jeg'licfjetr, ei'ne jeg'licfoe, ein Jeg'lidjeS, any, every one. 
 
 The indefinite pronoun Fein, tti'nt, {"'ein, which is joined to 
 substantives, like the conjunctive possessive pronouns, mein, 
 fceilt, fein, &c, is also declined like them. 
 
 § 7. SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The substantive pronouns, ^e'mant), some or any body ; 
 9Tie / man&, nobody, are used in the singular only, and are 
 declined both as adjectives and as nouns, as follows : 
 
 N. je'manfc, somebody. 
 
 G. )e'mant>S or je'mant>e$, of somebody. 
 
 D. je'manfc or jc'man&cm, to somebody. 
 
 A. je'mant> or jc'man&cn, somebody. 
 
 N. nie'mant), nobody. 
 G. nie'mant>6 or nic'manfceg, of nobody. 
 D. nie'manfc or nie'manfcem, to nobody. 
 A. nie'manb or nic'manfcen, nobody. 
 
 3iC't>ennan/ every body, is declined as a noun. 
 
 N. je'fcennan, every body. 
 
 G. je'fcennanS, of every body. 
 
 D. je't>ennan, to every body. 
 
 A. je'fcerman, every body. " 
 
 * 3iC&'\r»et»er is generally used without the article, and is 
 then inflected like je'fcei*, or fei'ner, according to the first de- 
 clension. 
 
06 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. [BOOK I. 
 
 The substantive pronouns, man, one ; et'roa6, something ; 
 and uid)t6, nothing, are indeclinable. 
 
 £D?an, one, we, people, they, &c, like the French pronoun, 
 on, is used only in the third person singular ; ex. 2D?an fagt/ 
 Der $vieg fei geen'Digt, people say the war is ended. 
 
 Recapitulatory Exercises on all the Pronouns. 
 
 TOv ftnt) SDten'fdjm unD voir flnD jfcvb'ltd). 
 
 itjo'trett/ t>ie \§x feiD, intern' it)v fyoffet, Dag ttyr ofy'ne cud) 
 SDfaVlje ju ge'bcn, gclefyrt' unD wet'fe wcv'Den fon'net. 
 
 ©o'frate^ fag'te oft ju fei'neu gmro'Dcn: SDtein ie'ben ijt 
 mir nidjt fo fd)d£'bav alt? Die ^u'geuD. 
 
 5D?etn ©cfdnnacf' ij! ntd)t Dcv Det'ntge, unD Dein (Bcfdnnatf' 
 iff nid)t Dev mei'nige ; id) ftn'De ^cvgmVgen an (Bemdl'Dcn aus 
 Der Cftte'DevfdnDifdKn ©dnt'te, unt) Du, an ©emdl'Den aus Dcr 
 Staltd'mfdKU. 
 
 SIBofyev' Differ Un'tcvfdneD ? Da Dod) fonft mei'ne Stei'gung 
 tnitDer Det'utgen Imitate ganj lUemn'ftimmt, 
 
 ©in je'bei- fd)6pft aus Dev CimVU fei'nev *et'Denfd)aften, fein 
 (Mid o'Det Un'glftd. 
 
 3d) fraa/te nad) jc'manb, fanD a'bet uie'ntanDcn ju ^att'fe. 
 
 ^e'Des SanD t)at fehte ©cbvdu'd^. 
 
 £$ gtebt %itytix De'ren man ftd) nid)t leid)t 6eroufl*t' mvt>, 
 uuD ml'tfyt man fovg'fdftig fccrbivgt'. 
 
 ftnD, are. ate, as. 
 
 ftetMidj, mortal. Die ^ugcnD, virtue. 
 
 %tjOY, fool. (Sefd)macf, taste. 
 
 fciD, are. ftuDe Skt'gnugClt an, am pleas- 
 
 tuDem if)i* bojfct, to hope. ed with. 
 
 Dag, that. Dag QxmdfDe, picture. 
 
 Ofyne JU geben, without giving. auS, (out) of. 
 
 STRitfje, trouble. UtcDcvldnDifd), Flemish. 
 
 voerDen rennet, can become. @d)\\U, school. 
 
 gelefylt, learned. ttaUduifd), Italian. 
 
 roeifc, wise. voofyev, whence. 
 
 fagte oft, often said. UntcvfclncD, difference. 
 
 £U, to. Da Docfj, since. 
 
 gl'CltnD/ friend. fonft, otherwise. 
 
 icben, life. SReigung, inclination. 
 
 i|| nidjt fo fd)d^6av, is not so bcinafye ganj ubeveinjtimmt, 
 valuable. coincides almost entirely. 
 
PART II. CH. 5.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 67 
 
 fc()6pft, draws. Saul), country. 
 
 au£, from. fyat, has. 
 
 Quelle, source. (Scirattd), custom. 
 
 icit>cnfct)aft, passion. 0;$ gicfct, there are. 
 
 (Bind oDit Unglucf, good or gefylcv, fault. 
 
 ill fortune. (cicl)t, easily, 
 
 fragte, inquired. fid) ben>ufft roift), becomes con- 
 
 ltad), after. scious. 
 
 fanfc, found. forgfaitig, carefully. 
 
 JU §mf(, at home. Wvluvgt, conceals. 
 
 I know him. He knows them. She knows us. You know 
 her. They know them. He gives it to them. We give it to 
 him. She gives it to me. They give it to us. Tell it to 
 him. He told it to them. Take pity on (of) me. He is 
 ashamed (shames himself) of thee. We remember (ourselves 
 of) you. There are ten 2 of 1 us 1 . There are six 2 of 1 them 1 . 
 Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself. I deny it to my- 
 self. He was not 2 master 3 of 1 himself 1 . When thy days are 2 
 dark, 1 then 3 thy 5 false^ friends 7 depart 4 from 8 thee 9 , but thy 
 true friends forsake thee not. 
 
 They gave it not to my friend, but to thine. 
 
 We owe it not to your desert, but to theirs. 
 
 This is not thy lot but mine. I mean this house. 
 
 This is the man (this man is it) of whom I speak. 
 
 Thou must do 2 this/ but not 2 leave 3 that 1 (undone). 
 
 This is his own estate. 
 
 He does as those people of the torrid zone, who shoot 5 
 arrows 1 at 2 the 3 sun 4 . 
 
 Who is the most estimable among men 1 The most vir- 
 tuous. 
 
 What (which) man can promise 4 himself 1 constant 2 happi- 
 ness 3 ? 
 
 Which season is the pleasantest? 
 
 know, fcn'ne. told, fag'te. 
 
 knows, faint. take pity, ettw'met tud). 
 
 you — know, f en'nct. ashamed, fdjdmt. 
 
 they — know, frn'UClt. remember, CVin'ntM. 
 
 gives, gtcbt. there are, c£ ftut>. 
 
 give, gc'fcen. shalt, fellft. 
 
 tell, fa'ge. love, tic ben* 
 
68 
 
 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 neighbor, Dtaclj'bav, m. 3. a. C. 
 
 as, rote. 
 
 deny, fcerfa'ge. 
 
 was, roar. 
 
 not, ni d)t. 
 
 master, J^etT/ m. 2. b. 
 
 when, wctUl. 
 
 day, %<X§, m. 3. b. b. 
 
 dark, fcuvtf'el. 
 
 are, ftut). 
 
 then, fcann. 
 
 depart, roei'djen. 
 
 false, falfcl). 
 
 friend, gmtltb, m. 3. b. b. 
 
 from, ftOU. (Dat.) 
 
 but, a'ber. 
 
 true, real) v. 
 
 forsake, fccvfaf fen. 
 
 gave, ga'ben. 
 
 but, fou' bent. 
 
 owe, wrbanf'cn. 
 
 desert, 33erbten|V, m, 3. b. b. 
 
 lot, 400^, ». 3. b. 6. 
 
 mean, mei'ne. 
 
 house, *£au6, w. 3. b. C 
 
 man, 20iann, m. 3. b. e. 
 
 is, i\\. » 
 
 of, t>on. (Daf.) 
 
 speak, ve'fce. 
 
 must, mufft. 
 
 this, (Ace. Neut.) 
 
 do, tfyun. 
 but, a'bev. 
 
 that, (^Icc. Neut.) 
 
 not leave, ntcl)t (af fen. 
 
 own, ei'gen. 
 
 estate, *©ut, ?i. 3. b. e. 
 
 does, roac()t eg. 
 
 as, roie. 
 
 people, *:Bolf, ?i. 3. b. e. 
 
 torrid, f)ei§, 
 
 zone, Ufa' 11 *//- 1- t» 
 arrow, spfctl, m. 3. b. b. 
 at, gc'gen. 
 
 sun, ©on'ne,/. 1. c. 
 to shoot, ab'febicfetu 
 estimable, frijag'bar. 
 among, un'tcr. (Dat.) 
 man, Dei* ?0Tenfc(), m. 2. b. 
 virtuous, tu'gent>f)aft. 
 can, Hnn. 
 himself. (Dat.) 
 constant, beftan'btg. 
 happiness, (Btftcf, n. 3. b. 
 promise, tocvfprcdj'en. 
 season, ^afyr'jeit,/. 1. b. 
 pleasant, an'gcnefjm. 
 
 Many persons suffer themselves to 5 be 5 deceived 5 by 1 no- 
 body 2 except 3 themselves 4 . 
 
 Apply thyself to virtue ; this will never 2 forsake 3 thee 1 . 
 
 Whoever is 6 not 4 diligent 5 in 1 his 2 youth 3 , will 1 not 6 know 9 
 (how) to 7 employ 8 himself 5 in 2 his 3 manhood 4 . 
 
 Who did (has 1 done 3 ) that 2 ? his brother or your sister? 
 
 His sister and mine. 
 
 Which house (do) you 2 mean 1 ? 
 
 What book is this? 
 
 Who will get 3 the 1 prize 2 ? my cousin or his? 
 
 Judges must be 8 just 7 towards 1 every one 2 , even 3 towards 4 
 their 5 enemies 6 . 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Put these coins again in their places. 
 I know no one who is 3 so 1 happy 2 as he. 
 (We must give) to every one his own. 
 
 person, 9D?cnfdj. 
 
 suffer, faffen. 
 
 by, fcon. (Dat.) 
 
 except, au'fcr, 
 
 to be deceived, bttl'lVgCtl. 
 
 apply, bejlci'ftge. 
 
 to, (Gen.) 
 
 virtue, Me %\x'$txft,f. 1. t>. 
 
 will, r»iv&. 
 
 never, nic. 
 
 forsake, wrfaffen. 
 
 in, in. (Dat.) 
 
 youth, Su'genb,/. l. 
 
 not, nicbt. 
 
 diligent, flctftg. 
 
 is, ijr. 
 
 will, ttirt>. 
 
 manhood, SOtan'ncSaltcr, m. 
 
 o. a. 
 to employ, jn bcfdjaf tigeu. 
 know, nnffen. 
 
 has, t)at. 
 
 that, t>a$. 
 
 done, ^etf)au', 
 
 brother, *iSvn / Der / m. 3. a. a. 
 
 or, o'fccr. 
 
 sister, ©djrocf'ter,/. I. C. 
 
 mean, mci'nct. 
 
 what, n>ag fitv tin. 
 
 book, * 95 ltd)/ ft. 3. b. e. 
 
 will, n>it&. 
 
 prize, spvci^/ m, 3. b. b. 
 
 get, fcafcon'tvagcn. 
 
 cousin, 3$et'tor, m. 3. a. C. 
 
 judge, SHidj'tcv, m. 3. a. a, 
 
 must, mitf'fen. 
 
 towards, ge'gcn. 
 
 even, fclbji (^4cc.) 
 
 enemy, gcint), m, 3. b. 6. 
 
 put, Ic'gCt. 
 
 just be, gewffeC fcin. 
 
 coin, Stfiin'je, /. 1. C. 
 
 again, iDic'bev. 
 
 in, auf. (^lcc.) 
 
 place, *?pia£, w. 3. b. b. 
 
 know, fcn'nc. 
 
 happy, gtftcf'lid). 
 
 as, al£. 
 
 his own, fca£ fei'nigc. 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 VERBS. 
 General Remarks. 
 
 Verbs express the connexion between subjects (nouns), 
 and qualities (adjectives or adverbs). The various modes in 
 which qualities are connected with subjects, are expressed by 
 different kinds of verbs and the different parts of each verb. 
 
 I. Verbs are divided into neuter, active, reflective, and pas- 
 sive. Some verbs are defective, as the impersonal verbs. A 
 complete verb comprehends, besides the participles, four moods, 
 
70 VERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 the infinitive, the indicative, the subjunctive, and the impera* 
 tive ; and these principal parts of the verb contain different 
 tenses ; with the exception of the imperative, which has only 
 the present tense. Each tense contains two numbers, and 
 three persons in each number. 
 
 II. Some of the different forms of the verb are original, 
 and others supplementary. 
 
 The original forms are the infinitive present of the active or 
 neuter verb, and all those parts which are formed from the 
 infinitive mood, by altering, increasing, or diminishing it, 
 viz. the Present, Imperfect, Imperative, and the Participles. 
 Thus from the infinitive lie'ben, to love, is formed the imper- 
 fect, idj (ieb'te, I loved. 
 
 The supplementary forms are made by joining the past 
 participle, or the infinitive mood, to an auxiliary verb ; as, id) 
 
 l;a be geliebt', I have loved ; id) mv'bt lie'ben, I shall love. 
 
 III. In their original forms, all German verbs are active or 
 neuter ; except the past participle, which, when it stands by 
 itself, has (as in English) a. passive meaning ; as geltebt', loved. 
 This passive meaning is preserved when the past participle is 
 joined to the auxiliary voev'fcen, to become, which in this in- 
 stance is Englished to be, and forms the passive voice ; as, id) 
 WCt'tiC geliebt', I am loved. But the past participle takes an 
 active signification when it is joined to the auxiliary fya'ben, to 
 have ; as, id) fya'be geliebt', I have loved. 
 
 The indicative and the subjunctive contain two original 
 tenses, the present and the imperfect. 
 
 There is no difference between active and neuter verbs 
 with respect to the original tenses. 
 
 IV. The verb is inflected by adding certain letters to the 
 substance of the verb. The substance of the verb consists of 
 those letters which, in the infinitive mood, precede the final 
 letters en (or the final letter n, in those which do not end in 
 en). Thus the substance of the verb lie'ben, to love, is licb ; 
 that of txmi'Utn, to enlarge, is evwci'tCf ; and that of ttyltn, 
 to do, is tl)lt. 
 
 V. The additional letters, by means of which the verb is 
 inflected, are joined to the end of the substance of the verb ; 
 as, id) lieb-e, I love ; tut licb-ejl, thou lovest ; id) (terete, I 
 loved, &c. But in the past participle most verbs have also 
 the augment, i. e. the syllable ge, prefixed to the substance of 
 the word; as, lie'ben, to love, past. part, geliebt', loved; fed)'= 
 ten, to fight, past. part, gefodyten, fought. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] VERBS. 71 
 
 VI. The augment ge is not prefixed, when the verb is com- 
 pounded with be, emp, ent, n, fcet', JCV, or ge, which are fre- 
 quently prefixed to it to express particular modifications of the 
 original meaning of the verb. Thus, the past participle of 
 the regular verb, gefo'bctl, to vow (derived from (o'bcn, to 
 praise), is not gegctobt, but gclobt'. But when the above- 
 mentioned syllables are not prefixed by way of composi- 
 tion, but are part of the original verb itself, the syllable ge is 
 prefixed ; as in bt'ttn, to pray, past. part, gebe'tct, pray- 
 ed ; and in the irregular verb, ge'ben, to give, past. part. 
 gege'ben, given. 
 
 VII. All the original forms of the verb which are made of 
 the infinitive, are either regular or irregular, or partly regular 
 and partly irregular.* This variety of forms, though it is 
 found in all parts of the verb, occurs particularly in the form- 
 ation of the imperfect tense and the past participle. Upon 
 this difference three modes of conjugation are founded, the 
 regular, or modern, the irregular, or ancient, and the mixed 
 conjugation. 
 
 VIII. A verb is regular, if, in its conjugation, the letters of 
 the substantial part remain unchanged, and if, at the same 
 time, the imperfect tense, in the first and the third person of 
 the singular number, ends in te or ete, and the past participle 
 in et, or t; as, fte'ben, to love, imp. id) (or er) lieb'te, or lie'bete, 
 I (or he) loved ; past. part, gelte'bet, or gcltcbt', loved. 
 
 A verb is irregular, if, in its conjugation, one or several of 
 the substantial letters of the word are changed, and if, in the 
 first and third person singular of the imperfect tense, the 
 letters te or ete are not added, and the past participle ends in 
 en or n ; as, flic'fycn, to flee, id) (or er) jlofy, I (or he) fled, 
 gejio'tycn, or gcflotyn', fled. 
 
 A verb is mixed, if, in its conjugation, one or the other of 
 the substantial letters is changed, but at the same time the 
 imperfect and the past participle are formed in the regular 
 way, in te, and t ; as, bvmg'en, to bring; tc() (or er) bradj'te, 
 I (or he) brought ; gebradjt', brought. 
 
 IX. The substance of all primitive verbs, that is, of all 
 those which are not formed by composition or derivation, 
 consists of one syllable. 
 
 * This division affects the supplementary forms only in as 
 much as most of them are made by joining an auxiliary verb 
 to the past participle, which is either regular or irregular. 
 
72 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 § 1. REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 In every regular verb the additional syllables are conform- 
 able to the following table. 
 
 All those verbs, the substance of which consists of more 
 than one syllable, are regular. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 1st Per. 
 
 2d Per. 
 
 3d Per. 
 
 1st Per. 
 
 2d Per. 
 
 3d Per. 
 
 Sing. t 
 
 1 
 
 Plur.l en 
 
 i 
 
 \\ or ejt 
 tor et 
 
 toret 
 
 en 
 
 e 
 en 
 
 eft 
 
 et 
 
 e 
 en 
 
 Imperfect, 
 
 Singt 
 Plur. 
 
 te or ete 
 ten or ttcn 
 
 tejt or eteft 
 ut or etet 
 
 te or ete 
 tenor eten 
 
 ete 
 eten 
 
 etejt 
 Utt 
 
 ete 
 eten 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Sing* 
 
 — 
 
 e 
 
 e 
 
 Present, cnt). 
 Past, gc — etor t. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 en 
 
 et or t 
 
 en 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Present, en. 
 
 
 Observation. The choice between the endings ft and eft, 
 t and et, te and ete, U\l and ctcjt, ten and eten, M and CtCt, 
 depends on euphony. Thus, in the imperfect tense of the 
 verb lo'fcen, to praise, we may use either tob'tC, or fo'cete ; 
 but in ve'fcen, to speak, we must say, id) VC'betC, I spoke, and 
 not vefc'te, because, in pronouncing, this could not be distin- 
 guished from the present, id) ve'fce, I speak. 
 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 73 
 
 Conjugation of the Regular Verb, lie'beu, to love. 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 (ie'beit, to love. Present. Itc'bcnt), loving. 
 
 Past. geliebt', loved. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) (ie'be, I love, do love, or id) (ic'be, I may love. 
 
 am loving, 
 bit liebjt or (tc'bcjt, thou lov- tot lic'bcft, thou mayst love. 
 
 est, dost love, or art loving, 
 er, fie, or es licbt or lie'bct, cr lic'bc, he may love. 
 
 he, she, or it loves, does 
 
 love, or is loving. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 voiv (tc'bcn, we love, do love, roir Ue'ben, we may love. 
 
 or are loving. 
 
 tf)V licbt or lic'bct, you love, ifyv lic'bct, you may love, 
 
 fte ItC'bcn, they love. fte Ue'ben, they may love. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) licb'tt or (te'bete, I loved id) lie'bete, I might love. 
 
 or did love, 
 tot fieb'tefl or (tc'bctfft, thou tot Ite'bctCft, thou mightst love 
 
 lovedst. 
 CV Ucb'tC or licb'cte, he loved. er fie'bcte, he might love. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 Xb'vc Ueb'tcn or lic'bctctt, we n>iv (ic'bctcn, we might love 
 
 loved. 
 
 tfyr licb'tct or lie'betct, you ifyu lie'betct, you might love, 
 loved. 
 
 fie fteb'ten or lit'biton, they fte lie'beten, they might love. 
 
 loved. 
 
74 IRREGULAR VERBS. [BOOK 1. 
 
 Imperative. 
 Singular. 
 
 iu'bt (Ml), love (thou), 
 iu'bt tv, let him love. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 lit'bm toiv, let us love. 
 
 iu'Ut or tiebt (ifyt*)/ love (yow) or do (you) love. 
 
 lic'ben fie, let them love. 
 
 So conjugate, [o'ben, to praise ; g(au'6cn, to believe. 
 
 § 2. IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 The change of letters in the substantial part of irregular 
 verbs commonly affects only the vowels ; and, in this case, 
 the first and the third person of the imperfect indicative end 
 with the final letter of the substantial part ; as, fpring'Ctt, to 
 spring, imperf. indie, icf) fpvang, I sprang; tt fpvang, he 
 sprang ; past part, gcfpvuttg'cn. But sometimes the change 
 affects also the consonants ; as, fdjnci'bltt/ to cut, imperf. id) 
 fcfenif t ; fein, to be, pres. id) bill, imperf. id) roar ; past part. 
 
 geroe'fen.* 
 
 The imperfect subjunctive is formed by adding Z to the 
 imperfect indicative, and is inflected like the present subjunc- 
 tive ; as, fpving'CU, to spring, imperf. indie, id) fpvaug ; imperf. 
 subj. id) fpuftng'e, &,c. 
 
 When either of the vowels a, 0, or U, occurs in the imper- 
 fect indicative, they are changed into d,. b, or U, in the sub- 
 junctive ; as, fiic'gctl/ to fly ; imperf indie-. ic() flog ; imperf 
 subj. id) jW'ge. 
 
 * The different tenses of the substantive verb, feitt, to be, 
 are, in German, as well as in English, composed of three 
 distinct verbs, which have ceased to exist, except in those 
 tenses. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] MIXED VERBS. 75 
 
 Conjugation of the Irregular Verb, ftng'en, to sing. 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Present, ftttg'cn, to sing. Present, ftng'enfc, singing. 
 
 Past, gefnng'en, sung. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. ftng'e. 
 
 2. ftng'et*. 
 
 3. ftng'et. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 1. fang. 
 
 2. frtng'ejr. 
 
 3. fang. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ftng'en. 
 ftng'et. 
 ftng'en. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fang'en. 
 fang'et. 
 fang'en. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ftng'e. 
 
 ftng'eft. 
 
 ftng'e. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 fdng'e. 
 
 fdng'ejt. 
 
 fdng'e. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fing'en. 
 ftng'et. 
 fing'en. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fdng'en. 
 fdng'et. 
 fdng'en. 
 
 2. ftng'e (tm). 
 
 3. ftng'e ev. 
 
 fing'en reiv. 
 ftng'et (it}i-). 
 ftng'en fte. 
 
 § 3. MIXED VERBS. 
 
 The conjugation of the mixed verb is like that of regular 
 verbs, with regard to the endings of the imperfect tense and 
 the past participle, and it resembles that of the irregular verbs 
 as to the change of letters in the substance of the verb. 
 
 Conjugation of the Mixed Verb, fcenf'en, to think. 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Present, fcenf'en, to think. Present. &en£'cn&, thinking. 
 
 Past. gcfcacl)t', thought. 
 
76 
 
 IRREGULAR AND MIXED VERBS. 
 
 [book 1. 
 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 
 3 ' 
 
 Singular. 
 
 feenf'e. 
 fccnfet. 
 
 Plural. Singular. 
 
 fcenfett. frenfe. 
 t»cnfet. fccnt'cft. 
 fcenfen. fcenf'e. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fcenfen. 
 fcenfet. 
 fcenf'cn. 
 
 1. 
 
 2. 
 3. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Mdyte. 
 
 t>actytc|t. 
 
 ti\dyu. 
 
 Plural. Singular. 
 
 fcadytnt. fc&clytc. 
 fcartytet. t>dd)tct^. 
 fcaclyten. fcdcr/te. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fcdciyten. 
 t>dct) tet. 
 
 fcdcr/tcn. 
 
 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 1 fcent'en 
 
 2. fcenf'e (Mt). bmt'tt 
 
 3. fcent'e er. fcenf'm 
 
 n>ii\ 
 % 
 
 A List of all the Irregular and Mixed Verbs. 
 
 The following list of irregular and mixed verbs exhibits in 
 alphabetical order all the anomalous forms of each. Those 
 parts of the verb which are not given, are regular, except 
 when the sign "&c. ; ' is put after the first or second person of 
 a tense, to indicate that the other persons of that tense are 
 formed in the same irregular way, according to page 75. 
 
 If for the same tense or person, two or more forms are set 
 down, the first of them is to be considered as the most usual ; 
 and when the regular form is also in use, it is inserted in a 
 parenthesis. 
 
 This table is complete in regard to simple verbs ; but of 
 the compound verbs it contains only such as either occur very 
 frequently, or are not easy to be traced to their origin, or differ 
 in some respect from the simple verbs from which they are 
 derived. (The section on Compound Verbs, containing a list 
 of the particles with which simple verbs are most frequently 
 compounded, will enable the learner to trace any compound 
 verb to the simple one from which it is derived, and by this 
 means to find out any irregularity of the former by referring 
 to the latter in the following list.) 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 77 
 
 to 
 
 
 tm St* 
 *■* —i "» 
 
 '— * ^* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 C_^-» ^* 
 o .^" o o 
 
 
 
 • . 
 
 
 
 
 %> 
 
 r 
 s 
 
 • * . 
 
 
 
 
 
 1—1 d 6 «* 
 
 
 o o o o 
 
 
 ^i 
 
 d °3 <<3 -*" 
 
 o o 
 
 «^^ . d d 
 
 
 Ho 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^^^— ^C3- 
 
 .5 «o ,*^ !p ,- cti. ^ 
 « ?"^ *■* «■ s-> t3- 
 
 -t-S 
 O 
 
 a, 
 
 S 
 
 »— i 
 
 <s 
 
 
 
 ^*-. •£-» ^^> ^j J-» ^i, *-► 
 
 • 
 
 •*- 
 3 
 
 S3 ~ <u «*• ,--». 
 
 O 
 
 • *- o ^* 
 
 ^^ . d 
 
 5^ *> . — « o rt3_ 
 •-=-» ^1» ^^^ ,^2^ ^ J_^ 
 
 
 
 
 -go-e-e ^e^ 
 
 
 
 • ^-fc • ■*-*• 
 
 •^^ -<-* 
 
 >«^ -»-► ••^ -^* 
 
 
 
 S3 3 
 
 „_ 
 
 ««=- 
 
 
 
 JQ O 
 
 i-> * 
 
 «^ :-<■ 
 
 
 
 
 «• 
 
 CS3-'P 
 
 
 
 o . • 
 
 «^ . 
 
 . • ♦> 
 
 •»-» 
 
 S3 
 
 
 <-> 
 
 W V>*3- 
 
 B 
 
 CD 
 
 S-i 
 
 *53 
 
 si w-3 . 
 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 "fl 
 
 tt-^ to . 
 
 '— - 
 
 • >** ^~ S3 
 
 
 
 <X» 
 
 S3 O 
 
 
 
 «■£ 
 
 •^ 
 
 »* ^f 
 
 
 
 ^* 
 
 «-♦ • 
 
 • «— jO 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 JO 
 
 X> 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 ~1 ^^ 
 
 
 
 
 a) B* 
 
 S o 
 
 .3 15 
 
 ^ s g 1 
 
 
 
 & O 
 
 
 a o o o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ** ~ 
 
 CO 
 
 a> ^ -S -^ ■«-» 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 S3 S3 O 
 
 CO <■• 
 
 
 
 ^* «^ ■•-' 
 
 en S3 ^* S3 S3 
 
 
 
 S 2 s 
 
 
 - -~I S «> ^» 
 
 
 
 va-> S3 
 
 5> JS 
 
 
 O S3 ^-— <35 tti. 
 
 
 
 <3 «J. 
 
 <** <_* * «** 
 
 
 
 1 83 $ 
 
 » » 
 
 8R ^^ 8R 
 
 7# 
 
78 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 [book 
 
 so 
 
 f^o 
 
 U 
 •eo 
 
 SO 
 
 JO 
 
 $3 ** 
 
 •jo js 
 
 -$*-> <3D-Cl 
 
 goo 
 
 53 JO .JO 
 
 >jO *5D <3D 
 
 
 JO JO JO 
 <«► fc* *rf 
 
 <3T) <5D «S3 
 
 ~ S3 ** *■» i_i 
 
 
 o « 
 
 iiii .O s£j --> 
 
 <^ i-. o c^ c* ^ 
 
 »yj <3"j <3j <3j <3D <X> 
 
 O 
 
 — 
 
 a. 
 
 so 
 
 •?o 
 
 So 
 
 s 
 
 5q 
 
 iO 
 
 
 
 
 U«3 
 
 -«o . 
 
 JO JO 
 
 <i» oO «0 
 
 o 
 
 "T "ii •«-» 
 
 
 jo - *_► e* 1 ^ 
 
 ^rf '— » c^ -o. 
 
 J3- o 
 
 o-e-e -e«e*e ««« ^e 
 
 £5 
 
 Jp- J=* jo 
 
 *2 
 
 © 
 
 >JO 
 
 a) 
 
 >- 
 
 Oh 
 
 So 
 
 $* %$ 
 
 ^^°© „ 
 
 S3 5 ^ CD 
 
 o ^r c* ^* 
 ,£> — I sTjsO 
 
 ^ d ■ 
 
 O o 
 <irf o o 
 
 08 J 88 
 
 >o -yT 
 
 •e-e^e -e^-^e 
 
 ^>-^ ° ° d 
 
 6 6 6 06 ^4c8 
 
 .21 .ii -2i £ <s <s t* <s 
 
 .., ", . *- f . ^(i r£ *~>. >•> - ^> 
 
 Ei is 
 
 so 
 
 e 
 
 •to 
 
 
 O n 
 
 ^. o 
 
 
 O 
 -t-k 
 
 •« 41. 
 
 
 *-■ JO 
 
 - O 
 
 z » 
 
 iO 
 
 I 
 
 So 
 
 u 
 
 •I: "w 
 ■/J ^> 
 
 v V 9] U 
 
 »Cf S en JO 
 
 <*— O Ci- >-i 
 
 •^ _► . — 
 
 - O ^ r» a) 
 
 s ^ « «) ? 
 
 & .» .£!":-> o 
 
 ^ "+«^ ^ ^ -«-^ 
 
 o 
 
 9 © 
 
 o Jq -Q 
 
 j* *». "•■• 
 
 CTj SS S3 
 
 ■v *» «* 
 
 >• Q> <^ 
 
 
 ^3 - > 
 
 G be s 
 
 -° -O J3 
 
 Boo 
 
 *^ *j ->-> 
 
 J3 e* ^* 
 ^^ *• ^* 
 
 ^ ** »** 
 
 S3 X* "rS 
 
 rt 
 
 A3 
 
 a. 
 
 i - 
 
 S 2 ^ 
 
 S^ bC O 
 
 *" /-, ^ 
 
 2^ o 
 
 « <>» 5- 
 
 
 S3 
 
 I I 
 
 -T bfl 
 
 S c 
 
 Q © 
 
 
 
 B B B 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 79 
 
 
 
 «■-» *^ 
 
 
 j^ 
 
 *** 
 
 j^ 
 
 — 
 
 «-» 
 
 
 
 
 ^* 
 
 ttt 
 
 
 2 si ^ 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 &. 
 
 <3i 
 .5 
 
 o 
 
 SS 
 
 *■* *^- *~* *~? 
 
 Vrf- ♦— 
 
 
 a 55 
 
 ^^ 
 
 <*^ 
 
 <*±— 
 
 1 fa 
 
 a .„ . ^ » j 
 
 <s 55 
 
 
 a a 
 
 «-» 
 
 a~ 
 
 U- 
 
 a. 
 
 t* -— » o 
 
 JO iO 
 
 
 jo jo 
 
 JO 
 
 «-^ 
 
 «sl 
 
 H 
 
 •<-► -^ j-> — 
 
 o <-» 
 
 
 '_* '-» 
 
 ft> 
 
 «-* 
 
 
 S U ^ }* 
 
 <3D <D 
 
 
 <X <3} 
 
 <3D 
 
 «^ 
 
 <-> 
 
 «* 
 
 -_. o <1* <«> 
 
 
 
 hi 
 
 
 
 «m 
 
 
 S-i s—^> 
 
 * * 
 
 
 >s 
 
 • 
 
 
 o «> 
 
 
 • • O S 
 
 • • 
 
 » 
 
 .?* • 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 • • » <>* 
 
 • • 
 
 
 — * a 55 
 
 • 
 
 
 c w *- 
 
 ► 
 
 ^s"vo 
 
 • 
 
 
 a JO JO . 
 
 JO 
 
 • 
 
 
 «* 
 
 
 
 •~ a 
 
 
 •- — >- 
 O O ^-^ O 
 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 6 
 
 6 6. 
 
 . o 
 o 
 
 
 6.66 
 
 d 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 3 
 
 "*- 55 !i3- ^^£3> 
 
 *5 '■' •— -r* 0i_ 
 
 *-> £J r>j •«» «S 
 
 •«-* ti ^a it- ^-» 
 
 »a.~ <•> <■**> 
 «s -^ "^ «■ 
 
 ■8 S3 3 
 
 w ^ ^ <3-> C* 
 
 }<*s T2 ""S* •<£ —■ 
 ; a ^-r*— a r: 
 
 3 
 
 
 vO 
 
 g 
 
 /=> 
 
 a- 
 
 s 
 
 jo Si 
 
 *— • 
 
 jO «a s* ^» «_ 
 
 /W 
 
 %*> 
 
 «* 
 
 '-^ 
 
 £T ^* ^» ^ «-► 
 
 •55 
 
 '■"3 
 
 _ h» a a 
 
 
 
 
 
 *-^ ^ »-^ 
 
 •^•^ j» 
 
 /i» 
 
 •g JO JO^/O 
 
 
 *-> 
 
 
 
 <-> ** "-» <_> t_» 
 
 »^» .<«» 
 
 
 »** »^» 
 
 • •^ 
 
 •** 
 
 .** 
 
 ■♦*• 
 
 ••^ -^* ••-* -«^ 
 
 • ~— 
 
 
 I- !- '— 
 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 O o 
 
 
 O © O 
 
 
 o 
 
 o o 
 
 O 
 
 o o 
 
 6^ d 
 
 d 
 
 3 S3^ 6 
 >a*ii£La s 
 
 d 
 
 3 
 
 o3 o£) 
 
 3 
 
 j- 
 
 3 4 d . d 
 
 r* a <^ "i -w 
 
 -^ — ^, ^_, ^ 
 
 55 ^ ^ ;_» ^ 
 
 #o ^-v 
 
 *— 
 
 /^» O '_ jO « 
 
 JO 
 
 «* 
 
 <-> 
 
 O 
 
 t^ t* c* «^ 
 
 i- 
 
 « 
 
 _ :_► J_> h» 
 
 
 
 i- 
 
 
 S-i 
 
 ^e-e o 
 
 /=* 
 
 -g-io /o-e/=* 
 
 *e 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 <-» ^ *ci 'T^ '^ 
 
 - «— •*■* 
 
 
 -<*>* .«-* 
 
 »«■* 
 
 ■•* 
 
 •** 
 
 ■« — 
 
 
 - 
 
 o 
 
 &'a 
 -Zra 
 
 55 
 so 
 
 /o 
 
 JO 
 
 JO 
 
 s s 
 
 «5 
 
 
 55 55 ^' J& " 
 
 5 2 s i» 
 
 55 
 JO 
 
 s 
 
 
 '3 
 
 en 
 
 •a bD 
 
 <r> 
 
 ^3 »-< 
 
 J-H 
 
 . JB ^ 
 
 ■♦-i 
 
 
 o 
 
 -»5 
 
 
 
 *- 
 
 
 
 r+ ^- 
 
 ^> 
 
 
 
 «>» <» 
 
 . <*> 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 
 s 
 
 > 
 
 • — . 
 
 o 
 
 hi 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 hi 
 
 ,0) 
 
 © ^ 
 
 Q« 
 
 Q 
 
 «^ 55 
 
 5 '- a 
 
 
 "3 S 
 
 a, o 
 
 ^ o g 
 
 g o^ 
 be 2 
 
 O O *5 
 
 ^ o 
 
 O 55 55 +" .j? 
 
 a. 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 .« 
 
 a- a-g 
 
 55 55 £ 
 
 {5 ^ 
 
 C* •- 55 
 
 «- <D a 
 
 S ^55 
 
 .a- 55 '^ o 
 
 -- S^ c 
 
 ■a ^a-> ■ — k nj 
 a a a 
 
au 
 
 
 
 
 IRREGULAR 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 
 [BOOK I. 
 
 Past 
 articiple. 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 O 
 
 *• ^> »• ^^ 
 ^* <— \* a_fc 
 
 S* /* .5 ,o 
 
 Si S 
 
 Si Si 
 
 o o 
 
 Rh 
 
 ;_► 
 
 $^ 
 
 i-t *♦ *^ 
 
 <-. '-f '^, <L» 
 
 <_, s* 
 
 o '-» 
 
 Ct> 
 
 O 
 
 «^» <Si 
 
 «j *3D «D <S: 
 
 ♦3D <X) 
 
 •5D «D 
 
 
 
 
 It 
 
 
 !- 
 
 J- 
 
 ^ N ^ V 
 
 
 B 
 
 
 o «* 
 
 «* 
 
 • • • o 
 
 • o 
 
 •~ -~- 
 
 
 Ho 
 
 
 0r^«-> 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 -~> 
 
 
 (3 
 
 
 *■ t> 
 
 fc . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • » • 
 
 
 ■*-*«>» ^* .,0. 
 
 >j. fSi **> J—- <-» 
 
 C x* ** «* "* 
 
 
 
 <* 
 
 -"— 
 
 * * ' '<£_ 
 
 ^?i- 
 
 ^-^- v_^ 
 
 
 
 O <i* 
 
 d d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *J 
 
 ^ 
 
 a© °3 
 
 ^"^ d 
 
 ' 
 
 ; d 
 
 
 -4-> 
 
 o 
 
 •to 
 
 (■a 
 
 4 
 
 ^ 
 
 °<3 «** « 
 
 
 •/S .« .— «o 
 
 <+^<Ci- 
 
 • - • 
 
 o o 
 
 M-* 
 
 
 *— *■ 
 
 ^* <— o 
 
 ?->■_» 
 
 w <-* ^-^ ^* 
 
 w v^ 
 
 ^^ 1_» 
 
 
 
 *4-«* 
 
 
 '-* - — 
 
 <«^ ■«* -^^ -^* 
 
 •V-* >«^ 
 
 •o^ -<— » 
 
 
 •8S 
 
 d d 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 i— i 
 
 
 <-> 
 
 O C «* 
 
 d d 
 
 o • d «5 
 
 *-* ^* * B ^ ^ 
 
 
 ■ • 
 
 c o 
 
 
 
 .£3- ° 
 
 °3 -e o 
 
 
 si3- •^3' >£? •^3- 
 
 
 
 
 • ♦^ 
 
 ■•■* 
 
 • «** - — * 
 
 • ♦i^ •«-* ••■* »*^ 
 
 • *^ -*^ 
 
 • ^-* '*^ 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 ♦ , -^ -«-» 
 
 
 
 
 3>+ 
 
 ' g 
 
 
 
 js~ si 
 
 
 
 
 :%► 
 
 h 
 
 
 
 «j ■«-►•— >5i. 
 
 S-i 
 
 S3 
 
 HO 
 
 53 
 It" 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 «f wJ rt< '>? J> 
 
 trf ^> ^-» i-» 
 
 • 4-^ 
 
 * >* 
 
 ** 
 
 • cti. 
 
 *- ^— x ^£3- 
 
 o *- ^ <-» 
 O »±i- S3 
 
 ■S*>«>-^ S3 
 
 
 
 
 st'S 
 
 
 sc-tj «^ 
 
 5 
 
 ^: s v-^s 
 
 
 
 
 s. 
 
 •*A 
 
 gg ."? t2 i^ 
 
 *«£. 
 
 
 
 
 
 4-* 
 
 » 
 
 *■+ 4-^ — * *^ 
 
 *^ 
 
 S3 /» 
 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 A 
 
 A AAA 
 
 /s 
 
 /a - — 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 
 „G 
 
 
 
 
 G 
 
 
 
 H3 
 
 bD 
 
 J-, 
 
 O 
 
 
 fH 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 • i— i 
 
 a> 
 
 bo 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 * 
 
 t3 
 
 o 
 
 
 2 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 0) 
 
 CO 
 
 j3 
 
 
 4-1 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 ° . 3 = rt bo 
 
 G 5 
 * O 
 
 03 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 <*» 
 
 6* 
 
 CD 
 
 si o 
 
 o - o o 
 
 o ♦* 
 
 o is 
 
 *-> 
 
 
 s 
 
 "r* 
 
 ^T3 
 
 <3D ^ 
 
 
 £i *♦ 
 
 e 5 >■» 
 
 
 
 r3 
 
 **" *^ 
 
 <_> ri <-_^ o 
 
 S *~* 
 
 *-> <*► nj 
 
 
 
 
 « G 
 
 
 
 Si <^ 
 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 &) 
 
 b) © 
 
 »D»D»0»0 
 
 80«0 
 
 £> So 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 81 
 
 
 **■* 
 
 »* 
 
 
 
 '~» 
 
 •-• 
 
 •rfS-'— * CD cD 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 . .. 
 
 o 
 
 4& 
 o 
 
 
 — - 
 
 o 
 
 — <i <S — 
 
 
 
 Q* 
 
 te- 
 
 <xi 
 
 <*t 
 
 cr. 
 
 x> 
 
 «3i 
 
 >a 
 
 /a <*1 cd-S 
 
 cr. 
 
 JS 
 
 «» 
 
 '-. 
 
 <*► 
 
 c* 
 
 «rf 
 
 '— 
 
 6* 
 
 <-. «•» <^ «^ 
 
 <L-> 
 
 «* 
 
 «p 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 cr. 
 
 en 
 
 <SD 
 
 «j 
 
 CD CD CD CD 
 
 cr 
 
 CD 
 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 \\ 
 
 / — ^ 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 • 
 
 O 
 
 '^ N * 
 
 • 
 
 >-. 
 
 
 u 
 
 • • • • 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 <3D 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 • 
 
 . 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • • • • 
 
 
 «j 
 
 • 
 
 
 7*» 
 
 • 
 
 ^^; 
 
 
 ^^^ 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 -«_» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i* CTj «j 
 
 
 jM 
 
 <-> 
 
 
 C- 
 
 
 
 » — * 
 
 «3j 
 
 v - 
 
 
 *CD 
 
 
 u 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 u> 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 6 6^6 
 
 o Crf ,J- ,** 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 6 
 
 ■U4 
 
 d ^ d 
 °$ ^ d °^ 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 ir~ cd <-> ?"" 
 
 <-* 
 
 cc 
 
 
 CD 
 
 <)o 
 
 CD CD CD ^ 
 ^C *C "C "«> 
 
 4_> 
 
 ^Cl 
 
 cr. 
 
 W CD 
 
 «o 
 
 *^* •** 
 
 - — * 
 
 k«M* 
 
 *^^ 
 
 •^^ 
 
 •*-* 
 
 • *^ 
 
 -— »^J> *«-^ <—* 
 
 ••i^ 
 
 •^* 
 
 t. 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 >M 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 ^*— s 
 
 
 
 •a 
 
 CD 
 
 # 
 
 
 
 « • 
 
 
 
 1^ II 
 
 <*e2}sr<ff 
 
 • 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 5 « 
 
 d 
 
 ** 
 
 • 
 
 — 
 o 
 
 •A 
 
 • 
 •^ .Si « S 
 
 • 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 If 
 
 a£s 
 
 ,»■» 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 «3D 
 
 <35 
 
 CD CD CD ^ 
 
 «x t 
 
 ill 
 
 
 ^e-e^- 
 
 c 
 
 
 B 
 
 o-e 
 
 
 ^e 
 
 
 5 
 
 CD^J 
 
 •♦^ -*^ 
 
 ■*■► 
 
 -*■* 
 
 -«^ 
 
 •^^ 
 
 • ^^ 
 
 -^^ 
 
 •— • •— -— > «•> 
 
 ■♦* 
 
 •*" * 
 
 >-i 
 
 $1 
 
 
 
 •— *^^» 
 
 
 v\ — ^ 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 _ ■*-► 
 
 
 
 
 *tih 
 
 
 
 • -i— • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -<-► 
 
 
 •it . . 
 
 
 
 
 <£i 
 
 
 
 
 cr> 
 
 
 <-> 
 
 CD 
 
 4_» 
 
 'CD 
 
 
 o *»,£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . ^ k * . 
 
 
 
 t* - cd 
 
 t <* 
 
 
 
 
 >*-> 
 
 
 >**. 
 
 
 
 .2^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 r? *-» S» 
 
 "§ ' 
 
 ■u» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S) 
 
 •^» CD 
 
 CD 
 
 
 J-> «-* 
 
 #■* 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 SJ 
 
 3 
 
 • S3 •. • 
 
 •2* 
 
 
 *>* jO 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 /o 
 
 x> 
 
 A 
 
 x> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^C 
 
 
 
 -<-» 
 
 ■M 
 
 0> 
 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 -4-> 
 
 
 T3 
 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 i- 
 
 
 C 
 
 M ^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 -i-> 
 
 c2 
 
 
 cd 
 
 <^ ^^ C3 . * 
 
 ^3 
 
 
 
 to flow 
 to ask 
 
 > 
 
 cd 
 
 O 
 
 N 
 
 o 
 
 C 
 
 s 
 
 ©o 
 
 to 
 
 B 
 
 • ^-* 
 
 O 
 
 > 
 
 3d 
 o 
 
 s 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8 s ^ S 
 
 O r> ° 
 * 2 be 
 
 O 
 0) 
 O 
 
 0) 
 
 O Cd 
 
 
 
 <-* 
 
 05- 
 
 2 
 
 
 8 
 
 
 •5- Ms 
 
 <b# 
 
 "J* 
 
 ««5 
 
 «k» 
 
 ^> 
 
 «> 
 
 c* ^^ ^> c^ **•* 
 
 ^, f 
 
 -< ^* — 
 
 toife 
 
 to 
 
 
 © 
 
 © i 
 
 S 
 
 © 
 
 @©©S) 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
82 
 
 
 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 
 [book I. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 j 5 ^ 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 Q# 
 
 
 
 
 £ 
 
 
 1 « 
 
 ~ « S 
 <«* S .P 
 
 
 
 
 »^ 
 
 J^-e* 
 
 
 >v ** c 
 
 i?- 
 
 4-> CD 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 g^ s 
 
 
 ^cj 3 
 
 e 
 
 7Z 
 
 u £Z- 
 
 <SD <X) <X) 
 
 <R <3D 
 
 J3~J=?- 
 
 fti 
 
 «>> 
 
 <-, <-> 
 
 <rf «>> 
 
 <^ . <^ *^,. 
 
 <-. '^ 
 
 «-» <^» 
 
 CD 
 
 CD CD 
 
 <D «) 
 
 <5D <T) <Xs 
 
 «3D <*} 
 
 CD CD 
 
 
 ^— x 
 
 
 ^— ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 J-> 
 
 
 >-i 
 
 * • • 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 
 So 
 
 o • 
 
 tf> 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 6* 
 
 t c» 
 
 <-* 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 
 1 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 • ^. «h> • • • 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 v_^ 
 
 
 v —»' 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d d 
 
 o ^* 
 
 
 
 
 •to 
 
 S 
 
 • 
 
 d d 
 
 4 4 
 
 «-* o 
 
 ^«€* 
 
 4 4 
 ^ «? d 
 
 o o 5 
 
 4 4 £ s 
 
 ^-^«a: -tr 
 
 »cs .21.2 
 
 o 
 
 5Q 
 
 CD 
 
 
 CD <3:> <3D 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 .<-. «■* 
 
 -«— k •** 
 
 • ♦^ .fc^ -^^ 
 
 • •^ *^^ 
 
 • «^. .«^ •♦>* 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 >-> 
 
 
 
 a. 
 S 
 
 so 
 
 d 
 
 4 
 
 d d 
 
 ^1 
 
 
 4^ 
 
 ^ • d 
 
 
 u 
 
 {xc 
 
 "£ cs 
 
 ^. 
 
 ^ - - 
 
 
 1?* 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 <*cd 
 
 
 
 at, *■* 
 
 £*/— cd 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 *©*> 
 
 -e o-e 
 
 e^e^e «^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 •** 
 
 •4-ft W 
 
 • ^* ••-k 
 
 •** --^ .^* 
 
 .♦-* -~^ 
 
 • ** .^* .*^ 
 
 
 
 
 J5- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <-> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 J5 
 
 i* 
 
 
 
 >u» 
 
 4-> 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 •<S1 
 
 so 
 
 CD 
 
 cd 
 
 <•* 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 CS JS-^^ 
 
 tn 
 
 w 
 
 o 
 
 **. 
 
 
 
 &» 
 
 ^^^ i* 
 
 <D 
 
 is 
 
 
 •— 1, 
 
 y ^ 
 
 
 <-► . 
 
 t* ^ 
 
 Ih 
 
 ^3 
 
 ^fc 
 
 r»* y 
 
 M 
 
 
 
 iu o* 
 
 Ph 
 
 ►5 
 
 rft* 
 
 ■X2- <^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^ 
 >*■> 
 
 
 
 
 * jj 
 
 «C$,i^ 
 
 >*■» 
 
 
 s£> * 
 
 *■ ■~ — CD 
 
 
 
 ^*- 
 
 • . .<-► 
 
 6* 
 
 
 »><s 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 "Si 
 
 4 
 
 CD 
 
 CJ w<Ji t><i 
 
 
 
 ;_> 
 
 3 -y> 
 
 j-> 
 
 
 » . 
 
 *^ -^ w 
 
 ^^ ^H ^o 
 
 
 
 «»» 
 
 >o «> 
 
 <-► 
 
 
 A 
 
 AAA 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 O 3 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 *j 
 
 ■«-> . — 
 
 -»-> 
 
 ■p 
 
 
 
 
 
 o . 
 
 Oh =0 
 
 O, 
 
 .S o 
 
 5 § 
 
 
 
 
 
 >> 
 
 
 cti -^ 
 
 £ -a 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 'a? 
 
 o 
 
 .ts 9s 
 o 
 
 -4-> 
 
 J— 
 
 3 § 
 
 Oh 
 
 qj id -a 
 
 en ^ to 
 
 o .a 
 
 2 2 ^ ^ 
 
 • ^4 
 
 bo 5 
 
 '^ o 
 o * 
 
 bD 
 
 L- i— i CS 
 
 o o +* 
 
 
 <** 
 
 
 *• — *^ a 
 
 o S s s 
 
 ■ - • - S a 
 ^r Ji ^ bo 
 
 « ? CL 
 
 "^-f ^ CO 
 
 ss *- ^* 
 g^ •>-» CD 
 
 "cj ^5 5 
 
 
 
 © 
 
 ©S) 
 
 © © 
 
 ©S)© 
 
 ©0 
 
 tp-^tQ' 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 83 
 
 n 
 
 ft 
 
 ^> 
 
 '-* 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 o 
 
 <* 
 
 6* 
 
 «i <3D 
 
 8 « 
 
 <«► o 
 
 
 £ si 
 
 ft* Si 
 
 ft 
 ft* 
 
 
 ft •!-> ft> ~ 
 
 -, ** 
 
 s 
 
 <u 
 
 u— ~ Xr ft 
 <i— ~ o o 
 
 Sitr 
 
 a 
 
 ~ 
 
 
 . .— 
 
 •o 
 
 O 
 
 J_ *«_► it* CU» 
 
 ■j-> a-> 
 
 <St* 
 
 a- 
 
 ^ «-. c« '-» 
 
 «* ft* 
 
 ft* 
 
 '-. 
 
 <X> <Tj <Z) <Tj 
 
 <X> <35 
 
 <3D 
 
 <X> 
 
 o 
 
 ft 
 
 itr^* 
 
 - 
 o 
 
 - - 
 o o 
 
 •§ -8 «, | •* J «$ 
 
 o 
 
 ft* «» 
 
 o 
 
 eg 
 
 .ft* 
 
 iw 
 
 o 
 
 2 «2«8 
 
 2 1 - 
 
 d SI <£** 
 
 3 
 
 *3 
 
 ■it* 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 ■a- 
 
 O 
 
 . O 
 
 — 
 
 o 
 
 
 ^-v. it* iU it- 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 £ <*$$ 
 
 o 
 
 • ■— -►UW ■*•* <5 
 4* '-* it* 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <4-> 
 
 si 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 ►** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 si 
 
 4* 
 
 
 ^T 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 
 
 it- 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 
 j=j- 
 
 
 
 
 t-» 
 
 ^k 
 
 
 m 
 
 
 . i* 
 
 
 
 
 
 rfa* 
 
 
 >=> . 
 
 
 «* 
 
 
 
 
 r*-» 
 
 si 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 • «£ 
 
 
 
 
 si 
 
 si 
 
 
 s=T^ 
 
 
 <Z- 
 
 
 
 
 si 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <— • 
 
 J-. 
 
 
 v fS <-» 
 
 
 •J5- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 it* s 
 
 
 • «■» 
 
 
 
 
 ** 
 
 jS 
 
 4 
 
 •g'au 
 
 
 jO 
 
 
 
 
 /^ 
 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 s ° 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 J « 
 
 a, 
 
 W3 
 
 "O O 4)7| 
 
 3 a 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 T3 ^ 
 
 ed 
 
 •2 C — ' ° 
 
 o -5 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 Q) 
 
 J8.S 
 
 X3 rC 
 
 <n-5 
 
 ^■Zts 
 
 5 o 
 
 o 
 
 — 
 
 
 
 X2 
 O 
 
 2 o 
 
 © 5 
 
 o 
 
 o « -^ j. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -SiE 
 
 ♦5L<E- 
 
 A* b* 
 
 ft* 
 
 - « SS 2J 
 
 si S S si 
 
 **- -T* - si 
 
 _-~ — '-* S- 
 
 ss «»► 
 
 ft* 
 
 S 
 S 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 ** 
 ^* 
 
 <p^ 
 
 <r^»i-> 
 
 «n 
 
 ^(^(ss;^ 
 
 ^^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 s*s 
 
84 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 BOOK 
 
 I 
 
 *•+ 
 
 
 
 
 «*» 
 
 <^< 
 
 ^ 
 
 /S* 
 
 <2 
 
 
 « 
 
 s 
 
 *4 
 
 
 «* 
 
 ^> 
 
 <3i <35 
 
 c/j "ea 1 
 
 o 
 
 
 <35 
 
 <3D 
 
 5$ 
 
 ^ ^* j5 
 
 *-» ^»> JT"" 
 
 • ■— .«- <*> 
 
 fe* <•» «»► 
 
 <X) <33 «3D 
 
 
 So 
 
 Si 
 
 
 
 J-4 
 
 o 
 
 ** JO 
 
 c 
 
 J-H 
 
 CD 
 
 a. 
 
 so 
 5Q 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 
 •3 
 
 JO 
 
 6 
 4 
 
 o 
 4 
 
 
 • • 
 
 o o 
 
 *8^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 w^^ ..^> «-^2* *^* w^* 
 
 u u w t- Ti 
 
 O 
 
 <3 
 
 
 a 
 
 •co 
 so 
 
 ^ 
 
 o 
 
 /o 
 
 Si 
 
 
 
 o o S o 
 
 <3 og^og 
 
 -«-► «^ 2* 
 
 o o 
 
 ^*e ^e-e 
 
 o 
 
 JO 
 
 • — 
 
 s 
 
 1=1 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 ■— 
 
 io 
 
 ■fl 
 
 op 
 
 ■S 1 
 
 JO 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 iO 
 
 
 «^ ^* ^ 
 
 JO 
 JO 
 
 *£ 
 
 JO /o 
 
 
 •-i 
 O 
 
 &Z? 
 
 f^ <-f 
 
 
 JO 
 
 
 &. 
 
 • 
 
 CD 
 
 ft 
 
 CD 
 
 ■*o 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 «^ 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 •*. 
 
 
 --> 
 
 
 •«■* 
 
 
 j-> 
 
 
 (^ 
 
 T3 
 O 
 
 o o 
 
 +5 -^ 
 
 a 
 d 
 
 3 ^ S 
 
 en ' cd 
 O »-i 
 
 O 
 
 O 2 
 
 CD 
 
 I o 
 
 CD CD*" 
 
 S ~ "O 
 
 oog 
 
 ^ w o 
 
 JO 
 
 
 
 <^ <-> — 
 JO Xf- £ 
 
 <^ <^ *> 
 
 v^V w»* v*V 
 
 
 •g o 
 
 bfl 
 
 03 
 
 5 Q 
 
 S g to 
 
 « « 
 
 - JO 
 
 6 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 85 
 
 ^ CD 
 
 
 •— 
 
 
 
 1= 6 
 
 
 _ *j ►* CD 
 
 ^: «iL cd ^— 
 
 o 
 
 o ,_ 
 
 
 '-. 
 
 
 v»— o 
 
 
 r o 
 
 
 cs »^_ ) 5i- i* u, ^ 
 
 jj 
 
 £ 6 
 
 B 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 cr- 
 
 cd 
 
 
 CD 
 o 
 
 
 C CD 
 
 CD CD 
 
 
 CD CD CD CD 
 
 CD 
 
 j-i 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 ■j 
 
 
 i « • • 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 
 >^^^' 
 
 
 
 
 '**—*' 
 
 r-> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 /■_» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 <-» 
 
 
 
 '-* 
 
 
 
 
 ♦—* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 5* 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 5 j& 
 
 
 » • • • 
 
 3^" 
 
 o ^^ 
 
 ^T* d 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 d . 
 
 ^ «- CD ^ 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 £L 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 J3> 
 
 
 
 C CD- ^* 
 
 
 «o ^_ 
 
 
 n 
 
 
 ._ «o 
 
 
 •« 
 
 
 
 u— »-♦*■ ~> 
 
 » 
 
 n 3 
 
 
 
 »■* j5 
 
 
 #■*■ 
 
 
 
 a--~^-—,a- 
 
 CJ^ 
 
 «~* #•*- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 >_ 
 
 
 ■^ S* 
 
 
 •— * 
 
 
 <-» <-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 e-e o^g- 
 
 ■e 
 
 
 
 >«■* 
 
 
 • «^ -«* 
 
 
 **^ 
 
 
 
 »** • — • **i^ 
 
 ■ *- — 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 
 d o 
 
 
 
 
 C 
 
 d 
 
 
 J? 
 
 
 d 
 
 «3 
 
 
 
 
 1 £ 
 
 
 
 i o 
 
 • - is} ° 
 
 ► ^ CD CD ^ 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 
 3 O 
 
 £ 
 
 1 s 
 
 F JEr- 
 
 
 
 » ^ *2 ° •>£> 
 
 
 — . * -^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 J« 
 
 
 
 *- 
 #■ 
 
 : »- ^-s»- 
 
 cr 
 
 .» s 
 
 
 .*~> 
 
 
 *^T . ^7~ 
 
 
 > . ^> 
 
 
 *- 
 
 ^ ^i? o-S" 
 
 ^ 
 
 <_» ' 
 
 
 ■_^ 
 
 
 *w -w 
 
 c 
 
 • <_* 
 
 
 ■- 
 
 » ^.^ <-^ w <«. 
 
 v^» 
 
 »•* 
 
 
 • •^ 
 
 
 .«* ■ — * 
 
 -*- 
 
 * -^— 
 
 
 
 * ■•* *^* ■•^ 
 
 *■ 
 
 3-1 , — » 
 
 
 ^> 
 
 
 •n en cc= 
 
 
 r*— f^J 
 
 
 ~ * *>+ ++ ++ — t 
 
 s 
 
 c 
 
 e 
 
 S c 
 
 a 
 
 iO .w .— . 
 
 CD fafl 
 
 C3 .-. (V) 
 
 ^= CO fcb 
 
 .22 ^ « -a 
 
 O -Q -^ CD 
 o ^ ^ 
 
 <4— CD— 1 ST 
 
 '■° > O "S" 
 
 CD 
 
 a 
 
 CD 
 
 s 
 
 o 
 
 S> 
 
 CD 
 
 
 § § 
 
 
 0) ^3 
 
 
 
 
 ai 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 fcfl's 
 
 S 
 
 crt 
 
 to s- 
 
 •a cd 
 
 
 
 E^ 
 
 C 
 
 o 
 
 ft. ^ ° 
 ^2 2 
 
 o 
 
 
 w o 
 
 » 
 
 •~. •« 
 
 ^. 
 
 
 .-= 
 
 S 
 
 s s 
 
 --» 
 
 CD 
 
 — CO 
 
 ~ 
 
 <*— CD 
 
 
 cd 
 
 w bD 
 
 
 
 — 
 
 — 
 
 o C 
 
 S) ^) ^"CT* fe^ 
 
 8 
 
 Q 
 
SG 
 
 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^*o 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 ho .a- 
 
 <-t 
 
 -Sss?« 55H « 
 
 
 
 
 *"" <"^— .»- Cat ^"* ^^ ' **» #»^> «*■•* f_^A 
 
 
 
 e 
 
 » o 
 
 •<3 u. :_» :_ :-» :-> }-• t-> u. i-f 
 
 
 Oi 
 
 «i» > — ' 
 
 ;_, ^ -._ <_ c-. ^» •_ c c»> «■* 
 
 z* «^ 
 
 «30 
 
 «} *33 00 <X> <*D 00 00 00 00 
 
 «3 <3D 
 
 
 to 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 • • 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 • • 
 
 
 
 6 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 a3 o 
 
 • • • 
 
 
 
 Si 
 
 to 
 u 
 K 
 
 3 
 
 *«3 
 
 <s> ** ^ ^ ^* **%* 
 
 <-> <.> c^- •«_► i* ^ ~ s o 
 
 S 
 
 
 JS 
 
 
 .** -— ■•_> ■«-> oO «f5 "'i ~- ■ <-* 
 
 uO »0 
 
 +■! 
 
 SO 
 
 ^— v 
 
 <-* •— • «-* «^ «^ •— * •.* ^^ ^* 
 
 * ^ *.*— 
 
 o 
 
 ^ 
 
 !m 
 
 *-v *-. <*< 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 >g o 
 
 *_» <— < «U» <_• • »_» •_ '— < *^ *— ' 
 
 
 
 
 ••!-* 
 
 -^^ •♦.* **^ - ^^ -^^ -^* ••^ •*■* 
 
 -*— . -^^ 
 
 
 • 
 
 " ^~N »-< 
 
 Ih 
 
 O-, 
 
 
 o 
 
 % 6 ° 
 
 O 
 
 a 
 
 SO 
 
 •a 
 
 # 
 
 * 08 . ^ 
 
 *->* 
 
 
 to 
 
 J- o 
 
 ^JjI'Sp^ ^J 
 
 6 
 
 1 -a* 
 
 
 1?* 
 
 
 
 
 «-* 
 
 t*^^t^ ^t^^t* **— 
 
 '-^- ^..— iT3 
 
 
 
 
 55 
 
 .0 ^3- ,** 
 
 
 
 • .-^ 
 
 .«■* •♦.* • «^ • ^* -^^ *^-» **^ - *i^ »*^ 
 
 ■ *~* **" — 
 
 -*-j 
 
 w 
 a 
 
 
 s£> .... ... 
 
 ,-«-» 
 
 U— 
 
 r— 
 
 •<•* 
 
 
 "tS 
 
 ^^ 
 
 03 
 
 to 
 
 
 j^. . . . . ... 
 
 t2_ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 0H 
 
 2» 
 
 
 •• 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 "ii. .... ... . 
 
 «ti . . . . . .» . 
 
 _ . • . . ... a 
 
 
 
 
 a, 
 
 ^^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 1-1 
 
 t2^ 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 "£ S 
 
 i 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 1 
 
 • 
 
 S3 
 
 ' (TO 
 
 "to 
 •ea 
 
 a 
 
 bo 
 C 
 
 *•* 
 
 « — ^ 2 
 
 to •»* 
 
 to s 
 
 s 2 s 
 
 j 
 
 
 tr«C 
 
 TS <»* c* «rf <i* -— . •— •— ^~^ •* 
 
 5 S «ri 
 
 j 
 
 
 e 
 
 rSwww www w 
 
 © t$ 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 ,ft* 
 
 it- 
 
 ft* 
 
 ft* 
 
 — » 
 
 ft* 
 
 ft* 
 
 O 
 
 ft* 
 
 ft* 
 ** fc 
 
 o 
 
 C 5* 
 
 C ft* 
 
 <^-_CD 
 
 »* 
 
 *^ *^ 
 
 ft* r* 
 
 
 
 *-> 
 
 . **^ 
 
 . ^"> 
 
 . **-?» 
 
 . *-> 
 
 *-^s 
 
 *»> „ ^-> 
 
 ^-C-" - ^"* N 
 
 •*£* ,rv 
 
 e 
 
 s£? 
 
 
 
 
 <— » 
 
 "C ■ 
 
 
 *— > ■— • 
 
 ■-*■ u» 
 
 
 (_• 
 
 
 
 
 
 * ». 
 
 * ^ 
 
 * .» * r- 
 
 *<■ *^ 
 
 * » * m 
 
 * , 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 cd 
 
 <3S 
 
 cD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD CD 
 
 CD CD 
 
 rr, «> 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 x-v ° 
 
 ft* 
 
 *-* *■* l_k 
 
 _ .j— erf 
 ft* «^ ■ — 
 
 O 
 
 ^* *~ 
 
 .— ft* 
 
 6 6 <i °, 
 
 £* w S *» 
 
 — 
 O 
 
 ft* 
 
 *"ft* 
 
 -8 
 
 ** 
 
 ft* 
 
 V* 
 
 O 
 08 
 
 t) O o o 
 
 i o o 
 
 9 o 
 
 j .8 «3 «§ .8 «8 3 "8.8 
 
 *~ -.*■ ** ~^ «- «* .?* 
 s aj.io £ <*- cd ;p 
 «-» ^* «> v _» <-* 
 
 o 
 
 ■8 
 
 ■""c* Ti <_» 
 
 ^if-er 
 
 4 
 
 *- »** 
 
 — .— .— «o 
 
 w — -» , ~ ft* ft* ^r ^ — ^ — - •— *-, •— »ii •— • ■— •— «ft* 
 ♦V *^ c» t y* >^* > '-> *£* ■*£ X ""Ci ~^f .~ *\i *C t < -' ^C? *C* *C 
 
 o 
 
 d o « 8 
 u^w *J**o 
 
 1*^^— * -L-* ft* 
 w ft* .^~ ■•"^ 
 
 .*•> , **^ ,ft* *-N 
 
 s 6 
 
 «8 08 
 
 .s « 
 
 o 
 
 «3 
 
 o 
 
 
 O O 
 
 0) 
 
 ■*-> 
 cd 
 
 S3 
 .0 
 
 ft* 
 
 0) T3 
 
 a, 
 
 0) 
 
 ca 
 
 Oh 
 
 S s 
 
 CO 
 
 Uh 
 
 £; 
 
 
 ed 
 
 O w 
 
 /-s 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 *-> 
 
 ctf 
 
 a> 
 
 *c 
 
 cc 
 
 *G 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 
 a, 
 
 
 <+^ CD 
 
 «^S«CJ 
 
 JO iC* 
 
 
 
 ^ TS 
 
 
 cd 
 
 ctf C3 
 
 •*-> 
 
 Dh W 
 
 QJ .S 
 
 2 ^ 
 
 cu -Q 
 
 C fr, 
 
 O CS 
 
 
 
 X kfl 
 
 fC qs 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 CO Q 
 
 O © 
 
 o2 
 
 O *" 
 
 -^ -is 
 
 CO 
 
 ^* *-' 5i *i ft* Hi *- 
 
 *-* ft* * ~ ft* *■ c* 
 
 *^ - "^ co *§■ O **^ 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 "8. M 
 
 co 
 
 *^ *— — * » ^ "" *■ ~ «-*^ *^ ft* *— — S JS 
 
 CU 
 
 3 
 
 wO 
 
 - .ifi ■-»•—** .— ft* ^ 
 
 c* cj .— ft* «^ ;- «^» ^j .-* "Tt 
 
 co ""S" 'S "^ ■'S' "k ^S" — 
 
 *-* Q C— S CS CJ • — ft* ft* ctf ft* ■»-> 
 
 ©® ® ® © © © ®® ®® ©© © (S) 
 
88 
 
 
 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS 
 
 
 [book I. 
 
 
 CD 
 
 ^ 
 
 •3 £± 0* <- — s 
 
 *^ •"* Ji ^* 
 
 Tr* -?* ir* V s- * 
 •L* <^ -u-» 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 a 
 
 .8-8 
 
 £ 2 "8 S « 
 
 n ^ u s 
 
 '& 
 
 g 
 
 
 .-> <_><_» r* 
 
 t> ^-^ »~ . <-> ^-» ^_^ i-t 
 
 '^~ *^.~ ^~> ^-> 
 - <_, <^ ^— > 
 
 ~c 
 
 '™* ^~> -^ 
 
 rt <_ «■• 
 
 * m 
 
 «~ '» * . *•* 
 
 c< t "^i >^ <-* h; ^ 
 
 
 
 cJ- *— ** 
 
 A, 
 
 '~* 
 
 &»• <-> «* »^o CD O *--— «» "35 O •«. 
 
 - -— -i> '— --» 
 
 <^> 
 
 CD c-. — ► 
 
 CD 
 
 CD CD 
 
 v_^ CTjn_^ 
 
 CTj CD <3j <SD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 
 "to 
 
 
 
 • ■ • 
 
 
 
 
 
 Q 
 
 
 «-*5 
 
 «*5 
 
 
 
 
 
 j„ 
 
 
 • "»■» 
 
 r • • • 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . C 
 
 ^^^ * * * 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 *" »*" -< **""*» 
 
 
 
 
 
 •<o 
 to 
 
 8 
 
 O 
 
 2> 
 
 6 6 
 
 "^» "° erf -°3 
 
 ^s- y -— i* *w «c> 
 
 . d c>' 
 
 w» ^ ^ %* 
 
 m <t* X^ vO 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 O 
 6* 
 
 
 lS> 
 
 di 
 
 8 8 
 
 t y '- 1 '2 5 ?t 
 
 * t • v » ^ C*^ 
 
 £ 
 
 & 
 
 
 a 
 
 o. 
 
 sC* «£> 
 
 "' sJP "^ >'-' 
 
 ^ ^"> , ^-> ^^-> ^*>> 
 
 -fcf> 
 
 ■C*" 
 
 
 5Q 
 
 w 
 
 '— ' *— » 
 
 • • "— » <** ^™~ 
 
 V-* %- • v^ %-* 
 
 ^—* 
 
 
 -i-> 
 
 
 
 O O <^,il fcn 
 
 
 
 *^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 c 
 
 •^^e 
 
 •^^ 4 -e^e^ 
 
 ■— '— ' "^ '^» 
 
 
 
 J- 
 03 
 
 
 • *»^ 
 
 •«t» •*— ► 
 
 .«■* >«-* « #^ 
 
 • ^* • »•* ■•-* -•<* 
 
 **^ 
 
 * *■* 
 
 
 
 
 ^ *" -! 
 
 
 
 
 Cl, 
 
 
 
 
 «>*>»& 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 i— i 
 
 •<o 
 •to 
 
 d 
 
 CD 
 
 c^4 
 
 2 2 .4 
 
 2 Ct. «3 - ^. 
 
 0* • 
 
 d 
 
 CD 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 *w 
 
 
 -.- 
 
 5. fcT .i 5 ^ 
 
 ^-0 s ^e 
 
 <U» <i* •«-» O 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 *§ 
 
 5 
 
 8 8 
 
 "S'S'S s 
 
 'g 
 
 S 
 
 
 3 
 
 £. 
 
 
 
 O *^-> .'-* Vrf 
 
 
 
 
 
 » j > j 
 
 O O Ci-^^-^ 
 
 
 - m 
 
 '■^ 
 
 
 
 *e 
 
 -e^e 
 
 •^ o3 "^ -g" *g- O 
 
 xi v-> <- > <~* 
 
 
 .^S 1 
 
 
 
 •*^ 
 
 > «-^ > «—* 
 
 >•■* >«^ • «—* 
 
 ■ «M* •*■* -^* «^* 
 
 •*-k 
 
 **"^ 
 
 
 
 
 <4-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 . ♦*» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^J* 
 
 
 
 
 4-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • *•• 
 
 
 
 
 >«irt 
 
 
 
 
 ^3" 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■u 
 
 s> 
 
 
 i* 
 
 ' 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 "<S> 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 03 
 
 to 
 
 
 f*-» 
 
 
 
 
 t: 
 
 <x> 
 
 
 
 . *> 
 
 
 
 
 *k 
 
 
 is 
 
 
 • 8 
 "Si 
 
 • ^* 
 
 t 
 
 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 -t-> 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 a 
 
 S 
 
 • •■* 
 
 In 
 
 O ^ 
 
 -5 a 
 
 0* § " 
 
 03 0) 2 
 
 (1) 
 
 • l-H 
 
 CO 
 
 en 
 
 
 "to 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 2 22 
 
 ° 2 
 ^ o2 
 
 •i* <-► -1^ ^* 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 "cD 
 
 
 
 CP ,^- 
 
 «- CD 
 3 .— 
 
 *-* 
 
 
 
 J^ 
 
 «-» ^» 
 
 e+ 'T* *~* 
 
 .^- .~^-» .— </<^ 
 
 CL <-► 
 
 o» 
 
 
 
 • <-* 
 
 c c 
 
 *3i ^* f^ 
 
 •:-> <^» ^-» <_j 
 
 CL » 
 
 g 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ *-* 
 
 *-^ *-• J-» 
 
 J-» ?-► J-» 5i 
 
 r-l "" 
 
 
 
 
 s f*> 
 
 ^,*"> x ft* 
 
 ^r-p* '■.f7 s JP* 
 
 •^5" -^"^ „f7* ^ 
 
 —> . «^N 
 
 -% 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 •— » ■— * 
 
 *-* CS ^3 
 
 'w> <_*<—»<—> 
 
 J. w 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 ®® 
 
 © ®® 
 
 ®®®@ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ® 
 
PARI' II. CII. 6.] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 89 
 
 
 
 
 it jj 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 
 cd ?* 
 
 S3 o 
 
 ♦^ 
 
 4-* 
 
 ■*-* £* 
 
 si •-* j3 
 '-^ ^ '-^ 
 
 _. 
 
 w 
 
 & - 
 
 g 
 
 
 S B 
 
 <-> 
 
 
 >=» £ 
 
 cdo-> .r* 
 
 >7* 
 
 m 
 
 , *--> *^ 
 
 
 £3 
 
 <—. «■» <-» 
 
 .<** 
 
 g 
 
 ►** ° 
 
 5 5 o 
 
 » j 
 
 £- 
 
 
 
 
 
 > J 
 
 
 
 * i^ 
 
 
 ■^. S3 
 
 c* 
 
 /-» 
 
 C <*» ««► 
 
 <-. 
 
 o 
 
 •^ -^ 
 
 '.-*■+'— 
 
 w 
 
 '_» 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 
 cd cd 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 cd cd 
 
 CD <5D CD 
 
 cd 
 
 CD 
 
 
 o • J - 
 
 
 ■8 
 
 /J 
 
 o 
 
 V CD 
 
 o o 
 
 s "s? ? s $ 
 
 a 
 
 
 «o 
 
 » g ~ 
 
 
 «-CS 
 
 g O 
 
 5 ° ° S d 
 
 - - eg** 
 
 70 ~ ~ S3 7L >""j. 
 
 j& -i- *» 
 
 
 w w » u C ~ >■' %i ^^ 
 
 o o 
 
 $4 
 
 S3 S 
 
 g 2 
 
 -g- © 
 
 JO 
 
 CD 
 
 
 o 
 d °^ . 
 °^ ," S °* o o 
 
 *-» >o -t-T 
 
 ii> ~i> -*-» ct.cj-, 5; 
 
 
 ^^ ^■*- ^-* l^» *— . *^* ^ *-^ •«* '.^ *«^ 
 
 
 
 ££ 
 
 
 ^> .^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 +j 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 en 
 
 C 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 ^J 
 
 
 
 «3 
 
 o 
 
 c3 
 
 > 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 0) 
 CO 
 
 
 
 C 7Z 
 
 
 
 3 
 o ^ 
 
 ^* 
 
 -»j 
 
 •♦-> 
 
 O 
 
 CI) 
 
 
 O o 
 
 
 
 *j O o- 
 
 J5 
 
 «*. 
 
 ^. 
 
 ■*-" 
 
 o 
 
 
 cc ^ 
 
 m cc o 
 
 
 •55 -2 cc 
 
 g 
 
 
 *-• 
 CD 
 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 -a 
 
 o 
 
 2 2 
 
 *>* 
 
 S ^ «^ 
 
 
 O © O 
 
 ^3 +J *-• 
 
 ~ s s 
 
 fi 
 
 & 
 
 g 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 JO 
 
 cd5-. -T" 
 
 o 
 
 e*s"t^ •— • 
 
 
 S 
 
 <-. 
 
 
 •^* 
 
 o 
 
 S3 ^* 
 
 3 s » 
 
 £ 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 © 
 
 © 
 
 ^ 
 
 ® 
 
 ® 
 
 ®® 
 
 ®®$ 
 
 
 ®^® 
 
 8 
 
90 
 
 
 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 [ 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 hS 
 
 *-» 
 
 « 
 
 
 
 «_» 
 
 
 
 rs 
 
 o «-» 
 
 *^-# 
 
 ft* ~- - 
 
 ♦-► 
 
 
 4— > *^ *** 
 
 
 Past 
 artici]. 
 
 our 
 
 o 
 
 £LcD 
 
 * ^ «— • 
 
 » 
 
 CM 
 
 
 
 
 .i: 
 
 »2 
 
 "i±- 
 
 
 d* «*► 
 
 ft* 
 
 O -L-* 
 
 «m 
 
 &* 
 
 <_, o» &« 
 
 v 
 
 
 
 1 CD CD 
 
 CD 
 
 <X) 00 
 
 CD 
 
 CD 
 
 CD CD CD 
 
 CD 
 
 
 
 
 Ih 
 
 • • 
 
 h* 
 
 • 
 
 ^ . — ^ . ^ 
 
 , J . 
 
 
 tJ 
 
 
 o *, 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 O 8 O 
 
 8 
 
 
 e 
 
 
 
 
 , *—^' ^^*N. 
 
 
 — ^/=> — « 
 
 jO 
 
 
 |4 
 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 • 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 »£t 
 
 A 
 
 r^* ~^~ 
 
 # 
 
 
 l*g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -» — ». 
 
 h 
 
 >H 
 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 t- 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 S3 
 •to 
 
 s 
 
 2Q 
 
 set. 
 
 o 
 
 1^ 
 
 «o »C5 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 08 
 
 d d 
 
 d 
 
 •** 
 
 Jo 
 
 <£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 •e 
 
 l-i 
 03 
 
 
 •*•* • •«* 
 
 •^* 
 
 • *^ »*^ 
 
 •*^ »*i^ 
 
 • *^ 
 
 • <-* »^* »^^ 
 
 •«H* 
 
 
 
 
 
 sq-> 
 
 U 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 CL, 
 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 O 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 S3 
 So 
 
 e 
 
 g • 
 
 d 
 
 ci 
 
 «$ 
 
 d ^T 
 
 •8 2 
 ■e *b 
 
 ^S_ fit. 
 
 d 
 .0 
 
 «3 • 
 
 8 O *^~ *""~ 
 
 d 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 1| »^> ^-> 
 
 i£3> 
 
 ^> *2^ 
 
 . ^~> . ^":^ 
 
 ■«C' 
 
 r*-^ . * p> > H-* .,*-> ^ *^> 
 
 >^J- 
 
 
 
 %-» •-» 
 
 w 
 
 *— • «-^ 
 
 ■— * '— • 
 
 v> 
 
 *■" <-» *~ <-> <-» 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■ •^ 
 
 
 
 
 +-* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 , ^"> 
 
 
 
 
 >b» 
 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 <^_^ 
 
 
 +j 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 a 
 
 •co 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ri-. -j— 
 
 
 
 so 
 
 
 ;-t 
 
 
 cE 
 
 
 *~" . f*-» 
 
 
 CO 
 
 u 
 
 
 <*• 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 "8 
 
 
 •** 
 
 
 Oil 
 
 
 3§ .*t 
 
 J3> si> 
 
 
 
 
 
 $-> 
 
 
 
 '— J- 
 
 
 
 
 
 t g». 
 
 
 ■♦•* 
 
 
 ■ «^ • *»*■ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 fji. 
 
 
 »y >*» 
 
 
 
 
 
 St 
 
 
 — • 
 
 
 8 • 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 i» 
 
 
 A 
 
 
 /=» JO 
 
 
 
 
 ■o 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 -»-» 
 
 
 •H 
 
 *j 
 
 
 
 ♦j 
 
 
 
 c* 
 
 
 
 •\ 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 i 
 
 «5 
 
 ■ in * 
 
 a, 
 
 m o 
 
 o ** 
 
 ^ u V 
 
 0) 
 
 CO 
 
 
 
 2 S- 
 
 5.CO 
 
 CO 
 
 « s 
 
 fcXI 
 
 a 
 
 •a M 
 
 O M 
 ** O 
 
 T3 
 
 .<— > 
 
 CO 
 
 O 
 
 en, to steal 
 
 en, to ascend 
 en, to die 
 
 GO 
 
 S 
 O 
 
 
 
 ■£• ."i* ca 
 
 *S" 
 
 55 Q-,^ d 'Ji* 
 
 <i* 
 
 tr 1 cd 1 ^ 
 
 •^> tJ 
 
 
 
 55 '-. o 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 
 4-» 4-» 4-» 
 
 tl CO 
 
 
 
 ®® 
 
 ® 
 
 ®® 
 
 S © 
 
 ® 
 
 ^ ®® 
 
 ® 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 91 
 
 S3 ~ 
 -3"* Si 5* 
 
 «« 
 
 
 
 J- S3 
 
 
 «-* 
 
 
 S3 
 «^» 
 
 _CO 
 
 *^ 
 
 S3^.H 
 
 S3 o u» 
 
 rj-» r*-» r*-> 
 
 ■M 
 
 -t-» 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 v CO 
 
 a- 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■<-► 
 
 
 ±-> •<_» 
 
 *-+ -U-. 
 
 -I-. 
 
 -u* 
 
 
 5^ 
 
 Crf «>* W 
 
 O 
 
 <^ 
 
 
 '-* '— . 
 
 '-^ '-^ 
 
 «k> 
 
 «M 
 
 <i» 
 
 a* 
 
 «5<X<35 
 
 CO 
 
 co 
 
 
 CD CO 
 
 co co 
 
 co 
 
 CO 
 
 ;> 
 
 » 
 
 a • • 
 
 
 
 
 • J- ■ — ■ 
 
 • !- ^ — ■ 
 
 . 
 
 
 >v /"-^\ »» 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 O =3 
 — -/a 
 
 O S3 
 
 . 
 
 
 *-» S3 
 
 co^ ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <£ 
 
 <4* 
 
 4-» 
 
 
 
 .^ co^» ii 
 
 • . . 
 
 
 
 
 • Cfcr <^ 
 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 
 -> 0^s> 
 
 • • . 
 
 
 
 
 . -u* 
 
 • -<-» 
 
 . 
 
 
 ^5S> 
 
 >N - X 
 
 o • d 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 d 
 
 • • 
 
 o o 
 
 d 
 
 
 4 
 
 o 
 
 eg 
 
 
 
 
 
 6* 
 
 
 
 4-» 
 
 
 
 CR«SI- 
 
 ^ £S 
 
 «5 
 
 j- 
 
 
 ^o 
 
 H-» i** r*-* 
 
 .U 
 
 
 
 cS3 »ct 
 
 4-» J_> 
 
 
 
 *CJ 
 
 
 
 sC-s3--J3- 
 
 » .-> 
 
 t .■-> 
 
 
 <kp £2- 
 
 t ^> t ^-> 
 
 ^? 
 
 . ^-> 
 
 ■^2" O 
 
 »-> 
 
 <-><-> t^ 
 
 c 
 
 '_» 
 
 
 •-* ■— 
 
 <_r '_- 
 
 •.»«* 
 
 S 
 
 w ^ 
 
 *— * 
 
 • ♦■^ • *»^ • •— » 
 
 • ♦^ 
 
 ■ «-^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■*.• 
 
 >«^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d d 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 4*2 
 
 d 
 
 ■«-» 
 o 
 
 6 ^ d 
 
 f*-> r*-» rjp> 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 
 cr.'^ 
 
 S3 *S 
 
 4-> -I— > 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 o 
 
 d 
 
 4-» 
 
 "coco 
 
 ct o 
 
 . ^-> . ^*> . **-> 
 
 , *-> 
 
 . .— > 
 
 
 ^C-^3- 
 
 . ^-> t .— > 
 
 sC 1 
 
 . ^> 
 
 s£? O 
 
 ^> ' 
 
 w <-. *-» 
 
 G 
 
 V^ 
 
 
 •— •-» 
 
 <— > <-. 
 
 c 
 
 •_> 
 
 <-. ^^ 
 
 <_. 
 
 .4-* >«-^ -«^ 
 
 ■«** 
 
 - n« 
 
 
 • *^ -*-. 
 
 • «^ -—+ 
 
 •*-* 
 
 • — * 
 
 ■♦^ 
 
 >4p* 
 
 
 
 
 — * 
 
 
 
 
 
 co 
 
 
 
 
 5- ■ 
 
 <l. 
 
 
 
 
 
 i^ 
 
 ^.21 
 
 
 
 4-» 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 s-> 
 
 
 rfr* 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 -ii iJ 
 
 
 
 
 «^ 
 
 tS3- 
 
 ** • 
 
 
 
 U 
 
 
 
 
 
 — ^ 
 
 52 s-» +-» 
 i"^ *^ S3 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CO 
 
 ••* ■ *•% 
 
 * »*" * 
 
 
 
 *. 
 
 *ct .— 
 
 
 
 
 
 S-> "*3_ S 
 ^ S3^ 
 
 • ^_ 
 
 
 ■*-► 
 
 4-> 
 
 
 <l>* 
 
 
 
 «» 
 
 
 . s . 
 
 
 
 
 S3 S3 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 S3 O 
 
 x» 
 
 
 iO 
 
 
 #o .o 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 «o 
 
 A 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 ■+-> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■*-> 
 
 
 ^„ 
 
 
 «s 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rt 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 S3 
 
 
 O 
 
 ^ 
 
 * 2 
 
 0) 
 
 
 
 
 o *■ 
 ** o 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 c 
 o 
 
 
 m 3 o 
 
 © ^ 
 
 ,* +■> S3 
 
 c 
 o 
 o 
 
 o ^ 
 
 rt S3 
 
 6V 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 «S3 
 
 o 
 
 .s 
 
 's-i 
 
 O 
 > S3 
 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 «> <— .SB- 
 
 Ck» 
 
 4^ 
 
 
 
 ^_ *t* 
 
 
 
 
 ^. 
 
 • — o :-» 
 
 -t-> i-> 4-t 
 
 
 •»* 
 
 
 1^ 
 
 «-► S3 
 
 _co 
 
 "O -rt 
 
 
 
 ®®@ 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 WW 
 
 
 
 4^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
92 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 [rook I. 
 
 
 
 5a 5a 
 
 »^L SJ 
 
 5a 
 
 5a 
 
 *^ ~ <-» <* 
 
 ^€,0 
 
 J-r" J-f J-r i* 
 
 •L^ <_» <_» T-* 
 
 5a 5a 5i 5a 
 
 JT -» o i-> «* <-- » 
 
 «* -— * JZ .«- ;_, ~ 
 
 u ^ S ^ 'f o *r o J- 
 
 --. v c o & p O S u 
 
 5a 5a 5a — - 5> 
 
 ft. 
 
 ±1 *•> 
 .— xa 
 xa ** 
 
 ^* 5a 
 5a 
 
 * — xa 
 
 S-» J-r 
 
 5a 5a 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 » 
 
 <a 
 s 
 s 
 
 
 £* «J" ^ 
 
 ^> 5a ■-=> 
 
 
 -3 
 
 o o 
 
 o <v^ 
 
 O 
 
 Xa 
 
 
 o 
 
 5a 
 
 
 
 ■^ 
 o 
 
 
 C vO 
 
 O 
 
 ty^j 
 
 ~* ._ </0 '^O <-. 
 
 i-> i-» s-t ** 
 
 t> C^. '... -^, 
 
 5a 5a 5a 5a 
 
 xa *s? 
 
 = « -r- fi erf 
 
 5 J~» .o 
 
 5a 
 
 -to 
 
 <-> '-> ■_» <_ <_. s — '^ 
 
 5a 
 
 t- 5a ~ o •— 
 5a 
 6 
 
 g- ^ o^ ^g 1 og sg- d§ J^^g 
 
 O 
 
 «8 
 
 o 
 
 
 «D 
 
 •a I 
 
 
 rsr. 
 
 $^ 
 
 »o 
 
 °3 J 
 
 jO •_ 
 
 «- -r 
 
 
 xa £ J JJ 
 
 5 C «» 
 
 5a 
 
 *? 5a 
 
 -3 
 
 
 5a 
 
 •c^ <«. <_* 
 5a 5a 5a 
 
 u, o 
 
 5a 
 
 O i* 
 
 o o o 5a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 <w 
 
 
 +J 
 
 55 
 
 
 c 
 
 
 
 CD 
 
 MS 
 
 
 Ph 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 .o 
 
 1^ 
 
 5a 
 
 5a 
 
 5a 
 
 <X2 
 
 5a 
 
 
 xa ^ 
 
 «rf Ta 
 /a 
 
 r ^-<D Ci 
 
 5a 
 
 5a 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 en 
 Cu> 
 
 — <i* 
 ■s^> xa 
 
 ^^ 
 
 CD 
 
 fa 
 
 OS 1 
 
 ?5 
 
 •r c 
 
 J-» CD 
 
 d o 
 
 CD 
 bJ3 
 
 i 
 
 c 
 
 • ^* 
 
 X 
 CD 
 
 
 P CD 
 
 S ^5 « © 
 
 o! o^ 3 
 
 ^ 5 Q ** 
 
 t d ^ i M 
 
 D 
 O 
 
 ^3 CD 
 > 
 
 ■ ^^ 
 
 O 
 
 2 - ss 
 — ** xa 
 
 
 2^ si S 
 
 M 
 
 CD 
 
 Oh 
 
 C 
 
 CO 
 
 > 
 
 • — 
 
 bo 
 
 — 
 
 - — w & 
 
 & & &&&& ^^ 
 
 a 
 m .Si 9 
 
 u Ri f) U 
 
 
 e» 
 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 •^ 
 
 93 
 
 <2 <2 
 
 ft* 
 sft 
 
 ft 
 
 l>4 
 
 o 
 
 £ c: £ 
 
 <-> «* ~ 
 
 
 ^> 
 
 •v. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 — «* 
 
 v. S ■ <0 
 
 1 Xm 
 
 2 fi 
 
 g 
 
 gfig 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 fi 
 
 9«bS1- 
 
 ft 
 
 •^ '-. 
 
 ft* 
 
 •^* ^ <_» 
 
 <3--< o 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 ft* 
 
 ft*^'^ 
 
 '-— » 
 
 ^^ 
 
 «> <30 
 
 <D 
 
 <SD <>: <3D 
 
 <35 
 
 <D 
 
 
 <D 
 
 <3D 
 
 <d 
 
 rr. 
 
 
 
 
 >H 
 
 
 
 j- - 
 
 
 
 
 
 • • 
 
 • o 
 
 3" • 
 
 
 O 
 
 , r • 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 £- 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 ft 
 
 ft • 
 
 e 
 
 
 ft 
 
 ft . 
 
 ft* 
 
 ft. 
 
 
 
 
 • 
 
 • • 
 
 •"§ 
 
 
 
 'a 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 
 IM 
 
 
 x-^ i- 
 
 
 
 In 
 
 
 
 
 6 d 
 
 O 
 
 • 
 
 • 
 
 6 ° 
 <« o 
 
 d 
 
 
 • 
 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 «* 
 
 
 ftrf 
 sft 
 
 ~- -?* .«- ft 
 •w -ft" ^^ S 
 
 
 ^ .ft 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 -c* 
 
 •Jw 1~ 
 
 £o 
 
 ^ .£ .Si v« 
 
 ft '<5 S 
 
 
 
 *S^ 
 
 v5 
 
 <cs 
 
 a a 
 
 g 
 
 ^^ +» -++ +~ 
 
 i & < 
 
 Ss 
 
 
 fi 
 
 • 
 
 g 6 
 
 g 
 
 fi 
 
 
 
 g ^?s^i? 
 
 ■*"* '-^ <^ *-^ 
 
 O ^j-j. 
 
 e-e 
 
 
 •^~ 
 
 2>er 
 
 »ft- 
 
 sft^ 
 
 
 
 
 •— 
 
 
 
 .— 
 
 .— 
 
 .«* 
 
 .«rt 
 
 
 in 
 
 • 
 
 ,^"^s 
 
 — ~ 
 
 *k 
 
 ■ 
 
 
 
 
 d . 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 jS 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 
 $ 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 *— - ■ *— * 
 
 6 
 
 il u o <3 
 
 '— ^ 
 ft « 
 
 
 ft 
 ft* 
 
 ft> 
 
 •v. • 
 
 s 
 
 ft* O 
 
 it 
 
 ft <£ 
 
 • 
 
 O 
 
 d 
 ft 
 
 «* 
 
 a a 
 
 fi- 
 
 ei'2 fi 
 
 ff ft 
 
 
 ft 
 
 «4 
 
 H 2 
 
 g 
 
 fi 
 
 fi 
 
 •e^e 
 
 
 
 O ,52. 
 % — ' <-* 
 
 
 ft 
 
 fi>g 
 
 
 .*-> 
 W 
 
 
 • *^ ■>«■* 
 
 •** 
 
 -«•* •*■* ■ — * 
 
 -<— * 
 
 • •^ 
 
 
 -«■* 
 
 •«-* 
 
 • ^^ 
 
 • ^^ 
 
 :£ ~ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 • — ■ — 
 
 ■» ** 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 gfi 
 
 "S o*£ 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 w- fi ^* 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^- *^ 
 
 
 
 ■ — * 
 
 ft 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft «n 
 
 
 
 a 
 ft 
 
 e 
 
 
 fi 
 
 
 
 fi fi 
 
 rfr* ft* 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 ft 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 •-* «—• ■ 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft ft 
 
 =J 
 
 
 
 ft 
 
 ft 
 
 
 ft 
 fi 
 
 
 
 a a 
 
 » £ 
 
 
 
 •-^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 SS 
 
 
 
 
 jO ^^" 
 
 
 
 z. 
 
 ft 
 
 
 K> 
 
 
 
 •-* ■♦* 
 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 •^ 
 
 
 
 
 •M 
 
 ♦* 
 
 be 
 
 
 
 
 ^* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 
 
 
 <D 
 
 
 
 ^2 
 
 ^ 
 
 TD 
 
 ■ — 
 
 , to grow 
 , to wash 
 
 > 
 
 C 
 •** 
 
 3|S 
 
 • — o — 
 
 ° ^ o 
 
 0) 
 
 O 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 tS 
 
 -Q 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 
 Ih 
 
 
 
 ■<-> 
 
 bfi 
 
 • ^ 
 
 -4-9 
 
 -a 
 
 ■5 
 
 )2 
 
 s 1 
 
 © 
 
 C -P 
 
 * O 
 O -^ 
 
 c ft* 
 •— • *-«— 
 
 ft* 
 ft* 
 
 «» s c» 
 
 ^ ,«rf jC» 
 
 C» <k> «>» 
 
 
 c ft 
 
 
 ft 
 
 «* 
 
 
 *•* 
 «* 
 ft c 
 
 — — 
 
 
 88 
 
 8 
 
 ^^8 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 
 8 
 
 8 
 
 ^ 
 
 m~ 
 
94 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 V 
 
 
 «-^ 
 
 i««S 
 
 
 *■* 
 
 s- .& 
 
 *«* ♦-► 
 
 ft* 
 
 vi ^j 
 
 ^, ^"» 
 
 
 Pa 
 
 Parti 
 
 
 
 »-tO <*3 
 
 <-t© 
 
 C '_, 
 
 ft* 
 
 <3D <!T3 
 
 <X> 
 
 
 
 ^— ^ 
 
 
 
 # 
 
 ' J-. 
 
 
 
 ■v* 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 cs 
 
 
 
 
 sv. 
 
 • 
 
 
 
 I" 
 
 •Si S 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 
 to 
 
 ii 
 
 3 
 
 
 8 
 
 *». 
 
 <53 
 
 
 
 
 
 m 
 
 *<* 
 
 >5? 
 
 ft* ~i^ 
 
 e 
 
 4-> 
 
 o 
 
 5Q 
 
 <*5 «NO 
 
 «ho 
 
 a 
 
 
 «e*e 
 
 *& 
 
 S-i 
 
 CD 
 
 
 •*^ «*^ 
 
 *•*■* 
 
 
 
 
 Oh 
 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 B 
 
 HH 
 
 • 
 
 
 O 
 
 
 B 
 
 ij 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 
 5 
 
 
 •«S 
 
 2 
 
 
 «-to *^o 
 
 <^o 
 
 
 
 
 w^*' 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 •*•* •*-* 
 
 ■^* 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 
 
 * ^*I 
 
 
 
 
 ^~— *■-?* 
 
 
 
 
 ■^-* — ^ 
 
 
 
 •<s> 
 
 
 
 >fcj 
 
 r*5 
 
 
 03 
 CO 
 03 
 
 8 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 s 
 
 ft* 
 
 
 
 
 
 w 
 
 
 
 «* 3 ^— V 
 
 «-* • 
 
 
 
 M 
 
 «fc> 
 
 
 
 » ° 
 
 «-*=> 
 
 
 
 • A* 
 
 
 
 
 ~—- ' 
 
 
 
 
 i t 
 
 O 
 
 
 
 "3 
 
 •*-> 
 
 
 
 C-c 
 
 
 
 
 «+- 
 
 •\ 
 
 
 
 o o 
 
 03 
 O 
 
 
 
 03 ^ 
 
 (h 
 
 
 <*> 
 
 CO 
 
 3 £ 
 
 <2 
 
 
 8 
 
 no, cd ^ 
 
 o 
 
 
 % 
 S 
 
 o o 
 
 «"3 
 
 
 
 
 je- O- 
 
 
 
 
 <x S 
 
 
 
 Xi-jC- 
 
 s ° 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ■"> <H» 
 
 ^» ° 
 
 
 
 <^ • — 
 
 S3 
 
 
 
 00,00, 
 
 00, 
 
 ."S3 XJ 
 
 C 03 
 
 C co 
 
 D 03 
 hJD G 
 
 03 03 
 
 s s 
 
 E bD 
 
 •«t) o r 
 
 • 3 *^ 
 
 CO 
 
 03 nJ g 
 
 bfi 2 
 
 -§ SI «u 
 
 -w 3 g S 
 
 T3 
 ** v" S 
 
 ~ iV. « 
 
 a; 3 -S: 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 3 TJ 
 
 cd 
 
 3 
 03 
 
 ? O 
 
 f 
 
 o 
 
 • — 
 -4-> 
 
 CO 
 
 o 
 
 s * 
 
 S5 > 
 
 1* ° 
 
 03 «- c» *• 
 
 03 .3 » bJj-s-ilf 
 
 03 . M 
 
 CO 
 O 
 
 
 ° 03 ^^ ^ £S 
 
 3 .^ C 3. 03 
 
 
 ^~S 
 
 ?-0 
 - .V. 
 
 13 
 3 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 03 
 CO 
 
 3, 3 
 O ^ 
 
 P - cfi 3 h 
 
 3 'S -^ 
 
 2 w>r3 O "^ "£ 
 
 03 ^ C^ 03 O « 
 
 r| *^ «< (C J) O ^ 
 
 -»->>>. 3 JD ♦"" 
 
 _n ^ co 
 
 O 03 O »- 03 
 g Q3.5 ri ^^W 
 
 «2 o ss o? s *; ^ 
 
 o ss « 
 
 «j 5* 03 
 
 3 i^ -^ 
 
 c ^ -^ 
 
 : in *~ 
 
 03 
 co 
 
 i. ft* 
 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 03 
 
 t^JS- 03 
 
 33 #* -3 
 
 cd 
 3 
 co 
 
 c ? 
 
 °"3 3 
 
 ft* 
 ft* .~i-» 
 
 cd «>: 
 
 J5 .2 ^> 
 
 co 
 
 O _c ^* cd .3" ^ *~ 
 •- ^ <C--3 *- "O ^ 
 ^3 <-. 3 o 03 ^—^ 
 
 .2 d S t -S > 
 
 •" 03 ^= - e 2 
 c i: ♦* «3 cd 
 
 ~ be 03 > Ja ^ "^ 
 
 o *- -s cd o^; s 
 
 cd if cd ft« «-X- 
 
 - b£T3 
 S 3 3 
 ** -3 cd 
 
 >7 co -^ 
 
 cd .3 co 
 
 h 3 bfi 
 
 03 _r 
 
 CO 
 JO 
 
 03 
 > 
 
 o JS 
 -3 a 
 
 .o 
 
 03 O 03 
 
 03 O S 
 
 "•^ O 
 
 u, CO o 
 
 03 03 
 
 3 2^ 
 
 03 O 
 
 -j ^0 
 
 03 'TJ ~T^ 
 ^ 3 «- 
 co cd sJS 
 
 03 
 
 3 
 cd 
 
 & 
 
 3 ^ 
 bfl_^ 
 
 03 o 
 
 S o 
 
 • s-« 
 
 3 ^. 
 03 ^ 
 
 9-- 
 
 5s 
 
 03 
 O 
 
 'P 
 03 
 
 CO 
 
 3 
 03 
 
 >> 3 
 
 03 "^ 
 J3 o 
 
 ** +j 
 
 S s 
 
 ->^ 
 
 u. g 
 
 cd c> 
 
 *3 ^ 
 
 03 ^3 
 
 >- 3 
 
 03 rt 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 03 
 
 > 
 
 o 
 
 3 
 
 cd 
 o 
 
 3 O 
 
 be*- 
 
 03 -? J 
 
 03 CO 
 
 > cd 
 cd 
 
 • *— « * »s 
 
 §P 03 .' 
 
 vx g i: 
 
 13 > "fc. 
 
 «3J > »- bD 
 
 O co g 'S 
 
 2 g § o 
 
 22 03 ~ 
 
 ft* 3 C SS 
 
 •r* ^ cd "<* 
 
 s S"s 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 
 
 95 
 
 The following verbs, which are similar to each other, are 
 to be distinguished. 
 
 ©(Ut'gCtt, to suck, irr. 
 ©djroim'meit/ to swim, irr. 
 
 ©inf'en, to sink, irr. 
 
 ©pving'en, to spring, irr. 
 $Vin£'ett/ to drink, irr. 
 
 ©du'gen, to suckle, reg. 
 ©djroem'men, to wash away, 
 
 reg. 
 ©cuf'cn, to sink, let down, 
 
 reg. 
 ©pvcng'CU, to sprinkle, reg. 
 ^vdilf'cn/ to give to drink, reg. 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises on the Irregular and Mixed Verbs. 
 
 When the verb to do is an auxiliary to another verb, the 
 auxiliary is not expressed in German. Thus the phrases, do 
 you know ? or do you not knoio ? are expressed in German as 
 if the English were, knoio you? or know you not? roiffet ifyt* ? 
 or roif fet tf}% uid)t ? 
 
 The position of the negative nid)t is immediately after the 
 verb, except with the infinitive and the participles, where it 
 stands before the verb ; and in questions, where it stands after 
 the pronoun. Ex. I am not, id) bin mcljt; are you not? fcit> 
 li)V nid)t ? not to be, nid)t fctn ; he might not come, CV M'me 
 
 ntcl)t. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I know, 
 
 » if fen. 
 
 May I? 
 
 Imv'fen. 
 
 I must not, 
 
 muffen. 
 
 Can I not ? 
 
 ftn'ncn. 
 
 Thou fallest, 
 
 fallen. 
 
 Dost thou catch? 
 
 fang'en. 
 
 Thou dost not hold, 
 
 fyal'ten. 
 
 Dost thou not hang ? 
 
 f) dug' en. 
 
 You must, 
 
 muffen. 
 
 May he ? 
 
 mo 'gen. 
 
 He does not let, 
 
 laffen. 
 
 Does he not sleep? 
 
 fd)fa'fen. 
 
 She advises, 
 
 va'ttjen. 
 
96 
 
 RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 Does she go ? 
 
 She does not dig, 
 
 Does she not strike ? 
 
 It grows, 
 
 Does it see ? 
 
 It does not eat, 
 
 Does it not happen ? 
 
 We give, 
 
 Do we step? 
 
 We do not forget, 
 
 You read, 
 
 Do you measure ? 
 
 You do not hew, 
 
 Do you not carry 1 
 
 They are, 
 
 Do they remain ? 
 
 They do not seize, 
 
 They do not go, 
 
 fafy'ven. 
 
 gra'ben. 
 
 fcbla'gen. 
 
 wadj'fen. 
 
 fe'tyen. 
 
 ef'fen. 
 
 gefdje'Den. 
 
 ge'ben. 
 
 tve'ten. 
 
 fcergef'fen. 
 
 le'fen, 
 
 mcf'fen. 
 
 fyau'en. 
 
 tra'gen. 
 
 fein. 
 
 blei'ben. 
 
 gm'fen. 
 
 ge'tyen. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I might, 
 
 Did I eat? 
 
 I did not dig, 
 
 Did I not step ? 
 
 Thou remainedst, 
 
 Didst thou lend ? 
 
 Thou didst not avoid, 
 
 Didst thou not fight ? 
 
 He induced, 
 
 Did he heave, or lift? 
 
 He did not conceal, 
 
 Did he not take ? 
 
 He commanded, 
 
 Did she speak ? 
 
 She did not write, 
 
 We nominated, 
 
 It bit, 
 
 Did it glide 1 
 
 He did not think, 
 
 m&'gen. 
 
 cf'fen. 
 
 gra'ben. 
 
 tre'ten. 
 
 Mei'ben. 
 
 lei'fyen. 
 
 met'fcen. 
 
 fed) 'ten. 
 
 berce'gen. 
 
 fye'ben. 
 
 bev'gen. 
 
 net/men. 
 
 befefy'len. 
 
 fpveciyen. 
 
 favti'ben. 
 
 evnen'nen. 
 
 beiffen. 
 
 g(ei'ten. 
 
 benf'en. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] RECAPITULATORY EXERCISES. 
 
 97 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Present. 
 
 I may fall, 
 
 I may not be able, 
 
 Thou mayst not, 
 
 Thou must, 
 
 He may be willing, 
 
 We may beat, 
 
 They may not bear, 
 
 fallen. 
 
 Hn'ntn. 
 
 m&'ge*. 
 
 tnuffeu. 
 
 XDoi'lm. 
 fra'gen. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I might dig, 
 
 He might not bring, 
 
 Thou mightst break, 
 
 Thou mightst not command, 
 
 He might conceal, 
 
 She might not help, 
 
 It might eat, 
 
 He might not, 
 
 We might not lose, 
 
 You might not creep, 
 
 They might not contuse, 
 
 They might not spoil, 
 
 gra'bett, 
 bring' etu 
 
 breeb'en. 
 
 bcfctylen. 
 
 ber'.qcn. 
 
 fyrf'fen, 
 
 cf fen. 
 
 mo'geu, 
 
 fccrlic'rcu. 
 
 frte'eben. 
 
 fcertmr'rett. 
 
 wrbcr'ben. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Read (thou), 
 
 Ic'fcn. 
 
 Give, 
 
 ge'bcn. 
 
 Take, 
 
 nefy'men. 
 
 Do not step, 
 
 tve'ten. 
 
 Eat, or do you eat, 
 
 ef'fcn. 
 
 Do not forget, 
 
 fcergeffen. 
 
 Let him come, 
 
 fem'men; 
 
 Let him not give, 
 
 ge'bcn. 
 
 Let us go, 
 
 ge'fyen. 
 
 Speak, or do you speak, 
 
 fprccb'cn. 
 
 Let them enjoy, 
 
 genie'fen. 
 
 Do not speak, 
 
 fprcdj'en. 
 
98 REFLECTIVE VERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 Past Participle. 
 
 Begun, fccgin'nen. 
 
 Spoken, fprcdj'en. 
 
 Not deceived. bctl'ie'gtn. 
 
 Fled, fUd)cn. 
 
 Flowed, fttefen, 
 
 Not sheared, fdje'rett. 
 
 Burnt, wvbveu'ncn. 
 
 Recommended, empfcfy'fen. 
 
 Brought, bring'en. 
 
 Valued, gel'ten. 
 
 Given, gc'kn. 
 
 Helped, ^cl'feit. 
 
 Requested, bit'tcn. 
 
 Called, tjti'ftri. 
 
 § 4. REFLECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 Active verbs, when they reflect upon the agent, are called 
 reflective verbs. They are formed with the pronouns mid), 
 Did), (or mil'/ t>iv,) ftd), XUVo, end), fid), answering to the En- 
 glish pronouns, myself; thyself; himself, herself, itself; our- 
 selves ; yourselves; themselves. They are conjugated like 
 active verbs, and are either regular or irregular. 
 
 Conjugation of the Reflective Verb, fid) Ut'bttl, to love one's self. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Present. 
 ftd) Ue'bcn, to love one's self. 
 
 Participle, 
 ftd) iit'btUb, loving himself, herself, or itself. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) lit'bc mid), I love myself. id) ik'bt mid), I may love 
 
 myself, 
 tot Utb\\ bid), thou lovest thy- tot Ke'tcfl Met), thou mays* 
 self. love thyself. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] REFLECTIVE VERBS. 99 
 
 er, fte, or e£ ikbt fid), he, she, it, fte, or e£ lie'be fid), he, 
 
 it loves himself, herself, or she, it may love himself, 
 itself. herself, or itself. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 tt)it* fte'beit tmS, we love our- ttnr ItC'beu \\\\€, we may love 
 
 selves. ourselves, 
 
 ifyr lit'btt end), you love your- ifyt Uc'bct eud), you may love 
 
 selves. yourselves, 
 
 fte lie'ben fid), they love them- f(e lie' belt ftd), they may love 
 
 selves. themselves. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) Utb'tt mid), I loved my- id) lie'bete mid), I might love 
 self. myself. 
 
 Du Iieb'te|t bid), thou, &c. im lie'betejt bid), thou, &c. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 rok (ieb'ten nn$, we loved nur lu'bttm itn^, we might 
 
 ourselves. love ourselves, 
 
 ifyr lieb'tet euet), you, &c ifyt (ie'bctct eucb, you, &c. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 lie'ben wiv un£, let us love 
 ourselves, 
 (ie'be bid), love thyself. (iebt or lie'bet end), love your- 
 
 selves, 
 lie'be tx fid), let him love him- lie'ben fte ftdj, let them love 
 self. themselves. 
 
 Exercises on the Reflective Verbs. 
 Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I am ashamed, fid) fd)a'tttett, to be ashamed. 
 
 He blames himself, fid) U\'b(U\, to blame one's self. 
 
 We unite together, fid) fcevei'ntflen, to unite. 
 
 You forget yourselves, fid) bevgef fen, irr. to forget 
 
 one's self. 
 
100 
 
 REFLECTIVE VERES. 
 
 [BOOK I. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 We rejoiced, 
 
 He betook himself, 
 
 They heloed themselves, 
 
 fid) frcu'en, to rejoice. 
 
 ftd) bcge'ben, irr. to betake 
 
 one's self, 
 ftcl) tjcCfcn, irr. to help one's 
 
 self. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Do not offend, 
 
 Grieve not, 
 Do not complain, 
 Do not burn yourself, 
 Be not afraid, 
 
 ftcl) fccvge'fycn, irr. to offend, to 
 
 fail in one's duty. 
 ftcl) gr&'mCU, to grieve, 
 fid) bcHa'gen, to complain. 
 fid) fcevbren'ncn, mix. to bum. 
 fid) fitvdj'tcn, to be afraid. 
 
 Observations on the Reflective Verbs. 
 
 1. There are many reflective verbs in German, which are 
 not so in English ; as, ftcl) cvbav'mcn, to pity ; fid) frctt'en, to 
 rejoice ; and many others, as in the above exercises, are em- 
 ployed only in the reflective form ; as, . 
 
 ftd) bcgc'ben, to repair to. fid) gv&'men, to be grieved, 
 
 fid) bcmddytigen, to get pos- fid) b mil? 'men, to boast one's 
 
 session of. self, &c. 
 
 ftd) befeanf en, to thank. 
 
 2. All active verbs, if the sense admits of it, may be used 
 as reflective verbs, by the addition of the reflective pronouns ; 
 in which case they frequently assume an intransitive meaning ; 
 as, fnrcfj'tCH, act. to fear ; and ftd) fuvcfo'ten, to fear, or to be 
 afraid. Some verbs, however, are employed in both forms ; 
 as, 
 
 iv'ren, to err, or ftd) tvi'Cn, to be mistaken. 
 
 janf'en, to quarrel, or fid) janf'Ctt/ to embroil one's self. 
 
 fdjcu'cn, to shun, or ftd) fcl)CU'nt, to be shy. 
 
 3. Most reflective verbs take the pronoun in the accusa 
 tive; as, id) cvbav'me mid), I pity; id) bcftn'nc mid), I reflect; 
 but some few require the pronoun in the dative ; as, id) ma'f* 
 mtv utd)t an, I do not assume; id) bii'lc mil* nid)t cm, I do 
 not imagine. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 101 
 
 § 5. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 A verb is called impersonal if, in those tenses which com- 
 monly have three persons, it is used, in its proper and peculiar 
 sense, only in the third person singular, with the pronoun C£ be- 
 fore it. Thus the verb ge'6cn, v, a. irr. to give, which is a com- 
 plete verb, has a peculiar meaning when used impersonally : 
 indie, pres. C$ gicbt, there is ; imperf. e<? gab, there was or 
 were. Ex. (£S giebt SJiCll'fdjCU, there are men {literally, it 
 gives men). 
 
 Most impersonal verbs, though generally used as such, are 
 sometimes employed as complete verbs, particularly in a poetic 
 sense. Thus the verbs fcOU'UCVll, to thunder, Mtt'jCU, to 
 lighten, are commonly used as impersonal verbs ; as, t$ 
 fcOU'ltert, it thunders; C6 Mit'JCt, it lightens; but sometimes 
 as complete verbs ; as, fcie ^6'^cn fcon'ncvn, the heights thun- 
 der ; fei'ne ^Ut'gCU Mi^tCU, his eyes threw out lightning. 
 
 Impersonal verbs are either intransitive, or active, or re- 
 flective, as they are used either by themselves, or with a 
 personal, or a reflective pronoun after them. 
 
 I. Conjugation of the Impersonal Intransitive Verb. 
 
 Conjugation of the Regular Impersonal Verb, veg'nen, 
 
 to rain. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 CS VCg'net/ it rains. C6 reg'UC, it may rain. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 eg VCg'UCte, it rained. C6 veg'ncte, it might rain. 
 
 The following verbs may be conjugated in a similar manner 
 
 fcon'uevn, to thunder. 6fit'jcn, to lighten, 
 
 fdmci'cvt, to snow. tfyau'en, to thaw, 
 
 fya'gelu, or fcljloffen, to hail. ta'gen, to dawn. 
 
 9* 
 
102 IMPERSONAL VERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 Conjugation of the Irregular Impersonal Verb, frtc'reu, to freeze. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 eg fricvt, it freezes. eg frte're, it may freeze. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 eg fror, it froze. eg ftb'tt, it might freeze. 
 
 II. Conjugation of the Impersonal Active Verb. 
 Conjugation of the Regular Impersonal Verb, dr'gCt'U, to vex. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 eg dv'gert mid), or mid) dr'= eg dr'gcremid), or mid) dr'gere, 
 
 gert, I am vexed. I may be vexed, 
 
 eg dv'gcvt Md), or t>tcC) dv'gevt, eg dv'geve t>ic(), or fctdj dv'geve, 
 thou art vexed. thou mayst be vexed. 
 
 eg dv'gcvt i()it, or tfyn dv'gcvt, eg dv'geve ityu, or tfyu dv'geve, 
 
 he is vexed. he may be vexed. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 eg dv'gevt uug, or tm^ dv'gevt, eg dv'geve un^, or un$ dv'geve, 
 
 we are vexed. we may be vexed, 
 
 eg dv'gert md), or cud) df'gevt, eg dv'geve cud), or cud) dv'geve, 
 you are vexed. you may be vexed. 
 
 eg dv'gcvt fie, or ftc dv'gert, eg dr'gcrc ftc, or ftc dr'gcrc, 
 
 they are vexed. they may be vexed. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 e^ dr'gerte mid), or mtdj dv'-- eg dr'gertc mid), or mid) dv'* 
 
 gerte, I was vexed, &c. gertC, I might be vexed, &c. 
 
 The personal pronoun is generally in the accusative, but 
 sometimes in the dative case. Thus the verb gefaCfcu, v. n. 
 irreg. to please, is used impersonally, with the personal pro- 
 noun in the dative case ; as, eg gcfd((t' mir, or mil* gcfdttt', I 
 am pleased, &c. ; eg geftel' mil', or mir gcjtel', I was pleased, &c. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Exercises on the Impersonal Active Verb. 
 Indicative. 
 
 103 
 
 Present. 
 
 I am hungry, 
 Thou art cold, 
 We are thirsty, 
 They are sleepy, 
 He is pleased, 
 
 It seems to me, 
 
 We were grieved, 
 You were grieved, 
 They were discomforted, 
 He was displeased, 
 
 (ntttg'ern, to be hungry, 
 frie'ren, irr. to freeze, 
 tmv'jtcn, to be thirsty. 
 fcWa'fmi, to be sleepy, 
 gefal'ieit/ irr. to please, (Dat.) 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 buu^CU, to seem, (Dat. or 
 
 Ace.) 
 grd'mcn, to grieve. 
 
 VCVtaue'fcrt/ irr. to discomfort. 
 mtSfal'lcn, irr. to displease, 
 (Dat.) 
 
 In all the instances mentioned under II, the personal pro- 
 noun in the accusative or dative case is evidently governed 
 by the impersonal verb, which is governed by the pronoun c£, 
 it, expressed or understood. In other cases, c£ is an expletive 
 which does not govern the verb, and is either not translated 
 or answers to the English there; ex. eg frllttt tl)U uic'manfc, 
 there is no one that knows him ; C6 fa'gcil t)ic Uu'U, people say. 
 
 III. Conjugation of the Impersonal Reflective Verb. 
 
 Conjugation of the Irregular Impersonal Verb t)cv|tc'l)Ctt/ 
 
 to understand. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 C£ berjtefyt' fid), it is under- c$ fccrftc'fje ftel), it may be 
 stood {literally, it under- understood, 
 stands itself.) 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 C6 fcer|tatt&' ftdj, it was under- cS fccrfian'&c ftel), it might be 
 stood. understood. 
 
104 COMPOUND VERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 Exercises on the Impersonal Reflective Verb. 
 
 It is becoming, 
 It is not* proper, 
 It is evident. 
 
 It came to pass, 
 
 It subsided, 
 
 It was protracted, 
 
 Present. 
 
 ftd) fdjic'tcit, to be becoming, 
 fid) gefy&'l'Cn, to be proper, 
 ftd) ergc'bcil/ irr. to be evident. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 ftd) ffl'gcu, to come to pass, 
 ftd) ge'beit, irr. to subside, 
 ftd) fcevjic'fyctl, irr. to be pro- 
 tracted. 
 
 § 6. COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 Simple verbs being regular or irregular, their compounds 
 are the same. 
 
 Compound verbs are compounded either with separable or 
 inseparable particles. 
 
 Those which are compounded with inseparable particles, 
 are conjugated like the simple verbs without the additional 
 particle ; except in the past participle, in which they do not 
 receive the augment ge. Thus the verb Cl'fut'lcu, to fulfill, is 
 conjugated like ffd'U'U/ reg. to fill ; except the past participle, 
 which is erfullt' (instead of gcerftU(t). 
 
 The separable particles are joined to the verbs in the infini- 
 tive and participle, except when the conjunction £tt, to, is 
 added to the infinitive, which is then put between the particle 
 and the verb; as, attf t)tt(ten, to detain ; he endeavoured to de- 
 tain him, u fudytc i(m attf jtt tjai'tcn (or attfjul)a(fcu). — In 
 
 the original tenses of the indicative and subjunctive, and in 
 the imperative, the separable particles are separated and put 
 after the verb ; except when for some reason (to be stated in 
 the Syntax) the verb must be put at the end of the sentence. 
 Ex. you detain, i(}t* tjai'tct attf; take care that you do not 
 detain me, fc'bct ju, t>afe" ifyt* mid) md)t attfl;altct. 
 
 * The negation is to be put after the reflective pronoun. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 105 
 
 Conjugation of the Separable Compound (irregular) Verb 
 auf fyalteit, to detain or stop. 
 
 Infinitive, 
 auf fatten, to detain. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Participle. 
 
 Present, auf fyafteufc, detaining. 
 Past. auf gcfyalten, detained. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) fyat'te auf, I detain, am ' id} fyaf'te auf, I may detain, 
 detaining, or do detain. 
 
 fcu t)ait\l auf, thou detainest. t>U fyaCteff auf, thou mayest de- 
 tain. 
 
 it, ftC, or eg fyatt auf, he, she, tt, fie, or eg fyaCte auf, he, 
 
 she, or it may detain. 
 
 or it detains 
 
 Plural. 
 rrnr fyal'teu auf, we detain. 
 
 i()V ^al'tef auf, you detain. 
 
 ftC fyat'teit auf, they detain. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 xovt fyaPteu auf, we may de 
 tain. 
 
 lf)V fyaf'tet auf, you may de- 
 tain. 
 
 fie {jiXVtm auf, they may de- 
 tain. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Singutar. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) fyteit auf, I detained, id) fyiel'te auf, I might detain. 
 
 t)U fyiel'tejt auf, thou detain- tot fyieCtejt auf, thou mightst 
 
 edst. 
 er tjiclt auf, he detained. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 volt l}ic('teu auf, we detained. 
 it)V fyiei'tet auf, you detained. 
 fie fytcl'tCU auf, they detained. 
 
 detain. 
 
 it tjid'tc auf, he might de- 
 tain. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 rcir fyiePteu auf, we might, &c. 
 il)v fyiel'tet auf, you might, &c. 
 fie fyiel'teit auf, they might, 
 &c. 
 
106 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 fyal'te (bit) auf, detain (thou). 
 ijal'te Ct' auf, let him detain. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fyat'teu roir auf, let us detain, 
 fjat'tet (it)r) auf, detain (you). 
 tjat'tCU ftC auf, let them de- 
 tain. 
 
 So conjugate 
 
 auf UCfymeu, irr. to take up. 
 weA/gebcu, zrr. to give away. 
 
 ab'tjokn, to fetch. 
 
 aug'fprecheu, irr. to pronounce. 
 VOf'fomtUCU, irr. to come be- 
 fore. 
 ehl'brtUgeu, mix. to bring in. 
 
 Exercises on the Separable Compound Verbs. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 I take off, 
 Thou acceptest, 
 It devolves, 
 
 We give up, 
 You except, 
 They assist, 
 
 ab'uefymeu, irr, to take off. 
 au'UCtytttCU, irr. to accept. 
 
 autyctm'falleu, or fyctm'fatfeu, 
 
 irr. to devolve, 
 auf gcbcit, irr. to give up. 
 auS'uetymClt, irr. to except, 
 kei'ficfycil/ irr. to stand by, to 
 
 assist. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I presented, 
 Thou rannest off, 
 He took in, 
 We pursued, 
 You sent home, 
 They came hither, 
 
 fcav'mdKU, to present. 
 fcafcOU'laufCU, irr. to run off. 
 ehl'UCfymctt, irr. to take in. 
 foi't'fcfcCU, to pursue, 
 fyeim'fcfcttfeu, to send home. 
 fyct't'ommCU, irr. to come hith- 
 
 er. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Look (thou) to, 
 Keep (you) back, 
 
 jufefrcu, irr. to look to. 
 juvfttf'ljalten, irr. to 
 back. 
 
 keep 
 
PART II. CII. 6.] 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 107 
 
 Composing, 
 Composed, 
 
 Participles. 
 
 jufam'mcnfegeu, to compose. 
 
 Observations on the Compound Verbs. 
 
 1. The compound verbs generally follow the conjugation of 
 the simple verbs, some of which are regular, and others irreg- 
 ular ; thus, an'vefcen, to address, and bere'fceil, to persuade, 
 from rc'&CH, to speak, are regular; attffdjmben, to write 
 down, and befcferet'bcn, to describe, from fcfetei'fcett, to write, 
 are irregular. But fcl)affcn, to create, is irregular, and 
 fccrfcfoaffcn, to procure, regular; I6fd)'en, to quench, regular, 
 and erldfciycvt/ to become extinct, irregular. 
 
 2. All separable particles have a distinct meaning, when 
 taken by themselves, and are therefore easily distinguished 
 when used in composition ; as, 
 
 <\{\ off, or down, 
 an, on, or at. 
 auf, up, or upon. 
 anS, out of. 
 bci, at, by, near. 
 
 fcar, there, 
 ein, in, or into, 
 fret, free. 
 mit, with, 
 nacl), after. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 2tb'fe£en, to depose, 
 
 2Cn'fpvcc()en, to address, 
 
 ShtfltcfyCH; to arise, 
 2Ut6"'fc§cn, to expose, 
 Set'ltefyen, to assist, to stand 
 
 Siu'fcMicfen, to inclose, 
 grci'fprccbcn, to acquit, 
 
 50tit'gc()CU, to accompany, 
 SKacl)'fo(gCU, to succeed, 
 
 from fCt'^Ctt, to put, and db, 
 down. 
 
 fpredj'en, to speak, an, 
 
 to. 
 fte'fyen, to stand, anf, up. 
 fet'jen, to put, an£, out. 
 jtc'tjen, to stand, bci, by, 
 
 or near, 
 fcblic'fcn, to lock, cin, in. 
 fprcclj'cn, to speak, fret, 
 
 free. 
 
 gdjen, to go, mit, with, 
 fol'ant, to follow, nadj, 
 after. 
 
108 COMPOUND VERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 JFJitt, thither, or there, and t)(V, hither, or here, are oftener 
 employed in German than in English. Both express motion 
 towards an object ; but fycv, when used in opposition to fyin, 
 denotes a motion towards the place where the person who 
 speaks actually is, and fyin a motion towards another place. 
 Thus, fyitt'fommen, signifies to get or arrive there, in opposi- 
 tion to tjn'hmmm, to come hither ; as, %d) f 2 onn'te nic()t 
 Ijin't ommen, I could not get there ; £om'mcu ©te fyer, Come 
 here. 
 
 3. The inseparable particles, as their name announces, are 
 used only in composition. Of these, the following are the 
 principal : 
 
 55c, (1.) in composition with verbs, denotes an expansion of 
 the action over an object, or its influence upon it ; as, bcttMcl)'; 
 fen, to overgrow ; bcftveit'CU, to bestrew ; berau'dKvn, to be- 
 smoke or smoke. By the use of this particle, many neuter 
 verbs are changed into active ; as, av'bciten, to work, tin 
 @tucf J^olj bear'beiten, to work on a piece of wood ; vei'tcn, 
 to ride, ein $pfcr& bcrei'ten, to train a horse ; fol'gcu, to 
 
 follow, ei'nen SHatl) bcfot'gen, to follow counsel ; fpredj'cn, to 
 
 speak, et'maS kfpvedj'en, to bespeak a thing, &c. 
 
 (2.) In composition with nouns and other parts of speech, 
 it denotes a communication of one object or quality to another ; 
 as, bcfhVgcfu, to wing, or provide with wings, from gliVgel, a 
 wing ; beb&lt'bent, to adorn with ribbons, from S3ant>, ribbon ; 
 bcau'gcn, to give an eye to, from 2ht'ge, eye ; bcfau'ben, to 
 cover with leaves, from k\\ub, leaf; berci'c()Cru, to enrich, 
 from veid), &c. In the application of this particle, there is 
 but little difference between the two languages. 
 
 Qnttp, which occurs only in three verbs, stands instead of 
 inbc (in, in, and the particle be), and signifies that the action, 
 which is expressed by the verb, is of an internal nature ; 
 as, ftn'bcn, to find, erapjtn'bCU (to find imvardly) to feel ; fang'fll 
 (ox fa'fycn) to catch, cmpfang'en, to receive; befefy'fcn, to com-: 
 mand, or commend, etnpfcty'lcn, to recommend. 
 
 Qhtt denotes (1.) removal from a place, and nearly corre- 
 sponds to the English from, or away; as, Cntjfte'gen, to fly 
 away; cntfcr'UCH, to remove; entfaffen, to send away or 
 dismiss. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 109 
 
 (2.) Deprivation ; as, cntcfy'l'CH, to dishonor ; cntMn'&CU, to 
 unbind ; cntfcf feftt, to unfetter ; mttjClWp'tm, to behead 
 UlttjWim, to unveil. 
 
 (3.) It sometimes denotes the commencement of an action; 
 as, eutbrcn'uen, to kindle; entjfin'&ttt, to set on fire; etttfrfjfok 
 fen, to fall asleep ; cutfpcing'cn, to spring ; ctUjtc'fycu, to 
 arise. 
 
 Q?t* denotes (1.) elevation, in the sense of the particle auf, 
 up ; as, cvfyc'ben, to elevate, or lift up ; cvhut'cu, to build up ; 
 
 erjie'fjcn, to bring up ; cvroaclj'fcn, to grow up. 
 
 (2.) Obtaining by means of exertion, or trouble ; as, cvfc'd)'- 
 ten, to obtain by fighting ; crfdjmci'rbellt, to wheedle ; etftfrfj's 
 CU, to fish out ; crar/briteu, to work out ; ttHu'fttl, to pur- 
 chase ; evfafy'VCU, to learn by experience ; thus, St* crfocfjt' 
 Ci'lKlt ©icg, He obtained a victory ; (£v t)M fchie ©unjt CV-- 
 fcljmci'djclt, He has wheedled himself into his favor, &c. So 
 likewise in regard to mental exertions ; as, Cl'fiu'rtcn, to devise ; 
 erfcen^CU, to contrive ; CfftU'fcCU, to invent, &c. 
 
 (3.) Taking out, bringing out, coming out, in the sense of 
 the particle au$, out ; CVWdty'lcn, to elect, or choose out of; 
 ttnttt'tltn, to nominate ; etgie'fftt/ to flow out ; ivlafftll, to 
 issue ; erfcfoSp'fcn, to exhaust ; crbml)'crt, to break open, or 
 break out from. 
 
 (4.) A bringing or coming into a condition, which is indi- 
 cated by the words with which it is compounded ; as, CTtt) ci'- 
 ttVXi, to enlarge, from Xdtit, wide or large ; eirroav'mcn, to 
 warm, from warm, warm ; Cfgfau'CU, to grow grey, from <\vau, 
 grey ; Cl'fyar'tcn, to grow hard, from fj&tt, hard ; CvMct'djcn, 
 to turn or grow pale, from Mctcl), pale ; erbiilt'tcn, to grow 
 blind, from blint), blind; tvHl'ttXl, to grow cold, from Hit, 
 cold; tVVb'ttyn, to redden or blush, from vott), red ; crar'mcn, 
 to grow poor, from antt, poor; cvfl&'vcn, to explain, or clear 
 up, from UdX, clear ; Cffric'VCH, to freeze, from ftit'ttn, to 
 freeze; CVJltV'ncn, to make angry, from $0V\\, anger; tV\\tt's 
 Un, to expire, from jicv'bcn, to die, &c. 
 
 @C gives simply an extension or force to the primitive ; as, 
 kau'djcn, to use, gcbiau'dxn, to employ ; fccnfcn, to think, 
 9Ct>CHi'CU, to think of, or bear in mind ; frie'rcit, to freeze, 
 
 10 
 
110 COMPOUND VERBS. [BOOK. I. 
 
 gcfric'fcn, to become frozen ; fcnffccn, to bear, ftrf) gefcml'fccn, 
 to endure, or have patience with ; lang'Clt, to reach, gelang'Cll, 
 to arrive at, or come to, &c. 
 
 ^cr denotes (1.) removal, answering to the particle away ; 
 as, Wrja'gen, to drive away ; fccvfctKnf'cn, to give away ; bcv- 
 pflan^cn, to transplant; tocvfct'JCH, to transpose; focvrocciyfcfn, 
 to change ; fccrfrtn'fen, to sell : or away, as implying waste, 
 loss, or consumption ; as, toci'trinf 'HI, to drink away, to spend 
 by drinking ; Dcvfpic'IcU/ to game away ; Derlie'fCU, to lose ; 
 bnat'bnUll, to work up; fcerMlVfycn, to fadeaway; V>ClTau'= 
 dbcn, to evaporate ; focrfdjmadj'tcn, to pine ; fccrbln'tcn, to 
 bleed to death ; btvtDtVhn, to wither away. 
 
 (2.) Putting out of order, or doing wrong, answering gene- 
 rally to mis; as, fccvlc'gcn, to mislay ; fccrfltfy'vcn, to seduce; 
 Dcvfc^VCt'bcn, to write wrong ; fccr&re'fycil, to pervert ; fcCl'fdt'; 
 fel)Cn, to adulterate ; fccrfal'jcn, to oversalt ; fccrgef'fcit, to for- 
 get ; ^cvfdjicbcn, to dislocate ; l>crnacl)1afftgen, to neglect ; 
 tKtTecl)'ncn, to miscalculate ; fcCVVUC'fcn, to derange. 
 
 (3.) Putting in the way, obstructing; as, beirbic'tcn, to 
 forbid ; tHTfa'gcn, to deny ; foerbit'tcn, to refuse ; tocrrocty'reit/ 
 to prohibit ; btxfytn'bnn, to prevent ; fecrfdjlie'fen, to lock 
 
 up ; Der&am'meit, to dam up ; wrfic'geht, to seal up ; fcerfpcr'* 
 
 ten, to bar up or out ; tommitt'Cftt/ to wall up, &c. 
 
 (4.) Putting or coming into a condition ; as, fceval'tdt, to 
 grow obsolete, from ait, old ; Wvfdng'CVJt, to lengthen, from 
 tang, long ; fccrftiv'jen, to shorten, from fttrj, short ; ttetctr's 
 men, to grow poor, from arm, poor ; VCVC'fccln, to ennoble, from 
 e'fccl, noble ; toevg&t'tmt, to deify, from (Sett, God ; fcevbvtV* 
 t>Cin, to fraternize, from 33w't>CV, brother, &,c. Sometimes it 
 adds force to the primitive ; as, l)CVCf)'VCn, to venerate, from 
 cfy'ien, to honor ; fccvfpot'tcn, to mock, from fpot'tCtt, to jeer; 
 fccdaclj'cn, to deride, from fadj'CU, to laugh : ttcvlci'fyen, to 
 grant, from lei'fyen, to lend, &c. 
 
 3d* denotes a thorough separation of the parts ; as, jcvbrcdj'- 
 Cit, to break in pieces; jcrfclwiCt'tCl'll; to dash in pieces; 
 jemU'tCU, to shake in pieces ; jerjU'Ctt'cn, to dissipate ; gttjtf'* 
 VCH, to destroy ; jevfcl)nct'fccn, to cut to pieces. 
 
 The particles Wt'htt, against, and fyin'ter, behind, though 
 inseparable in composition, are employed as distinct words. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] COMPOUND VERBS. Ill 
 
 Verbs compounded with mt6, which answer to the English 
 mis and dis y commonly take the augment ge before the partici- 
 ple, and the preposition $tt before the infinitive ; as, misbil'* 
 ligen, to disapprove, getttigbil'Uget, disapproved, ju miebtl'li-' 
 gen, to disapprove ; misbrau'eijen, to misuse, gcmte'braudjt, 
 misused, ju miSbvau'djcn, to misuse. 
 
 Some few neuter and active verbs drop the participial aug- 
 ment gc; as, mi&fMtn, to displease, es l)at miv misfal'leu, 
 it has displeased me : miSlci'tcn, to mislead, mtSlct'tet, misled ; 
 mi^Iing'cn, to fail, eg i|t mighmg'en, it has failed ; mtgra'tfyeu, 
 to miscarry, eg t|t ttttgva'tfyen, it has miscarried ; mtg'fcer= 
 fiefyen, to misunderstand, man t)&t e^ mig'kerltanc-en, it has 
 been misunderstood. 
 
 4. Some prepositions are both separable and inseparable, 
 as, tmvd), through; Vita, about; ft'bcr, over; to which may 
 be added rcie'fcet', again. The first three are separable in 
 the i?itransitive } and inseparable in the transitive sense of the 
 verb. Thus, DttTctybreclKtt, intrans. sep. to break through; 
 er brtdjt t>Utd), he breaks through ; &urcf)'gcbvodjcn, having 
 broken through : but et'Wag totvd)bvcd)'cn, trans, insep. to 
 break through a thing ; ev &Ul*djbrid)t' et'ne WflMtt, he breaks 
 through a wall; fcUVclbvodj'Ctt, being broken through. Thus, 
 Um'laufen, intrans. sep. to go or run round ; er taitft Itm, he 
 runs round ; UttVgelaufen, having run round : but tt'wa6 Utn- 
 iau'fen, trans, insep. to run round a thing ; ei* ttmtattft' t>te 
 ©tafct, he runs round the town ; umlau'fcn, being run round. 
 Thus, iVbevfe^en, intrans. sep. to leap or pass over ; et* fe£t 
 U'bev, he leaps over ; tVbcrgefe^t, having passed over : but 
 itbevfet'jen, trans, insep. to translate ; er ftbevfe^t' bie bi'tcn 
 ©(bvtft'jUller, he translates the ancient authors ; ubevfe^t', 
 translated. 
 
 QOBie'fcec in composition is separable in the proper sense, 
 but inseparable in the figurative sense ; as, VMe'fcevfyofen, prop, 
 sep. to fetch back ; id) fyol'te eg nne'Der, I fetched it back : 
 but nnet>evt)o'(ert, figur. insep. to repeat; id) nnefcevfyof'te t>te 
 QBov'te, I repeated the words. 
 
 In the above verbs the accent is laid upon the particle when 
 it is separable, but upon the verb when it is inseparable. 
 
112 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 5. Verbs compounded with nouns or adverbs are mostly 
 inseparable ; but take the augment ge in the participle ; as, 
 
 Infinitive. Pres. Ind. Participle. 
 
 sfiatfy'fdjfoaw/ to consult, icb ratfy'fdtfage. geratf)'fcl)faget. 
 Zfnt'roovten, to answer. id) ant'roorte. geant'roortet. 
 
 ftrg'wofynen, to suspect. 
 grol)locteu, to exult. 
 
 gTulyjtutfen, to breakfast, 
 gud^'fcftroanjen, to fawn. 
 J^an&'fyaben, to handle. 
 J^ei'vatfyen, to marry, 
 iieb'dttgeht, to ogle, 
 iieb'fofeu, to caress. 
 SDTutfy'mafeu, to conjecture 
 
 So the following ; 
 
 CUtacf falbern, to quack. 
 SHafc'bredjen, to break on the 
 
 wheel. 
 SKedtf'fertigen, to justify. 
 \Xt'ti}tiUn, to judge. 
 ttt'ftm&en, to testify. 
 •^XBeif'fagen, to prophesy, 
 ^ett'eifent, to emulate. 
 'IBillfafy'ren, to gratify. 
 
 Verbs compounded with fooff, drop the augment ge ; as, 
 kollen'fcen, to finish ; imp. id) boficu'bete, I finished ; part, bol- 
 Un'btt, finished : so, bOtlbnug'CU, to bring about ; fcolljie'fyeu, 
 to execute ; footfffreCfett/ to accomplish ; fcollfltfy'veu, to con- 
 summate. 
 
 List of the principal Particles with ivhich Compound Verbs 
 
 are formed. 
 
 1. The following particles are generally inseparable from 
 the verbs. 
 
 after 
 
 as, afterrefceu, 
 
 to backbite. 
 
 be 
 
 befeeufen, 
 
 reflect, consider. 
 
 emp 
 
 empfana/cn, 
 
 receive. 
 
 ent 
 
 entftc'fyen, 
 
 arise. 
 
 er 
 
 erftn'fcen, 
 
 invent. 
 
 W 
 
 gefcei'fyen, 
 
 prosper. 
 
 Jointer 
 
 fyiutevMei'ben, 
 
 remain behind. 
 
 mis 
 
 taisfaVUn, 
 
 displease. 
 
 fcer 
 
 feerjcfj'ren, 
 
 consume. 
 
 fcerab 
 
 fcevabfolgen, 
 
 deliver. 
 
 Pentad) 
 
 toevnadj'lafllgcn, 
 
 neglect. 
 
 fcerun 
 
 Devun'ctyrcn, 
 
 dishonor. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 uv 
 
 jer 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 113 
 
 fcotlbring'en, 
 
 ur'tfyeilen, 
 
 jerjU'ren, 
 
 to complete, 
 judge, 
 destroy. 
 
 2. The following are the principal particles, which in cer- 
 tain tenses before mentioned (page 104), are generally to be 
 separated from the verbs. 
 
 at 
 
 auf 
 
 fcafcotv 
 
 oarun'ter 
 
 fcurd) 
 
 fort 
 
 ijeim 
 
 tyerab' 
 
 fyerbei' 
 
 fyernad)' 
 
 fyenuvter 
 
 ijinab' 
 
 fyinaus' 
 
 in'nen 
 
 nie'oer 
 
 fiber em' 
 
 fcor 
 
 korft'ber 
 roie'Der 
 
 an 
 
 m$ 
 
 oafur' 
 
 oaroi'oer 
 
 ein 
 
 fur 
 
 j?in 
 
 ijerauf 
 
 foettotrd)' 
 
 tjeru'ber 
 
 fyerbor' 
 
 fcinan' 
 
 fjimVber 
 
 mit 
 
 ob 
 
 un'tcr 
 
 tor an' 
 
 fcorbei' 
 
 l« 
 
 anfyeim' 
 
 bet, oabei' 
 
 oabor' 
 
 oajroifdyen 
 
 einfyer' 
 
 gieid) 
 
 tyer 
 
 fyerauS' 
 
 herein' 
 
 fyerum' 
 
 jjerjur 
 
 Jjinauf 
 
 nad) 
 
 fiber 
 
 Doll 
 
 fc or auS' 
 
 roeg 
 
 juroi'oer 
 
 These particles have a meaning of themselves, independ- 
 ent of the verbs with which they are connected ; some of 
 their meanings may be seen in the following examples ; 
 
 21b'fdjreibcn, to copy, from fdjrei'ben, to write, ab, from. 
 
 2(ug'fdjreiben, to extract, 
 
 ifaf baueu, to erect, 
 Sltadj'gefyen, to go after, 
 SCTCit'nefymen, to take along 
 
 with, 
 9tie'Derrennen,torundown, 
 J^er'bringen, to bring hither 
 
 or here, 
 
 10* 
 
 fd)rei'ben, to write, au$, out 
 
 of, or from. 
 
 ban' en, to build, auf, up. 
 ge'fyen, to go, nadj, after, 
 nefy'men, to take, mit, with. 
 
 ren'nen, to run, nie'oer, down. 
 
 bring'en, to bring, fyer, hither. 
 
114 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 J^er^ot'bringcn, to bring king'en, to bring, fyctDor', 
 
 forth, forth. 
 
 §in't)tlfm, to forward, fyel'fen, to help, ()itt, forth. 
 
 ^inu'berfommen, to come fom'men, to come, fyhuVber, 
 
 over, over, 
 
 ttn'tevftnfen, to go to the jtnf en, to sink, un'Uv, under, 
 bottom, 
 
 trberftiefen, to overflow, flie'fm, to flow, iVbcr, over. 
 
 SSor'Ifommen, to occur, rorn'mew, to come, fcor, before. 
 
 SJonin'gcfyen, to go before, ge'fycn, to go, boran', before. 
 
 SSovbei'gefycn, to pass by, ge'ljen, to go, fcorfcri', by. 
 
 ^cg'nct^men, to take away, nefy'men, to take, roeg, away. 
 
 9Q3ie'&etfommen, to come fom'men, to come, nne'fcer, 
 
 again, again. 
 
 3tt'bet(fctt/ to bite eagerly, bciffen, to bite, $U, at. 
 
 § 7. AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 -Oa'ben, to have, fein (fci;n), to be, and roer'&en, to become, 
 are the three most important auxiliary verbs. 
 
 VBtt'Hn, is used as an auxiliary with every verb ; fya'bett, 
 with all the active and most of the neuter verbs ; and feitt 
 with many neuter verbs. 
 
 These auxiliary verbs are also used as such with one an- 
 other, to form the supplementary tenses of each of them ; and 
 their supplementary as well as their original tenses are used 
 with other verbs. Thus the future of fya'ben, id) M?U fya'bett, 
 I shall have, is a simple supplementary tense, formed by 
 joining the present id) ttm*'be, to the infinitive fya'ben ; and 
 this future of fya'ben used with gelicbt', loved, the past partici- 
 ple of lic'bctt, to love, forms a compound supplementary tense, 
 
 the compound future of lie'ben, id) roer'fce geliebt' fya'ben, I 
 
 shall have loved. 
 
 By thus joining the auxiliary verbs to others, the following 
 supplementary tenses are formed : 
 
 1. The two supplementary past tenses, viz. the perfect and 
 the pluperfect. 
 
 2. The two future tenses, viz. the simple and the compound. 
 
AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 115 
 
 PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 3. The two conditional tenses, viz. the simple and the 
 compound. 
 
 4. All the tenses of the passive voice. 
 
 The perfect is formed by joining the past participle of the 
 verb to the present, and the pluperfect by joining the 
 same to the imperfect, of the auxiliary k)(x'bcxx, or the auxiliary 
 fein ; as, id) fya'fce gettebt', I have loved ; id) fyat'te geliebt', 
 I had loved ; and id) bin geveifV, I have travelled ; id) roar 
 gevctft'/ I had travelled. (The auxiliary fcin, in all neuter 
 verbs, is Englished to have.) 
 
 The simple future is formed of the present indicative or 
 subjunctive of roer'&en, joined to the present infinitive of the 
 verb ; as, id) mt'tt lit'btn, I shall love : and the simple 
 conditional is formed of the imperfect subjunctive of roet'fcen, 
 joined to the present infinitive of the verb ; as, id) roitr'fcC 
 iit'bttt, I should love. The compound future is formed of 
 the simple future of fya'bcn, or of fein, joined to the past 
 participle of the verb ; as, id) roev'fce geltebt' tjd'imx, I shall 
 have loved ; icl) ton'M gcvcijl' fein, I shall have travelled : 
 and the compound conditional is formed of the simple con- 
 ditional of fya'bcn, or of fein, joined to the past participle of 
 the verb; as, icf) roiir'&C geltebt' tyx'bm, I should have loved ; 
 id) roftr'&e gcceijt' fein, I should have travelled. 
 
 The different tenses of the passive are formed by joining 
 the past participle of the verb to the original and the supple- 
 mentary tenses of roeffcen, which then is Englished to be ; 
 
 as, id) roer'fce geltebt', I am loved ; icl) wur'&e geltebt', I was 
 loved. 
 
 The following paradigms contain the original and the sup- 
 plementary tenses of fya'ben, fcin, and roer'fcen. 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb, QtibtXX, to have. 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Prcs. fya'ben, to have. Pres. fya'ben&, having. 
 
 Perf. gefyabt' fya'fcen, to have Past, gefyabt', had. 
 had. 
 
116 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) f)a'6e, I have. 
 
 t>U fyajt, thou hast. 
 
 Ct*, fte, e£ fyat, he, she, it has. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 wir fya'ben, we have. 
 
 it)t fyabt or fya'bet, you have. 
 
 fte fya'fcen, they have. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) fya'&e, I may have. 
 
 t>U §&'bt\t, thou may st have. 
 
 ev, fte, e^ fya'be, he, she, it 
 
 may have. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Xt>iv fya'fren, we may nave, 
 ifyv fya'lu't, you may have, 
 fte I) a' 6 en, they may have. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) fyat'te, I had. 
 
 felt fyat'tejt, thou hadst. 
 CV ^t'U, he had. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tt>ir fyat'tett, we had. 
 itjt tyxt'ttt, you had. 
 fte fyrtt'ten, they had. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) tybt'tt, I might have. 
 
 t>U fyat'tejt, thou mightst have. 
 
 er tyfrt'U, he might have. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 tOXX fydt'ten, we might have, 
 ifyr tyat'ttt, you might have, 
 fte fy&t'tett, they might have. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) ha'be gcfyabt', 1 have had. id) fya'be gefyabt', I may have 
 
 had. 
 
 tu tjtft gefyabt', &c. tot tja'fceff gcfyabr, &c. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) fjat'te geljabt', I had had. id) Ij&t'te gefyabt', I might 
 
 have had. 
 
 bu fjat'tcft gefyabt', &c. t»u (jfa'tejt ge^6f, &c. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 117 
 
 Simple Future. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) mx't>C t)A'bm, I shall have, id) wcr'&e fya'ben, I shall have. 
 
 i>u xt>ix\\ fya'ben, thou wilt t>u rocr'&c|t fya'ben, thou wilt 
 
 have. have. 
 
 tx ttrivt> fja'ben, he will have. tx xotx'bt fya'ben, he will have. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 wix wer'&en fya'ben, we shall nut mx'tim fya'ben, we shall 
 
 have. have. 
 
 tf)x mx'bet fya'ben, you will ifyt* roev'fcet fya'ben, you will 
 
 have. have. 
 
 fte rocr'&en fya'ben, they will fie mt'totn fya'ben, they will 
 
 have. have. 
 
 Compound Future. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) roev'be gefyabt' fya'ben, I shall id) roer'&e gefyabt' fya'ben, I 
 
 have had. shall have had. 
 
 fru mx\l getjabt' fya'beu, &c. i>u nw&cjt gefyabt' Ija'ben, &c. 
 
 (Conditional Tenses.) 
 
 Indicative and Subjunctive. 
 Simple Conditional. Compound Conditional. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) nnV&c fya'ben, I should id) nnVfce gefyabt' fya'bcn, I 
 
 have. should have had. 
 
 t>u roitv'bejt fya'ben, thou t>u wutr'Dcjt gefyabt' fya'ben, 
 
 wouldst have. &c. 
 
 ev roitr'be fya'ben, he would 
 
 have. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 xoix Ycux'bcn fya'ben, we should have. 
 it)f ttnif'fcet tnVben, you would have, 
 fte ttmv'fcett tijcCbtn, they would have. 
 
113 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular, 
 
 fya'be (t>tt), have (thou). 
 tjtfbt et'/ let him have. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fya'ben mv, let us have, 
 fyabt or r/a'bet (\t)V), have 
 
 (you), or do (you) have, 
 fya'ben fie, let them have. 
 
 Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, fya'beit/ to have. 
 
 This verb, as well as all others, may be conjugated in four 
 forms ; that is, 
 
 Affirmatively, id) tytfkt, I have. 
 
 Negatively, id) fya'be \\id)t, I have not. 
 
 Interrogatively, fya'be id) ? have I ? 
 
 Negatively and interrogatively, fya'bc id) ttic()t ? have I not ? 
 
 So likewise through all the tenses, as in the following 
 exercise. 
 
 Pres. Ind. Have I ? Have I not ? He has not. Hast 
 thou ? She has not. Have we ? We have not. You have 
 not. Have they ? They have not. Have they not ? 
 
 Imp. Had I? He had. Had she not? 
 Had you not ? They had. Had they not ? 
 
 Had we not? 
 
 Perf. Have I had ? Hast thou not had ? Has he not 
 had ? Have you not had ? She has not had. Have they not 
 had ? We have not had ? Have they had 1 They have not 
 had. 
 
 Pluperfect. I had not had. Had I not had ? Hadst thou 
 had ? She has not had. Had he not had ? Had we had ? 
 They had not had. They had had. Had they not had ? 
 
 Simple Put. Shall I not have ? Wilt thou have ? I shall 
 not have. We shall not have. Will you not have ? You 
 will not have. 
 
 Compound Put. He will have had. They will not have 
 had. Will they not have had ? We shall have had. Will 
 you not have had ? 
 
 / 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 119 
 
 Simple Cond. Should I have? Thou wouldst not have. 
 Would he not have 1 We should not have. Should we have ? 
 Should we not have ? You would not have. Would you not 
 have 1 They would not have. Would they not have 1 
 
 Compound Cond. I should not have had. Would he not 
 have had ? We should not have had. Would you have had 1 
 They would not have had. 
 
 Pres. Subj. I may have. I may not have. Thou mayst 
 not have. We may have. We may not have. They may 
 have. They may not have. 
 
 Imp. Thou mightst not have. Hadst* thou not. Had 
 we. Had we not. Had you not. Had they not. They 
 might not have. 
 
 Perf. Thou mayst not have had. We may not have had. 
 You may have had. They may not have had. 
 
 Plup. I might not have had. Thou mightst have had. 
 He might have had. He might not have had. We might 
 not have had. They might not have had. 
 
 Imper. Have (thou). Let us have. Have (ye). Let 
 them not have. 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb @eilt, (@C^tt), to be. 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Pres. fein, to be. Pres. fci'Cttfc, being. 
 
 Perf. geroc'fen fcin, to have Past, geroe'fcu, been, 
 been. 
 
 * The phrases beginning with the verb are not interrogative 
 in the subjunctive mood, but have the same meaning as when 
 preceded by if. 
 
120 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) (nit, I am. 
 i)U M|t, thou art. 
 
 cr, fit, e£ ift, he, she, it is. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Wit' ftnt>, we are. 
 if*a* fctfc, you are. 
 fte ftu^ / they are. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) fei, I may be. 
 
 t>U fei'ejt, or fet|f, thou mayst 
 
 be. 
 CI* fei/ he may be. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 roil* fci'ett, or fein, we may be. 
 \t)V fei'tt, or feit>, you may be. 
 fie fci'CU, or fetlt, they may be. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) roai*, I was. idj rod're, I might be. 
 
 &tt ro<U'|t, or roa'rejT, thou wast. t>u rod'reft, thou mightst be. 
 Ct* roar, he was. CI* rod'fC, he might be. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 roil* roci'rctt, we were, 
 ifyl* roa'iet, you were, 
 fte ttHVl'en, they were. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 roil* rod'fen, we might be. 
 tfyt* rod'vet, you might be. 
 fte rod'fen, they might be. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) tun geroe'fen, I have been, id) fei geroe'fen, I may have 
 
 been. 
 
 tot bijt geroe'fen, &,c. tot fci'c|f geroe'fen, &c 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) roai* geroefen, I had been, id) rod're geroe'fen, I might 
 
 have been. 
 
 tot roartf geroe'fen, &c. tot rod'vett geroe'fen, &c. 
 
 l\ 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 121 
 
 Simple Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) roev'be fein, I shall be. 
 &U mx\l fcin, thou wilt be. 
 et* rohrt> fein, he will be. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 voix roet'fcen fein, we shall be. 
 ifyr. mev^ct fcin, you will be. 
 fte roev'fcen fctn, they will be. 
 
 Singular, 
 id) mx'H fein, I shall be: 
 tut tt>cv't>cft fein, thou wilt be. 
 er mx'u fein, he will be. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Yoix XOtt'ten fein, we shall be. 
 it)x n>er'&ct fcin, you will be. 
 fte roev'fceu fcin, they will be. 
 
 Compound Future. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) roer'be gcroe'fcn fcin, I shall id) tucr'be gcrcc'fcn fcin, I shall 
 
 have been. have been. 
 
 bu w\x\l gcroc'fen fcin, &c. fcn roer'fccjl gcrcc'fcn fein, &c. 
 
 (Conditional Tenses.) 
 
 Indicative and Subjunctive. 
 Simple Conditional. Compound Conditional. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 U§ rottr'be fein, I should be. 
 t>n nmv'fccjf fein, &,c. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) nntr'fce gcroe'fen fcin, I 
 
 should have been. 
 
 tm nmr'&ejt gcroc'fen fcin, &c. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 fct (t>n), be (thou), 
 fet ev, let him be. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 fei'en, or fcin wiv, let us be. 
 fcifc (it)r), be (you), or do 
 
 (you) be. 
 fcin or fei'en fte, let them be. 
 
 11 
 
122 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, <&ti\\, to be. 
 
 Pres. Ind. Art thou? Is he not? We are not. Are they 
 not? They are not. Are you not? You are. Are we 
 not? 
 
 Imp. Was I? Thou wast not. It was not. She was. 
 Were we ? Were we not ? Were you not ? You were not. 
 Were they ? 
 
 Perf. I have been. Have I been? I have not been. 
 Have I not been ? Hast thou been ? She has been. Has 
 she not been? It has been. He has not been. Have we 
 been ? Have you not been ? They have been. They have 
 not been. Have they not been ? 
 
 Plup. Had I been ? I had not been. Thou hast been. 
 She had not been. Had he not been ? Had he been ? You 
 had not been. They had not been. Had they been ? Had 
 they not been ? We had not been. Had we not been ? 
 
 Simple Fut. I shall not be. Wilt thou not be ? He will 
 be. Will she not be ? It will not be. You will be. Will 
 you not be ? Shall we be ? We shall not be. They will not 
 be. Will they not be 1 
 
 Comp. Fut. Shall I not have been ? Wilt thou not have 
 been. He will have been. Will she not have been? It 
 will not have been. We shall have been. Shall we not have 
 been ? You will not have been. Will they not have been ? 
 
 Simple Cond. Should I be ? Wouldst thou not be ? It 
 would be. Would she not be ? He would not be. We 
 should not be. Would you not be ? You would not be. 
 Would they not be ? They would not be. 
 
 Comp. Cond. I should not have been. Would it not have 
 been ? Should we not have been ? We should not have 
 been. Would you not have been 1 They would not have 
 been. 
 
 Pres. Subj. I may not be. Thou mayst be. It may not 
 be. He may not be. We may be. You may not be. They 
 may not be. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 123 
 
 Imp. I might not be. She might be. It might not be. 
 We might not be. You might be. They might not be. 
 
 Perf. I may not have been. Thou mayst have been. He 
 may have been. It may have been. We may not have been. 
 You may have been. They may not have been. 
 
 Plup, I might not have been. Thou mightst have been. 
 She might not have been. We might have been. You might 
 have been. They might not have been. 
 
 Simple Put. I shall not be. Thou wilt be. He will not 
 be. It will be. We shall not be. You will not be. They 
 will not be. 
 
 Comp. Put. I shall not have been. She will have been. 
 We shall not have been. You will not have been. They will 
 not have been. 
 
 Imper. Be (thou). Let him be. Let him not be. Let 
 us not be. Be, or do (you) be. Do (you) not be. Let them 
 not be. 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb, QODer'feen, to become. 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Pres. wet'fecn, to become. Pres. ttCf'feenfe, becoming. 
 
 Perf. genWfem fcitt, to have Past, gCttOV'feett, become, 
 become. 
 
 Indicative. - Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) WCtr'fee, I become. id) mt'U, I may become. 
 
 felt n>ir|t, thou becomest. feu wcr'feeft, thou mayst be- 
 
 come, 
 er, fte, c$ roivfe, he, she, it er, fie, e£ rocr'fec, he, she, it 
 becomes. may become. 
 
124 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 roix roer'ben, we become. tt»il* wetr'tatt, we may become. 
 
 it)V WU'btt, you become. it)f roev'fcct, you may become, 
 
 fie tt>et w fcen, they become. fie roer'fcCU, they may become. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) ttntV'fcC, or »ir&, I became. ic() ttnVfce, I might become, 
 
 tat mw'bcft, or wavbjt/ thou tat ttHtf'talt, thou mightst be- 
 
 becamest. come. 
 
 Ct* nwv'&e, or n>avt>, he be- tx nntv'ta, he might become. 
 
 came. 
 
 Plural. Plural. 
 
 tOtX \mx"btn, we became. Wit wht'btXl, we might be- 
 
 come. 
 
 if; l* ttmr'&et, you became. it)X roftv'&Ct, you might bo- 
 
 come. 
 
 fie ttUtV'fcen, they became. fie nnVfcen, they might be- 
 
 come. 
 
 Perfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) bin gewov'tan, I have be- idj fet gcroor'tan, I may have 
 
 come. become. 
 
 tat bift geroov'tan, &c. tat feift geroor'&en, &c. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) J»dv geroov'tan, I had be- id) ro&'ve geroov'tan, I might 
 
 come. have become. 
 
 tat n>a'vc(l genWfcen, &c. tat ro&'i-ejt geroov'tan, &c 
 
 First Future. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) roev'ta roev'tan, I shall be- id) wcv'fce roer'tan, I shall be- 
 come, come, 
 tat nuvjt roev'tan, &c. tat mx'Mft rcev'tan, &c. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 125 
 
 Second Future. 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) wx'U geroov'fcen fein, I ic() roev't>e geroor'fccn fein, I 
 
 shall have become. shall have become. 
 
 tin nnv|t geroov'&en fein, &c. Dtt rocu'&ejt geroou'fcen fein, &c. 
 
 (Conditional Tenses.) 
 
 Indicative and Subjunctive. 
 
 Simple Conditional. Compound Conditional. 
 
 Singular. Singular. 
 
 id) n»Vt>e mx'ton, I should id) nht'te gercov'fccn fcin, I 
 
 become. should have become. 
 
 fcn ttnVfcejt roer'fcen, &c tot nnVfceit scroor'&en fein, 
 
 &c. 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 XOCt'Hn »it?/ let us become. 
 tt>et w t>e (t>tt), become (thou). tt>CV't>Ct (ifyr), become (you) or 
 
 do (you) become. 
 WX'tt er, let him become. W&en fte, let them become. 
 
 Exercises on the Auxiliary Verb, ^ct'feen, to become. 
 
 Pres. Ind. Does he become 1 Does she not become ? 
 Thou dost not become. Do we become? Do you not be- 
 come ? They do not become. 
 
 Imp. I did not become. Did I not become 1 Did we be- 
 come ? She became. She did not become. Did we not 
 become ? Did you not become ? They did not become. 
 
 Perf. I have become. Have I not become ? Hast thou 
 not become ? She has not become. Have we not become ? 
 Have you not become ? Have they become ? 
 
 11* 
 
126 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK. I. 
 
 Plup. I had become. Had I become ? Had I not be- 
 come? I had not become. Hadst thou become? He had 
 not become. Had she not become ? Had we become ? Had 
 you not become? They had become. They had not be- 
 come. Had they become ? Had they not become ? 
 
 Simple Fut. Shall I become ? Shall we become ? Wilt 
 thou become? Wilt thou not become? He will become. 
 She will not become. Will you become ? They will not 
 become. 
 
 Comp. Fut. I shall have become. Will he have become ? 
 Shall we have become? You will not have become. Will 
 they have become ? They will not have become. Will they 
 not have become ? 
 
 Simple Cond. Should I become ? Wouldst thou become ? 
 It would become. Would he not become ? We should not 
 become. Would you become ? They would not become. 
 
 Comp. Cond. I should have become. Would it have 
 
 become? Should we have become? We should not have 
 
 become. Would you not have become ? You would have 
 become. Would they have become ? 
 
 Pres. Subj. I may not become. She may not become. 
 Thou mayst become. He may not become. We may not 
 become. They may become. 
 
 Imp. I might become. Thou mightst become. She might 
 not become. We might n»t become. You might become. 
 They might not become. 
 
 Perf. I may have become. He may not have become. 
 You may have become. They may not have become. 
 
 Plup. Thou mightst have become. She might not have 
 become. It might not have become. You might have be- 
 come. They might not have become. 
 
 Imper. Become thou. Become (you) not. Let them be- 
 come. Let them not become. 
 
 / 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 12^ 
 
 A. Supplementary Tenses of Active and Neuter Verbs. 
 1. Supplementary Tenses of a Verb conjugated with Jpa'beit 
 
 Irifin. iit'Utl, to love. 
 
 Pres. id) iit'bt. Imp. id) (kb'te. Imperat. {ii'bi tot. 
 
 Pres. Part. (ie'6ent>. Past Part. geUcbt'. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Perfect. 
 gcliebt' fyci'ben, to have loved. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Perfect. 
 id) \)<X'bt geftcbt', I have loved, id) fya'bc geliebt', I have loved. 
 
 Du fyaft getiebt', &c. tot fya'bejt gdicbt', &c. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 id) tjdt'tt geliebt 7 , I had loved, id) fyht'tt gcficbt', I had loved, 
 tot fjat'tejt gcfiebt', &c. t>tt fydt'tejt gcliebt', &c 
 
 Simple Future. 
 
 id) rccv'fce (ie'bcn, I shall love, id) mv'bt lichen, I shall love, 
 tot rrnvjt (ie'bcn, &c. tot roer'toft Ue'bcn, &c 
 
 Compound Future. 
 
 id) recv'fce gctiebt' fya'ben, I id) roer'&e geliebt' fya'ben, I 
 shall have loved. shall have loved. 
 
 fcu roirjt geliebt' fya'ben, &c. tot reev'toft geliebt' \)<x'U\\, &c 
 
 Simple Conditional. 
 
 id) roftt'fce lie'ben, I should love, 
 tot wut'&ejt lie'ben, &c. 
 
128 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 Compound Conditional. 
 
 id) xtxxx'tz geliebt' fya'kn, I should have loved, 
 fcu nntv'&eft geliefct' fya'ben, &c. 
 
 Exercises on Active and Neuter Verbs conjugated with JFJa'&eiU 
 
 I have hoped, 
 
 Have I been zealous ? 
 
 I have not seen, 
 
 Have I not trembled 1 
 
 Thou hast quaked, 
 
 Thou hast not praised, 
 
 Hast thou not finished 1 
 
 It has thundered, 
 
 Has he not mentioned 1 
 
 Has she inquired 1 
 
 Has she not been penurious? 
 
 We have adorned, 
 
 Have we not slept ? 
 
 Have you not suffered ? 
 
 You have not lived, 
 
 They have not blossomed, 
 
 Had I not starved ? 
 
 Hast thou pined 1 
 
 Thou hast not found, 
 
 It had been worth, 
 
 Had she known, 
 
 He had not stood, 
 
 Had he not sat ? 
 
 It had not frozen, 
 
 We had not dreamed, 
 
 They had been called, 
 
 They had not grown old, 
 
 Had they demanded ? 
 
 fyof feu, to hope. 
 Ct'few, to be zealous, 
 fc'fyen, irr. to see. 
 Jtt'tmt, to tremble, 
 bc'bcn, to quake. 
 io'btn, to praise, 
 eu'fcl'tt, to finish. 
 fcOU'llcni/ to thunder, 
 etro&b'nen, to mention. 
 fot*'fcl)en, to inquire, 
 fvtv'gcn, to be penurious, 
 fcfomuc'fatt, to adorn, 
 fdjta'fcii/ irr. to sleep, 
 (ei'fccn, irr. to suffer. 
 Wbtti, to live. 
 Mft'fycn, to blossom, 
 fcat'ten, to starve. 
 fdjmadytcU; to pine, 
 ftn'fcen, irr. to find, 
 tau'geit/ to be worth. 
 Wif'feit; mix. to know, 
 jte'fyett, irr. to stand, 
 jlt'jen, irr. to sit. 
 ftic'vcn, irr. to freeze, 
 tr&u'mcn, to dream, 
 fyet'fcn, irr. to be called. 
 al'ttXXi, to grow old. 
 foment, to demand. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 129 
 
 2. Supplementary Tenses of a Verb conjugated with ©eitt. 
 
 Infin. SHci'fen, to travel. 
 
 Pres. id) rci'fc. Imp. id) rei'fle. Imperat. rci'fc tou 
 
 Pres. Part, rci fc«K Past Part. gcmjV. 
 
 Infinitive. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 gCVCift' fcin, to have travelled. 
 
 Indicative. Subjunctive. 
 
 Perfect, 
 
 id) tun gcrcijV, I have travel- id) fei gercijl', I have travel- 
 led, led. 
 
 Du bijt aereijV, &c. t>« fei'etf screijV, &c. 
 
 P/wper/ec£. 
 
 ic^ ttar gCVCijV, I had travel- id) rofc've gereijV, I had travel- 
 led, led. 
 
 t>n aa'reji geveijV, &c tot a&'reft gcvcijV, &c. 
 
 Simple Future. 
 
 xd) wer'fce VCt'fcn, I shall travel, id) rocr'&e VCifcn, I shall travel, 
 tot roivjt rei'fett; &c. tot rocr'&ejt vci'fcn, &c. 
 
 Compound Future. 
 
 id) wcr'be geretfi' fcin, I shall id) mtt'U gcrcijV fcin, I shall 
 
 have travelled. have travelled. 
 
 tot roirjt gereijV fcin, &c. fru »er'&e|l gcrctjV fcin, &c. 
 
130 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 Simple Conditional. 
 
 id) roiVbe m'fen, I should travel, 
 bit voftx'Hfi m'fen, &c 
 
 Compound Conditional. 
 
 id) ttnVfce geteijV fein, I should have travelled. 
 t»u rouv'fcejt gcvcijV fcin, &,c. 
 
 Exercises on the Neuter Verbs conjugated with ©ettt. 
 
 I have stayed, 
 
 Have I not stayed ? 
 
 I have not stayed, 
 
 Hast thou run 1 
 
 Thou hast not climbed, 
 
 Thou hast travelled, 
 
 He has stumbled, 
 
 Has he sailed 1 
 
 He is not come, 
 
 Will they not have gone 1 
 
 Has she followed 1 
 
 It will have burst, 
 
 We have proceeded, 
 
 Have we run 1 
 
 We have not wandered, 
 
 Have we not slidden 1 
 
 You have swum, 
 
 Have you swum ? 
 
 You have not crept, 
 
 Have you not embarked? 
 
 They have ridden, 
 
 Have they ridden ? 
 They have not ridden, 
 Have they not ridden ? 
 I had walked, 
 Had I drawn near ? 
 We should not have fled, 
 Would you have fallen 1 
 Thou hadst slipped, 
 
 Mci'beil/ irr. to stay. 
 
 vcn'ncn, mix. to run. 
 fitm'mcn, irr. to climb, 
 tei'fcn, to travel, 
 jtol'pent, to stumble, 
 fe'oicfn, to sail. 
 fOttl'men, irr. to come. 
 gC'tyCU, irr. to go. 
 
 fof'gen, to follow, 
 ber'jten, irr. to burst, 
 fort'filfyrett, irr. to proceed, 
 iau'fcn, irr. to rim. 
 wan'&mt, to wander, 
 gkt'teit, irr. to slide, 
 fdjnnm'mcn, irr. to swim. 
 
 ftrte'djen, irr. to creep. 
 ettt'fdjiffett/ to embark. 
 VCi'tCH, irr. to ride on horse- 
 back. 
 
 ge'tyCU, irr. to walk, 
 tta'tjev rftc'fen, to draw near. 
 fUc't)Ctt, irr. to flee, 
 fa Wen, irr. to fall. 
 
 fc()lup'feu, to slip. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 131 
 
 Wouldst thou not have sunk ? 
 Thou hadst not penetrated, 
 He had departed, 
 Had he not departed ? 
 It would have darted, 
 Had it not slipped ? 
 We had not pressed, 
 You had not recovered, 
 They had not slunk, 
 
 ftllf'nt, irr. to sink, 
 fcvtng'en, irr. to penetrate. 
 fc()Ci't>cn, irr. to depart. 
 
 fcfncfcu, irr. to dart. 
 fd)(ujyfcu, to slip, 
 fcring'en, irr. to press, 
 genc'fen, irr. to recover. 
 fdj(ei'el) en, irr. to slink. 
 
 3. List of the Neuter Verbs conjugated with £a'6cn. 
 
 Regular Verbs. 
 
 Arisen, to groan. 
 di'ttvn, to grow old. 
 ang'eltt, to angle, 
 anient, to anchor, 
 atty'meil/ to breathe. 
 
 ftct) bal'gen, to fight. 
 
 6e'ten, to pray, 
 bct'tcln, to beg alms. 
 blitt'JCtt, to blink. 
 MlVfyen, to bloom. 
 tu'Um'mcn, to grumble. 
 tMtv'gen, to bail, 
 bu'fen, to suffer for. 
 tuut'ern, to last, to endure, 
 fon'nmi, to thunder. 
 fcur'ftCtt, to be thirsty, or to 
 
 thirst, 
 ei'fcnt/ to be zealous, 
 ei'len, to hasten. 
 ei'tcvn, to suppurate, 
 entfa'gen, to renounce, 
 cv'ben, to inherit. 
 mu'ita, to putrefy. 
 feb len, to fail. 
 tec'frn, to stain. 
 jUt'cl)cn, to curse, 
 fov'fcljcn, to inquire, 
 fiinf'eht, to glimmer. 
 
 g&fy'ncn, to yawn, 
 gan'feln, to juggle, 
 gei'jen, to covet. 
 tjan'Min, to trade. 
 fyrtV'veu, to wait for. 
 fyaufctfyie'ren, to trade, to bus- 
 tle, 
 fyaufl'vcn, to hawk about. 
 (jetrfefcen, to govern. 
 (Jinf'en, to limp. 
 fyoVcfyen, to listen, 
 fyung'cnt, to hunger, 
 fyttp'fen, to leap, 
 fyn'jtcn, to cough. 
 it'ttn, to err. 
 janeVjcn, to shout. 
 HVbcw, to calve. 
 f&ttVpfcu, to combat. 
 faf'gCU/ to be penurious, 
 iei'tttcit, to shoot out, or bud. 
 frv'rcit, to coo, or creak. 
 Haf fen, to cleave, 
 fla'gen, to complain. 
 Hat'fcl)en, to clap, to applaud, 
 ffe'ben, to cleave, or stick. 
 M'gcln, to refine, 
 fnac'fen, to crack. 
 fnWren, to creak. 
 
132 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 [book I 
 
 hlic'hvn, to haggle, to act 
 
 niggardly, 
 fni'en, to kneel. 
 Mkvn, to be unruly, to roll. 
 M'tyeit/ to crow, 
 fra'men, to trade, 
 franf'en, to be ill. 
 htb'ftti, to catch crabs, 
 ftrte'gen, to wage war. 
 Iarf)'Ctt, to laugh. 
 lan'fceU/ to land. 
 Idv'mcn, to make a noise, 
 (au'evn, to watch. 
 [au'ten, to sound. 
 When, to live, 
 mang'dn, to want, 
 tttei'ncn, to mean. 
 nWX'mtln, to grumble. 
 OV'gcltt, to play the hand-organ, 
 ta'fen, to be mad. 
 
 raf ten, to rest. 
 
 tau'djen, to smoke. 
 
 rdu'men, to remove. 
 
 vau 'fcl)cn, to rush. 
 
 rdu'fpcnt, to clear the throat. 
 
 Vt(i)'lUn, to reckon. 
 
 Vtdytcn, to right, to go to law. 
 
 fe'fcCU/ to speak. 
 
 m'fen, to ripen. 
 
 1'Ct'men, to rhyme. 
 
 VU'Htn, to row. 
 
 fdu'men, to tarry. 
 
 fau'fett, to whiz. 
 fctja'Dcn, to hurt. 
 fid) fdjd'mcn, to be ashamed, 
 fdxut'fccnt, to shiver, 
 fdjcv'&en, to joke, 
 fdjim'meln, to mould, 
 fdjhtc'tcn, to swallow. 
 
 fdjmadj'tctt, to languish, 
 fduttat'jcn, to smack. 
 fdjmdfy'Icn, to scold, 
 fcljmau'fcn, to feast, 
 fdnmtt'jen, to soil, to dirty, 
 
 fdjn&kfa, to bill. 
 
 fdjnav'djen, to snore, 
 fdjnat'tmt, to gabble, 
 fdjrodr'men, to swarm. 
 fd)ttnn'fceht, to grow giddy, 
 fdjroit'jen, to sweat, 
 fe'gcht, to sail, 
 feuf jc«, to sigh. 
 fOf'gCU, to care, 
 fpie'len, to play. 
 jtCU'eru, to steer a ship. 
 jftt&i'ren, to study. 
 JKtr'mcu, to storm. 
 Itut'jcn, to butt at. 
 fu'bcln, to soil, 
 fum'men, to hum. 
 fun'fcigcn, to sin. 
 rap'pen, to grope. 
 ttjXe'Mn, to be enthroned, 
 to'bcn, to rage, 
 to'nen, to sound. 
 tttob'tttl, to endeavour. 
 tt'CUt'cnt, to mourn. 
 
 triumpfji'ren, to triumph. 
 ti'5'dchl, to deal in frippery. 
 tt>acl)'cit, to wake, or to be 
 awake. 
 
 roei'uen, to cry. 
 
 mllfatj'tm, to comply. 
 Jft'gcn, to despair, to despond, 
 janf'en, to quarrel. 
 jie'Ien, to aim. 
 jOt'tcln, to stagger. 
 jUf'nnt, to be angry. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 133 
 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 ftd) fccflei'fCtt, to be studious, 
 ftd)' ten, to fight, 
 gcfat'len, to please. 
 g(ei'd)Clt, to resemble, 
 fei'fcn, to scold. 
 fting'en, to sound. 
 
 (ei'fccn, to suffer. 
 vei'ten, to ride. 
 VUl<Vcn, to wrestle, 
 fait' fen, to drink hard. 
 fcl)ci'nen, to appear, 
 fcrjla'fen, to sleep. 
 
 fdman'bcn, to snort, 
 fdn'ci'en, to cry. 
 fcbwei'flen, to be silent, 
 febrmm'men, to swim, 
 fdjroin'&en, to be reduced, to 
 
 dwindle away. 
 fd)tt>6'ren, to swear, 
 fin'nen, to think, to meditate. 
 
 flt'jen, to sit. 
 
 jh'Ct'tcn, to combat. 
 Vevlu'edj'en, to commit a crime. 
 
 4. List of the Neuter Verbs conjugated with ©cill. 
 
 Regular 
 
 ttttS'avtcn, to degenerate, 
 begeci'nen, to meet, 
 bctyau'ven, to continue. 
 crMin^cn, to grow blind, 
 evflvini'men, to grow angry, 
 cvt'al'tcn, to grow cold. 
 evjUv'vcn, to be chilled. 
 evjTau'ncn, to be astonished. 
 flat'tevn, to flit, to flutter, 
 gclang'en, to get, to attain. 
 <Kroot)'nen, to be accustomed. 
 {•'Ict'tcvn, to climb, 
 vci'fen, to travel, 
 tcn'nen, mix. to run. 
 fe'geln, to sail. 
 fcaji'ren, to take a walk. 
 pl'peni, to stumble. 
 
 Verbs. 
 
 jtran'ben, to strand. 
 JH'ait d)c[n, to trip, 
 jhtt'jen, to start. 
 
 tra'ben, to trot. 
 Veval'ten, to grow old. 
 fcevav'men, to grow poor, 
 fcerfwm'men, to grow crooked, 
 fcevlafy'mcn, to grow lame, 
 tocvfait'evn, to grow sour, to 
 sour. 
 
 fccv|inm'men, to grow dumb, 
 fcerroe'fen, to decay, 
 fcevnn I'fccvn, to grow wild. 
 fcerja'gen, to despond. 
 nutn'bebt, to walk. 
 
 roan'fcmt, to wander. 
 
 afr'fatten, to fall down, 
 bcr'ften, to burst, 
 blci'ben, to remain. 
 
 12 
 
 Irregular Verbs. 
 
 cvfrte'vcn, to freeze to death, 
 ctfdjal'len, to resound, 
 erfdjrcc'fcn, to be terrified. 
 
134 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 fafy't'Clt, to ride in a vehicle. 
 
 fallen, to fall, 
 jiie'gcu, to fly. 
 fie'fyen, to flee, 
 flic'fen, to flow, 
 frie'ren, to freeze, 
 gcfcct'fyeu, to prosper. 
 
 ge'ljen, to go. 
 
 gCUC'fcn, to recover, 
 glct'tcrt, to slide, to slip, 
 tlim'mcn, to climb, 
 f emmen, to come. 
 hit'efyn, to creep, 
 fau' fen, to run. 
 Vet'ten, to ride on horseback, 
 vin'nen, to leak, to run. 
 'fdJfct'clKH, to sneak. 
 
 fcfovct'tcn, to stride. 
 
 fdjrocl'fcn, to swell. 
 
 fcljroim'mcu, to swim. 
 
 fdjttHtt'&en, to shrink, to dwin- 
 dle. 
 
 ftt'jeit, to sit. 
 
 fpviug'en, to jump. 
 
 jk'fycn, to stand. 
 
 jtei'gen, to mount. 
 
 flcv'ben, to die. 
 
 VCfbki'clKU, to grow pale. 
 
 ^Ct'lofdycn, to become extin- 
 guished. 
 
 fcerfdjnnn'&en, to disappear, 
 roaclyfen, to grow. 
 n>Ct'c()en, to yield. 
 TOCf'tCtt/ to become. 
 
 Obs. Those verbs which occur in both lists are sometimes 
 conjugated with fya'ben, and sometimes with fein. (See under 
 the next head.) 
 
 5. Of Neuter Verbs conjugated with either Qa'btXl or ©ein, 
 according to their signification. 
 
 1. Some take fyaben, to denote the completion of an ac- 
 tion or a state, and fcin to denote the condition of a thing ; 
 as, 
 
 3)a$ gtn'er fyat ans'gebrannt, the fire has burnt out. 
 
 £>a£ StamtU' ijt attg'gebrciMtf, the chimney is burnt out. 
 
 3)ic ^oty'fcn fya'ben au6 ,/ gc&ampft, the coals have done smoking. 
 
 2>ie gendytigfett i|t anS'getKimpft, the damp is evaporated. 
 
 £Mc (Sv'kt \\i gefvo'ren, the earth is frozen. 
 
 035 ir fya'beit gefro'ren, we have been frozen. 
 
 ©6 t)i\t gefro'ren, it has frozen. 
 
 2. Verbs expressive of motion take fcin, when the place, 
 or the manner of the motion, is referred to ; but take fyil'bcn, 
 when the simple action is designated, or whenever they are 
 used as reflective or reciprocal verbs ; as, 
 
 3d) bin in t>ic @tat>t gmt'ten, I have ridden or rode into the 
 city. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 13) 
 
 25i|? fcn gcgang'cn o'fcct gerit'tcn ? did you walk or ride? 
 
 3d) bin lang'fam gcrit'ten, I have ridden or rode slowly. 
 
 ^d) bin fcCU gan'JClt £ag get* ittCU/ I have been riding the whole 
 
 day. 
 3d) ija'be *>a£ spfcrb gerit'tcn, I have ridden the horse. 
 QODif futfc ilt Die @tat>t geci'Ict, we have hastened into the 
 
 city. 
 ^Biv fya'bcn ttltt &CV @ac()'e geei'Ict, we have hastened with the 
 
 atfair. 
 2)ei* 330'gef ifl in &a$ gefo geflat'tcvt, the bird has fluttered 
 
 into the field. 
 £r t)\\t lang'C gefiat'tert, it has been long fluttering. 
 2)ie SHci'tCV ftllt) fd)0ll auf gefeffen, the horsemen are already 
 
 seated. 
 3d) fya'be t>ie gan'je Sttadjt anfgefeffen, I have sat up the whole 
 
 night. 
 3d) bin in fcclS £ait£ gCgang'cn, I have gone into the house. 
 3d) fyd'bc mid) miVfce gegang'Clt, I have tired myself with 
 
 walking. 
 
 3. Some verbs expressive of motion require fcin when 
 taken in the proper sense, and fya'bcn in the figurative sense ; 
 as, 
 
 ( 2Dtr ffnt> gefau'fen, we have run. 
 
 £>a£ ftfajj i)At gciatl'fcn, the cask has leaked. 
 
 2)ie ibfd'ncn ftni> gefloffen, the tears have flowed. 
 
 2)tc Eftoty'rc fyat gefloffen, the pipe has leaked. 
 
 (£r iff ifym gcfolgt', he has followed him. 
 
 (El* ijat mei'nen ittyUll gcfolgt', he has followed my precepts. 
 
 2)er gcinb i|t in tic ©ta^t gctoutng'cn, the enemy has pene- 
 trated into the city. 
 
 G5v fyat in mid) gcfcvtmg'en, he has urged me. 
 
 QBtv fint) fort'gefafyrcn, we have left or gone on in a vehicle. 
 
 'JBtu ^vVbcn fovt'gefafyrcn jn ar'beiten, we have continued to 
 labor. 
 
136 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 B. Supplementary Tenses of Reflective Verbs. 
 ©id) lic'ben, to love one's self. (See page 98.) 
 
 Infinitive. 
 Perfect. 
 
 fid) gcliebt' fya'JJett/ to have loved one's self. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 id) fya'be mid) gcUcbt', I have id) Ija'bt mid) gelicbt', I have 
 loved myself. loved myself. 
 
 tot fyajt bid) gettcbt', &c. tot tya'bcjt tod) geliebt', &c. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 id) fyat'te mid) gelicfct', I had id) fydt'tc mid) gcficbt', I had 
 
 loved myself. loved myself. 
 
 tot bat'tejt tod) gclicbt', &c. tot fydt'tcji Did) geliebt', &c. 
 
 Simple Future, 
 id) rccv'to mid) lic'bcn, I shall id) nm-'&e mid) fie'bcn, I shall 
 
 love myself. love myself. 
 
 tot rcivft Did) lic'bcn, &,c. tot roev'&efl bid) (ie'ben, &c. 
 
 Compound Future. 
 
 id) rccv'to mid) geliebt' tya'bcn, id) wcv'be mid) gcficbt' fya'ben, 
 
 I shall have loved myself. I shall have loved myself. 
 
 tot nuvft t>id) gcficbt' (ja'bcn, tot roci'toft Did) gclicbt' fya'bcn, 
 
 &C. &.C. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] AUXILIARY VERBS. 137 
 
 Simple Conditional. 
 
 td) ttntv'&e mid) tie'beit, I should love myself, 
 fcu rouv'fcejt t>td) lie'beu, &c. 
 
 Compound Conditional. 
 
 id) ttuv'fce mid) gefiebt' fya'ben, I should have loved myself, 
 fcu roftv'&ejt bid) geliebt' fya'ben, &c. 
 
 C. Supplementary Tenses of Impersonal Verbs. 
 
 The supplementary tenses of impersonal verbs are formed 
 exactly like those of complete (active or reflective) verbs ; as, 
 
 SHcg'nen, to rain. (See page 101.) 
 
 Indicative, perf. e6 t)Clt geveg'net ; pluperf. e£ fyat'te ge= 
 reg'net ; simp. fut. e£ rcivD reg'nen ; comp. fut. e$ <»ivt) ge-- 
 veg'net fya'ben. 
 
 Subjunctive, perf. eg fya'be gefCg'itCt ; pluperf. e£ fyttt'tC 
 
 gcvcg'nct ; simp. fut. e$ mv'U reg'ueu ; comp. fut. es von'U 
 geveg'net fya'ben. 
 
 simp. cond. e£ nntv'be t'cg'nen ; comp. cond. eg yoxxx'U gc-- 
 veg'net fya'ben. 
 
 fc'gent/ to be vexed. (See page 102.) 
 
 Indicative, perf. C6 \)&t mid) gedv'get't ; pluperf. eg tjdt'tt 
 mid) gedv'gevt ; simp. fut. e£ nnrt> mid) dr'gevn ; comp. fut. 
 eg rcivb mid) gedv'gevt fya'bcn. 
 
 Subjunctive, perf. eg fya'be mid) gcdv'gert ; pluperf. eg 
 \)at'u mid) gedv'gevt; simp. fut. eg tvev'fce mid) dv'gcnt; comp. 
 fut. eg rcev'c-e mid) gedv'gevt fya'ben. 
 
 simp. cond. eg tvuv'fce mid) dv'gevn ; comp. cond. eg rouv'fce 
 raid) gedv'gevt fya'ben. 
 
 12* 
 
138 AUXILIARY VERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 ©ic() fctt'fte'fjCtt, to be understood. (See page 103.) 
 Indicative. perf. eg t)Ht fid) fcCVjlau'&Ctt ; pluperf. eg 
 
 fyat'te fid) vevftan'&en ; simp. fut. eg roivt> ftcl) toevjte'fyeu; comp. 
 fut. c^ n>ivt> fid) Devftau'&eu tya'fceu. 
 
 ^Subjunctive, perf. eg fya'be f(c() l>ev|tau'fccu ; plup. eg 
 fydt're ftcl) fcevjTau'fceu ; simp. fut. eg rcev'fce fid) fccrjtc'tyen ; 
 comp. fut. eg nw'Defidj Derflan'^ett &a'6en. 
 
 simp. cond. eg nu'iv'&e ftcl) fcevjte'fyeu ; comp. cond. eg wur'fte 
 fid) Dei-jtaufceu fya'ben. 
 
 D. Supplementary Tenses of Compound Verbs. 
 
 The particle, with which the simple verb is compounded, is 
 never separated from it in any of the supplementary tenses.* 
 Accordingly there is no difference between separable and 
 inseparable compound verbs, with respect to the supplement- 
 ary tenses ; they are formed exactly like those of simple verbs. 
 Examples : 
 
 Tluffyalton, to detain. (See page 105.) 
 
 Infinitive, perf. aufgefyaften fya'bcn. 
 
 Indicative, perf. id) fya'be aufgefyafteu ; pluperf. iff) 
 fyat'te auf gcfyalten ; simp. fut. id) von'U auf fatten; comp. 
 fut. id) roer'fce auf gcfyalten fya'fccn. 
 
 Subjunctive, perf. id) fya'be auf gefyedceu ; pluperf. id) 
 fyat're aufgefyafreu; simp. fut. id) rcev'fce auftjatteu; comp. 
 fut. id) roet'De aufgefyalteu tja'bm. 
 
 simp. cond. id) nn'ir'&e auf fatten ; comp. cond. id) rofir'fce 
 aufgefyatteu fya'beu. 
 
 SBefyaf'teu, to retain. 
 
 Infinitive, perf. frcfyapteu fya'bcn. 
 
 Indicative, perf. id) fya'be befyal'teu; pluperf. id) fyat'tt 
 
 * The reason is obvious ; since all the supplementary tenses 
 are formed by joining the auxiliary verb either to the infinitive 
 mood or to the past participle ; in neither of which does such 
 a separation of the simple verb from the preposition take place. 
 
PART II. CII. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 139 
 
 befyal'tcn ; simp. fut. id) rocv'fce bcfycd'tcu ; comp. fut. id) 
 ttev'fce bctyal'ten fya'ben. 
 
 Subjunctive, perf. icf) fya'be befyal'tcu ; pluperf. id) fyat'te 
 fcctyaf ten ; simp. fut. id) roev'fcc betyal'tcn ; comp. fut. id) 
 ron'U bcfyal'ten fya'ben. 
 
 simp. cond. id) nmv'&c bcfyal'ten; comp. cond. id) nmr'fce 
 befyal'teu fya'beiu 
 
 § 8. passive verbs. 
 
 The passive voice of active verbs is formed by joining 
 the past participle of the verb with the different moods and 
 tenses of the auxiliary tt>cc't>en ; with only this difference, 
 that the first syllable, gc, of the past participle gCWOv'fccn, 
 is dropt in all its combinations with the verb. Thus we say, 
 id) bin gcliebt' rpor'&cn, I have been loved, (instead of id) bin 
 gcliebt gcroovbcn.) 
 
 Conjugation of the Passive Verb, (Gcliebt' roer'&CU, to be loved. 
 
 Infinitive. Participle. 
 
 Pres. gcliebt' roet'fcen, to be gelicbt', loved 
 
 loved. 
 
 Perf. gcliebt' rcov'ben {tin, to 
 
 have been loved. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) rcev'be gelicbt', I am loved. 
 
 fcu mii'ft gelicbt', thou art loved. 
 
 er, fie, or eg nnvfc gcliebt', he, she, or it is loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 »iv mermen gcliebt', we are loved. 
 if)U tt>cv't)Ct gcliebt', you are loved, 
 ftc roev'&Ctt gelicbt', they are loved. 
 
140 PASSIVE VERBS. [BOOK I, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 Singular. 
 
 id) xtxxx'tz or roart> gelicbt', I was loved. 
 
 tW WUV'&cfl: or wav&jt gcliebt', thou wast loved. 
 
 tx nmi*'t>e or n>avt> gcliebt', he was loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 mx mvc'Uu gcliebt', we were loved. 
 \\)x nntv'fcct gelicbt', you were loved, 
 fte nntt'fcen gelicbt', they were loved. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) bin gelicbt' worsen, I have been loved. 
 &tt bijt gcliebt' rcov'ben, thou hast been loved. 
 tt t|t gelicbt' roov'fcen, he has been loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 wix f(nt> gcliebt' tt>ov't>en, we have been loved. 
 \l)x fcit> gelicbt' n?0V>CU, you have been loved. -" 
 jie f(Ht> gelicbt' tt>0V'i>en, they have been loved. 
 
 jP/«per/ec£. 
 
 id) voax gcliebt' tt>or't>cu, I had been loved 
 
 t>tt \Vi\Y\l gcliebt' roov'fcClt, thou hadst been loved. 
 
 ZX Xtxxx gcliebt' worsen, he had been loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 xoix roa'vcn gcliebt' worsen, we had been loved. 
 tl)f iM'vet gcliebt' roov'&en, you had been loved, 
 fte ttHl'veit gcliebt' worsen, they had been loved. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 141 
 
 Simple Future. 
 Singular. 
 
 "& 
 
 id) nw'be geliebt' rocv'frcn, I shall be loved, 
 fctt roivfl <Klic(?t' roer'Dcn, thou wilt be loved. 
 er it>tr£> geliebt' rocr'fcen, he will be loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ttik roev'&Ctt gcltctf Wcr'&Ctt, we shall be loved. 
 ifyr rocr'fcet geliebt' roev'c-en, you will be loved, 
 ftc rocv'&cn geliebt' rocv'&en, they will be loved. 
 
 Compound Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) XDW'bt geliebt' worsen fcin, I shall have been loved. 
 t>U ttirjt gcliebt' roor'&cn fcin, thou wilt have been loved. 
 tv Wil'D geliebt' roov'&CU fcin, he will have been loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 n>ir ttev'&en geliebt' worsen fcin, we shall have been loved. 
 ifyr rccv'c-et geliebt' worsen fcin, you will have been loved, 
 ftc roef'&Cit geliebt' WOr'OCU fcin, they will have been loved. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) tt>ev't>e geliebt', I may be loved. 
 
 bit tt»ev't>C|t geliebt', thou mayst be loved. 
 
 ei* roev'&e geliebt', he may be loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 »il* ttev'feett geliebt', we may be loved. 
 it)f roev'fcet geliebt', you may be loved, 
 fte roev'fcen geliebt', they may be loved. 
 
142 PASSIVE VERBS. [BOOK I 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) ttftV'be geliebt', I might be loved. 
 
 fru rouv'&ejt geliebt', thou mightst be loved. 
 
 it ttHlf'De geUebt', he might be loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 XOVt ttnVt>CU geltebf, we might be loved. 
 itjt tttnr'bet geliebt', you might be loved. 
 f(e NHtf'fcen geltebt', they might be loved. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) fei geftebt' WOV'fccn, I may have been loved. 
 
 fclt fetjt gcCicbt' roov'&CU, thou mayst have been loved. 
 
 it fci geltebt' w?0t*'t)Cn, he may have been loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Xb'\X fet'en geliebt 7 ttJOffreit, we may have been loved, 
 ifytr fei'et geliebt' WOr'ten, you may have been loved, 
 fie fet'en geltebt' roov'fcen, they may have been loved. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 tcf) roa'vt geftebt' worsen, I might have been loved. 
 
 &U tt&'veff getiebt' WOV'&ftt, thou mightst have been loved. 
 
 tv rod're geltebt' WOV'fcen, he might have been loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Wit Wd'rcn geliebt' worsen, we might have been loved. 
 it)V W&'ret gettebt' WCV'Uw, you might have been loved, 
 fie roa'ven geltebt' rooffccn, they might have been loved. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 143 
 
 Simple Future. 
 Singular. 
 
 id) roct'fce geficbt' wev'fcen, I shall be loved, 
 fru wcr'^cft $&UM roev'fcen, thou wilt be loved, 
 et* MV'H gcltebt' xccx'Uxx, he will be loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 wxv wct'ben gefiebt' rocr'bcn, we shall be loved. 
 i()v rocv'bet geliebt' rocv'ben, you will be loved, 
 fie wcr'bcn gclicbt' rocv'&cn, they will be loved. 
 
 Compound Future. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) roer'fce geftebt' roov'twt fein, I shall have been loved, 
 fcu n>Cl*'&C|t gcttcbf roor'ben fcilt, thou wilt have been loved, 
 er n>cv'^c gclicbt' roor'&cn fein, he will have been loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 XOXV WCr'bCU gcticbt' WOV'bCtt fctU, we shall have been loved. 
 ix)v aer'bet gefiebt' roor'&cn fein, you will have been loved, 
 fie rocr'&cn geltebt' worsen fein, they will have been loved. 
 
 Simple Conditional. 
 Singular. 
 
 id) rofir'&c geliebf mt'Uxx, I should be loved. 
 l\x roftv'Kcjt geficbf roci-'fecn, thou wouldst be loved, 
 ev n>uv'&e gettebf rocv'&cn, he would be loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 roiv nmv'fcen gefiebt' wev'ben, we should be loved. 
 il)i* wiiv'&ct gelicbt' mt'tom, you would be loved, 
 fie tmVftei gclicbt' rocv'fccn, they would be loved. 
 
144 PASSIVE VERBS. [BOOK Ic 
 
 Compound Conditional. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 id) ttUV'be gdicbt' WOt'fcCtt fcin, I should have been loved. 
 
 in nntv'fccjt gcltcbt' ttw'fccn fcin, thou wouldst have been loved. 
 
 et* TOUX'bt gdicbt' worsen fcin, he would have been loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Wit ttnVfccn gcttcbt' WOt'fcftt feitt, we should have been loved. 
 itjV rouv'&et gcUcbt' worsen fcin, you would have been loved. 
 ftC ttiVftCU gclicbt' worsen fctu, they would have been loved. . 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ttCt'&e (felt) gtfiebf, be (thou) loved. 
 mx'U Ct* gclicbt', let him be loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 nw'fccn roit gcttcbt', let us be loved. 
 
 roev'&et (il)r) gclicbt', be (ye or you) loved, 
 wer'den ftc gcticbt', let them be loved. 
 
 Observations. I. The past participle of the verb is pre- 
 served throughout the passive voice, whether that participle be 
 regularly or irregularly formed. There is, accordingly, no 
 dhTerence between regular and irregular verbs in regard to 
 the formation and inflection of their passive voice. Thus 
 the passive of the irregular verb fc'fydt, to see, is formed in 
 the same manner as that of the regular verb lic'ben, to love, 
 by joining the past participle gcfc'fycn, seen, to the auxiliary 
 
 verb rccr'fccn ; as, gefe'fyen rocv'fccn, to be seen ; id) rocv'fcc 
 gefe'fyen, I am seen; id) bin gcfc'fycn root'fccn, I have been 
 seen, &/C. 
 
 II. The verb fcin, to be, with the past participle, must not 
 be confounded with the passive voice. In the former case 
 the past participle is used as an adjective, expressing the actual 
 condition of a thing, while the passive voice signifies a state of 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] PASSIVE VERBS. 145 
 
 being acted upon. Ex. 2)a$ £iUt£ \\l gcfraut', the house is 
 built; Dai? ipaut? »ir& gcbcutt', the house is building; ta£ 
 (Sf'fcii roar auf gctvacjcn, the dinner was served up ; fcat? Sffett 
 WliV'De aufgctuagCll/ the dinner was serving up (or being 
 served up). 
 
 ju^crcises on the Passive Verbs {regular, irregular, and mixed.) 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Am I not praised? [o'frnt, to praise. 
 
 Is it not lost ? fccvlie'veil, irr. to lose. 
 
 Are they not rubbed 1 vei frcn, irr. to rub. 
 
 You are called, UCu'llClt, mix. to call. 
 
 ^Imperfect. 
 
 Was he not beaten 1 fc()(a'gcn, irr. to beat. 
 
 We were not taught, (d)'vcu, to teach. 
 
 Were you not preferred ? iUH'^iC^CU, irr. to prefer. 
 
 They were read, Ic'fen, irr, to read. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 Thou hast been blamed, ta'c-cfn, to blame. 
 
 He has been bitten, bcif'fcu, irr. to bite. 
 
 You have not been punished, |h\Vfen, to punish. 
 
 Have they been loaded 1 Ux'tXM, irr. to load. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Had it been measured 1 mcf fen, irr. to measure. 
 
 We bad been hindered, biit'DCVlt, to hinder. 
 
 They had not been given, gc bc\\, irr. to give. 
 
 You had been misunderstood, Vcvr'en'ncu, mix. to misunder- 
 stand. 
 
 Futures. 
 
 I shall be weakened, fcbwdcfj'CU, to weaken. 
 
 Shall we not be seized ? grci'fen, irr. to seize. 
 
 Will they not be washed ? wafd) en, irr. to wash. 
 
 13 
 

 ^48 
 
 PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 [ 
 
 BOOK I. 
 
 You will have been seen, 
 Will they not have been re- 
 warded 1 
 
 fc'fynt, irr. to see. 
 bclofy'ueu, to reward. 
 
 Subjunctive. 
 Present. 
 
 He may be used, 
 They may be borne, 
 You may not be sent, 
 
 bv<XU'd)(\\, to use. 
 tra'gCU, irr. to bear. 
 fcu'fcCU/ mix. to send. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Thou mightst be honored, 
 It might be excused, 
 We might be overtaken, 
 They might be written, 
 
 cfy'rcn, to honor. 
 
 entfclwl'fcigen, to excuse. 
 
 Cin'tyolen, to overtake. 
 fclH'Ct'kn, irr. to write. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 They may have been found, fin'frCtt, irr. to find. 
 It may have been brought, tu'ini.yCH, mix. to bring. 
 
 You may have been chosen, roafy'leu, to choose. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 It might not have been felt, 
 We might have been absolved, 
 Thou mightst have been es- 
 teemed. 
 
 cmpfin'&cn, irr. to feel. 
 (o$'f|n-ec()cn, irr. to absolve, 
 actytcn, to esteem. 
 
 Futures. 
 
 We shall be asked, fra'^CU, to ask. 
 
 It will not have been denied, Icug'licn, to deny. 
 Thou wilt be justified, vccrjt'fevtigcn, to justify. 
 
 Conditional Tenses. 
 
 Should I not be shunned ? mci'bnt, irr. to shun. 
 
 He would not be revenged, rdc()'CU/ reg. fy irr. to revenge. 
 
 Would it not be stolen 1 flcfy'lm, irr. to steal. 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] 
 
 PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 147 
 
 Should we not have been fang'eit, irr. to catch. 
 
 caught 1 
 You would not have been ber'gett, irr. to hide. 
 
 hidden, 
 They would not have been beibireil'llClt, mix. to burn. 
 
 burnt. 
 
 Let them be judged, 
 Let it be repeated, 
 Be {thou) not driven, 
 
 Imperative. 
 
 Vtcb'teit, to judge, 
 nucbeirfyo'leit, to repeat, 
 tret' ben, to drive. 
 
 Promiscuous Exercises. 
 
 ^a'etttts crjatjff toon ben al'ten SDcnt'fcfjen, „fte gfou'bftt, bag 
 e£ bet: 4 Srfya'bcnfycit 5 bitnm'ltfcbev 6 QOfVfen 7 nicbt 2 an'gcmcjfcn 3 
 fei 1 , t>tc 3 (Softer 4 in 5 SBdn'be 6 etn 2 ju 1 fcblie'fen 2 , o'ber fie 3 in 4 
 men'fcbetiartiger 5 (Se|U(t /6 bar 2 jit 1 ttellen 2 . ©ie tyei'ligen 
 ^al'ber nub Jpai'ne unt> mit SRa'mcn Don ©ot'tern bejetefc's 
 nen 2 fie 1 ta^ gefyetm'ttigtoolle ^23c'fcn, mefefces fie mtr in 2ln'- 
 bactjt febatt'en." 
 
 ©te jeub'neten flel) au$ buret) gret'l)eit£[tebe ttnb ^rett'e; t»te 
 gtrau'en roa'reu bet tfy'itett fyo'fyer geaeb'tet ate bei ben mit 
 gebtl'betereu ©rie'efoen nub SKo'meru ; tie S'fyeit rour'ben fyei's 
 lig getyal'tett: twfc gtt'te ©tt'tcn gal'ten bci itfxttn mefyr ate 
 an'bern>drtt? gtt'te ©cfct'jc. 
 
 2lnadjftt'ft$ [acfe'te ate er fafy roie ©o'lou ficb bemufy're t>ic 3 
 Uu'gerecbtigfeit 4 ttnb 5 Jpab'fucbt 6 fet'tier 7 SDTtt'burger 8 buret) 9 
 g e f eb t i t'b t n e 10 (S c f c t' J e 11 jit 1 toertrei'ben 2 . Sic'fc febie'; 
 nen ifym ben 4 ©pin'tteitgerocben 4 dfyn'lieb 3 jtt 1 fein 2 , wel'ebe bat? 2 
 ©ebttuVebc 3 unb 4 ftlet'ite 5 M$ 5 ficb 6 in 7 tb'neu 8 ftug'e 6 fefl's 
 fyielten 1 , toon 4 ben 5 ©tar'fen 6 ttttb 7 (Svo'fcn 8 a'ber 1 jerif'feu 3 
 nntrben 2 3)arauf foil 2 ©o'teu 1 gcaut'rcortet fya'ben, tk Sfoen's 
 febett fytet'teii ify're SSun&'nifle, roenn e6 Ifei'nero 3 Von 4 beiben 5 
 S^et'len 6 ntt^licb 2 fei 1 fie 9 jtt 7 breeb'en 8 ; ttnb ev roofle fet'nc 2 
 (Sefet'je 3 fo 4 ju'trdglteb 5 fur 6 fei'ne 7 25fti w gcv 8 tnacb'en 1 , bag c$ 
 fur 4 je'beu 5 bef'fet 3 fein 9 fotte 1 fte 11 jit 6 fyat'ten 7 , ate 8 jn 9 fiber* 
 trc'teu 10 . 
 
 SEol'le n>a$ bit famtjt, fo fannft bit was bit rctfljt. 
 
148 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 er$&l)fett/ to relate, 
 alt, ancient, 
 fretltfcl), German, 
 glaubnt, to believe, 
 fcafj, that. 
 
 angcmctfcn, becoming. ; 
 (5rl)abcnl)eit, dignity. 
 (}tmmlifc(), heavenly. 
 
 SQBefm, being. 
 
 (£>0tt, god. 
 
 cinfcbliefen, to inclose. 
 SOGanD, wall. 
 Ofccr, or. 
 
 fcarftclleu, to represent, 
 menfcbciltivtig, human. 
 (Sejtalt, form, 
 bciligcn, to consecrate. 
 QBalD, wood. 
 Jpain, grove. 
 ttllt, by. 
 Sftame, name. 
 
 Sejetcbiten, to signify. 
 
 gcl)eimut|3\)0((, mysterious. 
 
 fcbaucn, to contemplate. 
 
 ttttV, only. 
 
 2iu^ad:t / devotion. 
 
 attSjeiclmett, to distinguish. 
 
 tUtrcl), through. 
 
 gretbeitSlicbe, love of liberty. 
 
 $l*cue, faithfulness. 
 
 §l'ilU, woman. 
 
 hti, anions. 
 
 acbtcn, to esteem. 
 
 fyod), high. 
 
 alt?, than. 
 
 Wit, far. 
 
 gebil&et, cultivated. 
 
 Stye, marriage. 
 
 fyalteu, to hold. 
 
 f)ciltg, sacred. 
 
 ©itte, custom. 
 
 gel ten, to have effect. 
 
 (§cfc£, law. 
 
 aufccircarts?, elsewhere. 
 
 Uxd) en, to laugh. 
 
 ai£, when. 
 
 fefycit/ to see. 
 
 rote, how. 
 
 ftc() bcmftfycn, to exert one's 
 
 self, 
 fcevtreibett, to expel. 
 
 Ungerecbtigffit, injustice. 
 
 Jpabfurbt, avarice. 
 SDfttbuvgcr, fellow-citizen. 
 fdjfeibCtt, to write. 
 fcbeinetl/ to appear. 
 atynlid), similar, 
 ©pimtcngcrocbe, cobweb, 
 feftfyalten, to arrest, 
 fdjroad), weak. 
 iU'm, small. 
 
 ftcb fangeu, to be caught. 
 abei*, but. 
 jerrciffeit/ to tear. 
 
 frai'f, strong. 
 
 gl*0$, great. 
 
 fcavauf, thereupon. 
 
 fo(( (from foHen), is said. 
 
 untroovtcn, to answer. 
 
 baftcit/ to keep. 
 
 SBftirtuig, bond. 
 
 rocim, when. 
 
 mifcficb, profitable. 
 
 %t)tii, party. 
 
 brecben, to break. 
 
 ttcfleit/ to will. 
 
 maebcu, to make. 
 
 Jlltrdglicl), advantageous. 
 
 23uvgCl*, citizen. 
 
 t$ fofle (from fo(len), it shall. 
 
 fur, for. 
 
 ftbcvtrctCtt, to transgress. 
 
 rooden, to will. 
 
 UlllUn, to be able. 
 
 fo, thus 
 
PART II. CH. 6.] PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 149 
 
 It is reported 4 of 1 the 2 Sybarites 3 , that they killed 3 all 1 
 (the) cocks 2 , that they might 6 dream 5 out 5 their 1 morning 2 
 dreams 2 without 3 disturbance 4 . 
 
 The philosopher Bias being asked, what animal he thought 4 
 (for 1 ) the 2 most 3 hurtful 3 , replied, " Of wild creatures, a tyrant; 
 and of tame (ones), a flatterer." 
 
 Praise, like gold and diamonds, owes its value only to its 
 scarcity. 
 
 The Tears. 
 
 Hillel was walking in a moonlight night with his disciple 
 Sadi, in the gardens of the Mount of Olives. 
 
 Sadi said, " See yonder, that man in the light of the moon, 
 what is he about (begins he) 1 " 
 
 Hillel answered, " It is Zadoc ; he is sitting by the grave 
 of his son weeping (and weeps)." 
 
 " Cannot 9 Zadoc 3 then 2 ," said 4 the 5 young 6 man, 6 " mod- 
 erate 10 his 7 grief 8 ? The people call him the just and the wise." 
 
 Hillel replied, " Shall he, on this account, not 3 feel 4 the 1 
 pain 2 ? " 
 
 "But," asked Sadi, "what advantage has the wise man 
 over the fool ? " 
 
 Then his 2 teacher 3 answered 1 , " Behold, the bitter tear of 
 his eye falls to the earth, but his countenance is turned 2 to- 
 ward 1 heaven 1 ." 
 
 of, 1>CU. (Dat.) 
 
 the Sybarite, fcer @i;6at 4 i'te,2.a. 
 
 to report, cqdty'feit. 
 
 that, t>a£. 
 
 cock, *Jj)afm, m. 3. b. 6. 
 
 to kill, t&D'tcn. 
 
 that, fcamit'. 
 
 morning dream, *50?Cl w gCU' 
 
 traum, m. 3. b. {\ 
 without, of)'ue. 
 
 disturbance, ©toning,/. 1. fc. 
 to dream out, aus'tvaumcu. 
 I may, tc() faun, mix. (Subj.) 
 philosopher, spijilofopj)',- m. 
 being asked, translate, when 
 
 he was 2 asked 1 ; when, fca, 
 
 to ask, fva'gcn. 
 
 13* 
 
 what, wcl'dKtf. 
 
 animal, ^tyicr, n. 3. b. b. 
 
 for, fur. (Accus.) 
 
 hurtful, fcl)&Micl). 
 
 to think, batten. (Subj.) 
 
 to reply, aut'roortcn. 
 
 of, un'tcr. (Dat.) 
 
 wild, »tfo, 
 
 creature, (ScjVljepf , n. 3. b. fc. 
 
 tyrant, Xxj/IWXVL' , m. 2. b. 
 
 tame, $al)m. 
 
 flatterer, @d)mcicl)'lcv, m. 3i 
 
 a. a. 
 praise, iob, n. 3. b. 
 like, roie. 
 
 gold, ©olfc, n. 3. b. 
 and, UUt>. 
 
150 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 diamond, SHatttOllt'/ m. 3. b. b. 
 
 to owe, Devbanf'cn. 
 
 value, \d3mt), m. 3. b. b. 
 
 only, allctn'. 
 
 scarcity, &ll'ttnf)tit, f. 1. t>. 
 
 tear, 'itjrd'ne,/. 1. c. 
 
 to walk, ttXttl'beftt* 
 
 in, in. (Dat.) 
 
 moonlight, monb'fyefl. 
 
 night, *Sflacl)t / /. 1. 6. 
 with, mit. (Dat.) 
 disciple, ®d)iV(cr, m. 3. a. a. 
 garden, *(£av / tcn / w. 3. a. a. 
 mount of Olives, £>['bcvg, m. 
 3. b. b. 
 
 to say, fa'gen. 
 
 to see, fc'fyen, irr. 
 
 yonder, bOVt. 
 
 man, *33tami/ m. 3. b. C. 
 
 light, i\d)t, n. 3. b. e. 
 
 moon, 50?ont», m. 3. b. b. 
 
 to be about, bcgin'nen, irr. 
 
 to answer, ant'WOVti'U. 
 
 to sit, ftt'jcn, irr. 
 
 by, an. (Dat.) 
 
 grave, *@5fab, n. 3. b. C 
 
 son, *©o()n / m. 3. b. b. 
 
 to weep, roci'nen. 
 
 (can), to be able, Ufal'lUtl, mix. 
 
 then, benn. 
 
 to say, fa'gcn. 
 
 young man, 3ltng'Iittg/ m. 3. 
 b. b. 
 
 grief, XtMltt, /. 1. 
 
 not, nietjt. 
 
 to moderate, tnaf'jigcn. 
 
 people, ^olt 1 , n. 3. b. e. 
 
 to call, nen'ncn, mix. 
 
 just, gevedjt'. 
 
 wise, roei'fe. 
 
 to reply, cmne'bern. 
 
 (shall), to be obliged, forfeit/ 
 
 irr. 
 on this account, fca'wttt. 
 pain, ©cljmcrj, m. 3. b. b. 
 to feel, empftn'bcn, irr. 
 but, a'bcr. 
 to ask, fra'gcn. 
 what, rccl'djcr. (Ace.) 
 advantage, *33or'£itg, m. 3. b. b. 
 over, foOV. (Dat.) 
 fool, 3:I)0V, m. 2. b. 
 then, brt. 
 
 teacher, UtytW, m. 3. a. a. 
 to behold, fc'fycn, irr. 
 bitter, bit'tcr. 
 eye, 2Ut'ge, re. 3. a. c. 
 to fall, ftnt'Cn, irr. 
 to the, Jltv. (Z>«f.) 
 earth, &X't>(,f. 1. C. 
 but, a'ftev. 
 countenance, 2(nt'(ift, w. 3. b. 
 
 b. 
 
 toward, (Dat.) 
 
 heaven, bet* J^tm'mcf, w. 3. a. 
 
 a. 
 to turn, ju'rcenben, mix. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 Every adjective in its simple form, may be used as an ad- 
 verb ; as, bie'fH* SOTdtttt t|l efyv'ltd), this man is honest ; and 
 bic'fcv SDIann fyan'fcclt cfyv'lid), this man acts honestly. 
 
PART II. CH- 1.] ADVERBS. 151 
 
 The following are the adverbs which most frequently occur 
 in writing and conversation. 
 
 § 1. DIFFERENT KINDS OF ADVERBS. 
 
 A. Adverbs 
 
 WO, where? 
 
 wofycv', whence? 
 
 IDOtj in', whither? 
 
 tyicr, allbicr', here. 
 
 fyic'fyev, hither. 
 
 fca, text, frafettft', there. 
 
 t>a'()CV, DOVt'biT, thence. 
 
 fcabin, oovt'bin, thither. 
 
 fctef'feit, McffeitS/ on this side. 
 
 Jen'fett, jcn'fcitS, on the oppo- 
 site side. 
 
 if'gcnOS, iv'gcuM»D, some- 
 where. 
 
 gur'genfe*/ 
 
 where. 
 
 an'ocv^roo, 
 
 in'ncvfyaflj, in- 
 au'fcvtyalfc, 
 
 out- 
 
 ntv'gcntwo, no- 
 an'ocvrodvts, 
 
 or 
 
 elsewhere. 
 an^crSrcotyer , from another 
 
 place. 
 <m'&crSn>obin , to another place. 
 aUcnttjal'bcn, allcrroc'gcii, or 
 
 allcror'tcn, everywhere, 
 in'ncn, bavin'nen, or orin'nen, 
 
 within. 
 
 au'fen, brau'fen, without. 
 
 in'rocnoifl, internally. 
 (Ute'rocnoig, externally, out- 
 ward. 
 
 of Place. 
 
 in'ncvlicf), 
 
 wardly. 
 dtt'fcvlid), 
 
 wardly. 
 o'ben, bvo'btn, above. 
 fcarouf/ or oranf, upon it, 
 
 thereon, 
 ab, off, down. 
 
 anf tint* nie'&ev, or anf nno ab, 
 
 up and down. 
 Ctll ltnt> au£, in and out. 
 fyilt lint) fycr, to and from, 
 {jicu nut) t»a (Dort), here and 
 
 there, 
 fort, forth. 
 
 i)0nt, before, fronting, 
 fyin'tcn, behind. 
 Von roan'nen, whence. 
 bOlt Ijin'nen, from hence. 
 nat), nafy'e, near, 
 fern, feme, far. 
 vocit ab, far off. 
 ua t)C bet, hard by. 
 
 ftti'mefeub, or gc'gcnroartio,, 
 
 present, 
 ab'rocfcnt), absent. 
 
 B. Adverbs of Time. 
 
 jbann, when, 
 oann, atebann', then, 
 nun, je$t, now. 
 bait>, soon. 
 
 foglcid)', un^evjug'lid), imme- 
 diately. 
 
 fib OU, already. 
 
 fnify, early. 
 
 fpdt, late. 
 
 jc, jc'mate, ever. 
 
 nic, nie'mafe, never. 
 
 nod), still, yet. 
 
152 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 nod) md)t, not yet. 
 kijei'tCU, betimes, 
 al'lejett, always, 
 jttjei'tcn, jnwei'leu/ or bi& 
 
 XOti'Utt, sometimes. 
 
 drift, etn'jientf/ once. 
 
 llCU'Iid), lately, newly. 
 
 lefc'tens, U^t'iid), fytfjln , 
 lastly, lately. 
 
 einfVmtfte/ at some times. 
 
 VOt'tttatS, or C^emali?, for- 
 merly. 
 
 nadj'mate, or nadjfyer', after- 
 wards. 
 
 Wit'tott, tme'&crutn, again. 
 
 fcitfyev', feit, since. 
 
 IjCU'te, to day. 
 
 gef tent, yesterday. 
 Vov'gcjtent, e't)cge|tet*u, the day 
 
 before yesterday, 
 mit'tagtf, at noon. 
 VOt'mtttagS, before noon. 
 nacl)'mittag$, afternoon, 
 im'mcr, always. 
 jU'tS, continually, always, 
 
 ever, 
 fo t'bttt, just now. 
 lang'e, febou lang'e, or langjt, 
 
 long ago, a long time since. 
 VOfldngjl', long ago, &c. 
 
 unl&ngfr, or ofynlangjV, not 
 
 long ago. 
 luSfyer', hitherto. 
 fca'malS, at that time, &c. 
 
 C. Adverbs of Affirmation and Negation. 
 
 )<\, yes. 
 
 netn, no. 
 
 niel)t, not. 
 
 roafyv'Iidj, truly, verily. 
 
 fm'Iid), ji\ frei'ttel), or ja 
 
 tt>otyl, yes to be sure, surely, 
 
 yes. 
 aflcv&ingtf', entirely, by all 
 
 means, 
 gav \\id)t, not at all. 
 MttesroegS, mit nicfyten, by 
 
 no means. 
 
 f'aum, hardly. 
 ilt feci* ^tl^at, indeed, 
 nnfefyl'bar, doubtless. 
 fcWediterfcingS', absolutely, 
 rotvt'tid), really, 
 im'mcvmefyr, ever, 
 nim'mermcfyr, never. 
 giauHtd), credibly. 
 4>ieKcicC)t , / perhaps. 
 VenttUtty'lid), probably. 
 fcurdjauS' nid)t, absolutely not. 
 imglautvfid), incredibly. ' 
 
 D. Adverbs of Various Use. 
 
 tneift, faji, fclner, almost. 
 
 fcetna^e, nearly. 
 
 genng', genung', enough. 
 
 Doll, fcol'lig, completely, 
 obenfytu', superficially. 
 ^oI'lcnD^ fully. 
 tfyfUS, partly. 
 
 nn'gefdljt, or ofyn'gefafyr, about, 
 
 ate, nue, as. 
 nne, how. 
 rcanrnt', why. 
 fca'rmn, therefore. 
 an't>er£, otherwise, 
 gfciclyfalte, likewise, 
 glcicfoimc', gleid) &U, like as 
 fo, so. 
 
vX 
 
 PART II. CH. 7.] 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 153 
 
 fcfyt'/ 9M, very, much. 
 
 pi, all'ju, too. 
 
 ganj/ gdnj'Ud), whole, wholly. 
 
 n?ol)(, gut, well. 
 
 ft'bel, fcblecbt, ill. 
 
 M'fe# badly. 
 
 al'fO, thus. 
 
 uugcmcin', uncommonly. 
 
 g(cid), directly, equally. 
 
 fibcrauS', exceedingly. 
 
 jug(ctd)', at the same time. 
 
 jufam'men, together. 
 
 fammt'ltdj, all together. 
 faclj'te, softly. 
 
 fon'ccvlid), 6cfou'DCV6, espe- 
 cially. 
 Ht}, in short. 
 l)auptfad)'(td), chiefly. 
 mit §lei£, on purpose, 
 tnctmcfyv', rather. 
 VCt'licl^, sincerely. 
 ved)t, right. 
 uu'rcd)t, wrong. 
 Cll&'lid), lastly. 
 
 The following adverbs seem to require some particular 
 notice. 
 
 | SBetjl, 03301, 
 
 is often found, where the English can affix no distinct mean- 
 ing to it. It is not, however, a mere expletive ; but serves to 
 give to a sentence a peculiar modification. Sometimes the 
 expressions, may be, perhaps, probably, about, nearly, indeed, 
 may correspond with it. It occurs in questions; as, £>abett 
 ®ie tt)0t)( gefyert', IMS man fcafcou' fagt? Have you by chance 
 heard, what is said of it? — and accompanies verbs in an in- 
 determinate and conditional construction; as, 2>d) mod)'tC tt>o()( 
 Ic'fcn, I should like to read (if I could). Instead of the adverb 
 W0l)t, well, denoting, of a good quality, in a good manner, not 
 ill, gut is frequently used; by which means the confusion, 
 that might arise between this signification and the expletive, 
 is obviated. For example: 3d) n>ciS nid)t, rco man fcie'fc 
 @ad)'cu gut fau'fcn faun, I know not, where one may buy 
 these things iccll. In this instance, if tt>ot)( were used, it 
 would, by the generality of readers, be understood as an ex- 
 pletive. When used as an expletive, it is pronounced short, 
 and some, in this case, write ttol instead of Xt>ot)U 
 
 (SCV'UC or gent, willingly : comparative, lie'frcr, more willing- 
 ly : superlative, am Ucb'jUu, most willingly. 
 
 By this adverb, the idea, to like, to be fond of, is expressed ; 
 as, ct'roaS gcv'ne tbltn, to do a thing willingly, to like to do it ; 
 et'roaS gcvu cf'fcn, to eat a thing willingly, that is, to like it; 
 
154 ADVERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 Ct'tM£ gCVtt mb'$tlt, to like a thing. (St'rociS gent fc'fyen, to see 
 a thing willingly, to see it with approbation ; hence, to like, to 
 approve. (5i* i|ft ©CimVfe lic'fccv alt? g(cifcl), He likes vegetables 
 better than meat ; literally, he eats more willingly, ©ic fe'tyen 
 CS am lteb'|Un, They see it with most pleasure, that is, they like 
 it best. The use of Uz'btt, and am Ucb'^CU, will be readily 
 understood from that of gent. 
 
 Jptn and J|?ei\ 
 See page 108. 
 
 SDa, 
 
 combined with prepositions, and followed by the conjunction 
 fcaft, serves as a substitute for the English participle, united 
 with a preposition. Examples : By reading much he became 
 learned ; 2)a'&Ul*cl) &ftg it tnc( (a£, WUX'M it gclefylt'. From 
 talking too much, mischief often comes ; 3)av'au6 fcafe man £U 
 X>k{ febmaftt, mtjte^l' eft Itlt'fycif. Justice consists in giving 
 
 every one his own; (Bevedytiafrit bejiefyt' oa'tun, t»af3 man 
 je'&erman fca<? fei'ue gibt, 
 
 Sect), 
 
 put after an imperative, has the power of entreating and ex- 
 horting, and answers, in general, to the French done, and, 
 frequently, to the English pray. Examples : ©a'gen ©ie mil* 
 tod), Pray tell me. ©cut ©ie bod) $0 QUt, Pray, be so good. 
 'vIDati fag/te er tod) ? Pray, what did he say ? ^Bat MS tod) 
 Ctlt $antt, What a noise that was ! Occasionally it may be ren- 
 dered by somehow; as, 3>d) fano mid) tod) ba(t> WXt'btV, I some- 
 how soon found my way again. — In common conversation, it 
 is sometimes used for the affirmative ja, when a negative pre- 
 cedes. 
 
 3*, 
 
 besides its affirmative signification, yes, nas an expletive use, 
 in which it may be often translated by, indeed, truly, certainly, 
 see, I see, I wonder, forsooth. Examples : ©tc fom'mcu ja fyfc, 
 You certainly are come late, or, I wonder you come so late. 
 
PART II. CH. 7.] ADVERBS. 155 
 
 @ic finfc ja t*cc()t 9VO6 a,crDOv'fceil, You, indeed, are grown very 
 tall. £v jtclit fid) )& fcfyf fon'DcvbvU* an, He, forsooth ! behaves 
 in a very singular manner. — 3a xootji, certainly, yes, certainly. 
 3a, combined with a negative, be it with the particle nid)t, or 
 lite, or the adjective fein, may be rendered by the same exple- 
 tive terms, pray, certainly, see, &,c. ; but frequently it strength- 
 ens the expression ; as, )<\ nicl)t, on no account ; ja ilie, never, 
 spoken emphatically. 
 
 SDiit'ten, 
 
 before the prepositions in and ttn'tCf, signifies in the midst of; 
 as, mit'tcn in fci'net SHc'fcC, in the midst of his discourse ; nut'; 
 U\\ un'ter. DCU gctll'fcClt, in the midst of the enemies. 
 
 9Torf), 
 
 signifies an addition, where the English use more. Sftotf) Ctlt£, 
 one thing more; nod) etll'mat, once more; nod) im'mcr, still, 
 by continuance, constantly. (£v bkibt nod) tlll'mei* ill Soil'DOlt, 
 He still continues in London. 
 
 A Comparison 
 
 of things equal, is, in English, made by the repetition of as: 
 for example, ' as brave as Leonidas.' In German, the first 
 particle is rendered by fo, and the second by al6, or n?ic : fo 
 tap'fci* a(t> ico'ui&aS. The word than, after the comparative 
 more, is expressed by a(S. Sometimes the English put but 
 after a comparative degree, instead of than : for example, 
 " There was nothing farther to be done, but to fight." The 
 German al£, must here be retained. QOBtC is occasionally 
 substituted for a(S, and then the fo may be omitted ; as, t^'- 
 
 for wit ico'ni&atf. 
 
 The Negative 
 
 ntd)t is often used by the Germans, where the English would 
 deem it superfluous ; as, Q;!? t|t u'bcv ei'llCU SOTo'ltat, fettOCtn' 
 id) @ie utd)C gefe'^ett fya'bc, It is above a month, since 1 have 
 [not) seen you. 
 
 In interrogative exclamations, the negative gives emphasis. 
 
 ^GDie vuele SQfan'fdjcn ftno nid)t in oic'fcm ftrie'ge nm'gcfom* 
 
156 ADVERBS. [BOOK I. 
 
 UtCU/ How many men have (not) perished in this war ! 3£ic 
 )\cl% fcl)teu er Utcl)t, How proud did he (not) appear ! (The 
 French also make use of the negative. Quel bruit ces hom- 
 mes n'auraient-ils pas fait, s'ils m'avaient attrape & un tel ban- 
 quet !) 
 
 Not a, not any, are, in German, commonly expressed by 
 h'\\\, none ; as, not a single line, fct'ne cin'jigc $M'k, 
 
 Two negatives, in the same sentence, are in general im- 
 proper ; although they sometimes occur not only in the lan- 
 guage of common life, but also in the best writers. Sometimes, 
 indeed, there may appear to be energy in the repetition of 
 the negative ; but, on the whole, it should be rather considered 
 as a species of negligence in composition. 
 
 About, nearly. 
 
 This idea, accompanying numbers, is differently expressed. 
 1. By certain adverbs, viz. fceiua'fyc, ct'roa, fa|t, UU'gcfafyr, 
 l»ol;I, H$. Q?£ ftnt> roofyl fcvei Saty're, It is about three years, 
 tw'gefttijf jefyu spfunfc, about ten pounds ; ycozx bi$ fcrci SBod)'* 
 Cn, from two to three weeks. 2. By the use of the preposi- 
 tion, an, hex, ge'gen. %n tit }U>asi'}lg/ nearly twenty ; bei 
 (or ge'gCU) foier'jig, nearly forty. 
 
 § 2. OF THE FORMATION OF ADVERBS. 
 
 Adverbs are either original words, as, ja, yes ; itcin, no ; 
 tt»0, where ; tt>ie, how ; or adjectives used as adverbs ; or 
 they are formed from nouns or adjectives, or by composition. 
 
 A. Adverbs derived from Nouns or Adjectives. 
 
 A noun or adjective is formed into an adverb by adding 
 either the letter S (the ancient characteristic of the genitive 
 case for nouns of all declensions) or the syllable lid) to the 
 noun or adjective. The additional £ always makes the word 
 an adverb, without making it an adjective ; while most of the 
 words formed by adding (id) are properly adjectives, which 
 may be used also as adverbs. 
 
PART II. CH. 7.] ADVERBS. 157 
 
 1. The following substantives, denoting parts of the natural 
 day, are changed into adverbs by an additional S. 
 
 Substantives. Adverbs. 
 
 in *£ag, the day ; tagS, or t>c6 £ag£, in the day- 
 
 time. 
 
 Die 3Tac()t, the night; ttftcfetf, or freS 3Ucl)t3, in the 
 
 nisfht. 
 
 btt SDtOV'gcu, the morning; mov'^cni?, or t>Ct? ^TRov'genS, in 
 
 the morning. 
 
 t>Ct* 2i'6cilt>, the evening ; a'bcnfcS, or t>e£ ll'bn\b$, in the 
 
 evening. 
 
 fcer ^ov'mittag, the forenoon ; toor'mittagS, or t>e$ 33cr'mit; 
 
 tag£, in the forenoon. 
 
 fret* Staclymittag, the after- nadymittags, or H6 SRaciymtt'- 
 noon ; trtg£, in the afternoon. 
 
 t)CV SO^it'tag, the noon ; mit'tagS, or bc$ SDiit'tagS, at 
 
 noon. 
 
 So, also, some adjectives become adverbs, by means of an 
 additional 6 ; as, bevcitt?', already, from bcrcit', ready ; jlctS, 
 constantly, from jiet, constant; bcfon'fccrS, particularly, from 
 bcfon'fccv, particular ; an'fccvS, otherwise, from au'fccr, other; 
 rattS, to the right hand, from veefct, right: litlfS, to the left, 
 from [int, left, &-c. Numerals become adverbs by the addi- 
 tion of ClU* or tenS ; as, ev'|icu£, in the first place, or first; 
 jvpei'tcnev secondly; frvtt'tCUS, thirdly, &c. And the following 
 words ; bef tCllS, in the best manner ; itiet'jiCUS, mostly ; C'bcjb 
 CltS, by the first opportunity; fyoclVjiCUt?, at the most; il'bvu 
 gen£, as for the rest. 
 
 2. There are some adverbs formed by the addition of {id), 
 which cannot be used as adjectives ; as, fvei'licl), indeed, from 
 firei, free ; IMtjr'licl), truly, from tt>at)V, true ; gut'ltcl), goodly, 
 from gut, good. 
 
 B. Compound Adverbs. 
 
 Among compound adverbs, those which are composed of a 
 preposition and the adverbs fyicr, t)k, here, t>a, there, \x>0, 
 where, l)tn, thither, fyev, hither, deserve a particular notice. 
 In these cases, if the preposition begin with a vowel or \\, 
 an V is often added to the adverbs t>rt and tt>o. 
 
 14 
 
158 ADVERBS [BOOK I. 
 
 1. With t>a, t>av, instead of t>er, fcie'fer, t>crfet be. 
 
 iidhd't by it, with it, thereby. 
 
 fcaran'/ on it or that, thereon. 
 
 fcarauf , upon it or that, there- 
 upon. 
 
 fcavautf', from thence, it, that. 
 
 fcarcin', thereinto, into it or 
 that. 
 
 twill', therein, in it, within. 
 
 fcamacl)', after it, thereafter. 
 
 fcaa.e'gCU, against it or that. 
 
 fcamit', with that or it, by it, 
 therewith. 
 
 fcane'ben, near that or it, next 
 to it. 
 
 fcantm', for it or that, there- 
 fore. 
 
 fcawi^cr, against that or it. 
 
 fcrtjll', for that or it, thereto. 
 
 batiOl*', before that or it. 
 
 fcarit'beu, on that account, at 
 it. 
 
 tuxnut'tcr, under it or that. 
 
 fcafur', for that. 
 
 t>a\)0U', of that or it, thereof, 
 therefrom. 
 
 t>a$rc>tfcl)'en, between, amidst 
 that. 
 
 2. With fytCi', or fyie, are compounded the same prepositions 
 as above. 
 
 fyievan', on this or it, &c. fytevauf, upon this or it, &c. 
 
 3. With U50, n>0l*, instead of mi'(\)(V, MS. 
 
 n^CVan', on which, whereon. 
 
 KDOVauf, upon which, where- 
 upon. 
 
 worm', in which, wherein. 
 
 womit'/ with which, where- 
 with. 
 
 rcofcuvcl)', by or through which. 
 
 Wantm', for which, why. 
 
 IDOgC'gCU, against which. 
 
 VttODOV', before which. 
 
 tt>o$lt', to which, whereto. 
 
 WOuartV/ according to which. 
 
 WOltc'bcu, next to which. 
 
 ttonVbcr, upon which, where- 
 upon. 
 
 Wofuv', for which, wherefore. 
 
 IDOruu'tCV/ under which, among 
 which, Slc. 
 
 4. With fycr and fyin, as adverbs. 
 
 tjcxab', binafc', tyvun'ttv, down, fyemtf', out, &c. 
 fyevauf , tyinauf, up. 
 

 PART II. CH. 8.] PREPOSITIONS. 159 
 
 § 3. THE COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 
 
 Adverbs are invariable, except that some admit the degrees 
 of comparison, as ; 
 
 Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 
 
 $\lt, or YbOt)[, beffer, better; am (jum) bcpten,* best, 
 well ; 
 
 h'btl, ill ; fcljlim'mer, worse: fdjfimm'ffett/ worst. 
 
 t)ic(, much ; mdjv, more ; tttci'|tcn, most. 
 
 roc'nia,, little, m'ni$tt, less; WnigfiCII/ least. 
 
 few : 
 
 m't)C, near; Xia'tjW, nearer; nacb'ffcit, nearest. 
 
 tyod), high ; t)b't}W, higher ; fjocft'ftcn, highest. 
 
 t'tjt, before; Cfycr, sooner; e'fyeflcu, soonest. 
 
 Sent/ readily, lit'btt, more rea- (icb'flcn, most rea- 
 
 or willingly; dily, or rath- dily, or most wil- 
 
 er ; lingly. 
 
 Observation. The syllable \\n changes adverbs from affirma- 
 tive to negative, in the same manner as in, im, or un, in 
 English ; as, qJauMtcl), credibly ; mtA.UuMtd), incredibly ; 
 recl)t1ic(), justly; un'VCC^tUcl), unjustly. 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 Some prepositions are always separated ; as, 
 
 um-wiCfen, for the sake of; as, urn t>c^ grie'fccns widen, for the 
 
 sake of peace. 
 fcOnsWe'gen, in the name of; as, t)0tt <Serid)t$' »e'gen, in the 
 
 name of the court. 
 
 Some are separated or not according to the construction ; as, 
 
 Itm^Cf, round about ; as, 3c() gillg tint t>a$ @d}[og t)CV, I walk- 
 ed about the castle; and ^c() ging umfycv', I walked about. 
 
 * 
 
 Or mtfs (anf Das) SScf'te. 
 
160 CONJUNCTIONS. [BOOK I. 
 
 fyinter-fyer', Muter-brent', behind ; as, id) gino, fyn'tn bem 
 
 COTvUl'llC t)ft or Drcin, I walked after the man, I followed the 
 man ; and %d\ ging fytuterfyer', or ^iutClDt'Cin', I walked be- 
 hind. 
 
 ABBREVIATION OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 In the familiar or colloquial style, the definite article and 
 the preposition are generally contracted into one word ; as, 
 
 am, for an bem. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 as, am ^en'jfer, at the window. 
 dWd ild)t, into the light. 
 aufS JpauS, upon the house, 
 beim 93a'ter, by the father. 
 burcl)S gcit'cr, through the 
 
 fire. 
 furs? @eft>, for money, 
 im Jpim'mct, in heaven, 
 im? QBaffer, in the water. 
 
 foom tt'bff, from evil. 
 
 foOfg Seu'jUl*/ before the win- 
 dow. 
 
 foOlttl %t)CiC, before the door. 
 
 tVbevm geit'er, upon the fire. 
 
 iVberS 99?eer, beyond the sea. 
 
 un'tcrm SCop'fe, under the 
 head. 
 
 £ttm $$ad)'t, to the rivulet. 
 
 Jill* St) 're, for the honor. 
 
 Some of these abbreviations occur, not only in the familiar, 
 but in every kind of style ; as, am, im, fcom, jum, JUt\ 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 The conjunctions a'ber, and fon'Dern, which are both Eng- 
 lished but, have a distinct meaning and use in German. 
 
 am, 
 an 6, 
 aufi>, 
 beim, 
 
 for an bem, 
 an bas, 
 auf Das, 
 bci Dem, 
 buvd) baS, 
 
 furs, 
 
 im, 
 
 ins, 
 
 fur bas, 
 in bem, 
 in ba$, 
 
 bom, 
 Dors, 
 
 fcon bem, 
 bor bas, 
 
 feorm, 
 u'bcrm, 
 iVberS, 
 un'term, 
 
 fcor bem, 
 ft'ber bem, 
 u'bcr Das, 
 un'ter bem, 
 
 jum, 
 
 ju bem, 
 ju i>er, 
 
 
PART II. CH. 10, 11.] INTERJECTIONS. 161 
 
 ©Olt'Dcm is used only after a negative, and always expresses 
 a contradiction ; as, <£v i\\ \\\d)t vctd), fou'fcent arm, He is not 
 rich, but poor ; (E$ fricut nic()t, fou'Dmi Ct? tfyattt, It does not 
 freeze, but it thaws. — 2Cbcx is used to connect two sen- 
 tences, of which the subsequent contains a limitation or mod- 
 ification of the antecedent ; as, (5r ift arm, a'bcr gufne'&cn, He 
 is poor, but contented ; Q?V fpricljt fccutfcl), a'bcv nicl)t gctau'ftg, 
 He speaks German, but not fluently. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 The following is a list of some of the interjections used in 
 German. 
 
 ad) ! ah ! afy ! ah ! toiUHttl'XMXl ! welcome ! 
 
 [ei'fcev ! alas ! fie'tyc ! lo ! behold ! 
 
 Of) ! ! oh ! ftc'fye M ! behold here ! 
 
 mi) ! roe'fye ! woe ! yfut ! fie ! 
 
 Ci ! l)Ut ! heigh ! iit'btt ! pray ! 
 
 ttofjUn' ! well then ! bd)u'U ©Ott ! God forbid ! 
 
 ijiif CSott ! God help ! jjol'fo ! YjZ ! holla! 
 
 (Jiff iptm'mcl ! Heaven help ! ft ! jtiU ! hush ! hist ! 
 
 tjait ! halt ! or stop ! 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 
 ADDITIONAL REMARKS, ON THE MODE OF FORMING NEW 
 
 WORDS. 
 
 General Remarks. 
 
 The number of German words has been and may still be 
 increased in two ways : 
 
 I. The language admits of being enriched out of its own 
 substance. 
 
 a. One part of speech may be used for another. Thus 
 the infinitive of the verb Ic'bcn, to live, is used as a substan- 
 tive, fca6 Wbtllf the life ; and the neuter gender of the adjec- 
 
 14* 
 
162 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [BOOK I. 
 
 tive cvfya'frCH/ sublime, may be used as a noun, bag Sl'fja'frene, 
 the sublime. 
 
 b. A word may be derived from another ; as, glYttg, kind, 
 from gut, good. 
 
 c. Several words may be compounded into one ; as, 
 ©U'bci'bcrgrocvf/ silver mine, composed of ©U'6er, silver, 
 23evg, mountain, and '^EBei'f; work. 
 
 II. A number 01 foreign words have been introduced into 
 the German language, and have become more or less natural- 
 ized ; as, StatUf', nature; ©tjmpatfyie' (SDtit'gefufyf), sym- 
 pathy. 
 
 § 1. OF THE MOST IMPORTANT MODES OF ENRICHING THE LAN- 
 GUAGE FROM WITHIN ITSELF. 
 
 A. Of the Infinitive Mood and Adjectives, used as Nouns. 
 
 Among the various modes in which a word may be changed 
 from one part of speech to another, there is none of so much 
 practical importance as the use of infinitives and adjectives as 
 nouns. 
 
 1. The Germans use the infinitive of every verb as a noun, 
 in the same manner as the English do the present participle; 
 as, fraS gitt)'(cn, the feeling; MS Jfpo'VCtt, the hearing; MS 
 gov'fcbcn; the searching, &c. 
 
 2. An adjective may be used as a noun in each of its three 
 genders, and ought then to have a capital letter for its initial. 
 
 a. When the adjective in its masculine or feminine gender 
 is used as a noun, it denotes most generally a man or a woman 
 of such description as the adjective imports ; as, fccv ©U'te, 
 the good man ; t>ie (Su'tC, the good woman ; cin gvOttVmev, 
 a pious man ; ei'ite grom'me, a pious woman. 
 
 The noun should always be preceded by the definite or in- 
 definite article, except in the vocative case ; as, 33 cf ttt, best 
 man ; 23cf'tc, best woman. 
 
 Sometimes the adjective stands without the noun to which 
 it refers, this noun being understood. In this case the adjec- 
 tive is not changed into a noun but remains an adjective ; as, 
 £t> gicbt iw'x'zkUx SDfcn'fcfocn, gu'te unt> bo'jc- 2)w 66'feit 
 ge'bcn fid) oft MS Sln'fcljn bCV glt'tcn. There are two sorts of 
 men, good and bad. The bad oftentimes give themselves the 
 appearance of the good, 
 
PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 163 
 
 b. When the neuter of the adjective is used as a noun, if it 
 is preceded by the definite article, it denotes the whole class 
 of things to which the quality expressed by the adjective is 
 ascribed; or it designates the quality itself ; as, t>a£ &<X)h'\\t, 
 the beautiful ; t>a6 Qh'fya'bcue, the sublime. 
 
 If the neuter adjective, when used as a noun, is not pre- 
 ceded by the article, it means any thing having that quality 
 which the adjective expresses; as, ©cbo'lKS, any thing beau- 
 tiful ; 3WtC£, any thing tender. 
 
 While in English (at least in prose) only a few adjectives 
 are used as nouns, the German language allows every adjective 
 to be used in that manner ; as, t>ci£ $dt'tt/ that which is ten- 
 der ; fca£ ©tav'f'c, that which is strong ; t>a$ 9Utur'lid>e, that 
 which is natural ; fca£ StunjVlirfK, that which is artificial.* 
 
 Sometimes the simple form of the adjective is used instead 
 of the neuter ; as, fcatf (£>ell> lint) fca6 SKetfy, the yellow and the 
 red ; or without the article, (Selfr lint SKotl) ftltfc jrect (Smut) 7 ; 
 fvU'bcn, Yellow and red are two primary colors. 
 
 In a few instances the indefinite article is used before the 
 simple form or the neuter of the adjective ; as, etn SKotfy, a 
 red (color) ; ctu SDTclj'vcvctf, something further. 
 
 B. Of the Derivation of Words from Others. 
 
 Among the various modes in which derivative words may be 
 formed, we notice two, as particularly important. 
 
 1. In the formation of nouns, by adding to adjectives, nume- 
 rals, nouns, or radical syllables of verbs, the syllables, ci (ei)), 
 
 fyeit, hit, img, tfynm, fdwft, nifj ; as, gifdjem', fishery, 
 
 (Sifdj'cr, fisherman) ; SBolifrem'menfyeit, perfection, (fcoflfOttl's 
 men, perfect) ; £tn't)cit, unity, (ein, one) ; 35te'&cv{?cit, righ- 
 teousness, (fcte'fccr, righteous); Sftei'gnng, inclination, (fid) 
 nei'gen, to incline); Sftit'tCVtfyum, chivalry, (SKit'ter, knight) ; 
 < 233 i f f c ii f d) aft , science, (wtffen, to know) ; ianfc'fdwft, land- 
 scape, (huit>, land) ; SBcfOCg'ftlg/ apprehension, (befov'gen, to 
 apprehend). 
 
 2. The formation of adjectives, by the addition of the syl- 
 lables [\w, fam, en, evn, ig, id)t, ifel), (id), fyaft ; as, efyv'tw, 
 
 * The great advantage that arises from this mode of using 
 every adjective as a noun, to designate certain classes of things, 
 or certain qualities, is evident, particularly in philosophy. 
 
164 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [BOOK I. 
 
 decent, (Qsfy're, honor) ; av'fccitfam, industrious, (Tiv'Wlt, labor) ; 
 golden, golden, ((Soft, gold) ; jiei'llCVU, of stone, (©tcttt, 
 stone) ; fflt'vtg, fiery, (geu'CV, fire) ; tfyo'ricfct, foolish, (^tyor, 
 fool) ; bid)'t(vtfd), poetical, (£>td)'tev, poet) ; fadj'fifd), Saxon, 
 (t»CV @acl)'(V, the Saxon); fin Difd), childish, (ftint), child); 
 frnfc'fid), childlike; muuD'ltd), oral, (SDhmfc, mouth); t^CVj'- 
 ^aft, hearty, (£ct:$, heart). 
 
 C. Of the Composition of Words. 
 
 A compound word is produced by uniting two or more 
 terms into one. Such expressions, therefore, as neiospaper, 
 seaport, vainglory, belong to this class. 
 
 The rules for composition, which are tacitly acknowledg- 
 ed in German, and ought to be uniformly observed, are these 
 two : 
 
 Rule I. — The several terms which enter into the composi- 
 tion should suggest so many distinct ideas ; and these ought 
 to be so perspicuous, that, when combined, they shall render 
 the word intelligible at the first glance. 
 
 Rule II — The prior term of the compound should define 
 and limit the other. Hence the first component may be called 
 the particular term ; and the second, the general. For ex- 
 ample : SD?onD'itd)t, moonlight ; the general term itcl)t, light, 
 being defined by the more particular term, 5D?ont>, moon : 
 fum'men>0u f / sorrowful ; the general term Doll, full, being de- 
 fined by the particular term, ^urn'mer, sorrow. 
 
 To these two rules of composition, are to be added the fol- 
 lowing observations. 
 
 1. In compound substantives, the second component, or 
 general term, furnishes the gender ; as, t>a£ SRatfy'fyauS, the 
 council-house, from t>a* Statf), the council, and t>a£ <§(lll£, the 
 house ; fccv 2(rbcttjS(ot)n, wages for work, from Die %x'bt\t, 
 labor, and t>cr iok)\\, the reward ; SDTcn'friKnliefcc, love of man, 
 from &cr SDicnfd), man, and Die $ie'6e, love. 
 
 2. The compound should be neither too long, nor harsh to 
 the ear. 
 
 3. Though one of the terms be a compound word, yet, 
 when it enters into a new composition, it is supposed to convey 
 only a single idea. For example, MG &l'bttbtt$totxt t the 
 silver mine, consisting of ©ifljcr, silver, and SSerg'rocvf/ a 
 
PART II. C1I. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 165 
 
 mine, has for its second term, a compound word, SScrg'rocrf. 
 This may be resolved into 23erg, mountain, and QGDcvf, 
 work ; yet, the idea which it suggests as a component of 
 ©ifbcvbcvgrDCrf, is only one. Consequently, words may be 
 twice or oftener compounded, without being disqualified for 
 serving in a new composition according to the second rule; 
 care being taken not to make the compound too long. But 
 whenever such words are admitted, a hyphen (:) is resorted to, 
 in order to break their extended appearance: as, (£encval':$;c(t>- 
 JCltg'mcijUr, Master General of the Ordnance; $Hcicl)$; 
 (Scucval'^clfcmav'fdjaK/ Field-marshal General of the Empire. 
 
 4. A hyphen is, moreover, employed, when either one or 
 both of the components are foreign words ; as, fca£ EHctcbe'; 
 Collegium, the council of the Empire ; fcat> Criminal' ;(&(\:id)t, 
 the criminal court of justice ; t>ci* Justiz' ^SKatfy , a council, or 
 counsellor of justice ; Da£ Intclligenz 's23Utt / a paper for ad- 
 vertisements; t>a£ Intclligenz' -Comptoir, the advertising of- 
 fice; fcatf Justiz'- Collegium, the court of justice. The foreign 
 words are written either in their own type, as is done in these 
 examples, or in the German character ; as, 2?nfcUtgtflj's!5fatfc 
 But if the words are not too long, it is rather more usual 
 to write them without the hyphen, as one word ; as, 
 3ntelligen$'bUtt. 
 
 5. By the process of composition are produced, in the fol- 
 lowing manner, 
 
 (1) Substantives. 
 
 a. Both terms being Substantives. Examples : 3)ie 2CbCHte 
 fhtnfce, the evening-hour — from tcv 2t'bent>, the evening, and 
 t>tc ©ttm'fcc, the hour; frcr 'Zlp'fclbaum, the apple-tree — t>er 
 Sty'fcl, and fcer 23aum ; fcev ©cmi'tag, Sunday — tic ©on'ne, 
 feci* ^ag; t>ct* (Sot'tcSbicnjl, divine service — ®ott, God, t>cv 
 SMcnjt, the service; tcv J^cl'fremnutfy, heroic courage — fcct* 
 «£>elt>, the hero, bet 9Tiut(), courage ; Me J^ci^cnSgutC, good- 
 ness of heart — fcaS £cvj, Me (Sll'te. 
 
 b. The first term being an Adjective. 3Mc Q5vo£'mutf), mag- 
 nanimity — gvoe, great, t>cr 99?utl), spirit ; Me ©eljrocr'muttj, 
 heaviness of spirit, melancholy — fiercer, heavy, fcctr 50Tltt^/* 
 spirit; tic Si'gcnltcbc, self-love — ci'gcu, own, and Me ik'bc. 
 
 * It will be noticed, that in these two last examples, there 
 is a deviation from the first observation (under Rule II.) rela- 
 tive to the gender of compound substantives. 
 
166 
 
 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 c. A Numeral the first term. 3)et T>V(i'faS, the tripod — 
 fcrei, three, tn $US, the foot; MS ^tcfecf, the square — Dicv 
 four, Die (Sctc,* the corner; MS ZCc^t'ecf,* the octagon — ac()t, 
 eight. 
 
 d. The Pronoun fclbjt the first term. 3^a^ ©eftyt'ttertrauCtt, 
 self-confidence — DaS 33evtvau'en ; t>ie ©cIb|Vprufung, self- 
 examination — t>ie spnVfung ; Der @elb|Vbetntg, self-delusion — 
 Der. 93ctrug'. 
 
 e. A Verb the first term. 2)CV §Ccf)t'boDcU/ the fencing- 
 school — fectytCU, to fence, t>cr SSo'Dcn, the floor ; Die SHett'baljn, 
 the riding-school — ret'ten, to ride, Die *5at)U, the course, the 
 ground ; Da6 QOBavt'getD, pay for waiting, for attendance — 
 XDM'ttll, to wait, MS (5e(D, money. 
 
 f. A Particle the first term, such as <\b, ait, Ctn, &c. 3)k 
 TCb'VCife, the departure; t)ie Zln'htuft, the arrival; t>ev Pitt's 
 gang/ the entrance. 
 
 (2) Adjectives. 
 
 a. A Substantive being the first term. ^tl'gcnU'Cict), rich in 
 virtue — bie ^u'genD, virtue, vetcb, rich; fraft'VolI, full of 
 strength or power — Die £vaft, fcoll ; eiS'falt, cold as ice — 
 MS §tS, fait ; golD'gelb, yellow as gold — DaS <25olD, gelb ; 
 pcc()'fri)»arj, black as pitch — Datf tycd), febroarj; got'teSfurcl); 
 tig, pious, fearing God — ©Ott, God, and fuvd)'fig (an adjec- 
 tive, not usual except in composition) ; f)idf£'bcDuifttg/ destitute, 
 wanting help — Die fiht'ft, beDfllftig. 
 
 b. An Adjective the first term. $cid)t'fcvtig, thoughtless, 
 flighty; fyell'blau, light blue; fm'vmllig, voluntary; alt'ftug, 
 wise as an old man. 
 
 c. A Numeral the first term. SH'Ci'ctftg, three-cornered, 
 triangular ; biev'erfig, quadrangular, square ; fed^'fllftg, six- 
 footed ; acfyt'feitig, having eight sides. 
 
 d. A Particle the first term. 2(b'fydngig, dependent ; an': 
 jTanDig, becoming ; iVbcvmutfytg, overbearing, insolent ; Jtt's 
 huif tig, future ; un'gl&ufcig, unbelieving ; tm'gcvccljt, unjust. 
 
 e. A Verb the first term. 2)enf 'rofU'Dig, memorable — Dcnf'en, 
 to think of, and nnif'Dtg, worthy; fyab'fud)tig, avaricious — 
 
 See note on preceding page. 
 
PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 167 
 
 (ja'fccn, to have, and Me ©ltrijt, eager desire ; Ite'benSttmvMg, 
 lovely, amiable — lie'ben, to love, rtmr'fcig, worthy; lobcn^ 
 rotvtij, praiseworthy — lo'beu to praise, mxtt), deserving. 
 
 (3) Verbs. 
 
 a. A Substantive being the first term. Svanfc'fdjagfU/ to 
 raise contributions, by the menace of fire — t>CT 33l\Ull>/ fire, 
 fcbat^en, to raise contributions; hijVroanbcIn/ to walk for 
 pleasure, to take a walk — fcic htft, pleasure, tDan'bclll/ to 
 walk ; mtt'nftvn, to emulate — £)ie QBct'te, the wager, com- 
 petition, et'fcnt, to be eager or zealous ; wct'tci'lcudjtcn, to 
 lighten without thunder — &a$ Wrt'tZV, the weather, the tem- 
 pest, itwtytm, to shine; fyanfc'fyaben, to handle — Me £ftttt>/ 
 the hand, tya'bdX, to have. 
 
 b. An Adjective the first term. SBoffln'ing'en, to accomplish 
 — Mil, full, bring'cn, to bring ; fcofljie'tyen, to execute — pt'tjCM, 
 to draw. 
 
 c. A Particle the first term. This species of composition 
 has been treated of at large, from page 107 to page 114. 
 
 (4) Participles. 
 
 A Substantive being the first term, (a.) The present partici- 
 ple : etyr'liebcub, loving honor, generous — t»ie (£f)'re, honor, 
 jie'benD, loving; gcfe^'gebcnt), legislative — t>a£ C8efe$'/ the Jaw, 
 ge'bfltt), giving ; tMcb'fyabcnt), having the guard, being on duty, 
 as an officer — l>ie IBtxdyt, the guard, tya'bentv having, (b.) The 
 past participle: blu'menbch'dujt, crowned with flowers — lit 
 sBUt'me, the flower, befrdlljt', crowned ; fcbncc'tcfcctft, covered 
 with snow — t>ei* ©cfyuee, the snow, bc&ccft', covered ; fce'gebo- 
 fen, born of the sea — tie @ee, the sea, gebo'ren, born. 
 
 (5) Particles. 
 
 Compounded zoith Particles. SBor'rcdvtS, forward, jttt'ficf', 
 back; tytncin', into; fycvautf', out of ; mitfytu', therefore ; fcafyer', 
 thence ; mtumefyv', now. 
 
 6. The components often remain unaltered ; as, 2(p'fc(baum, 
 apple-tree ; Ubr'macfccr, watchmaker ; tu'gcnfcveid), rich in 
 virtue : but in many instances, the first term undergoes some 
 change, by letters being either added or omitted. 
 
168 
 
 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 
 
 [book I. 
 
 (1) Letters added. 
 
 eg: as, bet* (5ot'tC£t>icn|t, divine service — from @ott ; 
 <33ei'|U$fraft, power of mind — t>CV ©cijt ; tie ^o'&egnotfy, 
 agony of death — bet* c £ot>. 
 
 g : as, t>ag Jfptm'mefsndjt, the light of heaven — feev Jpittt's 
 mcl ; tag (S'felgofyr, an ass's ear, the corner of a leaf of a 
 book turned down — t>ev (S'jYf; tag 2C* 'beitgfyailg, the work- 
 house — Me 2(r'bett; t>er (Sebnvtg'tag, the birth-day — tit 
 ©cbttvt'; tag J^illfg'mittel, means of assistance, resource — 
 tit Wfe. 
 
 ng, en$ : as, Die grie'&engfeiev, the celebration of peace — 
 
 ton grieve ; tit J^et'jenggute, goodness of heart — tag £ev$. 
 
 The above additional letters mark the genitive case, in the 
 first component. 
 
 e : as, frag §tt'%tUit, affliction of heart — tag Jperj ; bet* 
 spfev'fcefng, the horse's foot — tag spfcvfc ; ttx ©an'febvaten, 
 the roasted goose — tit (Sang, the goose. 
 
 In some of these examples, the inserted e may be considered 
 as the characteristic letter of the plural number. 
 
 n, or en : as, tag grcMenfrjt, the festival of joy, the jubi- 
 lee — tit gven'fee ; tag IDvacb'enblut, dragon's blood — Dei* 
 2H'ac()'e ; tn Jpel'&enmntfy, heroic courage — ttv $dt, the 
 hero; tag J^iv'tenlcben, pastoral life — t>er %\tt, the herdsman; 
 tn SSau'CVUpoIj/ vulgar pride — ttx. ?&ai\'CX, the rustic, the 
 clown. 
 
 The additional n, or en, may, in some instances, indicate the 
 genitive case, in others the plural number. 
 
 et*: as, ttv Ci'crfttcfjCU/ the omelet — tag Si, the egg, and 
 t>ev ^tt'cben, the cake; fcte SSU'Dcvfcbrift, ideographic writing 
 — tag 53ilt>, the image, figure, and t>te ©d)l*ift, the writing ; 
 tit 30Bet'bevii|t, craft of women — tag QBcib, the woman, and 
 tit U\l, cunning. 
 
 The letters ev correspond, in these words, with the termina- 
 tion of the plural. 
 
PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 1 G9 
 
 i : this occurs only in two very ancient compounds ; Die 
 Sdadj'tijjaH, the nightingale, and Dei* StfiU'tigfim, the bride- 
 
 groom. 
 
 (2) Letters omitted. 
 
 e, in substantives: as, Die QsnD'ftlfce, the final syllable — 0at5 
 Qht'De, the end; Die ©fO'folge, the succession — Da6 Qft'be, the 
 inheritance, t>ie got'gc, the act of following or succeeding; 
 
 act* ©onn'tag, Sunday — t>ie ©onne; Der ^irfdj'baum, the 
 
 cherry-tree — Me fttt'fcfr. 
 
 en, in infinitives : as, Der. gcefjt'boDCtt, the fencing-school — 
 fcd)'ten, to fence; Die Sfteifbatjlt, the riding-school — VU'Utl, to 
 ride ; benf'fflftfliig, memorable — Dennett, to think of, and 
 WltV'&ig, worthy; fyab'fucfetig, avaricious — fya'kn, to have. 
 
 These omissions take place because only the radical syllable 
 of the first component is employed in composition. 
 
 7. It is not settled by rule when and how these changes in 
 the first component are to be made. Analogy and euphony 
 alone determine the question. Sometimes a diversity occurs 
 in the state of the first component, as it is combined with dif- 
 ferent words; as, Dev *8au'evf)of, the farm, and Dcv 25au's 
 fttlfttCg/ the war of peasants — both from Dei* SStol'tV, the 
 husbandman, the peasant ; Die S^r'flirdjt, reverence, and Dei* 
 gtVVCUvdufccr, the reviler — from Die Stj'rc; DCf gcu'crfycrD, the 
 hearth, and Die gcu'CVJjtn'UUjt, a great fire — from DC16 gdl'CV; 
 &a$ J?CV'£c(ctD, affliction of heart, and Die ipeu'jensaua.ft, anxi- 
 ety of heart — from Da£ £crj. But even in regard to the same 
 compounds, an uncertainty occasionally prevails: for example, 
 Der (gi'clKnbatUtt/ or Dev Stctybaum, the oak-tree — from Die 
 (gi'cfje, the oak ; (SvD'HoS, or ©r'Dcnt'fot?, the clod of earth 
 — from Die (£r'De. 
 
 8, There are a few instances in which a change of significa- 
 tion is produced by the mode of composition ; as, Dei* SanD'; 
 maun, the husbandman, the peasant, and Der $anD£'ttl(inn, the 
 compatriot; Jpeil'mtttel, medicine, and JpcUs'mittel, means of 
 salvation ; gcfo'nnvtljfcljaft, agriculture, and gel'DevttHVtfyfcljaft, 
 rotation in crops. 
 
 15 
 
170 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [BOOK I. 
 
 9. The more ancient compounds cannot always be reduced 
 to that analogy, by which the composition of words is now 
 regulated. 
 
 10. When it happens that two or more compound words 
 occur in a sentence, having the second component the same, 
 this component is frequently omitted in the first word, or words, 
 and only expressed in the word that is last : as, spfaf' fen-- Utti) 
 ^Bzi'bwlift, craft of priests and women ; £riC3$* Mtt> grte'* 
 !>enS£eitcn, times of war and peace ; 35ct- 33 US- \Mb &\pta$, 
 day of prayer, repentance, and fasting. The hyphen is then 
 put after the first word or words. 
 
 § 2. OF THE INTRODUCTION OF FOREIGN WORDS INTO THE 
 
 GERMAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 The German language is sufficiently copious and produc- 
 tive, to furnish native words for any idea that can be expressed 
 at all. Moreover, it is so old, that none of the known 
 languages of the earth can be considered as its parent ; and 
 the radical words as well as the manner of forming new terms, 
 are so peculiar, that the German cannot borrow expressions 
 from foreign languages without violating its own idiom. This 
 being the character of the language, the best German scholars 
 have laid down the general rule, that in speaking and writing, 
 all those terms which are not of genuine German growth, but 
 imported from foreign languages, should be avoided. It was by 
 disregarding this principle, that, particularly from the last half 
 of the sixteenth, until the last half of the eighteenth century, 
 a considerable number of Latin and French terms were intro- 
 duced into the language; many of which are still in common 
 use. But a sounder taste, and a better knowledge of the native 
 riches and powers of the language, have already cleared it of 
 many of those heterogeneous ingredients ; and there is reason 
 to hope that this purifying principle will by degrees succeed 
 in removing all these inconsistencies, without indulging in the 
 blind zeal of an over-hasty and extravagant " purism." 
 
 According to this principle, we ought to be directed by the 
 following rules. 
 
 1. No foreign word should be used, if the same idea may 
 be conveyed by a native term, equally expressive and usual. 
 It is improper, for example, to say cjccuftvctt, instead of cntfcW* 
 
PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 171 
 
 fcigen, to excuse ; or SDfrfcicamcnt', instead of Qtil'mittti, 
 medicine ; or Stationafttlilij, instead of iano'WCfyr, national 
 militia. 
 
 2. A genuine German word should be preferred to a for- 
 eign one, if the former, although less usual, is equally expres- 
 sive, and not yet wholly obsolete. Thus, SBor'fyut, advanced 
 guard, is better than ifoant'gar&e ; Sftacr/fyut, rear guard, is 
 better than ftrtere'garoe ; and SJttC'teltrejfeu, centre of the 
 army, is better than (Een'trum. 
 
 3. If we find no word already formed to express a particular 
 idea, we should, instead of resorting to foreign languages, 
 rather try to form a new word, in the true German style, either 
 by derivation, or composition, which have been treated of in 
 the preceding section. 
 
 a. By derivation, for example, the words SBolfS'tfyum, na- 
 tionality, fcotfg'tfyitmttdj, national, and SJoffS'tfyumUritf'eit, 
 national peculiarity, have lately been formed from the radical 
 word ^olf, people or nation ; and those words have already, 
 in a great measure, displaced the foreign terms, Sftationalttat', 
 national', and SUtional^tgcntfyumltdSt'cit. 
 
 b. In the way of composition, a foreign word may be ren- 
 dered in German, by resolving its meaning into the component 
 ideas. 
 
 Take for example the French word courrier, which means a 
 messenger who is to proceed with speed. In this instance, 
 the more general idea of a messenger is defined by the par- 
 ticular idea of speed. Messenger, in German, is 23o'tc, and 
 speed, Ct'lc; and these two words being put together accord- 
 ing to Rule II. of the preceding section, form the word 
 (Stf'POte. This is preferable to Courier', which ought not to 
 be considered a German word, as it is needlessly borrowed 
 from a foreign language. — In the same manner the French 
 word diligence, which is frequently used in Germany to deuote 
 a carriage which is to travel with despatch, may be rendered 
 by CU'tDOgen ; from < 2Ba'gcit, carriage, and CKc, despatch ; 
 and this German word has already displaced in a great meas- 
 ure the barbarous term JH'ftgCUCC. 
 
 But in seeking native for foreign words, we ought to guard 
 against mere literal translations. It is the sense of the foreign 
 words which is to be rendered in German, and not the man- 
 
172 FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. [BOOK I. 
 
 ner in which this sense is expressed in the language to which 
 they belong. Thus the French word alike, which is sometimes 
 used in Germany as signifying a walk planted with trees, can- 
 not be rendered simply by ©aug, walk ; but by SatmVgang, 
 from (Sang, walk, and 95aum, tree. 
 
 4. The general language which is at present spoken by all 
 well-bred persons in Germany, may be recruited, by antiquated 
 German words, and by local or provincial expressions. But 
 they cannot be considered as parts of the general and living 
 language, until good German writers have obtained for them 
 the sanction of public opinion. 
 
 a. The word Cur'nen, to perform gymnastic exercises, is an 
 example of an antiquated term, which has been restored to the 
 living language. This word, having lately been revived by 
 Jahn, is now, with all the derivative and compound words 
 which have been formed from it, a legitimate German term. 
 
 b. " Provincial terms," says Jahn, " are the militia, which 
 take the field when the standing army of book-words is defeat- 
 ed." Thus the Swiss word k&wi'nt, avalanche, has become a 
 classical German word. 
 
 5. A number of foreign words which have taken a German 
 termination, and of which many derivative and compound 
 words have been formed, may now be considered as natural- 
 ized ; as, the word Sftatur', nature, which has been employed 
 in forming the derivative expressions Itll'mUUV, unnatural 
 state ; natitv'ficl), natural, STcatuvltcfyfctt, natural appearance ; 
 and the compound words, 9TatUl''ftaut>, state of nature ; 9ta= 
 tUU'redjt, natural right; and many others. The words, SKc'gel, 
 rule, and gami'Ite, family, are similar instances of naturalized 
 words. 
 
 6. There are some expressions, borrowed from foreign 
 languages, which may be considered almost, in the light of 
 proper names, peculiarly and exclusively belonging to the 
 objects which they designate. Of this kind are ^()ce, tea ; 
 &af fee, coffee ; ©cfcof oU'&C, chocolate ; %Qb*P, tobacco. To 
 attempt to Germanize such terms would be an absurdity. 
 
 7. There are some foreign terms, which, according to their 
 general and permanent signification, might be rendered in 
 
PART II. CH. 11.] FORMATION OF NEW WORDS. 173 
 
 German, but are nevertheless preserved by good writers, be- 
 cause they have a reference to peculiar circumstances and 
 times. Thus the native words, ^olf, people, and J£m*, army, 
 are in general to be preferred to the foreign terms, SiattOU 7 , 
 and Tlvmw' ; but in the time of Napoleon, the expressions, t>ic 
 gVO'fc ftnrtec', the Grand Army, and t>ic gvo'fe Station', the 
 Great Nation, had a special and .transitory meaning, for which 
 the foreign appellatives were better suited than the true Ger- 
 man expressions. 
 
 8. As the process of purifying the language from improper 
 mixtures must be a gradual one, it is particularly desirable that 
 they should be most carefully avoided in works which are likely 
 to be of lasting importance. From works of this character, 
 the changes may and will proceed, by degrees, to lighter kinds 
 of literature, and conversation ; while a precipitate or pre- 
 posterous attempt at purification, which would obstruct the 
 natural flow of thought and expression, is as much averse to 
 the genius of the language, as those very impurities which it is 
 intended to remove. 
 
 15 
 
 :^# 
 
BOOK II. 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 AGREEMENT, GOVERNMENT, AND ARRANGEMENT 
 
 OF WORDS. 
 
 The agreement of words consists in their being put in the 
 same gender, number, case, and person. 
 
 One word is said to govern another, when, by the power of 
 the former, the latter is made to assume a particular form ; for 
 example, a certain case in declension, or mood in conjugation. 
 
 The arrangement of words consists in placing them in the 
 proper order in which they should succeed each other. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 THE ARTICLE. 
 
 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 The articles em and feet* are generally used in German, as 
 a and the in English. In German, moreover, they must agree 
 with the noun in gender, number, and case, whether the noun 
 be preceded by an adjective or not ; as, citt 2D?antt, a man ; 
 ei'nem p'ten SDtan'ne, to a good man ; ei'nev treff'Iicfoen §vau, 
 to an excellent woman ; fcaS tfyCU'VC ftn'fceufen ei'neS getiek'tett 
 Kin'Mt the dear remembrance of a beloved child. 
 
CH. 1. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 175 
 
 Obs. 1. The article is never placed between the noun and 
 its adjective, but always before the adjective ; as, cill ^at'bcv 
 SSo'gcn, half a sheet; et'nc fyctf'be ©tun'fcc, half an hour; cin 
 fyal'betf 3<u)v, half a year ; Me bci'tim ian'ber, both the coun- 
 tries ; t>a$ gan'^e 3<Ht)V, all the year ; &ei* bal'be £ag, half the 
 day. 
 
 Obs. 2. In compounds the article agrees with the gender of 
 the last word ; as, &et* iic'bctfbvicf, the love letter ; Me ( 333et / s 
 tCVfa^UC, the weathercock ; ba£ ©ta&t'fyaitS, the town-house. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Give me the book. Bring me a pen. Here is a knife. Lend 
 him the penknife. He has the ink. Write an answer. I saw 
 the friends. 
 
 to give, ge'ben, irr. penknife, ge'bcrmeffer, rc. 3.a. <U 
 
 book, tdwd), n. 3. b. e. ink, SMn'tc, /. 1. C. 
 
 to bring, bvittg'en. to write, feljvci'bm. 
 
 pen, ge'Det', /.l.C answer, int'roovt, f. 1. t). 
 
 here, fytcr. to see, fc'fycil, irr. 
 
 knife, SOTcffcr, w. 3. a. a. friend, gvcunb, w. 3. b. 6. 
 
 to lend, Ict'tyCU. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 The article fcet* is used in German, though not in English, 
 before most nouns in a universal sense, or where a common 
 noun is, as it were, personified; as, t>a$ ic'bcn, life; ba€ IXi'ttK, 
 age ; fret' gvufy'ltng, spring ; bet* ©om'mcr, summer ; bet* 
 SEftcnfd), man ; Me SOten'fdjCU/ men or mankind ; also before 
 all common nouns in the oblique cases ; as, t>a6 $utt> fceS 
 35nt'bcv$, the brother's child. 
 
 Also before most adjectives taken substantively ; as, ba$ 
 ©U'tc, good or goodness; etu ©clc^V'CCV, a learned man; bet* 
 (Belcfyv'tC, the learned. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 Before proper names the article is generally omitted. 
 
 1. Before the proper names of places, the article is most 
 commonly omitted, particularly in the nominative ; as, Son'bOU/ 
 
176 
 
 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLE. 
 
 [BOOK II. 
 
 spc'tcvsfcurg, (SttVO'pa, (Eng'tanb. But the following nouns are 
 exceptions to this rule : 
 
 fcie ^urfei'/ Turkey. t>Ct* £aag, the Hague, 
 
 fcie iombav&ci', Lombardy. t)ic <&Sd)n>eij, Switzerland, 
 
 tie 9tic'&cvfant>c, the Nether- fcte ietoau'tc, the Levant, 
 
 lands. Die spf&f}/ the Palatinate. 
 
 Also the Germans say, Die @tat)t Son'DOU, the city of Lon- 
 don ; to$ ^6'nigVCid) gvanf VCtct), the kingdom of France, &c. 
 
 2. The proper names of persons generally take no article in 
 the nominative, nor, when they have a change of termination, 
 in the oblique cases ; as, (Ti'CCt'06 SHe'Den, Cicero's Orations. 
 In the oblique cases, when there is no change of termination, 
 the article may be used ; as, 23w'ttt$ tb'UU t>en S&'jav, Bru- 
 tus killed Caesar. 
 
 In speaking familiarly of well-known persons, the definite 
 article is sometimes used, even in the nominative case ; as, 
 fcer 5tav(, Charles ; Die htt'fc, Louisa. 
 
 A proper name when used as a common noun, requires the 
 article before it ; as fcer spia'to fet'ncS Jfit'altetS, the Plato of | 
 his age. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Death itself is not so dreadful. 
 
 Man is rational, man is mortal. 
 
 He has a house in (the) town. 
 
 We are going to (the) church. 
 
 They come from (the) church. 
 
 Neptune was the god of the seas. 
 
 I am going to London. 
 
 I come from Holland. 
 
 Cicero was an excellent orator. 
 
 The temple of Solomon was magnificent. 
 
 Death, 'Jot), m, 3. b. 6 
 
 itself, fclbjt. 
 
 not, me()t. 
 
 so, fo. 
 
 dreadful, furd)'tcv(id). 
 
 man, SOTenfcl), m. 2. b. 
 
 rational, fcCVUitnf tig. 
 
 mortal, ftcr'6lid). 
 
 house, J£>au£, n. 3. b. c. 
 
 in, in. (Dot.) 
 
 town, @tat>t, /. 1. l\ 
 
 to go, ge'fycu, followed by irt. 
 
 (Ace.) 
 church, ftir'djc, /. 1. C. 
 
CH. 1. § 1.] 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 177 
 
 to come, fom'men. 
 
 from, Doit. (Dat.) 
 Neptune, SRcptUtt'. 
 was, wax. 
 
 god, <S>0tt, m. 3. b. C. 
 sea, SOtCCf, n. 3. b. b. 
 
 to go, ge'fyen. 
 to, nacl). 
 
 to come, fom'men. 
 
 from, Von. 
 Cicero, (Et'CCfO. 
 excellent, tvefflicf). 
 orator, SKcr'nctr, m. 3. a. 0. 
 temple, ^em'pel, m. 3. a. a. 
 Solomon, ©a'lomo. 
 magnificent, pvacb'tig. 
 
 RULE IV. 
 
 The article is repeated before nouns of different genders ; 
 as, t>CV Sk'tcr, t>ie SDtut'tCt* UUD fcilS ftiUD, the father, mother, 
 and child : but before nouns each of which requires the same 
 article, it should be put only before the first; as, liX SHoef tint) 
 S$\\t, the coat and hat. 
 
 Sometimes, however, the article is repeated before each of 
 several nouns of the same gender, for the purpose of express- 
 ing the importance of each one of them : for example, when 
 different subjects are enumerated in a title, or superscription ; 
 as in that of the fable, 2>CV gucl)$ ttut> MX SHa'be, The Fox and 
 the Raven. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 The man, woman, and child are gone out. 
 
 The hare and pigeon. 
 
 The father, mother, son, and daughter are in the country. 
 
 The sheep, cow, and dog. 
 
 I left the book and ruler upon the table. 
 
 Give me the pen and penknife. 
 
 The father and son (do) not 3 resemble 1 each 2 other 2 . 
 
 man, *SOTantt/ m. 3. b. C. 
 woman, $X<X\l, f> 1. t>. 
 child, £iut>, n. 3. b. t. 
 to go out, au6'gct)CU, irr. 
 hare, JpvVfe, m. 2. a. 
 pigeon, ^cut'bc, /. 1. C. 
 in, auf. (Dat.) 
 country, $ant>, n. 3. b. C. 
 sheep, ©cfoaf, n. 3. b. b, 
 cow, kill), /. 1. b. 
 dog, Jjuufc; m. 3. b. b. 
 
 to leave, laf'fcu, irr. 
 book, 33ucl), n. 3. b. e. 
 ruler, iiueal', n. 3. b. [\ (Ace.) 
 upon, auf. (Dat.) 
 table, $ifct), m. 3. b. b. 
 pen, ge'frer, /. 1. C. 
 penknife, gc'DcvincjTcr, n. 3. a. 0. 
 father, *33a'tcr, m. 3. a. a. 
 son, igofyn, m. 3. b. b. 
 to resemble, g(ci'c()cn. 
 each other, fid). 
 
178 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. [BOOK II. 
 
 RULE V. 
 
 In an emphatic manner of speaking, the article is frequent- 
 ly omitted where it ought to be used, according to Rule II, 
 and Rule IV, particularly in the plural number ; as, Q5ei*ed) 'U 
 tmt> ltn'gcred)te, 30?cn'fc{)cn uni> 'Sfyie've fan'&en in Den 333cl'ten 
 ifyl* @t'al\ The just and the unjust, men and beasts found their 
 grave in the waves. 
 
 RULE VI. 
 
 The article is omitted, whenever the substantive expresses 
 a part of a thing, which in English is denoted by the word 
 some, (answering to the French du, de la, de V , des) ; as, 
 35ring'en @te mil* 2>rot>, Bring me some bread ; Jjpa'ben @tc 
 ^papier', Qin'tt, &c. ? Have you some paper, ink, &c? 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Have you eaten 2 bread 1 and drunk 2 water 1 ? 
 Bring me some wine and water. 
 I have bought 3 some 2 silk 2 to-day 1 . 
 Give me some paper, ink, and pens. 
 
 bread, 23rot>, n. 3. b. 6. to-day, ()eu'te. 
 
 to eat, ef'fcn, irr. silk, ©et'fce, /. 1. 
 
 water, ^XBaffCt 4 , n. 3. a. a. to buy, frut'fcit. 
 
 to drink, ttinf'Ctt/ irr. to give, ge'beit/ irr. 
 
 wine, ^33eitt/ m. 3. b. 6. paper, papier', n . 3. b. 6, 
 
 RULE VII. 
 
 In some phrases the article is commonly omitted in German, 
 where it is in English either expressed, or has a pronoun put 
 
 in its place; as, itberbnng'er fctc'fetf, the bearer of this; in 
 bef'tet* £H*t>'nung, in the best order ; t)ov ©n'&igung t>($ @ct)au'-- 
 
 fpic[£, before the conclusion of the drama ; id) fyci'be C£ in 
 J&iitt'&ett, I have it in my hands ; id) fya'fce t$ fcor 2(u'gcU/ I 
 have it before my eyes. — The same peculiarity is to be observ- 
 ed in regard to some adjectives and participles ; as, tt'fttttC, 
 the former ; Utfttttt', the latter ; btf<X$'tCX l the aforesaid ; 
 evroafyn'tCV, or get>ac()'tiT, the abovementioned ; gcnann'tcr, the 
 
CII. 1. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE. 17$ 
 
 abovenamed ; foCgCUfccr, the following : also with respect to 
 some proper names; as, CjUn'kicn, the East Indies; QODcfHn'* 
 fcten, the West Indies. 
 
 § 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
 
 The article must be put immediately before the noun to 
 which it belongs, if the noun is not preceded by other words 
 which qualify it; as, CM SOTauu, a man; t>ic §rau, the woman 
 If the noun is preceded by other qualifying words, the article 
 must be put before them. Thus, if the noun be preceded by 
 an adjective, the article must be placed before the adjective , 
 as, fcer. glt'te £Dtauu ; and if the adjective is qualified by an ad- 
 verb or a participial construction, the article precedes this ; 
 as, cine fci;t* gu'tc grau, a very good woman ; fcic al'ti$ fiber- 
 mc'gcnfce iw'bt jum SHufym, the all-surpassing love of glory. If 
 the adjective, for the sake of emphasis, is put after the noun 
 in the way of apposition, the article immediately precedes the 
 adjective, or the adverb, or participial construction, by which 
 it is qualified ; as, StatUl*', fcte fyet'Iige, sacred nature; uu'fct' 
 gmm& fcet fefomcrj'Itd) VCrmijf tc, our deeply regretted friend ; 
 £vieg, feet* ian'&Cl* fccrfyee'l'enfce, war which desolates countries. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Of the celebrated painter. An ill fed horse. The sea 3 
 connecting 2 (the) nations 1 . The 2 most 3 hearty 3 joy 1 . For- 
 bearance, (the) never tiring. He was a victim of (the) passion, 
 (the) deluding the heart, corrupting the taste, deranging the 
 intellect. 
 
 celebrated, fcciutfymt'. never, nic. 
 
 painter, SERa'ter, m. 3. a. a. to tire, cvtmV&en. 
 
 ill, fc()lcd)t. victim, Cp'fcr, n. 
 
 fed, gefut'tcrt. passion, iei'fccnfdjaft, /. 
 
 horse, spfcrt), n. 3. a. a. to delude, bct^'vcn. 
 
 nation, *33o(t\ n. 3. b. e. heart, «£erj, n. 
 
 to connect, l)cr£uu't>Clt. to corrupt, foevfrCl'fceil. 
 
 sea, ©ec, /. taste, ©cfdjmacf , m. 3. b. 
 
 joy, gtCtt'&C, /. to derange, jevnit'tCH. 
 
 hearty, fyev^'Ucl). intellect, ©ei|t, m. 3. b. C. 
 
 forbearance, langmutt), f. 
 
180 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 [book II. 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
 RULE I. 
 
 Two or more nouns are put in the same case, 
 
 1. When they are brought together only to show their com- 
 mon relation to another object ; as, ©cveefe'tigfeit, ^ofyf; 
 
 tt)ati$hit tint) gvim'micjfeit finfc Me SOtcvfmale ei'ncs £fyvif ten, 
 
 Justice, charity, and piety are the characteristics of a Chris- 
 tian. 
 
 2. When they are put together to denote the same object, 
 so that one of them either completes or explains* the other ; 
 as, fcer. ODTo'uat SXftai, the month of May ; Dev dibttj fcei'nes 
 25nt't>cr;£, t>e£ SHecfytS'gelefyrten, the advice of thy brother, the 
 lawyer. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 When one noun is qualified by another, the latter is gener- 
 ally put in the genitive case ; as, tit gmt'fceit t)Ct* 3iU'geut>, the 
 pleasures of youth ; fcic §vuc()t t>ev (Srfcnnfnifj tu'6 (Su'tcn imt> 
 256'fcn, the fruit of the knowledge of good and evil. 
 
 An exception is made when the noun which qualifies anoth- 
 er, denotes the object, of which the other is a part, only in a 
 general manner ; especially, if the qualifying noun expresses 
 an object which may be measured, weighed, or numbered. In 
 such instances the qualifying noun remains in the nominative, 
 singular or plural ; as, £et)U SiTcn %ud) (instead of ^U'cbctf), 
 ten yards of cloth ; eitt ©titer' 5 33l'0t> (instead of 2Sve'r>C$), a 
 piece of bread ; cm (SlaS QOBctlt (instead of ^ei'ttCt?), a glass 
 of wine ; eitt 3)ltt'jCttt> iidyttv, a dozen candles. 
 
 * When the preceding is explained by the subsequent noun, 
 the latter is said to be in apposition with the former. 
 
CH. 2. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 181 
 
 But the genitive is required if the qualifying noun is more 
 exactly designated by a pronoun or an adjective ; as, jcfylt 
 <E('(cn Mc'fCt? £n'cl)C$, ten yards of this cloth ; £tt>ci gaf fct* 
 (Ut'tClt 3Bci'nc6, two casks of good wine. 
 
 Observation, Nouns of the masculine and neuter genders, 
 expressing measure, weight, or number, remain, after numerals, 
 in the nominative singular ; as, jwan'jtg §U6 (instead of giVfc) 
 J&ng'C, twenty feet in length ; orct Boll (instead of 3ol'lc) bvctt, 
 three inches in breadth ; jroct spaav (instead of spaa're) 
 ©tvutll'pfc, three pairs of stockings. Measures of time, as, 
 3*ifyl*, year, %a$, day, and names of coins, as, ©coining, shil- 
 ling, are excepted. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 The genitive case is, frequently, supplied by the preposition 
 toon, of, with the dative. This is done, 
 
 1. When the article is excluded ; as, &cr ll&r&'liclje $f)ctf 
 toon ©ttg'tanD; the northern part of England ; tie QH'CU'£Cn 
 toon grattf'VCid), the boundaries of France. 
 
 2. When quality, condition, or proportion, is implied ; as, 
 cm SDfann toon ^cvftan'oc, a man of sense ; cm fiitt ton 
 Ci>'lci* ©enfung^avt, a gentleman of a noble character ; ci'nc 
 SJtct'fc toon jctm SDfai'lcn, a journey of ten miles; cut @cl)ijf 
 l>0lt JWCi tyun'&CVt ^on'UCtt, a ship of two hundred tons ; cine 
 
 ©itm'mc toon jwan'jig ©ul'ccn nno ffmf ©rofcfj'cn, a sum 
 
 of twenty guilders and five groats; cin SDtamt toon tic&t'jig 
 Zfifj'Xttoi a man of eighty years. 
 
 3. When the material is mentioned, of which any thing is 
 made ; as, ci'nc XI for toon (Sol'OC, the same as, ci'nc gol'&cnc 
 XII) r ; a gold watch ; cm SScctyer toon ©tl'bcr, a silver cup; cin 
 ©tlttyl toon (Sl'fcnbcm, an ivory chair. 
 
 4. Before the indefinite article, to denote character ; as, 
 Cin 2tb'fc()CU toon ci'ncm SDten'fcfjcn, a horrible villain, (literally, 
 a horror of a man) ; cin 2ut6 bttno toon ci'ncm cfyv'UclKn 
 SDfan nc, a pattern of an honest man. 
 
 5. To prevent an inelegant repetition of the same endings; 
 as, tic llv'facrjc toon ocm fon'ocrbaven s 3etra'gcn M OJTan'nce, 
 the reason of the singular conduct of the mja.n, — instead of pit 
 
 Xlr'fadjc ocs fon'cevbaven 95cttra'gcne cc£ 9D?an'nc£. 
 
 16 
 
182 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK. II. 
 
 Sometimes it is indifferent, whether VOW be made use of, or 
 the genitive case : for example, t>m ©cl)Cill VOW §Hct>'(ic()feit 
 fya'ben, or t»cn ©cbctit OCX SHc^'ficfiteit fya'ben, to have the ap- 
 pearance of honesty ; t»CV n&rfc'lidjc S^cil t)0U Qsilg'laufc, or, 
 Oct* uot'fc'liebe Xtjcil Sng'UnM, the northern part of England ; 
 
 ei'ncv von mei'ncn gmm^cn, or ct'nct* mei'ner greun'&c, one 
 
 of my friends. But where the genitive is not distinguished by 
 the article, or the termination, Von must be employed. Before 
 the article it is often superfluous ; as, fccit ©cl)Cin Von OtX 
 $!H'gCtt& fya'fccn, to have the show of virtue. £>et* $u'gen&/ 
 as the genitive case, would be sufficient, without the prepo- 
 sition. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 The friends of right and order are contending against the 
 passions and prejudices of the oppressors and the oppressed. 
 
 The town of Schwytz is the capital of the canton of 
 Schwytz. 
 
 You confounded John the Baptist with John the Evangelist. 
 
 The merits of the first President of the United States. 
 
 What is the price of a hundred weight of lead ? 
 
 I see a great number of children. 
 
 I want three cords of that wood. 
 
 He gave me a canister of genuine imperial tea. 
 
 I bought ten pounds of meat. 
 
 Natives of Europe displaced the aborigines of America. 
 
 He is a man of high rank and great pretensions, but no 
 merit. 
 
 A helmet of steel with ornaments of silver. 
 
 Is he not a model of a good son 1 
 
 friend, grctmfc, m. 3. b. b. oppressed, UUtCffctntcft'. 
 
 right, SHcc^t, m. 3. b. b. town, glec'fen, m. 3. a. a. 
 
 order, Orfc'nung, /. 1. t>. capital, £aupt'ort, m. 3. b. b. 
 
 to contend, fthtipfert. canton, Canton', m. 3. b. b. 
 
 against, ge'gett, (Ace.) to confound, Vcrroecr/fcltt. 
 
 passion, Wi'oenfdjaft, /. 1. i>. John, 3fofyan'nc$. 
 
 and, tmt>. Baptist, S&u'fer, m. 3. a. 0, 
 
 prejudice, ^Qet'nxttjtii, n. 3. with, mit. (Dat.) 
 
 b. b. Evangelist, €toangc(ifV / m.2.b. 
 
 oppressor, UntCtOnVfcr, m. 3. merit, 33et't>icn|V, n. 3. b. b. 
 
 a. a. the first, t>Cf cr'ftf. 
 
CH. 2. § 1.] 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 183 
 
 president, tythfLbtnt 1 , m. 2. b. 
 
 united, fcerei'nigt. 
 
 state, ©tciat, m. 3. b. t>. 
 price, spvcitf, m. 3. b. b. 
 hundred weight, (Eent'lKV, m. 
 
 3. a. a. 
 lead, $5(ei, n. 3. b. b. 
 to see, fc'fyeu. 
 great, gV0£. 
 
 number, ^DTeng'C, /. 1. C. 
 child, fttut), ». 3. b. C. 
 
 to want, brau'djcn. 
 cord, Klafut, /. 1. a. 
 
 wood, £o(£, w. 3. b. C. 
 
 to give, gc'bcn, 2rr. 
 
 canister, SSltcfo'fC, /. 1. C. 
 
 genuine, ad)t. 
 
 imperial tea, ^ai'fCVt^CC/ m. 
 
 3. a. 
 to buy, fau'fen. 
 pound, spfmtt), n. 3. b. b. 
 
 meat, gtfctfcf), w. 3. b. b. 
 native, cin'gcboren. 
 Europe, Suro'po. 
 to displace, fcertrdttg'ett. 
 aborigines, ilv'bcrootyner, m. 
 
 3. a. a. 
 man, *SD?ann, m. 3. b. c. 
 high, t)cc(). 
 rank, SHang, m. 3. b. 
 pretension, *2tn'fpntd), m. 3. 
 
 b. b. 
 but, a'bcr. 
 no, fein. 
 
 helmet, Jjpcfm, »ra. 3. b. b. 
 
 steel, @M^f, »«. 3. b. b. 
 
 with, mtt. (Dat.) 
 
 ornament, jSie'vaffy, /. 1. t>. 
 
 silver, ©tl'bcv, n, 3. a. a. 
 
 not, nicbt. 
 
 model, SDhtftet/ »• 3. a. a. 
 
 good, gut. 
 
 son, ©ofyn, w. 3. b. b. 
 
 RULE IV. 
 
 The genitive case often occurs, where there is apparently 
 no word to govern it. Thus it expresses : 
 
 I. Relation of time. 2>c$ 2f bcirttf, in the evening ; De£ 
 SDtor'gClltf/* in the morning ; &CS SDiit'tagS, at noon ; t>eg 
 Sfla(()t6,t in the night ; (Sonn'abcnfcS, on Saturday ; SOXon'- 
 tag6, on Monday ; ei'uc£ $a'ge$, one day, on a certain day; 
 fyeu'tigcs ^a'ges, this day ; ein'mal t>c£ SDio'nates, once in a 
 month; fcicv'uhU &C£ Safy'VCS, four times in a year. 
 
 * The same idiom prevails in the Greek language ; as, 
 og&gov, early in the morning ; vvxtoc, in the night. 
 
 t Here the article corresponds with the termination, and 
 not with the gender, of the substantive ; the addition of £ (to 
 £ftac()t, f. 1. b.) being formerly the characteristic of the geni- 
 tive singular in all declensions. 
 
184 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 
 
 2. Relation of place. Sie'fctf Dt'tCG, in this place ; gct)6's 
 rigftt Ol'ttti, in or at a proper place; al'lei* Ov'fC/ in all places, 
 every where. 
 
 3. Way and manner. ©cra'&CS (or gcva'fccn) QOBc'geS, 
 straightways ; fie'tyenfctn gu'fcS, immediately ; fcic'fer ©Cjtalt', 
 in this manner ; foI'gcn&Cl* ©CfUft', in the following manner ; 
 mei'ttetf S^fifc/ on my part; nn'fertt ^fyeilS, on our part; 
 mei'ne* < 23E3if / fcu^ / to my knowledge ; mei'nes SSctftnf'en^/ in 
 my opinion ; ei'niger SDTci'fcU/ in some measure ; gewtffev 
 SDfrl'fftt/ in a certain degree; nn'foervidjtetei* ©ac()'e, not hav- 
 ing effected one's purpose. Also the following phrases: fling's 
 erg jlcv'bcn, to die of hunger; ci'UC^ fd)mevj1ld)CU io'DcS 
 fttx'btft, to die a painful death ; feci* £ Off 'tiling le'betl, to live 
 in hope ; t>Ct? 3u / tvattcn6 fe'ben, to live with confidence, that 
 is, to entertain a confident opinion with regard to a thing. 
 With the verb fcin : as, '■HMf'fcnS fcin, to intend ; bn SOfahlltltg 
 frill, to be of an opinion ; fceS ^to'DcS fctU/ to perish. 
 
 RULE V. 
 
 The accusative case is employed to denote time, both as to 
 date and duration. — Date : fcCU jefyn'tClt *£ag Itad) &ei* ©d)Iacl)t, 
 the tenth day after the battle ; fo ttOt t$ fcag tx'\U %*t}V, thus 
 it was (in) the first year; fceit tlltttl'tett Slt'li, the ninth of July ; 
 VO'vtgCU 2)ienf'tag, last Tuesday; fcrei mat t>ie ( 2Bod)'e (Ace), 
 three times a week. —Duration: id) bill Den gau'jcn $ag $n 
 •Qatt'fe get&e'fen, I have been at home the whole day ; id) VtHT'= 
 
 be nod) ei'nen SDTo'nat in fcer ©tafct bfei'beu, I shall remain 
 
 yet a month in town ; fecrroci'Ieil @te Cl'llCU Ztu'gcnblirf, stay 
 one moment. The adverb iailg, long, is frequently subjoined 
 to mark the duration ; as, jefyn 3>afy'l*e (attg, for ten years. 
 
 After certain adjectives and verbs, signifying weight, mea- 
 sure, extent, age, price, value, such as, gro£, great, bttXt, broad, 
 fd)ir»ev, heavy, mie'gen, to weigh, Hfttn, to coast, the accusa- 
 tive follows. (Si'ncn §116 bttit, a foot broad ; ei'nen SOTo'uat 
 alt, a month old ; CS »iegt ei'nen Beut'ltcr, it weighs a hundred 
 weight. 
 v Space and motion are indicated by the accusative, ©hint 
 
 [ang'en QQBcg gc'fycn, to go a long way ; &en 2Jrtg fyintin'tci: 
 lau'feit, to run down the mountain ; CV gefyt chicit gn'tcn 
 @d)Vitt, he walks a good pace. 
 
CH. 2. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 185 
 
 RULE VI. 
 
 The gender is deviated from, when the meaning of the 
 word is more regarded, than its grammatical nature. 3)ie'feS 
 gxau'cnjimmcr iff am fcbftn'fien, roeun fie fid) niefct fcfeminft, 
 This lady is most handsome when she does not paint herself. 
 grail'enjimmev is of the neuter gender, but the pronoun fie, 
 she, is feminine, because this is the gender which the subject 
 naturally has. (Er (icbt fetn Q33cib ntrijt, fon'fcmt nuftbau'fcelt 
 fie, He does not love his wife, but treats her ill. c 2J3cib is neuter, 
 and the feminine fie answers to it. 
 
 RULE VII. 
 
 The English often admits a different number, in the verb, 
 from what its subject, according to strict grammar, would 
 require; as, "All the company were present;" "The army 
 of martyrs praise thee." The German, however, does not 
 allow this deviation, but always requires the verb to agree in 
 number with its subject ; as, t>ic gan'JC (ScfeU'fcfoaft rcai* 
 
 juge'gen. 
 
 On the other hand, in German the singular number is some- 
 times used collectively, in reference to more than one subject, 
 where in English the plural would be employed. For example : 
 3et)U attcu'fcf)CU t^fcett ifjt iz'bttt ettt'gefclttt, Ten persons have 
 lost their life ; according to the English, lives. 5D?ct)V a(6 
 
 ijun'Mxt SSw'get* fya'beu ify'ren Sta'mcn unterjcidj'net, More than 
 
 a hundred citizens have subscribed their name, — in English, 
 names. 2>ie VO'tfye, bfalt'e, ItnD get'Be gav'fcc, the red, blue, 
 and yellow color, — in English, colors. 2)ie gvanjo'fifeljc UUt» 
 3tatid / nifd)e ©pva'dje, the French and Italian language, — in 
 English, languages. In these two last examples, the German 
 idiom may be accounted for by the figure ellipsis, thus ; Die 
 
 rotfye (gar'fce), bUu't (gau'bc), tint) ge('6e gar'be, the red 
 
 (color), the blue (color), and the yellow color; 3)iC %VQto$'* 
 fifd)e (@pra'et)c) tint) Stati&'nifdje ©ptft'dje, The French (lan- 
 guage), and Italian language. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 The people call them time-pleasers, flatterers. We are 
 wholly of your opinion. He walks ten miles, twice a day. 
 Their faces are turned 3 to 1 (the) East 2 . In the forenoon I am 
 
 16* 
 
186 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 
 
 commonly at home, but in the afternoon I 2 ride out. He did 1 
 not 2 yield 1 a 2 finger's breadth (a Jinger broad.) 
 
 people, *33o(f, n. 3. b. c. East, SOTot'gen, m. 3. a. a. 
 
 to call, ncn'ncn, mix. to turn, vDen'fcen, mix. 
 time-pleaser, ^Bct'tetfafylte, /. forenoon, ^ov'mtttag, m. 3. 
 
 1. C. b. b. 
 
 flatterer, ©djmeidylev, m. 3. commonly, gerrjotyn'ficf). 
 
 a. a. at home, ju Jpau'fe. 
 
 wholly, ganj. afternoon, OTaclymittag, w*. 3. 
 opinion, s J*iei'uung, /. 1. t>. b. b. 
 
 to walk, gc'fyeu, zrr. to ride out, <\\\$'Vt\tm, irr. 
 
 mile, SOtci'Ic, /. I.e. to yield, mi'dWXl, irr. 
 
 day, ^ag, m. 3. b. b. not a, tcilt. 
 
 face, (Scftcfof, w. 3. b. e. finger, gttlg'er, m. 3. a. rt. 
 
 to, nacl). (Da*. ) broad, bvett. 
 
 § 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
 RULE I. 
 
 The noun, in the nominative case, being the subject of a 
 sentence, is generally placed before the verb. 
 
 Note. — The subject is to be distinguished from the object : 
 the former governs the verb, and the latter is governed by the 
 verb : for instance, Set* SSa'tet' litbt fei'nen @ot)lt, The father 
 loves his son. Here, bet* ^a'tCV is the subject, which governs 
 the verb, that is to say, the verb must agree with it, in number 
 and person ; fci'ncit ©otyit' is the object, which is governed by 
 the verb, because it must, in compliance with the nature of 
 the verb, stand in a particular case. 
 
 Exceptions to the jirst Rule. 
 
 The subject is put after the verb, 
 
 1. In a direct question ; as, ©cljrcifct bet* STttcutn ? Does the 
 man write? ©djreitt, the verb — t>er SDTamt, the subject. It 
 is the same, when the question begins with an interrogative 
 pronoun, or interrogative adverb ; as, QBaS fagt t>CV SSa'tCt* ? 
 What says the father? 9£e('cl)CS fSlU't) Uejl MX @c()lV(cv? Which 
 
CH. 2. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 187 
 
 book does the pupil read ? 9Bantm' U\d)t fceir ^lia'be ? Why 
 does the boy laugh? ^esroe'scn rociut Me ©cftrocf'ter ? What 
 does the sister weep for? 
 
 2. When instead of the subject, some other word or phrase, 
 generally for the purpose of emphasis, is placed at the head of 
 the sentence ; particularly in the following cases : 
 
 a. When the object is placed at the head of a sentence. 
 For instance ; ©ie'fetf ®(ucf geiiicjV fcer ^u'gcn&fyafte, This 
 happiness the virtuous man enjoys. 2)CV %a genfcfyaftc, is 
 the subject, which follows after the verb geilicfV; because 
 the object, Me'fetf ©tucf, begins the sentence. 
 
 b. When the dative or accusative case of the person stands 
 first ; as, £)cm SDTen'fclKlt ift t>a$ it'bttl tfytU'tt, To man life is 
 dear; 2)ie'fen kna'ben t)*t mciu grcimfc Me gvanjoftfclK ©pra'cljc 
 HtUtjVt', To this boy my friend taught the French language. 
 The sentences here begin with a case of person, and the sub- 
 ject is found after the verb. This, and the preceding excep- 
 tion, may perhaps be together comprehended in these words, 
 viz. When any oblique case of declension begins a sentence, 
 the subject must come after the verb. 
 
 c. When an adjective or pronoun, belonging to the subject 
 or object, begins the sentence. (£>Ut \\l &CV ^Bcilt Jttttt 4 , a'btt 
 ami) tfyeu'cr, The wine indeed is good, but also dear. The 
 adjective gut, in this instance, belongs to the subject, and, 
 beginning the sentence, displaces the subject, bet "333c ill. &Ut 
 fin'bct mciu 33a'ter t>m QOBctil, &c. My father finds the wine 
 good. Here gut belongs to the object, &C11 333cill, and has the 
 same influence on the subject. The same is also to be observed 
 of the pronoun, when it belongs to the subject or object ; as, 
 SDteitt i|t to&$ #au$, Mine is the house; mciu belongs to fca£ 
 Jpaui?, which is the subject, and is put after the verb. 
 
 d. When the pronoun cS begins the sentence : for example, 
 ©S Ummt fccr @rn-ccl)'er, The speaker is coming ; £$ fa'gcit 
 Me icn'te, People say. 
 
 e. When an infinitive is put at the beginning, either as a 
 member of the sentence, or for the sake of emphasis : for 
 
 example, Urn SKu'fye $u gcuic'feu, mftffen tie ©efet'je erfitflt' 
 
188 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 
 
 lKr'fceit, In order to enjoy peace, must the laws be fulfilled ; 
 ^3cl)0i-'d)CU woi'kn fctc Uu'U Utd)t, Obey will the people not ; — 
 for, the laws must, the people will not. 
 
 f. The participles, with an adverbial power, to express the 
 manner of being, acting, or suffering, and participles generally, 
 when placed at the beginning of a sentence, cause the subject 
 to follow the verb. For instance : QOBei'UCltt* fpvacf) t>cr SBa'ter, 
 Weeping the father spoke ; $vau'cvn& ging'Clt t»ic (gefdfyr'tcn JU 
 tern (Svab'tttillC/ Mourning the companions went to the sepul- 
 chre. Thus with the past participle ; ®c(tcfct' unfc an'gchctet 
 Writes' t>cr £clD fci'ne SEKit'&ftrgei unt> eil'te in t>a£ @d)lad)t'- 
 
 filb f UCU'e ht'btxn pi erring'en, Beloved and adored, the 
 hero left his fellow citizens and hastened into the field of bat- 
 tle, to obtain new laurels. 
 
 g. The subject must come after the verb, when an adverb 
 or certain cases of nouns used in an adverbial signification, or 
 absolute cases, commence the sentence. 25a(t> femmt t>er QGBtn'- 
 tu, Soon winter comes ; @d)UCll gefyt &ie $?it t>afyhl', Quickly 
 
 time passes ; Itn'glutfltdjer 'IBei'fe traf fcas *oos fei'nen S5ru's 
 
 t»Cl*, Unfortunately the lot fell upon his brother. 
 
 h. When a preposition, with its case, takes the lead, 93?tt 
 
 freu'&iger SOtie'nc ging'en tk <£'m'mt)\m intern 95cfrei'er enfc 
 
 ge'gCH, With a joyful countenance the inhabitants went to meet 
 their deliverer. When, however, the preposition, with its 
 case, forms an exclamation, it is considered as an interjec- 
 tion, and does not move the subject from its place ; as, 25ct 
 met'ltet* (Styvt, &er SDTcnfd) ijt un'fcljufoig, Upon my honor, the 
 man is innocent. 
 
 3. The following conjunctions have the same effect, in 
 transposing the subject, when they commence the sentence : 
 but they may themselves be placed after the verb. 2d'f0, 
 signifying, so, thus ; fcafyev', thence, therefore ; fcavaitf , 
 thereupon, then ; fcaritm', for that reason ; fcemnad)', con- 
 sequently ; fonad)', accordingly ; fcami, then ; fceiS'tyafb, be$s 
 fyal'bftt, for that reason ; t>c6'VDCgen, on that account ; betfglet's 
 d)Ot, likewise ; bod), yet, still, (it does not always affect the 
 situation of the subject) ; fer/ttCV, moreover ; folg'lid), con- 
 sequently ; g[cid)'»ol)(, nevertheless ; inbef'fen, in the mean- 
 while ; jeftt, now; t'ttltm, scarcely; mitfyill', consequently; 
 HOd), yet, nor; nun, now; tfycUtf, partly; fo, either meaning 
 
CH. 2. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 189 
 
 so, or beginning the subsequent member of a sentence ; iVbct'- 
 fcicS, aufevfccm', besides; u'brigcuS, in other respects; t)<x r 
 then (which must always precede the verb). — When the con- 
 junctions, and), also ; cntwe'fccr, either; £tt>ar, indeed, are in 
 the beginning of the sentence, the subject may be put after 
 the verb, by which means a stress falls either upon the sub- 
 ject, or the verb ; as, Tilld) fief fca$ 33oIr\ The people even 
 exclaimed ; (£ntt»c'&cv licft fccr ^na'be, o'fccv ev fcljreibt, The 
 boy either reads or writes ; $WM fdjci'HCt t>ie @on'ne, a'bci* 
 &c, The sun indeed shines, but, &c. When the emphasis is 
 on the subject, it should remain before the verb ; as, Tilid) fca£ 
 ^clf rief, Even the people cried out. — In old and formal lan- 
 guage, the subject is sometimes placed after the verb, when 
 Utlfc, and, precedes. Unt> ()at SScflag'ter CVttic'fcn, And the 
 defendant has proved. Here SBcfUg'tCV/ the subject, is after 
 the verb. 
 
 4. In quoting, the subject is put after frt'gCtt, or any simi- 
 lar verb, when part of the quotation goes before ; as, 2)a$ 
 (Siutf, fagt fccr ^DBci'fc, i|i t>ct*vd tt7evifc()/ Fortune; says the wise 
 man, is treacherous. 
 
 5. The subject always follows the verb, in the subsequent 
 member of a sentence. 
 
 Note. ■ — The subsequent member of a sentence is that, which 
 comes after one beginning with a relative pronoun (such as 
 ttHXt?, what), or a relative adverb (such as rc>0, where), or a 
 conditional, causal, or consecutive conjunction (such as VPCUU, 
 if; rocil, because; tut, when). Examples: ^aS frcr ^3a'tCt* 
 fagt, ttjlit tier @ot)tt, what the father says, the son does. The 
 first member of this sentence begins with the relative pronoun, 
 tt»a£ ; in the second or subsequent member, therefore, the sub- 
 ject, t>cr ©obn, stands after the verb, tl;nt. ^S3c ta$ 2(a$ ijt, 
 fccvfam'mcln fid) t>ic %Vln, Where the carrion is, the eagles are 
 collected. Here, the first member commences with the rela- 
 tive adverb, voo ; and the subject in the following member, is 
 
 after the verb.* 3£cnn t>a$ defter gitn'|ti$ btcibt, fo femmt 
 
 * Strictly speaking, we ought, in the second, here called 
 the subsequent, member, to supply some demonstrative word, 
 corresponding to the relative, in the first ; namely M£, in 
 reference to the preceding tt>rti? ; and fca ; in correspondence 
 
190 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 
 
 twin gxciml) in WnigCll ^a'gCU, If the weather continues 
 favorable, my friend comes (or will come) in a few days. This 
 sentence also consists of two members : the first, if the weath- 
 er continues favorable ; the second, my friend comes, or will 
 come ; in the latter, which is the subsequent member, the sub- 
 ject is placed after the verb. So likewise, ^ed t>ie ^Ctt fdjnctf 
 
 tocrffrficbf; fo bcnitfct' oct* 2Bet'fe je'fceit 'ZUt'genbUrf, Because 
 
 time passes quickly, the wise man turns every moment to ac- 
 count. Here are again two members, the antecedent, because 
 time passes ; and the subsequent, the wise man turns every 
 moment to account. The subject in the latter, of course, 
 stands after the verb. 2) a Sa'fav ftcl) na'tycrtc, cntifict) en Die 
 gem'fce, When Caesar approached (antecedent), the enemy with- 
 drew (subsequent). — The subsequent member, after an ante- 
 cedent, with a conjunction of the description alluded to, fre- 
 quently begins with the particle fo, concerning which it is 
 proper to refer to Book II. Ch. 8. § 1. This particle serves 
 as a connecting link, between the antecedent and subsequent 
 members.* For example : QOB&'ire t>cr. §(u£ fd)i|f bav, (or 
 ^QBenii fret* gfug fd)i|f bav roa've,) fo nmv'oe fcer Jpan'oel Mil's 
 fyeit, If the river were navigable, trade would flourish. — The 
 conjunction DeftO, and also je, when equivalent to Def'tO, con- 
 stitute a subsequent member. Ex. 3e mefyf DU fragft, DeftO 
 nje'niget* WV'bt id) ant'roovten, The more you ask, the less I 
 shall answer. — A subsequent member is likewise produced, 
 when an infinitive begins the sentence, expressing purpose and 
 design. Urn .re id) £u roer'oen, unterjietyt' fid) oer SKenfdj oft 
 t>en grd'flett SDlfl^'fcItgfeiten, In order to grow rich, man under- 
 goes the greatest hardships. "Man undergoes," &lc. is the 
 subsequent member, in which the subject must be put after the 
 verb. 
 
 In order to lay more stress upon the subject in the subse- 
 quent member of the sentence, it is sometimes, by way of 
 exception, placed after the verb. Ex. Jjpcvr, ro&'rejt DU fyier 
 
 with WO. The subsequent member may, perhaps, in every 
 instance, be said to depend upon connecting words, which are 
 understood. 
 
 * Such a link between the antecedent and subsequent 
 members, may always be supposed ; and if not expressed, it is 
 understood. 
 
1 
 
 CH. 2. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 191 
 
 gcroc'fcn, mem SBru'&cr rcd'vc uic()t gcjbv'bcn, Sir, if thou hadst 
 been here, my brother would not have died. 
 
 6. The last instance, in which the verb precedes the 
 subject, is where the conjunction roeim, if, is to be supplied ; 
 as, 3£d're mem 33a'tcr frier gcroc'fcn, fo roa're t>ae? tln'glucf 
 md)C gcfdje'fyen, Had my father been here, the misfortune 
 would not have happened. SBd'rc mcin 35a' ter frier geroe'fen, 
 stands for, rocnn mcin 33a'ter frier gcroe'fen roa're, if my father 
 had been here; and the subject, as appears, is after the 
 verb. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 The enemy approached the suburbs. 
 (Do) you 2 see 1 this temple ? 
 Why did our teacher change his plan 1 
 This measure nobody can excuse. 
 The courageous, God assists. 
 Short was his life, but eternal are his deeds. 
 The command was given. 
 They never saw him weep. 
 The Spartan died composed and smiling. 
 Man commonly believes. 
 Without altercation, they divided the prize. 
 We therefore determined to stay. 
 The papers indeed mention it, but I do not believe it. 
 Not every thing which glistens, is gold, says the proverb. 
 Because he saw it in others, he imitated it. 
 If you had not walked so slowly, you would have overtak- 
 en us. 
 
 enemy, gcinfc, m. I can, id) faun, mix. 
 
 to approach, na'frett. (Dot.) to excuse, entfdwf fcigen. 
 
 suburb, *33ov'ftai>t, f. 1. b. courageous, mu'tfrig. 
 
 to see, fe'fren, irr. to assist, frel'fett, irr. (Dat.) 
 
 temple, Xtm'ytl, m. 3. a. 0. God, (Sett. 
 
 why, roarum'. short, fttrj. 
 
 to change, dn'fcem. life, ie'ben. 
 
 teacher, Utyvtt, m. 3. a. a. but, a'ber. 
 
 plan, sp(an, m. 3. b. b. eternal, e'roig. 
 
 measure, 93?aS'vegel, /. deed, £t)at, f. 1. &, 
 
 nobody, ttie'mant>. command, SSefefyf', »*. 
 
192 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 
 
 [book II. 
 
 to be given, Ct'ge'fyett, irr. 
 
 to weep, Wi'tim. 
 
 they, man. 
 
 never, nit. 
 
 composed, gefajft'. 
 
 smiling, lacfyetnt*. 
 
 to die, jtetr'bcit, irr. 
 
 the Spartan, tot <&yma'ntV. 
 
 commonly, gettofynlid). 
 
 to believe, ajau'ben. 
 
 man, fccr 2DtCUfd). 
 
 without, ofy'ne. 
 
 altercation, ©tfei'tigfeit. 
 
 to divide, tfyei'Ictt. 
 
 prize, sprei^/ m. 3. b. 6. 
 
 therefore, fcafyei' 7 . 
 
 to determine, bcfc^fic'fcit, irr. 
 
 to stay, Mei'fcen. 
 
 paper, j&t'tung, /. 1. &. 
 
 to mention, CVttafy'ttCn. 
 indeed, JttXIV. 
 
 but, a'btv. 
 
 to believe, gfau'fcnt. 
 
 not, tticl)t. 
 
 every thing, ai'lt$. 
 
 to glisten, glan'jen. 
 
 gold, (golfc. 
 
 to say, fa'gen. 
 
 proverb, ©pridyiDOft, w. 
 
 because, tt>cif. 
 
 in, fcon. 
 
 others, an'fcere. 
 
 to imitate, naclytttadjett. (See 
 
 Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. F.) 
 slowly, [ang'fam. 
 
 to walk, ge'fyctt, 2>r. (with feitt.) 
 to overtake, cin'fyolctt. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 The Substantive, being the object, is generally put after the 
 verb : for example, %d) Iie'6e mci'nen 33a'tcr, I love my father ; 
 
 mei'nen ^x'ttv is the object. 
 
 Exceptions : 
 
 1. When a stress is laid upon the object, it may be placed 
 at the beginning of the sentence ; as, 2)cn Jj3omer' It'fr id) mtt 
 SBevgmVgCU ltnl> 35eroun'&mtng, Homer I read with pleasure 
 and admiration. 
 
 2. In certain cases the verb is removed to the end of the 
 sentence ; * then the object naturally comes before it. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 The Substantive in the Genitive case, not being the object,f 
 
 * See Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. 
 
 f The genitive may be the object, viz. when it is governed 
 by the verb. See Book II. Ch. 5. § 1. F. Rule n. 
 
CH. 2. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. 193 
 
 generally stands after the word by which it is governed ; as, 
 t>Ci* ©Ofyn mci'ncS gveun'betf, the son of my friend. 
 
 But it is found, 
 
 1. Before the substantive that governs it, when it bears an 
 
 emphasis. 2>e6 ^a'tcvi? @c'gcn bau'et ben fttu'Dcvu Jpdufer, 
 a'bcv ton SDfott'tcr §fud) reiffet fie nie'ber, A father's blessing 
 
 builds houses for the children, but a mother's curse pulls them 
 down. 
 
 When the noun in the genitive precedes the governing 
 word, the latter loses its article ; for example, Dc£ k'benS 
 Sl'CU'&C; life's joy ; for, bie gxcu'bc &C6 it'btnti, the joy of life. 
 It may happen that the governing word, though put after the 
 genitive, keeps the article ; but then the genitive is deprived 
 of it; as, 3JoIf$ Die 3Kcng'e, a multitude of people; gxcu'be 
 Ik guile, abundance of joy. This, however, is not to be 
 extended beyond the phrases established by custom. 
 
 The position of the genitive, before the governing word, 
 should be easy and unaffected ; otherwise it is better to leave 
 that case in its natural place. Thus two, or more, genitive 
 cases, when transposed, produce a heavy and unharmonious 
 sound, as in this example ; betf gfO'ftn spi)ilofo'pfyen ftant 
 ie'ben; better thus, batf Se'fccn beg gvofen spfyilcfo'pljcn ftant, 
 
 the life of the great philosopher Kant. And it is worse, 
 when of two genitives, before a third word, one governs the 
 other ; as, t>c6 fto'lligS bet* granf'en Sftft'lUttlg, instead of bie 
 ^fO'ltUUg tt$ ft&'nigg bet* grailf CU, the coronation of the king 
 of the Franks. 
 
 2. Before adjectives ; as, bet? 33erl*reci* 7 cni? fc^ltl'&tg/ guilty 
 of the crime ; beg io'bctf nnVbtg, worthy of the praise ; bet* 
 ©OV'ge iin'wevtl', undeserving of the care. 
 
 3. Before some prepositions. 
 
 * 
 
 RULE IV. 
 
 The Dative has its place commonlv after the verb, and if 
 there be an accusative case besides, it generally depends on 
 
 * See Book II. Ch. 7. § 2. 
 17 
 
194 SYNTAX OF THE NOUN. [BOOK II. 
 
 emphasis or euphony whether the dative or accusative is to be 
 put first. The emphasis is generally on the last word. Ex. 
 £t gtbt t>cm SDtan'iie MS 25uc(), He gives the book to the man, 
 or £v gtbt M$ 25ucl) Dcm Sttan'ne. 
 
 When it is to be marked with peculiar emphasis, it should 
 be moved from its place, and stand before the verb : as, 2)cm 
 s D?an'ne gibt CV t>at? SSltd). If the object be a monosyllable, or 
 a short word, and the dative case consist of more syllables, the 
 former should be put first, because a long word commonly 
 finishes the sentence better than a short one ; for example, Qsr. 
 fctg'tc fcicS fccm 'iBa'tcr, He told this to the father. 
 
 RULE V. 
 
 Two accusatives are sometimes used after the same verb, 
 one expressing a person, and the other a thing. The former 
 is then placed in the same manner as the dative, according to 
 the preceding rule. Examples : 3d) ttCU'tte t>en SDfanil grcimfc, 
 
 I call the man friend ; 3d) fyei'fe ei'iwn fol'djen SDTann ci'nen 
 £c(t>eu, I call such a man a hero ; ©V Icljvt fcetl ©Cttvpro'ntutf 
 OtC SHcdj'cnfuttjt, He teaches Sempronius arithmetic. 
 
 When the subject, the object, and the case of person meet 
 together, either before or after the verb, they commonly follow 
 in this order : subject, case of person, object. For example, 
 before the verb ; £>a UX gctfc'fyctT fcCttt gchl'&e t>CU grie'&Ctt 
 an'gcbotcu l)at, Since the general has offered peace to the ene- 
 my. After the verb ; 2luf fcie'fe c 2Bcife tm-fdjaff'te gafav fei'* 
 nen gvcun'&cu (Semtg'ttymmg uut> benatjm' fei'nen getn'fccn af'le 
 Jfjoff'mmg jur §Had)'e, In this manner Caesar procured satisfac- 
 tion for his friends, and deprived his enenues of all hope of 
 revenge. 
 
 RULE VI. 
 
 The Dative and Accusative cases stand before the adjec- 
 tives,* by which they are governed.! 
 
 RULE VII. 
 
 The Vocative case may be put either before or after the 
 verb, at the option of the speaker. 
 
 * See Book II. Ch. 3. § 1. Rule v. — 2 and 3. 
 f Compare Book II. Ch. 3. § 2. Rule n. 
 
CH. 3. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 195 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Give me the book. Such men I like. The fruits of the 
 earth. Love's labor is in vain. He is tired of life. 
 
 He mentioned it to me afterward, but to her he entrusted 
 it first. 
 
 When they had told me every thing, I 2 appointed 1 them a 
 time of meeting. 
 
 to give, ge'bttt/ irr. to mention, ertt&fy'ltcn. 
 
 book, *£$udj, n. 3. b. c. afterwards, fpd'tevfytn. 
 
 such, fot'cvjcv-c-cs. but, a'bcv. 
 
 man, *93?amt, 3. l\ c. to entrust, Vcrtrau'en. 
 
 to like, (te'beit, first, jUCfjV. 
 
 fruit, "gvudjt, /. 1. fc. when, nad)t>cm'. 
 
 earth, <£?'$t, f. every thing, al'k$. 
 
 love, hc'fce, /. to tell, fa'gen. 
 
 labor, %yiu't)t, f. to appoint, bcjtim'meu. 
 
 in vain, UttlfOttjt'. time, 3eit, f.l.h. 
 
 life, k'bm, n. 3. a. meeting, jSufam'mcnftmft,/. 1. 
 
 tired, u'krfcvufffg. (Gen.) 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
 RULE I. 
 
 Every adjective may be used, not only as such, to qualify a 
 noun, as, tic fyo'fye Ut'mc, the high elm; but also as an adverb, 
 to qualify either a verb, or another adjective ; as, Xue'fc spjlau'je 
 road)\\ (ang'fam, This plant grows slowly ; cin grun&'ltd) gekfyt'- 
 ttt SDtauU/ a thoroughly learned man. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 Every adjective when used in its declinable form must agree 
 with its substantive in gender, number, and case. 
 
196 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK II. 
 
 This rule applies to the adjective not only in its first, or 
 positive, state, but also in the degrees of comparison. The 
 substantive is sometimes understood, yet the agreement re- 
 mains : for example, t>er gu'te SQiann, unt> fccr bo'fe (WHann 
 
 understood), the good man, and the bad (man) ; t)Ctl JU)Mf tetl 
 bU'ftti SDTo'natCit, the twelfth of this month (iag, day, under- 
 stood) ; 95effere SOlcn'fcljcn, t)tt%'li<btn im& trtu'ert fya'be icfy 
 lUV'gen&S gcfuu'fccn, Better men, more hearty and faithful ones, 
 I have nowhere found. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 Every adjective must be used in its declinable form, when- 
 ever it is in its natural position, i. e. immediately before the 
 substantive which it qualifies. The substantive itself may be 
 either expressed or understood. Examples : t>Cl* tcip'fcvc 3Q?anit, 
 the brave man; ei'UC ro'ttyc SKo'jC/ a red rose; t>te frci'Clt im& 
 gU'tCU Sftf'geV/ the free and good citizens ; ©r tttjUitf ei'ne 
 
 2Cnfn>ovt, a'bcv ntefjt ei'ne genefy'mtgenfcc, fon'fcmt cine ab'fct)(a= 
 5CU&C CZtut'roovt understood), He received an answer, yet not a 
 permitting but a refusing one. 
 
 In all other cases the adjective is used in its simple, inde- 
 clinable form ; as, Me SSfur'ger, gut Mllfc fl'Ct, the citizens, 
 good and free ; 2)ev SDfcinit iff tap'feir, The man is brave ; £>ie 
 gvuclj'tc wefDctt vetf, The fruits become ripe; @te mtjftm fid) 
 tap'fer, They defended themselves bravely. 
 
 RULE IV. 
 
 Cardinal numbers are generally not declined, except (in, 
 ei'ne, till, or li'MV, ei'ne, ei'tlt?; one, and the other cardinal 
 numbers when they do not stand before nouns but take the 
 place of nouns ; as, (Sr fvtfyrt Xtlit toitV Spfcr'&Cll, He drives with 
 four horses ; <£x fdt)l*t mit fcie'ren, He drives with four. (Sin, 
 ei'ne, eiu, is used when it precedes a noun ; as, 3d) £ auf te etil 
 spfllUfc $uVttt, I bought one pound of sugar : ei'netr, ei'ne, 
 ci'netf, is used when it takes the place of a noun ; as, 3d) 
 ftlllfte nut' ei'llCS (or etnS), I bought only one. 
 
 RULE V. 
 
 Some adjectives govern cases. 
 
 1. The following adjectives, most of which are in English 
 
CH. 3. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 197 
 
 followed by of, govern the genitive ; bcoiivf tig, in want of; 
 6eu6'tl)tgt, in need of; octmtp', conscious, (with the reciprocal 
 dative, and the genitive of the object ; as, 3d) bin mil* bet ©adVc 
 Hid)t bcnw|ft', I am not conscious of that thing) ; cin'gcocnlf, 
 mindful ; fd'tjig, capable of, (it is also joined with the prepo- 
 sition ju) ; ffOt), glad, satisfied, (also with the prep, il'itt, and 
 the accusative) ; gcwcit)l*'/ informed of, aware of, (also with the 
 accusative : it generally occurs with the verb nw'&CU, to be- 
 come ; as, (£r toavo ttt ©efatyr' [genitive], or, Die ©efafyv' [ac- 
 cusative], gcn>a^r'/ He perceived the danger) ; gcttdt'tig, ex- 
 pecting ; gCHUfj'/ certain ; gcrcofynt', accustomed to, (also with 
 the accusative) ; frtu'Dig, skilled in, experienced in ; IDS, free 
 from, rid of; tttdctytig, in possession of; mu'De, tired of; quitt, 
 rid of ; fatt, tired of ; fdnd'Otg, guilty : t^cil'^aft, partaking of ; 
 u'bci'Dritpg, tired with ; fcero&dj'tig, suspected ; berltff ttg, 
 having forfeited or lost; tooll, full of, (also with botl) ;* mttif, 
 worth, deserving ; toftr'oig, worthy ; and the negatives corres- 
 ponding to these adjectives, as, un'nmv&ig, unttmoig, Wll's 
 fccnmp, un'geroofynt, un'fdl)ig, &c. 
 
 2. The following adjectives, most of which are in English 
 followed by to, govern the dative case ; dtyn'licl), like, re- 
 sembling ; an'gCUtejfen, adapted, suitable ; an'gciicbm, agree- 
 able; bcfrmnt', known to ; bcqucm', convenient; bang'c, anx- 
 ious, fearful, (as, SDtir \\\ bang'c, I am fearful) ; befcfe&er'ftd), 
 troublesome : Dicu'ltd), serviceable ; furd)t'bar, formidable ; 
 gcfyof'fam, obedient ; gemdf}', suited to ; getrcu', faithful : 
 gCWO'gClt, inclined to, favorable ; gfctcl), like ; ntftjt, near ; 
 fcevroanot', related to ; !t6'tfyig, necessary ; intfc'lid), useful : 
 fd)dD'(id), hurtful ; Jlt'trdglid), conducive, useful ; and others, 
 signifying advantage, or disadvantage. — In many instances, 
 the above adjectives take after them prepositions governing 
 their appropriate cases ; such as, fuv, for ; ge'gcn, towards, 
 against ; ju, to, &c. 
 
 3. Those which imply measure, weight, age, value, gen- 
 erally with a numeral preceding, require the accusative, and 
 are put after the noun in their simple (indeclinable) form. Of 
 
 * Sometimes the substantive, dependent on V»c(I, remains 
 undeclined after it ; as, Doll SOlllt^/ instead of 3Rtt't(e6; full 
 of courage. 
 
 17* 
 
198 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK II. 
 
 this kind are (ang, long; brctt, broad; fyodj, high; tief, deep; 
 gVOS, great; fcljrocr, heavy; ait, old ; WXtij, worth; fc()n('t>ig, 
 indebted, owing. For example : jcfyn §U$ (ang, ten feet long; 
 ptbif $Pfun& fdjwcr, weighing twelve pounds; funfjig %at)V 
 ait, fifty years old; tV(i itya'ia mxty, worth three dollars; 
 (Er ijt t)tc( (Sc(D fc()U(^ig r He owes a great deal of money. Sang, 
 joined in this manner to words denoting time, expresses dura- 
 tion : as, jeijlt 3<tfyte (ang, for ten years ; ci'ne $tit (ang, for a 
 time. 
 
 Observations. (1.) The cardinal numbers, and the words 
 i)ic(, much or many, and wc'llig, little or few, govern the 
 genitive ; and are always put after it. They are frequently 
 combined with the personal pronouns ; as, tltl'fer &tt>o(f, 
 twelve of us ; cn'Cl' jwan'jig, twenty of you ; ifyr'er fcrei'flg, 
 thirty of them: lin'ftt tne'le, many of us; ty'ttt roe'ntge, few of 
 them. 
 
 (2.) The word all, in English, commonly has the definite 
 article after it; as, all the world. — %i\, in German, is com- 
 monly without the article ; as, ai'U ^dt, all the world ; al'= 
 (e$ ©c(t>, all the money. There is only one construction in 
 which this word requires the article, namely, before possessive 
 pronouns, when used substantively ; as, al'(c t>ie ^Dtci'nigen, 
 all my friends ; a('(e£ t>a£ Un'fvige, all we possess. The article 
 may also stand before adjectives, which are employed as sub- 
 stantives; as, ai'U t>te (Sll'ttn, all the good people ; a('(c6 t>a$ 
 23o fc, all the evil. Otherwise it is not necessary, except when 
 a relative follows, nor even then always ; as, ai'U t>ic nac()'« 
 t()Ct(igcn gorgftt, V0(i'd)( fcavaitS' cntjtan'DClt, all the disadvan- 
 tageous consequences, which arose from it. The truth is that 
 in the instances first adduced, the article should not be con- 
 sidered as belonging to ai'U, but to the possessive pronouns. 
 — '#(( sometimes follows the word to which it belongs : for 
 example, tie SBei'fpiefc ai'U, all the examples; t>ic ^fyr&'nctt 
 al'(c, all the tears; VOn t>Clt iVLu'tgClt aClcn, of all the rest: 
 
 fcic'fes aClcs, all this, for ai'U$ fcic'fes ; M$ ai'its, for Mt$ 
 
 t>a$, all that. It is always put after the personal and relative 
 pronouns ; as, tt)iv ai'U, all of us ; flc ai'U, all of them ; Me 
 hu'tt n?cl'd)C ai'U jugc'gen ttNl'mt, the people who all were 
 present. 
 
CH. 3. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 199 
 
 After Alfred the Great, succeeded his son, Edward the 
 elder. 
 
 The Romans, brave in war, and wise in their legislation. 
 
 Ten dollars Saxon money are eighteen florins Rhenish. 
 
 Although conscious 3 of 1 his 1 guilt 2 , he 5 was 4 incapable of 
 remorse. 
 
 It is pleasant to the eye, but dangerous to the soul. 
 
 Three good leagues off. 
 
 He pleased all of us. 
 
 They are stirring {stir themselves) by thousands. 
 
 after, nac(). (Dat.) 
 
 great, gvo£. 
 
 to succeed, fof'gCH. 
 
 son, ©ofytt, m. 3. b. 6. 
 
 old, Hit 
 
 the Roman, t>Cf SHS'inCi:. 
 
 brave, tap'fcv. 
 
 in, im. (Dat.) 
 
 war, £vicg, m. 3. b. b. 
 
 wise, roei'fe. 
 
 in, in. (Dat) 
 
 legislation, ©cfc^'gcbuug, /. 
 
 1. t>. 
 dollar, ^fya'fcr, m. 3. a. a. 
 Saxon, @dd)'ftfc(). 
 florin, (Bill fcCtt/ m. 3. a. a. 
 
 Rhenish, 9tl)ei'iufd), 
 
 although, nneroofyk 
 
 guilt, <gd)u(t>, f. 1. D. 
 
 conscious, bcftntfft'. 
 
 incapable, un'fdtyig. 
 
 remorse, SHcit'e, /. 1. 
 
 pleasant, an'gcnefym. 
 
 but, a 7 bar. 
 
 dangerous, gefdfyf'lid). 
 
 good, gut. 
 
 league, ©tttU^C, /. 1. C. 
 
 off, wett. 
 
 to please, gefal'leU/ irr. (Dat.) 
 
 to stir, fid) thtyvtXU 
 
 by, ju. (Z>af.) 
 
 § 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 The place of the adjective is before the substantive ; as, 
 &ei* fdj&'lte £ag, the fine day. 
 
 Except : 
 
 1. When it is joined to a proper name, as a title of distinc- 
 tion ; as, Start bet Stitb'ne, Charles the Bold ; Sttcjran'&cr t>er 
 (Svo'fC/ Alexander the Great. 
 
200 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. [BOOK Ii. 
 
 2. When it is connected with the substantive by a verb ; in 
 this case the adjective is put after the verb ; as, 2)ci* 50taun ijt 
 gltt ; or before it with an emphasis, (Silt ift Dcv 93iann. 
 
 3. When the adjective stands as it were in apposition to 
 the noun ; for example, t>cv £c(t>, nt&cft'ttg im gef'fcc UU& 
 lt>et'fe im 5Ka'tt)C, the hero, powerful in the field, and wise in 
 the council. This stands for wi'dw m&cfc'tig im gd'fce, imfc 
 roci'fc im SHa'tfye i\\, who is powerful in the field, and wise in 
 the council. 
 
 4. Adjectives derived from names of places and countries 
 are, in certain phrases, put after substantives ; as, £c()n spfuut) 
 Qntg'Ufd), ten pounds English; jwan'jig Wftaxt hVkdtfd), 
 twenty marks of Lubeck ; Ijim'&ert gu$> §Ktycin / l&n&ifd) / one 
 hundred feet Rhenish. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 The numerals are placed before other adjectives, preced- 
 ing a substantive ; as, 3)m QU'te, cfyt'ltdje SDicn'fdjen, three 
 good, honest men. 
 
 When cardinal and ordinal numbers meet before a substan- 
 tive, it depends on the emphasis, which of them is to be put 
 first : whether, for instance, it be, fcic fcvei CV'ftCn, the three 
 first ; or, t»ie CV'ftcit M'Ci, the first three. This applies also to 
 the words, t)ie an'&evn, the others, t>ic (cfc'ten, the last, and 
 generally to adjectives in the superlative degree, which may 
 be put either before or after the cardinals. Examples, t>ie 
 fcvet leg'ten, or, t>te Ufytcn t>t*ei, the three last; fcte flier an 1 - 
 fcern, or, Die anfcern flier, the other four ; tic fed) 6 kef' ten, 
 or, Die fcef'ten fcd)S, the six best; t>tc jetyu fc^on'ttcn, or, tuc 
 fd)6n / |U , n $et)n, the ten finest. It is to be noticed that the 
 emphasis, in these instances, falls upon the word, which is 
 put last. — The words cd'le, all ; man'd)e, several ; flie'Ie, 
 many; je'&er, each, stand before both the numerals, and the 
 adjectives. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 Adjectives usually follow the cases they govern ; as, bic'fet 
 (Ety'rc roiV&tg, worthy of this honor ; Dctf 33 cr bred) 'ntt? frijttP&ig, 
 guilty of the crime ; fcem SBvVtCf dl)U lid), like the father ; JcJ)U 
 fel'lcn (dug, ten yards long ; fcrei §11$ bvcit, three feet broad ; 
 
CH. 4. § ].] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 201 
 
 fcrf)6 spfmtt) fitter, weighing six pounds. They are likewise 
 frequently put after, when they are connected with nouns that 
 are governed by prepositions ; as, (£6 \\l juv UntCirfyal'tUUg fef)V 
 nft§'(k(), It is very useful for entertainment ; ©clfyVjufriefccnfyeit 
 tft JUV ©luct'fe'ttgfcit nncntbefyr'ltcl), Self-content is indispensa- 
 bly necessary to happiness. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 An old man, as vigorous and active as a youth. 
 
 Their attacks were violent, but calm was his reply. 
 
 Six beautiful, spirited horses. 
 
 The three most dangerous. 
 
 Many honest men. 
 
 Tired of the confusion. Recollecting his menaces. 
 
 old, alt. reply, llnt'WCVt, f. 
 
 as, e'benfo. beautiful, fd)cn. 
 
 vigorous, ft'dfttg. spirited, fcu'rig. 
 
 active, tfyd'ttg. horse, SKof}, n. 3. b. (j. 
 
 as, ate. dangerous, gefdtyf'licf). 
 
 youth, Sftng'Thta,, m. honest, efyvliclj. 
 
 attack, Tfn'griff, m. 3. b. i\ confusion, 'iBevnnv'tung, /. 
 
 violent, fycf tig. tired, u'bevfcvufftg. 
 
 but, a'bcr. menace, SX-o'bung, /. 1. fc. 
 
 calm, gclaf fen. recollecting, cin'gc&enf. 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
 RULE I. 
 
 Pronouns agree with the substantives to which they are 
 prefixed, in gender, number, and case ; and the relative cor- 
 responds with the antecedent substantive to which it belongs, 
 in gender and number, the case depending upon other cir- 
 cumstances ; as, (Slau'bct un$, eu'rett gmm'fccn, fce'ren liuf - 
 
 tidjttgfeit ifyl* hnilt, Believe us, your friends, whose sincerity 
 you know. Here, the genitive bc'rcn, whose, depends upon 
 ilufficljtig'feit, sincerity. 
 
202 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK II. 
 
 The personal pronouns are not combined with substantives, 
 as the others are, but only bear a reference to them, and, in 
 that reference, they agree with them in number, and the third 
 also in gender; as, %d) will CU(() UHt) ifym glcicl) VOOtji, {literally, 
 I will to you and to him equally well), I am equally a friend 
 to you and to him. This is likewise to be observed of pronouns 
 demonstrative and interrogative, when they stand by them- 
 selves ; and the connexion between the relative, and its ante- 
 cedent, is of a similar description; as, ^el'clKV fcon bei'fccit 
 fyat CS gcfagt' ? Which one of the two has said it? Scv'jcuigc, 
 WCi'd)W fell' gCgemVbcr. ft§t. The one who sits opposite to you. 
 
 Observations. — 1. Speaking of any inanimate object, the 
 English use the neuter of the pronoun of the third person, it, 
 all such objects being considered as of the neuter gender ; 
 the Germans, having three distinct genders, even for lifeless 
 things, apply the pronouns accordingly. J£JtCt* i)\ Ctn tlCU'Ci* 
 §Ut, Here is a new hat; <£v ift fefyl* few, (He) It is very fine; 
 <2Bo fya'ben @te ifytt gcfrutft 7 ? Where did you buy (him) it? Jput 
 is of the masculine gender ; therefore, the masculine pronoun 
 appertains to it. So, SH31C gefallt' Sfy'ucn biefe ^tt'tcnmg ? 
 How do you like this weather? ©ie i\l fefyi* un'attgcucfym, 
 (She) It is very unpleasant. The personal pronoun is in the 
 feminine gender, on account of the substantive. 2)a£ spfeib 
 gefyt vcdjt gut, a'bcr e$ ift JU fyif Jtg, The horse goes very well, 
 but it is too fiery. The neuter, C6, it, is used because I>a6 
 spfct'b is of that gender. 
 
 2. The personal, or reflective, or reciprocal pronoun, in the 
 dative case, with the definite article after it, frequently supplies 
 the office of a possessive pronoun ; as, Si* nunf'te tfym mit bcv 
 JfJCMD/ He beckoned to him with Ms hand; %d) fya'bc mil* ba£ 
 23etU foervenff, I have sprained my leg; Qri; tyat ft ct) bcit J?al£ 
 ab'gefcljnittcn, He has cut his throat; ©tc mact)'cn ftcfy t>a£ 
 Wbm fau'ev, They embitter each other's life. 
 
 3. A demonstrative pronoun or an equivalent adjective, is 
 sometimes preferred to the pronoun of the third person, espe- 
 cially in the oblique cases, for the sake both of distinction, and 
 of sound. When a nearer object is alluded to, b'w'fcv, or ber 
 Ic£'tCt*C, the latter, is used ; when a distant one, jt'nn, or bet* 
 Ct'ftevc, the former ; or the whole sentence is changed. Exam- 
 ples : hti'fe wax bet ftavoti'ue auf SJcfncl)', ate flc bte Utacfo'vidjt 
 
CH. 4. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 203 
 
 Ct'fyictt', Louisa was on a visit to Caroline, when she received 
 the news. In this case, ffc may refer either to Louisa, or to 
 Caroline ; and therefore, if we mean the former, it is better to 
 use jc'nc; and if the latter, bicfc; instead of the ambiguous 
 [ic. 2)ic £Kad)'ficl)t/ Me er ifym jetg'tc, roar, fcin ^crc-cr'bcn, The 
 indulgence he showed him was his ruin. If in this instance 
 we mean the ruin of the person to whom the indulgence was 
 shown, it would be better, instead of fcin ^CffcCV'bcn, to say 
 fcat? 33cf&Ct'kn DCS UtyttVttl, the ruin of the latter ; but if we 
 refer to the one who showed indulgence, we say, t>a£ 'SJcv&CV* 
 kn &CS cr'jtcrcn, the ruin of the former. 
 
 SDcrfcl'bc is sometimes substituted for a personal pronoun ; 
 as, 933cnn man rue @alj'anflcfmtg nod) mcfyr erfyi^t', fo l)cr- 
 tmn'jtct Mefcl'bc, or fie, If we heat the solution of salt still 
 more, it evaporates.* 
 
 4. The genitive case of the demonstrative pronoun, fcer, 
 t)ic, t>a£, viz. fccf'fcn, M'Xtn, t)Cf fen, in the singular, and DC'rcr 
 or DC'vcn, in the plural, is put instead of the possessive, to 
 avoid confusion ; for example, (Tl'CCVO (ic£ DtC 9O?tt't)CVfd)n>0; 
 renen bc$ Katili'na in fcef'fen ipan'fc ergrci'fen, Cicero ordered 
 the accomplices of Catiline to be seized in his (Catiline's) 
 house. Here Dcffcn stands for fctncm, and prevents, at once, 
 all misconception ; but fct'nem, his, might be referred to Cic- 
 ero. £>cr Scn'fnl roan&'te fid) an dch <§>tmt', rrcil cr auf bffs 
 fen 50tlltfy trait'tc, The consul applied to the senate, because 
 he trusted to its (the senate's) courage. If it were fci'ncit/ 
 his, (@cnaf being of the masculine gender,) it would be un- 
 certain, whether the courage of the consul, or that of the sen- 
 ate, was intended. 
 
 5. It has been observed, already, that the neuter of the pro- 
 noun of the third person often begins a sentence, in connexion 
 
 * In the ceremonial style which is used in speaking of per- 
 sons of high rank, the pronouns fctcfcl'kn, fyod) fricfcUwn, 
 tyodijt'Dtcfcttwn, and aUcrtyM)jVt>icfcl(?cn, with the verb in the 
 plural after them, are used instead of the personal pronouns. 
 The words fyocl), high ; fy6d)fi, highest. ; and al(crt)6d)ft', 
 highest of all, with which Dicfd'kn is compounded, mark 
 the degree of nobility belonging to the person addressed, or 
 spoken of. 
 
204 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK II. 
 
 with a noun of a different gender and number ; for example, 
 £6 ijt cin SDtomt, It is a man ; (£$ i|t ci'UC gvait, It is a woman. 
 (Si? here corresponds with a masculine, and a feminine. 
 However, the English language admits the same mode of ex- 
 pression in these instances. The peculiarity of the German 
 appears in the following ; £6 fint) fcie'le 9JiCU'fd)en t>a, There 
 are many people ; (£g vuft fccr. 33a' til', The father is calling ; 
 (£$ torn 'men itU'tt, People are coining. This frequently 
 answers to the English there ; as, There is a quarrel in the 
 house ; <£$ i\\ CtU @tt*eit ittl <§au'ft ; There is a doubt among 
 the learned, &S ift cin $mi'fd iin'tCV fcen <Btki)t'ttn. Some- 
 times this way of opening a sentence is calculated to give it 
 more effect, than if the subject itself were placed at the be- 
 ginning ; for the attention of the hearer is excited by the ex- 
 pectation of the word which is to follow. It is, therefore, often 
 used with the subjunctive mood, to convey a forcible senti- 
 ment : for example, &$ [c'bc t>a£ ^a'tcvlant* ! (Long) live (the) 
 our country ! gS fom'mc mil* rci'ltCV £U na'fye ! Let no one come 
 too near me ! The neuters of the demonstrative pronouns are 
 used in a similar manner; as, 2)k6 (instead of fctc'fcS) \\\ mciu 
 gmmfc, This is my friend ; 3e'nc$ meilt geiltfc>, That is my 
 enemy ; £>a£ ftttfc ©ofoa'tcn, Those are soldiers. 
 
 6. In regard to the manner, in which the two relative pro- 
 nouns, n>cl'c()CV and fcer, are used, it may here be remarked, 
 that the genitive of fcev is, in general, preferred to that of 
 ttcl'djct*; as, 2)ev Wlann, Deffen id) gefcadyte, The man I 
 mentioned ; 2)ic Sfy're, fce'reu cr fo rcur'tug i|t, The honor of 
 which he is so deserving; 2)te 5D?aii iter, fce'ven SBerMen'jle fo 
 groS ftnt>, Those men, whose merits are so great. — 2)ei* must 
 be made use of, when a vocative case precedes ; as, 1 £>XI, 
 
 bev bit al'fes mit ^OBei^eit t>enMfteft, O Thou, who governest 
 
 all things with wisdom. The repetition of the personal pro- 
 noun, which, in such instances, is necessary, after the rela- 
 tive t>ev, gives force to the sentence. — The particle ate is 
 sometimes found before VDtl'd)tV, as a mere expletive ; 3)if 
 
 grem'fcen, ate n?el'd)e cvjt fuvj'lid) fyier an'scfommen flirt, The 
 strangers, who have but lately arrived here. Now and then 
 it may have an explanatory force, similar to the Latin quippe 
 qui, but, generally speaking, it is superfluous and improper. 
 
 7. The relative pronoun roefdjcr, Wel'dje, mld)t$, (or fc>ev, 
 tie, feaS,) is used in preference to the relative pronoun VOtv, 
 
CH. 4. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 205 
 
 IMS, if the object to which it relates is a distinct one ; but if 
 it is vague or only vaguely referred to, the relative pronoun 
 WW, n>a$, should be used. Examples : DCV SDTami, roc I'd) ci: (or 
 btv) fcic'fe "Xijat gctfyau' l)at, the man who has done this deed: 
 3>cl) roeis nicl)t rocv fcie'fe i^u getfyau' M/ 1 know not who has 
 done this deed; jEi'jtei: von bct'Dcn mug c$ gctbair fya'ben, a'&er 
 
 id) roeiS ntd)t, Wefdjer, one of the two must have done it, but 
 I know not which ; Wits, roaS id) fat), geftet' mil:, All (that) I 
 saw pleased me ; al'Ic hie So'lcn, vdcI'cI)c fitr Die SBafyr'beit 
 gcflor'pen flllD, all the excellent (persons) who have died for 
 the truth. 
 
 The choice between the two interrogative pronouns, roc('d)CV, 
 \T>ci'd)t, roel'cbcS, and MX, \va$, depends, in the same manner, 
 on the distinctness or indistinctness of the object. Examples : 
 
 §'ux ftn& t>m C5cm&f'fce ; roel'cljes aefdllt' t>tv am beften ? Here 
 
 are three pictures; which do you like best? 3£a£ tnetlift Ctt ? 
 What do you mean? 35ou rocm rc'ocft t>lt ? Of whom do you 
 sDeak ? 
 
 8. The Relative Pronoun is, in English, sometimes omitted, 
 and understood : in German it must always be expressed ; as, 
 The man I love, 2>cn 50?ann, Dcu (or roc('d)cn) id) lie'be. With 
 and) or and) im'incv, following, it signifies whoever, whosoever, 
 whatever, whatsoever ; as, ^H3cv and) Dct* 5D?ann fctn mag, 
 Whoever may be the man ; ^BaS aud) iin'mcr Me §&l'ge fctn 
 Wag, Whatever may be the consequence. 
 
 9. The Dative Singular of the Pronouns of the first and 
 second person, mil', Div, is, in familiar language, often inserted, 
 merely as an expletive: X>lt fcijt mir cm fd)6'ncv (Scfcl'fe, Thou 
 art a fine fellow ; 3d) lobe mil* t>CU StfyeiH'WDCilt, I give the 
 preference to Rhenish wine ; SDaS wag Ml* Ct'llC grcu'bc QtVM'* 
 )(n fctn ! That must have been a (great) joy ! The plural is 
 also thus found, especially in the second person : £Da£ rear 
 cud) ci'uc iuft ! That was a pleasure ! v Da6 H>ar end) ctu geft ! 
 That was a festivity ! Or, in speaking to a person with whom 
 we are not familiar, 3)aS war 3»t)'iicit ciu §c|t ! That was a fes- 
 tivity ! The third person likewise is to be met with in another 
 connexion ; as, Silt ftrAttftt; t>Cf ifym ffavfc', One of his pa- 
 tients who died : here the personal tfytn, to him, represents, in 
 fact, the possessive his. 
 
 10. The Possessive Pronoun is, sometimes, put after the 
 genitive case; as, ted ^a'tevs? feill 35ru'i;?r, the father's his 
 
 18 
 
206 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. [BOOK II. 
 
 brother ; t>e$ ftna'tcn fci'nc SDTut'tCU, the boy's his mother ; 
 fcct* §vau it)? &UID, the woman's 7*er child, instead of the 
 father's brother, the boy's mother, the woman's child. In these 
 cases the addition of \i\\\, fci'UC, il)l*, is in most cases useless 
 and inelegant, and ought to be avoided. 
 
 When, in English, an individual object of possession is to 
 be indicated, out of a greater number of the same kind, the 
 possessive pronoun absolute, with of before it, is placed after 
 the substantive ; as, a friend of mine, a servant of yours, an 
 acquaintance of ours, a book of his. In German this must be 
 differently expressed ; as, Sin gmtno Von mil*, a friend of 
 me, or ©i'ncv Von met'nen gmtnfecn, one of my friends : (Sin 
 •35eDicn'tet' von ims, a servant of us, or Qsi'net Von un'fevn 23e- 
 iHCU'ten, one of our servants ; (Si'ncS Von fei'ncn SSu'djevn, 
 
 one of his books ; or Shut* mei'nev grcun'&e ; Si'ner liu'fcm 
 25et>ten'tm ; Qst'ncs met'nei* S5iVdjer. 
 
 11. The Demonstrative fcic'fet, Dte'fe, t>ie'j>6/ may relate to 
 what is past, present, or future. SMc'fe 0tacC)t may signify this 
 night, that is to say, the night which is now present, or which 
 is to come, and also last night. 
 
 12. The substantive pronouns et'ivatf, something, and nid)t£, 
 nothing, are sometimes used by themselves ; as, (3\(b ityltt 
 ct'roaS, Give him something ; (Sicb il)m ttidjttf, Give him noth- 
 ing. St'roatt is also used adjectively before nouns ; as, Ct'lVilS 
 23v00, some bread ; and adverbially before adjectives and ad- 
 verbs ; as, (5i* bcfano' fid) in ei'ncv ct'roas mitj'Iidjen $a'g?, He 
 found himself in a somewhat uneasy situation ; (£v frcnimmt' 
 ftd) Ct'ttHlS IMtn'&Cvlid), He conducts (himself) somewhat 
 strangely. 2fttd)t6, never occurs as an adjective except before 
 an adjective in the neuter gender being used as a substantive ; 
 
 as, (£6 i\\ nidjts SBafy'rel an oic'fcm feen'tcfe'te, There is no 
 
 truth {literally nothing true) in this report. 
 
 13. (Si'ltigc, and Ct / (id)C, some, joined with numerals, denote 
 an undetermined excess of the number mentioned ; as, Ct'ntgC 
 or ct'Iid)C aroan'Jtfli spfltnD, some twenty pounds, that is, twenty 
 odd pounds. When prefixed to a hundred, or a higher number, 
 they intimate a repetition of the same ; as, ci'nigc (utt'Dftt 
 93icn'fd)cn, some hundreds of men ; ct'ltd)C trtlt'frttt) ifya'Icr, 
 some thousands of dollars. 
 
CH. 4. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 207 
 
 14. %['U, in familiar language, signifies, sometimes, that a 
 thing is consumed, finished, that nothing of it is left ; as, 5)cv 
 QGBem \\\ al'le, The wine is finished (all gone) ; £>ic Srft'freeven 
 ftllb oi'IC/ The strawberries are eaten. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 She, the youngest of the three sisters whom we saw 2 yes- 
 terday 1 , deserves all the praise that was 5 bestowed 4 on 1 the 1 
 two 2 others. 3 
 
 Here are the portraits ; which of them (do) you 2 like 1 best? 
 
 The man who does 3 his 1 duty 2 , despises the dangers which 
 surround 2 him 1 . 
 
 This painting is better than that which you have 7 honored 6 
 with 1 such 3 a 2 rich 4 frame 5 . 
 
 Which of the two suppositions appears to you most probable, 
 this or that ? 
 
 How (do) you 2 find 1 this pen? It is not sufficiently 2 pointed 1 . 
 
 He told him that his bills of exchange had 2 arrived 1 . 
 
 After they had 4 found 3 the 1 place 2 , they 6 searched 5 it 
 thoroughly. 
 
 Is this or that one the gentleman you mentioned ? It is 
 neither of the two. 
 
 It is a difficult task. 
 
 These are his own words. 
 
 This is the man whose works we all so much admire. 
 
 Is he a relation of yours? He is not a relation, but a friend 
 of mine. 
 
 Last night I 2 dreamt 1 I was walking through fifty odd rooms 
 which contained 4 some 1 millions 2 of 3 books 3 . 
 
 Whatever be 4 the 1 cause 2 of 3 it 3 , I shall know 4 it 1 this 2 
 night 3 . 
 
 young, jtmg. portrait, 35il&'ttifj, ». 3. b. i\ 
 
 sister, @cl)WCf ter, /. 1. C. I like, mil* gefMtf (from gc* 
 
 yesterday, gcf'tCVtt. fallen, to please). 
 
 to see, fe'fycn, irr. best, am kf'tCU. 
 
 to deserve, tocvftie'ncn. man, 3J?ann, m. 3. b. c. 
 
 praise, $ob, n. 3. b. duty, spjttcl)t, /. 1. t>. 
 
 on, Dat. to do, ttjlXW, irr. 
 
 the other, fcCV an'fceve. to despise, iHTacb'tCu. 
 
 to bestow, ettfyei'krt. danger, ©cfafyr', /. 1. t>. 
 
 here, fytev. to surround, umviUg'cn. 
 
208 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE PtfONOUN. 
 
 [book II. 
 
 painting, (ScttnU'&e, n. 3. a. a. 
 
 better, bcffcr. 
 
 than, a(tf. 
 
 with, mit. (Dat.) 
 
 such, fol'djer-e-es. 
 
 rich, fo|Vbar. 
 
 frame, Sftafy'mcn, m. 3. a. a. 
 to honor, beefy'ven. 
 supposition, SSonwS'fffcling, 
 
 f. 1. i>. 
 to appear, fcljci'ncn. 
 most, am mct'jh'u. 
 probable, roatyv'fcbcinliclj. 
 or, o'&ft*. 
 how, roti'. 
 
 to find, ftn'&CU, irr. 
 pen, gc'Dci, /. 1. C. 
 not, mc()t. 
 pointed, fptft. 
 sufficiently, gctlllg'. 
 to tell, fa'gen. (Dat.) 
 that, Cag. 
 bill of exchange, ^ccfy'fef, m. 
 
 3. a. A* 
 to arrive, (M'f Oitimcn, irr. (with 
 
 fein.) 
 
 after, nacl)&em'. 
 
 place, ^Pfa^t, m. 3. b. (\ 
 
 to search, fcuvcbflt'clKU. 
 
 thoroughly, grimb'ttcl). 
 
 gentleman, £cw, m. 2. b. 
 
 to mention, cvrodty'nen. (Gen.) 
 
 none, tct'nci'. 
 
 of, \)0\\. (Dat.) 
 
 the two, bct'bc. 
 
 difficult, fd)it>ie'vig. 
 
 task, ZCc'beit, f. 1. t>. 
 
 own, ct'gcnci--c-c£. 
 
 word, QOBort, ». 3. b. (\ 
 
 work, ^OBcvf, rc. 3. b. 6. 
 
 much, fefyv. 
 
 to admire, fcenwu'Dcvn. 
 
 relation, ^CHMUb'tcr. 
 
 but, abet*. 
 
 night, 9lacl)t, /. 1. 6. 
 
 I dream, tvaumt mit. 
 
 to be walking, gC'fyCit, irr. 
 
 through, Durd). 
 
 room, *@5cuueb', n. 3. b. c. 
 
 book, *iBuc() / n. 3. b. e, 
 
 to contain, CiUtyal'teu, irr. 
 
 cause, tlv'filcl)C, f. 1 . C. 
 
 of it, fcafeon'. 
 
 to know, cvfafy'rcn. 
 
 § 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
 
 The Pronoun either stands in the room of a substantive, 
 or is connected with it in the character of an adjective ; 
 and has accordingly either the position of the one or the 
 other. 
 
 Therefore, when used substantively, it may serve as the 
 subject, or as the object, in a sentence, and is placed accord- 
 ingly. The personal pronouns never occur otherwise than as 
 substantives ; and the demonstrative pronouns occasionally 
 assume this character. When the latter are employed as ad- 
 jectives, they occupy the place of the article, and go before 
 any other .word, that may be joined with the substantive ; as, 
 2)tc'fc Dvci gu'feil Ull'tt, These three good people ; 3e'ttC fold* 
 eir'jUn fap'fcvn STOn'UCV, Those four first brave men. The 
 
CH. 4. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN. 209 
 
 word all, however, may precede them. — In 93a' tei* tttt'fc** our 
 father, which is the beginning of the Lord's Prayer, it might 
 seem, as if the possessive were put after the substantive, "33a'; 
 ttv ; but uu'fci*, is there the genitive plural of the pronoun of 
 the first person, in imitation of the Greek. 
 
 The personal pronoun, in the accusative case, is commonly 
 put before the dative ; as, St* gtbt CS mil*, He gives it to me; — 
 eg, the accusative case, before the dative miv. <&d)ic'h fie 
 it)ttt, Send them to him; — fte, them, preceding ifym, to him.* 
 The dative is found before the object ; as, (£ib mil* e£ ; but not 
 so frequently as after it ; and then it is often contracted in 
 familiar language; as, mil* CS, into mtVS, t>iv C6, into fcivS. 
 
 Farther, the personal pronoun, in the dative, or accusative, 
 is sometimes placed before the subject, when the verb is at 
 the end of the sentence, '■JBemi mil* &a$ ©Ificf guu'ttta, t|t, If 
 fortune is propitious to me ; SBeil bid) Drill SSa'tCi: liebt, Be- 
 cause thy father loves thee. 
 
 The relative pronoun has its place, naturally, at the begin- 
 ning of that part of the sentence, to which it belongs. The 
 word ad may sometimes stand before it. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Those last free Romans. 
 
 They refused it to him. Grant him his request. 
 
 As long as misfortune persecuted him. 
 
 the last, bet* le^'te. request, (Stflld)', n. 3. b. 6. 
 
 free, fret. as long as, fo (ano/e afc. 
 
 Roman, SftS'mcr, m. 3. a. a. misfortune, ba<? UU'glM, 
 to refuse, roci'gent. to persecute, ttcvfol'geu. 
 
 to grant, gero&lj'tm 
 
 Book II. Ch. 2. § 2. Rule iv. 
 
 18* 
 
210 SYNTAX OP THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 VERBS. 
 
 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
 
 A. Persons and Numbers. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 The verb must agree with its subject in number and per- 
 son ; as, IBiv Ue'Ben itjn n>ie er wis geliebt' tjut, We love him 
 
 as he has loved us. 
 
 Observations. — 1. When the verb belongs to two or more 
 substantives of the singular number, it is commonly put in 
 the plural ; as, iu'bt, $n§ imt> ©i'fevfudjf f(nt> fycf tige Set'Den- 
 fc()viftcn, Love, hatred, and jealousy, are violent passions. 
 Sometimes, the verb stands in the singular after two or more 
 substantives : for example, SDtOfD tint) 33evroiY|Utng fyev'fcl)Ct 
 tm $ttn't>e, Murder and destruction reign in the land. It is a 
 sort of elliptical form, which should be thus supplied, 3D?0Vt> 
 
 hev'fcl)ct tm Un'oe, tint) S8etrou'finng ^ct*'fc()ct im kn'oe. 
 
 2. When the subjects are of different persons, the first per- 
 son is preferred to the second ; and the second to the third : 
 consequently, the verb will be in the first person plural, when 
 one of the subjects is of the first person, and in the second, if 
 there is a second and no first person : for example, S)u, tcill 
 23ru'bei* nut) id) roof fen fpajic'rcn ge'fyen, You, your brother, 
 
 and I will take a walk. Q&oflcn is in the first person plural, 
 because one of the subjects (Ml, fcein SSnt'&er ttnt> iel)) happens 
 to be in the first person, namely, id). £>U, beitt 25ru'bcr, Mlb 
 bei'ne ©djroefte* feib fyeu'te ein'gelaben roov'ben, You, your 
 
 brother, and your sister, have been invited to-day. ©eib, is 
 the second person of the verb, on account of bit, the second 
 person, which takes the lead in the absence of the first. 
 
 3. The verb is put in the plural number, with a subject in 
 the singular, in titles of address ; as, (Elt've Sjfceilenj' fya'fcen 
 befob'lcit, Your excellency has ordered ; Qnt've SOtajejldt' (or 
 abbreviated (Sro. SDUjejMt) genffyen, Your Majesty is graciously 
 
CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 2l . 
 
 pleased ; 3^'vc (or, according to an antiquated form, ^t)'vo) 
 <SmVt>CU bcmer'foll, Your Lordship observes. In the above, 
 fya'bcn, gcvil'bcn, bemeirtcn, are in the plural number. Per- 
 sons of title, or rank, are sometimes spoken of in this form, 
 even when absent ; as, 2)cv £cit 33avon' filtt) fyicr gcwe'fcn, 
 My Lord Baron has been here. But persons of good taste 
 
 always say, 2)cr Qat 23ai*ou' \\\ fyier gerce'feiL 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 The personal pronouns are generally to be expressed. 
 
 Observations. — 1. The imperative mood takes no pronoun 
 in the second person, except for the sake of emphasis and dis- 
 tinction. But the third person singular and plural, and the first 
 person plural, cannot be used without the pronoun. See the 
 Conjugation of Verbs. 
 
 2. When two or more verbs, of the same person, come to- 
 gether, one pronoun (or substantive) may serve for them all : 
 for example, %d) tc'fc lint) fc()vci'bi\ I read and write ; (£r tarn 
 pt mil*/ gtug a'ba* baft> tme'tw t»eg, He came to me, but soon 
 went away again ; ^iv tya'bcu 3fy've ©m'fotnmfl Cl*l)af ten, 
 fcaufen fnv 3fy're (5&'te, nnt> roer'fcen nns t>as SJergmYgcn mad/* 
 
 Clt, @ic Jit bcftt'cbcn, We have received your invitation, thank 
 you for your kindness, and will do ourselves the pleasure of 
 calling upon you ; £)cr gctnfc friro, im& focrfyccv'tc M$ ianfc, 
 The enemy came, and desolated the country. 
 
 3. The pronoun of the first person is sometimes omitted 
 in antiquated and formal language, particularly in addressing 
 persons of superior rank ; as, (Su're ©na'&en f'anu fyicrmiF 
 fcerftcfo'cvtt, I can herewith assure your Lordship ; £>e'ro 
 ©cl)rct'kn fya'bc crfyaftcn, I have received your letter. This 
 notion seems to have sprung from an imaginary kind of rev- 
 erence, by which he that spoke, or wrote, was too modest to 
 mention his own person, at the same time with the person 
 spoken to. But this awkward form of affected modesty is 
 going out of use. 
 
 4. In familiar language, and in poetry, the pronouns of 
 the first and the second person are sometimes omitted ; as, 
 35itt (instead of id) bin) fo gait} t>er(af'fcn tyicr, I am so entirely 
 
212 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 [book II. 
 
 forsaken here ; S5ift (instead of bi\l &tt) mil* gut? Are you 
 kindly disposed toward me ? 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Exorbitant riches, and extreme poverty, beget ambition 
 and servility, and undermine the freedom and order of so- 
 ciety. 
 
 Your father, you, and I, have accepted 3 the 1 invitation 2 . 
 
 You and her youngest brother were classmates. 
 
 Urge me no further. 
 
 Stand thou at his right hand, and let him stand 4 at 1 his 9 
 left 3 . 
 
 Let us go 2 hence 1 . 
 
 Be so kind as to hand me that book. 
 
 exorbitant, u'bevm&fftg. 
 riches, (Plural of) *SKek()'= 
 
 tfyttm, n. 3. b. c. 
 extreme, du'fcr|lcv-C-et?. 
 poverty, Wmittl), /. 
 
 to beget, eqcu'geu. 
 ambition, Q£()r'gct£, m. 3. b. 
 servility, Untcvtljd'mgfeit, f. 
 to undermine, ttntcirgva'bcu. 
 freedom, gm'fyCU, /. 
 order, £)i*t>'nung, /. 
 society, ©cfcll'fcijaft, /. 
 father, 33a'ter. 
 invitation, Qnn'fatntltg, /. 
 to accept, an'nefymen, irr. 
 young, *jung, 
 brother, 55vu'fca\ 
 class-mate, @djltl / fmm& / m. 
 3. b. b. 
 
 to urge, fcrdng'en. 
 
 no, nic()t. 
 
 further, rPei'tCV. 
 
 to stand, ftc'fyCU. 
 
 at, ju. (Dat.) 
 
 the right hand, t»ic SKccfo'te, (an 
 adjective used as a noun, 
 Jfpantv hand, being under- 
 stood.) 
 
 to let, faf fen. 
 
 the left hand, Die ttltfe, (an 
 
 adjective used as a noun), 
 to go, ge'fycil. 
 hence, t)0U fyin'ttCll. 
 so, fo. 
 
 kind, git'ttg. 
 as to, ttnt>. 
 
 to hand, rct'cl)CU. (Impcrat.) 
 book, *35uc() ; n. 3. b. C. 
 
 ' B. Tenses. 
 
 1. To signify past time, the German language has one ab- 
 solute tense, the Perfect ; and two relative tenses, the Imper- 
 fect and the Pluperfect. 
 
 The Perfect tense is commonly employed to express an 
 action past, without any particular reference to other events ; 
 
CH. 2. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 213 
 
 as, (£r f^at ftd) gefetpfcrti He has become better , 2Me @d)if fc 
 t)cu 3>n'Mcn ftnt> an'gcfommcn, The vessels from India have 
 arrived. 
 
 The two relative tenses are used to denote an event in 
 reference to another. 
 
 The Pluperfect indicates an event in its relation to another 
 successive event ; as, 3d) war fauin an'gct'ommcn (pluperfect), 
 ate t>cr ^ricg cvt'l&vt' rouv'&C, I had scarcely arrived when war 
 was declared. 
 
 The Imperfect designates an event in its relation to another, 
 which is either past, or cotemporary, or correlative (i. c. con- 
 nected by the relation of cause and effect.) Accordingly, 
 with respect to past events, we cannot say, %d) rear t\utm 
 an'gct'ommcn, ate bet $rtcg cvtlart' itort'ton ift (perfect"), but 
 we must say, crHart' MJW£'&'ei — If those two events, my arrival, 
 and the declaration of war, are to be represented as content* 
 poraneous, we ought to say, %d) ram gcra'oe an, ate ocr £rtcg 
 txflfotf Itfur'DC, I just arrived when war was declared. Cor- 
 relative events also are to be expressed in the same manner ; 
 as, 2>a id) fci'nc ©cftn'nnng fann'tc, trail' te id) ifnti nid)t, As I 
 knew his character, I did not trust him. Sometimes the 
 choice of the perfect or imperfect depends on euphony. 
 
 2. In the historical style, the present tense is frequently 
 substituted for the imperfect, to enliven the representation. 
 This is sometimes done in English, but more seldom than in 
 German. 
 
 3. The present tense is occasionally applied to a future 
 action. %d) rei'jc mor'gen ab, I (shall) set off to-morrow ; 3>n 
 orci QBodvcn fe'tyen ©ic mid) nne'&er t)tcr, In three weeks' time 
 you (will) see me here again ; %d) t'om'tnc g(cid) ttnc'OCt, I 
 (shall) come back immediately. 
 
 4. The imperfect subjunctive is frequently used for the 
 simple conditional ; as, 3d) ttMinfcb'tc, cr fcbric'bc mir, (in- 
 stead of, Sr untrue mir fd)t*ci'tcn,) I wish he would write to 
 me. 
 
 5. The pluperfect subjunctive is frequently used instead of 
 the compound conditional ; as, 3Bcnn cr an'gctommcu ware, 
 fo fyat'tc man mir cs ol)'ne Broci'fd gefdme'ben (instead of 
 @o nnir'oc man mir c$ ot)'nc ^rcci'fct gcfcljrtc'ben baben,) If 
 
214 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [iJOOK II 
 
 he had arrived, they would without doubt have written it 
 to me. 
 
 6. The perfect is often used for the compound future ; as, 
 ©ofcalfc' id) fei'itcn ©eg'nev gefj&rt' fya'be (instead of gct)6ut' i)a'= 
 ten roer'fce), rocr'fce id) mei'ncn (£utfd)luff faf'fcn, As soon as I 
 
 have heard (shall have heard) his adversary, I shall form my 
 resolution. 
 
 7. In quoting, the verb of the sentence quoted is generally 
 put in the present, perfect, or future, though the imperfect or 
 pluperfect should precede. Ex. 3d) \)Cvftd)'CVte ifym M> ** f*d) 
 tV'VC, I assured him that he was mistaken ; ©ic fci^te if)ltt 
 fcoraus', er rccr'fce fid) nidjt gfitcf'ttdj fhtylm, She foretold him 
 that he would not feel happy; ©r bcfyattp'tCtC, CV fci (tan? 
 gCfflt'jCtt/ He asserted he had been sick. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 He has begun 4 his 1 great 2 work 3 , but not 2 yet 1 finished. 
 
 He had packed 4 all 1 his 2 things 3 , and was about to depart, 
 when he received 3 this 1 news 2 . 
 
 Had you learned 3 our 1 language 2 before you came 4 to 1 this 2 
 country 3 1 
 
 When he saw 5 the 1 consequences 2 of 3 his 3 conduct 4 , he 
 repented (was he penitent), and endeavoured to repair (to 8 
 make 9 good?) the 1 injury 2 which 3 he 4 had 6 done 5 . 
 
 When he arrived, she 2 had 1 already died. 
 
 As their whole business was 4 carried 3 on 3 upon 1 credit 2 , 
 (so) they 7 must 5 fail when the political affairs of the country 
 were changed. 
 
 If he had 3 known 2 it 1 , he 5 would 4 have 4 come 8 with 6 me 7 . 
 
 When I shall 4 have 4 learned 3 his 1 decision 2 , I 6 will 5 com- 
 municate 9 it 7 to 8 you 8 . 
 
 great, grog, to pack, pac'fen. 
 
 work, 3£evf , n. 3. b. b. about, im 23cgnf fe. 
 
 to begin, bcgin'nen, irr. to depart, ab £U VCi'fCU. 
 
 but, a'Uv. when, al$. 
 
 yet, nod). news, Sladyridtf, /. 
 
 to finish, Ctt'OtgCU. to receive, Cffyal'tCU, irr. 
 
 all, al'ie. language, ©pra'cfoe, /. 
 
 thing, @ad)'e, /.l.C. to learn, cvlcv'ncn. 
 
CH. o. § 1.] 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 215 
 
 before, e'fye. 
 
 to, in. (Ace.) 
 
 country, idtlb, n 3. b. e. 
 
 to come, fom'men, irr. 
 
 consequence, §ol'ge, f. 1. C. 
 
 conduct, SSctva'gcn, n. 3. a. 
 
 to see, fe'bcn, »Yr. 
 
 to repent, ren'tg rocr'fcen. 
 
 to endeavour, fid) bemiYfycn. 
 
 injury, @d)a't>en, m. 3. a. a. 
 
 to do, tbltn, irr. 
 
 to repair, gttt mad)'en. 
 
 to arrive, an' fang en. 
 
 already, bercitS'. 
 
 to die, jlev'bcn, irr. (with fcin). 
 
 as, to. 
 
 whole, ganj. 
 
 business, ©cfdjdft', n. 
 
 upon, anf. 
 
 credit, £rct»if, m. 3. b. 
 
 to carry on, futj'vcn. 
 
 so, fo. 
 
 I must, id) mnff, mix. 
 
 to fail, jafjl'imfdjjig roev'ben. 
 
 political, of fentlid). 
 
 affair, Tin'gclegenfycit, /. 1. t>. 
 
 to be changed, fid) dn'omt. 
 
 if, roenn. 
 
 to know, » if fen, mix. 
 
 with, mit. (Dat.) 
 
 when, fobafo'. 
 
 decision, £ntfd)et'Mtng, /. 
 
 to learn, evfafy'Ven, irr. 
 
 to communicate, mit'tfyetfen. 
 
 C. Moods. 
 
 The Indicative and Imperative require no elucidation. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 The Subjunctive is to be used ; 1. When a state of uncer- 
 tainty is implied. It is, therefore, to be found after some 
 conjunctions > which convey that idea. Such are in many cases 
 roenn, if; afo roenn, as if; oh, whether ; t>amit', in order that ; 
 to§, that. But the subjunctive mood must not be supposed to 
 be governed by those conjunctions. It solely depends upon the 
 uncertainty, or doubtfulness, with which the action of the 
 verb is conceived. Thus the subjunctive occurs after ba$, 
 when any one of these verbs precedes : btt'ten, to beg ; 
 va'tfyen, to advise; evmafy'nen, to exhort; befov'gen, to ap- 
 prehend ; futd)'ten, to fear ; fd)ei'ncn, to appear, to seem ; 
 bcbillg'en, to make conditions; rcnn'fdKn, to wish; wcl'len, 
 to desire; jroei'feln, to doubt, &c. For, when we beg, advise, 
 exhort, apprehend, fear, wish, desire, that a thing may be done, 
 a degree of uncertainty exists, as to the event. This is 
 farther manifest from the verb fa'gen, to say, and similar 
 ones ; as, ant'n>ovten, to answer ; bebaur/ten, to maintain, 
 &lc. When that which is said or maintained, remains, in our 
 opinion, liable to doubt, the subjunctive should follow after 
 
216 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 bag: for example, 93ian fagt mir, fcag o? gc&on'ncvt fya'bc, 
 
 They tell me that there has been thunder ; Xln'fcr §rcttnt) bt- 
 
 fyatqrtet, t>aft" ties cin frudjt'barcs 3atyv feiu wcv'&e, Our friend 
 
 maintains that this will be a fruitful year. When, on the other 
 hand, the idea is considered as positive, and unquestionable, the 
 indicative must be made use of; for instance, when a person 
 speaks of himself; as, 3d) bcfyaup'te, fcafe" e6 \mt)V iff, I main- 
 tain that it is true. Here the subjunctive would be wrong, 
 because the notion is strongly affirmative. If what a person 
 maintains be not certain in his own conception, he should 
 look for another expression, such as, id) Alau'be, id) fcott'e, I 
 believe, I think. 3d) rocis, t>a£ cv l>a£ ©elo bcfom'mot l)at, 
 I know that he has received the money ; the indicative, for 
 the same reason. — The conjunction, room, does not require 
 the subjunctive mood after it, except when the sentence to 
 which it belongs is connected with one that contains a 
 conditional future ; as, 3d) wfir'&e C6" ttjmx, worn e$ mog'lid) 
 ID&'tC/ I should do it, if it were possible. Here rod've, the 
 verb belonging to room, is in the subjunctive mood, because 
 the preceding sentence contains a conditional future, I should 
 do it. It is evident, that the subjunctive rests upon the 
 opinion that is formed of the certainty or uncertainty in 
 the action of the verb. It is a natural consequence of this, 
 that, in some circumstances, it may be questioned, whether 
 the indicative or the subjunctive be more proper; the de- 
 cision will be according to the point of view, in which the 
 sentence is contemplated. 
 
 2. The subjunctive mood is used when room or tag is to be 
 supplied, in the following cases. 
 
 a. The subjunctive must be used at the beginning of a 
 sentence when the conjunction room, if, is to be supplied be- 
 fore the imperfect or pluperfect tense ; as in the following, 
 rod've id) an 3fy'l'W ©teflc, were I in your place, instead of 
 room id) an Sft'tft ©tcl'fc rod're, if I were in your place : 
 tjat'U a t>te ©dldt'jc t>C6 (WfuS, had he the treasures of 
 Croesus, for Wltttt cr Die ©d)dt^c U$ (Evo'juS tydt'te, if he had 
 the treasures of Croesus. — But when the conjunction room is 
 to be understood before the present tense, it must be in the 
 indicative mood. Examples ; 25i|i t>U rod), fo gib t)tc(; H|t- Ml 
 arm, fo gib fccin QOBc'nigo? go'nc, if thou art rich, give much ; 
 if thou art poor, give thy little cheerfully. Jpo'VCft tot was? 
 
CH. 6. § J-] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 217 
 
 66'jte/ fcaS fa'ge nidjt nadj, if thou hearest any thing bad, do 
 not repeat it. 
 
 6. The subjunctive is generally used when bag is to be sup- 
 plied ; as, <Ex gfaubt, C6 fct nicl)t mdg'Ud), He thinks (that) it is 
 not possible ; 2ttan fagt, t>er £ai'fcr fya'bc gric'tcn gemadjt', 
 They say (that) the Emperor has made peace. 
 
 3. It frequently has a potential signification, expressing, 
 either a wish ; as, X>Cl* J&im'mel ge'be C£, May heaven grant it ; 
 (£)0tt befyll'tt, God forbid ; — or a permission, and concession ; 
 as, (gx gc'tye roofyin' IX xooi'k, Let him go where he pleases : — 
 or a supposition ; as, £$ roa've fcffcr, rocnn roit Sfy'uen SHatfy 
 befolgt' fatten, It would be better if we had followed your 
 advice ; £>tc granjofen fyat'ten t>ic <&d)U\d)t uidn gnron'ncn, 
 
 n>cnn fie uid)t ci'nc fo gro'fe U'bennadjt an tas'tea gcijatt' ftat'* 
 
 ten, The French would not have gained the battle, if they had 
 not had such superior numbers : — or surprise, or wonder ; as, 
 $bt'tc id)$ tod) n\d)t geglaubt'! I should not have thought it! 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 The Infinitive Mood occurs either without the preposition 
 $U, or with it. 
 
 a. Without ju. 
 
 1. When it stands by itself and unconnected, for example, 
 in a vocabulary ; as, lic'bcn, to love; jVfycn, to see. 
 
 2. When it is in the room of a substantive, either as the 
 subject, or as the object; as, 33crfprcd)'ctt ttnfc ftfftCfot fiilD 
 jn?ct i>erfd)ie'&ene @ad)'cn, To promise and to fulfill are two 
 different things ; 2)a$ HCU'rtC id) fedyten, That I call to fight, or 
 fighting ; £\u" fyct'fc id) gvau'fam fettfafyteit, That I call to act 
 cruelly, or acting cruelly. 
 
 3. When for the purpose of laying peculiar stress on the 
 simple action or condition expressed by the verb, the infinitive 
 is used without an auxiliary ; as, 3d) ttiet'nctf 23nt'&CV$ Still's 
 fcev nidjt ericn'nen? 3d) ffc mrijt crrcn'nen? I not recognise 
 the children of my brother? I not recognise them? 
 
 4. After the verbs f^n'nen to be able ; me'gcn, to like ; 
 
 19 
 
218 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 faf'jvH, to permit, or cause ; tmv'feit, to be permitted ; foWcn, 
 to be obliged ; wol'leil, to will ; mftf'fctl, to be forced ; and 
 IfCl'Df 1!/ when it is the auxiliary to the future tense ; as, 3^) 
 Wev'fce fra'gen, I shall ask ; and similar verbs. 
 
 5. After the verbs, bct'fcit, to bid ; fyel'fctt, to help ; (cfy'VClt, 
 to teach; Ifv'ncn, to learn; fyo'VCU, to hear; fd)eu, to see; 
 fufy'fatt, to feel. For example : 3d) fytCS t()n ge'fyen, I bid him 
 go ; St* tyilft mil' fd)fci'ben, He helps me to write, that is, he 
 assists me in writing ; Dcr ^Ba'tCV UtjXt t>itt? &in& U'fm, The 
 father teaches the child to read ; c 333tl* lev'uen tauten, We learn 
 to dance ; 3 C< W've fie ftng'nt, I hear them sing; 3$ W¥ $ n 
 fom'ntcn, I see him come or coming; (£r fitfyfte fciu 23lut gafy'= 
 VCn, He felt his blood boil or boiling. — After some of these 
 verbs, the English more commonly use the participle ; but the 
 Germans constantly employ the infinitive. icfy'VCtt and iev'nctl 
 sometimes admit £lt before the infinitive that follows them. 
 
 6. Some verbs are joined to an infinitive, without £U, in 
 particular phrases. These are : 
 
 SSIci'bcn, to remain — with the infinitive, it signifies con- 
 tinuance of locality; as, @v hUibt lie'gen, He continues lying; 
 Sr bUibt ftt'^Clt/ He continues sitting, he keeps his seat, he does 
 not move from his seat ; (St* blcibt ftCtycn, He continues stand- 
 ing. It is used in the same manner with jlCC'h'U, to stick fast ; 
 fyang'cn, to hang ; fni'CU, to kneel ; Ht'btXl, to adhere, to stick. 
 
 gafy'vnt, to go in a carriage, with fpajie'ren ; as, 3d) f&tytt 
 fpctyie't'CU, I drive out for exercise, for an airing. 
 
 §in'fcClt, to find, is occasionally followed by the infinitive, 
 where the English put the participle, ©u fiUlfc ftc (djU'fim, 
 He found them sleeping or asleep ; 3 (ft fan& t>aS S3ud) auf 
 &em ^tfd)'e lic'gcu, I found the book lying upon the table. 
 The participle might here be used, even in German. 
 
 (Sc'tjCU, to go; as, %d) gc'fye fpajte'ven, I take a walk; (£i* 
 gd)t fd)(a'fen ; He goes to bed, (literally, he goes to sleep) ; and 
 with some other verbs. 
 
 ipa'bcn, to have, in these and similar phrases ; (£v t)at gut 
 vci'fen, It is easy for him to travel ; ©ie t}i\'bcn gut fprccfo'en, You 
 may well say so; 9QBtV tya'bcil ©cl& ftttf 3itlTeil jU'tyen, We have 
 money out on interest. 
 
 ©id) le'geit; to lay one's self down, with fd)(a'fen, to sleep ; 
 as, 3$ l*'8 e wid) fcfcfa'fttl/ I lay myself down to sleep. 
 
CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 219 
 
 3D?ad)'CU, when it signifies to cause, or occasion ; as, (£r 
 mad)t mtcfc Itob'm, He makes me laugh ; Sr mad)t mid) roci'ncn, 
 He makes me cry. 
 
 SHci'tcn, to ride on horseback, with fpajtc'rcn ; as, 3d) rci'tc 
 fpajie'rcil, I take a ride. 
 
 it)uu, to do, with uid)t£ ate, after it; as, 25 tc gratt tt)ut 
 ltid)t£ ate janf'CU, The woman does nothing but quarrel ; 2)cr 
 SDTann ttyut nid)tS ate fdjcl'teii/ The man does nothing but 
 scold. 
 
 b. With 1% 
 
 1. After substantives and adjectives, when in English either 
 to, with the infinitive, or of, with the participle, is used : for 
 example, after a substantive, hl|t Jtt fpif'tcit, an inclination 
 to play ; 0a£ 'iBcramt'gcn @ic JU fc'tycn, the pleasure of seeing 
 you ; OCt* SDBimfd) gclobt' JU mv'btn, the wish of being 
 praised : — after an adjective, 3»d) war fro I) mci'ucn grCUUO n>ie's 
 OCr Jll fc'fym, I was happy to see my friend again ; miVoc Jit 
 ftc'fycn, tired of standing ; tlCU'gicrig JU roif'fcn, curious to 
 know ; bcgie'rig £lt crfafy'ren, anxious to be informed. 
 
 2. After verbs, when purpose or design is intimated. 3$ 
 ging ju Ocm SDlau'ne, it)tn etc @ad)'e t>or'jufkl(cn uuo mil ibm 
 OanVber Jtl fprcd)'CU, I went to the man, to represent the thing 
 to him, and to converse with him about it. And here the par- 
 ticle um is frequently joined with Jti, which expresses design 
 still more distinctly ; as, iu'btt Oic Kv'bcit, ttitt glucflid) Jit 
 fciu, Love labor (in order) to be happy. 
 
 3. After the following verbs and others of a similar signifi- 
 cation : fttt'fttngen, to begin ; auf't)6rcu, to cease ; bcfcb'ieu, to 
 command; bitten, to beg; etUXlt'tCtt; to expect; fyoffeit, to 
 hope; filXityttn, to fear; Oro'tym, to threaten; pfle'gen, to be 
 wont ; bcljaup'tCU, to. maintain ; erfen'nen, to acknowledge, 
 with the infinitive in the perfect tense ; as, (£r crrcnnt', fid) 
 grirrt' Jtt baben, He acknowledges himself to have been mis- 
 taken : bet'en'iten, to confess, with the infinitive perfect; as, 
 
 Sr betemtf , t>a$ (Sclo erbal'ren ju ba'bcn, He confesses having 
 received the money : fdjei'ncn, to appear, to seem ; roitn'fdwt, 
 to wish ; foerfang'en, to desire ; ermang'eln, to fail ; crlaubeu, 
 to permit; geftat'ten, to allow ; fccrote'ucn, to deserve ; wa'gcn. 
 to venture ; fyvl'bett, to have ; as, 3>d) tjl'bt 3t)'ncn Ct'roaS JU fa'= 
 
220 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 gen, I have something to tell you : fcilt/ to be ; as, Q£g ift £U 
 fuidj'tcn, It is to be feared; ifif'fen, to know how; as, (£v ttetS 
 eg £U ma'dKU, He knows how to do it; and these verbs; tyel's 
 fen, mrt'jcn, fvcm'tticn, when they signify to be of use, to an- 
 swer a purpose. 
 
 4. The prepositions ofy'UC, without, and jlatt or anffatt', in- 
 stead of, require ju before the infinitive. The English con- 
 strue these with the participle ; as, ofy'ne JU n>if fett, without 
 knowing, (French, saws savoir) ; ftatt Jtt fd)la'fen, instead of 
 sleeping ; OllftAtt' JU fd)t*ei'ben, instead of writing. 
 
 In English, the infinitive, with to, is put after some verbs, 
 where the Germans prefer the conjunction tag, with the in- 
 dicative or subjunctive : for example, I knew him to be the 
 man, 3>d) rMjf'tc, tag er ter SDTann mar ; They thought me to be 
 mistaken, ©ie tad) ten, tag id) mid) tv'rete ; He believed it true, 
 (£r gfaub'tc, tag eg rrnxfyt: nnVve. — The infinitive with ta, is also 
 employed by the English, after such words as, when, where, 
 hoto, which, ichat, whose, whom, when certain verbs, such as, 
 to hww, to tell, to be told, and the like, precede. For 
 example, You know how to write it ; I will tell you ichat to do ; 
 Teach me what to say. In German, the indicative or subjunc- 
 tive of some helping verb, such as, mng, fcU, must, ought, 
 shall, is to be made use of; as, ©ie reiffen, tt)ie ©ie eg fdjrci's 
 kit muffen, You know how you must write it ; 3d) tt?t(( 3ty' s 
 nen fa'gen, wag ©ie tfytm muffen, I will tell you what you must 
 do ; *el)'ren ©ie mid), roag id) fa'gen foil, Teach me what I 
 shall say.* 
 
 The Infinitive, with yw, is used, where the English employ 
 the participle, with a preposition, such as of, from, and others. 
 For example, tag 33ergmVgen ci'neu gveunt ju fe'fyeu, the 
 pleasure of seeing a friend. 
 
 Observations. — 1. The Infinitive of the active voice, after 
 certain verbs seems to have a passive signification, while in 
 
 * In a sentence like this, He knows how to make it, if the ob- 
 ject is to express the simple fact that he can make it (no matter 
 how), we say, in German, (5r roeig eg JU mad)'en; but if the 
 manner be the prominent object, we say, (5t AH' it? tt>ic ei* Cg 
 
 mad/en foil (or mug). 
 
 
CH. 6. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 221 
 
 fact this peculiarity arises from the omission of the immediate 
 object of these verbs. Saft ifyn ru'fen, Let him call ; may also 
 signify, Let him be called, in which case it stands for iajj jc'^ 
 mauDen ityll ru'fen, Let some one call him. The same remark 
 applies to other similar expressions ; as, C £)(X $Ktcl)'tev t)tC6 it)lt 
 bill'fccn, The judge ordered him to bind, also to be bound ; 90Btt* 
 fa'tyen itm fcfola'gcn, We saw him beating, Also beaten. In 
 phrases like these, 2)ie'fcr ItnVjlanfc i|t JU CVTOa'gCtt, literally, 
 this circumstance is to consider, for, to be considered, the 
 infinitive is used as a noun ; as, SDie'fer Um'ftanfc ift Jltm (or ju 
 fccm)Srtt>d'gcn, This circumstance is for considering, i. e. worth 
 considering or to be considered. But in the use of this con- 
 struction, care must be taken to avoid ambiguity. 
 
 2. The Infinitive of the verbs bill* fen, fol'len, feu'nen, mb'- 
 gen, (af'fen, tmtf'fen, rcoHen, fye'ven, fc'^cu, is substituted for 
 
 the Past Participle, when an infinitive precedes. %d) fya'bc 
 e£ nic()t tfyltu DUV'fcn (for getmvft'), I was not allowed to do it: 
 2)u ty&t'tcjt fom'men fol'leu (for gcfollt'), You ought to have 
 come; £v fyat ein Jpaue" bau'ett laffen (for gelaffen), He 
 has caused a house to be built; %d) t)« be il)U an'tyoueu muf'feu 
 (for gemujft '), I have been obliged to listen to him ; Jjpdt'ten 
 ttur auS'gcben M&oClcn (for gcroollt'), Had we been inclined to 
 go out ; 3d) fya'be it)ii ret'tcn fc'fyen (for gefe'^en), I have 
 seen him ride. — kfy'veu, to teach, and ler'nen, to learn, like- 
 wise allow the use of this infinitive ; though the past par- 
 ticiple is, at present, more frequently employed ; as, Q£r tyrtt 
 mid) fcftm'ben Utj'Xttt, or $tUt)Xt', He has taught me to write ; 
 3d) fya'be bet ibm jeicfc'uen ler'nen, or gcleunt', I have learnt of 
 him to draw. 
 
 RULE HI. 
 
 The participle, besides its connexion with the verb, is, in 
 Syntax, liable to the rules of the adjective. 
 
 There are some participles, which may be said to represent 
 pronouns, having a demonstrative signification. Of this de- 
 scription are : befagf, aforesaid ; get>acl)t', evrodfynt', aforemen- 
 tioned ; geuannt', aforenamed; fofgeilD, the following. 
 
 The Present Participle, with JU, to, before it, and used as 
 an adjective, expresses futurity, with the implied notion of 
 necessity or possibility ; as, em forgfdltig ju t)mnci'&cnt>cv 
 
 19* 
 
222 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 Itm'jTant*/ a circumstance carefully to be avoided ; tin leidjt 
 JU focntici'&en&er Um'flanfc, a circumstance that may easily be 
 avoided. 
 
 The Past Participle of certain Verbs, is united with the 
 verb fom'tnnt/ to come, in an active signification, to express 
 the manner of coming; as, (£i* ffoitttlt gevit'tcn, He comes rid- 
 ing on horseback ; (£r fftmmt gegang'en, He comes walking ; 
 ©r fommt cjefaJj'vcn, He comes riding in a carriage. 
 
 The past participle is combined in a particular way, with the 
 
 verbs wol'Un, fya'ben, and roif'fcn ; as, 3d) rooll'te ©ic gcfragt' 
 
 fya'bcu, 1 would have you asked, that is, I should wish to ask you. 
 
 SJMc'fcs 3tobrecb'en wol'ltn roiv geafyn'fcet imf'fcn, We would 
 
 know this crime punished, that is, we wish to have it punished. 
 
 Cases Absolute. The accusative case joined to past parti- 
 ciples is taken absolutely. Examples : t>ag ©ejtdjt' uad) Often 
 getefyvt', his face being turned to the east ; t>CU 35(icf nad) fcettt 
 33a'tcr(an&e O.eroen'&et, his looks being turned towards his 
 country ; Me itt'gcn nad) t>cm £im'mcl gmd)'tft, his eyes being 
 directed towards heaven ; tue'fen llttVftcmfc fooraus'gffcfct, this 
 circumstance being supposed ; fcen (£cn>inn' ab'gcredjnet, the 
 gain being deducted ; t>ic$ auS'geuommen, this being excepted. 
 
 Sometimes the past participle is substituted for the impera- 
 tive mood ; as, SKo'fen auf ton \H3cg gcjlreut', unfc fees £arm$ 
 DCVgcffcn ! Strew roses on the path, and forget sorrow ! 2)U 
 ©tu'bc aufgerdttmt ! Clear the room ! in which examples 
 gcjU'CUt', V>ergeffcn, and auf gcvattmt, are past participles. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 I asked you if you had 3 been 2 there 1 . 
 
 They praise us that we might 4 return 3 the 1 compliment 2 . 
 
 I always 2 thought 1 that he would 3 please 2 you. 1 . 
 
 Promise me that you will 3 follow 2 him 1 , if he sets 4 you 1 the 2 
 example 3 . 
 
 If you had 3 known 2 him 1 , you could not 4 have 6 asked 5 such 2 
 a 1 question 3 . 
 
 Are you satisfied 1 then let us go. 
 
 (May) wisdom be your guide. 
 
 Had I not 3 told 4 it 1 to 2 them 2 , they would have 3 no 1 guilt 2 . 
 
 To come, to see, and to conquer, were almost simultaneous acts. 
 
 I saw him paint, and you heard him sing. 
 
 She does nothing but weep and lament. 
 
CH. 5. 
 
 $••] 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERK. 
 
 223 
 
 It avails nothing to 2 say 3 it 1 , if we (do) not venture to 2 do 3 
 it 1 , without waiting 3 any 1 longer 2 . 
 
 I know not how to tell her, without hurting 3 her 1 feelings 2 . 
 
 You have wished to 3 see 4 it 1 accomplished 2 ; it is now no 
 more to be altered. 
 
 Rise up, and move 3 your 1 hands 2 . 
 
 to ask, fra'gen. 
 
 if, ob. 
 
 there, fra. 
 
 to praise, (o'bot. 
 
 that, bamit'. 
 
 compliment, ^t'tigt'ett, /. 
 
 to return, ewnc'&Cnt. 
 
 I may, id) mag, mix. 
 
 to think, fccnt'cn, mix. 
 
 always, im'mcr. 
 
 that, t>af}\ 
 
 to please, gcfaHcn, irr. 
 
 to promise, VevfprccVcn, irr. 
 
 (Dat.) 
 to follow, fol'gen. (Dat.) 
 I will, id) voiii, mix. 
 example, Vbti'fyiti, n. 3. b. b. 
 to set, gc'ben, irr. 
 to know, hlintUf mix. 
 1 can, id) fann, mix. 
 to ask such a question, ci'UC 
 
 fol'cfoe §ra'ge tfyun, irr. 
 satisfied, bcfvie'fcigt. 
 to let, (aff cru 
 to go, ge'bcn. 
 wisdom, QOBeiS'fyctt, /. 
 guide, (Sclct'tcrin, /. 
 to tell, fa'gen. 
 no guilt, Hi'nz <&d)\iit>. 
 to come, fom'mcn. 
 to see, fe'tjcu. 
 
 to conquer, flc'gCU. 
 almost, bciua'fyc. 
 simultaneous, gleict/jettig. 
 act, J£>aut>'(uug, /. 1. t>. 
 to paint, ma'Icn. 
 to hear, fy&'ren. 
 to sing, ftug'CU. 
 nothing, nic()t6. 
 but, al$. 
 
 to weep, roet'nen. 
 
 to lament, fta'gcn. 
 
 to avail, from'men. 
 to venture, roa'gcn. 
 without, ob'ne. 
 any, ir'geilb. 
 long, (ang. 
 to wait, mar'ten. 
 
 to know, unf fen, mix. 
 
 how, rote, 
 
 feelings, ©cfufyl', n. 3. b. b. 
 
 to hurt, foerlet'jen. 
 
 to wish, MDUtt'fdjm 
 
 to accomplish, t)0Ubriug'Ctt,mzz. 
 
 now, mm. 
 
 more, mztjt. 
 
 to alter, dn'DCVU. 
 
 to rise up, auf ftcfycn, irr. 
 
 your, dcf. art. 
 
 hand, *£an&, /. 1. b. 
 
 to move, rc'gen. 
 
 D. The Passive Voice. 
 
 The passive voice of neuter verbs is employed impersonally, 
 is in Latin, when the subject of the verb is to be expressed in 
 
224 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 an indeterminate manner. Ex. <£f$ uurfc gcfatt'fcu, They run 
 (Lat. curritur) ; Q;6 UHlV'fce getaujf, There was dancing (Lat. 
 saltabatur). 
 
 E. The Auxiliaries. 
 
 When the same auxiliary belongs to more than one verb, 
 it need be only once employed ; as, %d) t)<\'kt CS gcty&rt' Unt> 
 gefc'tyen, I have heard and seen it ; QOBif tya'ben gcfcl)ric ben, 
 gclc'fen, ItnD gcfprocfo'Ctl, We have written, read, and talked. It 
 would encumber the sentence, to express the auxiliary more 
 than once in these examples. The English language co- 
 incides in this with the German. But the latter has a peculiarity, 
 which is not found in most other tongues : namely, that in the 
 perfect and pluperfect tenses the auxiliaries tya'bnt and fcin, 
 when placed at the end of a sentence, may be omitted. For 
 example : SD?ein grennt) fyat mtr gcfagt', Dag cr 3^'vcn 35ricf 
 gclc'fen, My friend has told me, that he has read your letter. 
 After gcle'fdt, the auxiliary fya'frc, is to be understood. It 
 would be quite as well, if it were expressed, though sometimes 
 the omission has a good effect, by preventing the monotonous 
 repetition of the same auxiliary word. The auxiliary ttHT'DCU/ 
 though at the end of the sentence, can never be left out. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 The trial is finished, and the sentance is passed. 
 
 He would have 10 been 9 taken 3 to 1 account 2 and 4 judged 8 
 by 5 our 6 law 7 , if he had 9 not 2 judged 4 him 1 self 3 and 5 abdica- 
 ted 8 his 6 power 7 . 
 
 As soon as he had 10 arranged 3 his 3 affairs 2 , and 4 taken 9 
 leave 8 of 5 his 6 friends 7 , he 12 departed 11 . 
 
 trial, SJUrfjt'th'Cit, rti. to abdicate, mc'Dcrtcgen. 
 
 to finish, en'ftcn. as soon as, fo balt> a(6. 
 
 sentence, Uv'tfyeif, n. affair, *!(n'gcfcgcnl)Cit / /. 1. fci 
 
 to pass, fallen, to arrange, bericl/ttgcn. 
 
 to take to account, JUt* from, fcou. (Dot.) 
 
 SKcciycnfcfoafit jic'fyen, irr. his friends, Mc ©ei'nigcn. 
 
 by, nad). (Dot.) leave, *Zibfc()ict), m. 3. b. 6. 
 
 law, <Sefc§', re. 3. b. b, to take, nclymcn, irr. 
 
 to judge, vicfj'tcn. to depart, ab'vcifcn. 
 power, 50?acl)t, f. 
 
CH 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 225 
 
 F. The Verb governing Cases. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 The Nominative case, as the object, is required, 
 
 1. By the following verbs: fcilt, to be; ffict'bClt/ to become; 
 Mei'ben, to remain ; fyci'fen, to be called, to bear a name ; 
 fctei'nen, to seem. Examples : gvicfe'ridj rtxxv tin gvo'fet 
 gclD'fyerv, Frederic was a great general; SDtcin 33vil'&er \\l 
 ©olfcat' geroov'Dcn, My brother has become a soldier; ©r bitibt 
 tin %t)0X, toit er im'mci* war, He remains a silly man, as he 
 always was ; 2Mc'fet SDiCnfd) tycijt tci* O'kvjiC, This man is call- 
 ed the colonel ; 0:6 fcfjcillt tin glt'tCl* tyU\\\, It seems a good 
 plan. The nouns, after the verbs, are here in the nomina- 
 tive case. 
 
 2. By the passive voice of such verbs, as, in the active, 
 govern a double accusative : for example, nett'ltCH/ to call, to 
 name — (£r rotrfc tin tljX'Udm SOiaun gcnannt', He is called an 
 honest man; fyct'fCU, to call, to name; tatt'fcn, to christen — 
 3)a6 £int> ijt Jpeinticl) getaufV roou'Den, The child has been 
 christened Henry ; (J^ein'vicl), is here the nominative case;) 
 fcljel'tctt/ to abuse — €v roivD cin S5eti*fi'gcv gefdjoften, He is 
 abused as a cheat ; fd)im'pfeu, to insult by opprobrious ap- 
 pellations — (St roarfc cine SDiem'mc gefdumpft', He was insulted 
 as a coward. Some verbs occur, in English, with two accu- 
 satives in the active, and two nominatives (namely, one as 
 the subject before, and the other as the object after the verb) 
 in the passive voice ; where, in German, the second accusative 
 is construed with a preposition. Such are the verbs, to ap- 
 point, to choose, to declare, and the like : for example, (£y i|l umt 
 3)0C'tCV gfqtftCbP IDOr'fcCH, He has been made a doctor ; (£l* iff 
 JUttt SHtdytiT cvnannt' mor/fcen. He has been appointed judge ; 
 &r ttttf'fcc fuv ci'tten ©pt£/(>ubcn crtldvt', He was declared a 
 thief. Here the prepositions Jtt and fur, are required, while in 
 English the nominative case is sufficient. Sometimes the verb 
 Utj'Vtn, to teach, is joined with a double accusative, in the 
 active voice ; as, je'man&Cll SDUiftf' IcfyTCU, to teach a person 
 musick. The dative also is used with the verb (d)TCU — ei'UCltt 
 ct'n>a£ ittyttn, to teach something to a person. 
 
 3. The reflective verbs are followed by a nominative, aftej 
 
226 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 ate, or tt)ic, as : for example, Q;r bctrctgt' fid) ate ein VCdjt'; 
 fdjaffcnci* SOTamt, He conducts himself as an honest man ; Qstr 
 
 jeidynet fid) ate cin gu'tec ©ofoat' ans, He distinguishes him- 
 self as a good soldier. But it must be observed, that this 
 nominative case is not governed by the reflective verb. The 
 phrase is elliptical, and at full length, would be, (£tr betrdgt 7 
 fid), ate cin fcdaffcbajfencv SDlann fid) bctvac\t', He conducts 
 himself, as an honest man conducts himself; £r £Ctd)'net fid) 
 au$, ate cin gu'ta ©ol&af fid) autf'jeictjnct, He distinguishes 
 
 himself, as a good soldier distinguishes himself. The same 
 takes place after verbs which are not reflective; as, 2)(T ftna'bc 
 fd)VCtbt ttHC Cin SOTamt, The boy writes as a man ; for S)er 
 Stm'bt fdjveibt, vok cin SDTann fcbreibt, The boy writes as a 
 man writes. If the case be referred to the reflective verb, it 
 must be the accusative : for example, (£r. £Ctgt fid) ate ci'llCtt 
 tftdyttgcn gel&'fjewn; He shows himself an able general. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Although he seems 7 to 5 be 6 a 1 man 2 of 3 talent 4 , he 9 will 8 
 never become 3 an 1 artist 2 , but remain 3 a 1 bungler 2 . 
 
 He was at first called 4 a 1 great 2 man 3 , but afterward insult- 
 ed 3 (as) a 1 villain 2 . 
 
 By the mark (which) they put 4 upon 1 this 2 pawn 3 , they 6 
 made 5 him a knight. 
 
 He first 3 conducted 1 himself 2 toward others as an unprin- 
 cipled man, and then 2 treated 1 himself 3 as his bitterest 
 enemy. 
 
 although, obglcid)' villain, SJerbrecb'ei*, m. 
 
 talent, 2ln'(a,qe, /• C. to insult, fd)Cl'tcn, irr. 
 
 to seem, fd)Ct'ncn. by, burd). (Ace.) 
 
 never nic'mate. mark, SHerf'jcidjcn, «. 3. a. a. 
 
 artist, ^unjVlcr, m. upon, an. (Dat.) 
 
 to become, mcv'bcn. pawn, 35au'cv, m - 3. a. C. 
 
 but, fon't>crn. to put, an'brmgen, mix. 
 
 bungler, ©tnm'pct', m. to make, mad)'cn. 
 
 to remain, bfei'bcn. knight, @pt*ing'cv. 
 
 at first, jttcrjt'. to conduct one's self, fid) bc- 
 
 great, gUOS. fttt'gCJt, irr. 
 
 to call, nen'nen, mix. first, juerjV, 
 
 afterward, nad)'l)Cl\ toward, gc'gcit. (Ace.) 
 
CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 227 
 
 others, an'&cve. then, fcann. 
 
 unprincipled, geroiffenfoS. bitter, bit'tcr. 
 
 to treat, betyan'fceln. enemy, §cint>, m. 3. b. 6. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 The Genitive case is governed, 
 
 1. By verbs which in English are generally followed by the 
 preposition of; as, an'ffagCU/ to accuse of; befcltv'fcn, to be 
 in need of, (sometimes construed with the accusative case) ; 
 fcefdjur&tgen, to accuse of, to charge with ; bevatt'ben, to rob ; 
 liberie' ben, to disburden ; tt)Ut''&igen, to deign, to think worthy 
 of. The thing that we are accused of, in need of, charged 
 with, robbed of, freed from, thought worthy of, is put in the 
 genitive case, and the person in the accusative : for example, 
 je'man&eu t>e£ SDtov'Dctf an'flagen, to accuse a person of mur- 
 der ; je'maufccn feci* 33crvat()cvci' befdnil'Mgen, to charge a 
 person with treachery ; jc'mau&CU fct'ucS 33cvm&'gen$ bevau'* 
 ben, to rob a person of his fortune; jc'tttanfccn fcer 207u'tjc 
 uberfyc'ben, to free a person from trouble; jc'ttiailfcCU gvo'fev 
 (£t)'vt Wuv'Mgcil/ to think a person worthy of great honor. 
 
 2. The following take the genitive case of the thing, and 
 the accusative of the person : but they may also be placed in 
 some other construction ; geroafy'ren, to grant ; CUtbld'fcn, to 
 strip ; entfaffen, to dismiss ; entla'fcen, to disburden ; ent(e'= 
 tHgen, to free from, to acquit, to disencumber;" cntfct'jCtt, to 
 displace; ubevfub'ren or iibcvwci'jcn, to convict ; nbeqen'gen, 
 to convince : V>crflcl)'crn, to assure ; twwet'fcn, to banish. For 
 example : je'manfcen fet'ne6 ^JOBun'fefjcS gewafy'ren, to grant to 
 a person his wish, thU which he wishes : ci'nen £D?aiui fet'ne£ 
 2lm'tet? entfet'jen, to discharge a man from his office; ftrf) 
 Ci'liet* $a|i entle'fcigen, to disencumber one's self of a burden; 
 fren @d)iif&igen fei'nes 33crbved)'en£ ubevfub'ven, to convict a 
 guilty person of his crime ; 3d) Vcvftdj'cvc bid) inci'nev gmtnt>'= 
 fdjaft, I assure thee of my friendship. Those beginning with 
 ent and ft'bev, may be construed with the preposition tUMl, and 
 the dative ; as, je'manDen fcOlt fci'nct* iajt cntfa'&cu, to free a 
 person from his burden; je'manfcen l>on fet'nem Sien'jle enttaf-- 
 fen, to dismiss a person from his office; je'mcuifcen Von fci'nem 
 3frr'tl)umc ftberjen'gcn, to convince a person of his error, 
 ©cro&lj'vcn, and fcevficl/cvn, are more frequently joined with 
 
228 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 the dative of the person, and the accusative of the thing ; as, 
 3d) gcrcafy'fC &il* fcci'nc 23it'tC, I grant (to) you your request ; 
 3d) \>ct*ftcl)'cve CS Mr, I assure (it to) you. 33evfid)'ent is like- 
 wise combined with the preposition X>0\\ ; as, %d) kilt fcon l>exr 
 @ad)'e t)CVJld)'cvt, I am assured of the thing. — 33clel)'ven, has 
 the genitive of the thing, in the expression, je'manfccn ci'ne£ 
 fccf'fevn bcUtyvcw, to inform a person of what is better, to set 
 him right. But commonly feotl is made use of — (£r t)<Xt mid) 
 
 Von fcev @ad)-'c biltfytt'. 
 
 3. Several reflective verbs are construed with the genitive 
 case of the thing. Such are, fid) an'mafcn, to claim ; as, ftd) 
 Ci'neS %i'ttl$ an'mafcn, to claim a title (more frequently with 
 
 the accusative, fid) ct'nen %i'Ui an'mafcn) ; fid) (ci'ncr @ad/c) 
 an'nc^men, to interest one's self in a thing ; fid) bcDcnf'Ctt, 
 to consider; fid) beftn'ncn, to think upon; ftd) bet>ic'ncn, to 
 make use of; fid) bcge'bcn, to resign, to give up ; fid) frcmad)'; 
 tigen, fid) bcmei'jtcnt, to make one's self master of a thing, to 
 gain possession of it; ftd) Clttfyal'tcn, to abstain ; fid) cntfd)la^ 
 gen, to get rid of a thing ; fid) Cntftn'nen, to recollect ; fid) 
 evte'men, to have mercy, to have compassion ; fid) CVUt'ncw, 
 to remember ; ftd) Ct*tt)ct)'rcn, to resist ; ftd) fmt'en, to rejoice 
 in, to enjoy ; fid) gctvo'jtcn, to hope for with confidence ; ftd) 
 tubmen, to boast of; ftd) fd)d'mcn, to be ashamed ; fid) nntcr-' 
 fang'Clt, Wltewnn'fccn, to venture on, to undertake ; ftd) fcctrfc'; 
 |)Cn, to be aware of; ftd) iKt'gcm, to refuse.* Also some im- 
 personate ; as, (£6 vcitt or gct'CltV mid), I repent ; SUlid) jam'mct't, 
 I pity, am sorry for ; &$ fccriangt' mid), I desire ; Sj? i OtxiXft)t^t , 
 ftd) (fcet 9)tu't)C,) It is worth (the trouble). Many of these 
 verbs also admit other cases and prepositions. 
 
 4. The verbs fcin, to be, and nxr'frCU, to become, have the 
 genitive case after them, in some phrases ; as, t>Cf SJiCl'nnng 
 fcin, to be of opinion ; ^it'tcnt? fcin, to purpose ; ipan'fcelS 
 ci'nig tKV'fccn, to agree upon a bargain. 
 
 5. The following govern either the genitive, or the accusa- 
 
 * The reflective, or reciprocal pronoun, in most of these 
 verbs, is in the accusative case : an'mafcn has it in the dative 
 when it is construed with the accusative of the thing ; as, 3d) 
 ma'fC mtV t>ic£ an, This I pretend to. 
 
' 
 
 CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 229 
 
 tive, the former being more usual with some of them, and the 
 latter with others ; ad)' ten, to mind, to care about ; bcfclVfcit, 
 to want; fccgelj'ren, to desire ; entbety'VCU, to want, to be with- 
 out ; cvro&fy'ucu, to mention; gcuic'fen, to enjoy; pjU'gen, to 
 foster, to take care of; fdjO'UCll, to spare ; fpot'tcn, to mock ; 
 fcergeffcn, to forget ; roav'tCU, to attend to, to take care of; as, 
 fei'nc£ 2Im'tcS wat'ttn, to attend to one's office. — (£ct>cn£'en, 
 
 to remember, to think of, has the genitive after it, and some- 
 times the preposition an with the accusative. 
 
 The combination of the genitive case with verbs was for- 
 merly more frequent, than it is at the present day. It is found 
 in old writings after many verbs, which now take other cases, 
 or are followed by the prepositions. For instance, to express 
 a part of a thing, the mere genitive was put, where a preposi- 
 tion is now more commonly employed ; as, 2>f} t>c6 23vo'&C£, Eat 
 of the bread ; ^rtnf'e t>e$ QOBci'neS, Drink of the wine; Stimm 
 t>C$ (Bctrct'fcCi?/ Take of the corn. In modern language it 
 would commonly be, 3g von fc>em SBvo'Dc, ^rinf'e x>on fccm 
 SBei'tte. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 He is charged 3 (with) (the 1 ) ingratitude 2 and accused 3 of 
 (the 1 ) slander 2 , and no one takes pity on him, to 4 free 5 him 1 
 (from) his 2 imprisonment 3 . 
 
 Deprived 4 of 1 his 1 former 2 friends 3 , he 6 finds 5 no lawyer 
 who will 4 engage 3 in 3 his 1 cause 2 . 
 
 While I mention 7 his 1 good 2 deeds 3 in 4 which 4 we 5 rejoice 6 , 
 I 9 am 8 not willing to 7 spare 8 his 1 errors 2 of 3 which 3 he 4 is 6 
 convicted 5 . 
 
 I (do) not 2 recollect 1 the circumstances which you men- 
 tioned. 
 
 Give up the power which you have 2 assumed 1 . 
 
 We (do) not 4 want 1 your 2 services 3 . 
 
 ingratitude, fcic Un'&an?fcar= to free, entte'btgen. 
 
 Hit, f. former, cental ig. 
 
 to charge, befd)td'fci,qen. to deprive, bei'AU'frfu. 
 
 slander, SBcvfaum'&img, /. to find, ftlt'fceft. 
 
 to accuse, an'ffagen. a lawyer, ciu §Kcc()t6'gcf carter, 
 
 no one, nic'ttiant*. cause, @ad)'c, f. 
 
 to take pity, fid) crfcar'men. to engage in, fid) an'ncbmen, 
 imprisonment, J^aft, f. irr. 
 
 20 
 
230 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 I will, id) Witt, mix. to recollect, ftd) mn'ncrn. 
 
 while, roal/veilb. circumstance, *Um'ftant>, m. 
 deed, $l)at, /. 1. t>. 3. b. b. 
 
 to rejoice, fid) ffeu'cn. to mention, get>en£'en, mix. 
 
 to mention, tXXO&fynttl* to give up, fid) bege'ben, irr. 
 
 to be willing, QjDideng feitt. power, (StvoaW, f. 
 
 error, SScrtl'nmg, /. 1. fc. to assume, ftd) au'mafcil. 
 
 to be convicted, ftben&ic'fim to want, betmv'fen. 
 
 fciu. service, £>m\\V, m. 3. b. b. 
 to spare, fcfjo'itflt. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 The Dative case is used, 
 
 1. After transitive verbs, which, at the same time, govern 
 the accusative. The accusative is then called the case of 
 the thing, and the dative the case of the person : for exam- 
 ple, ©e'bcn @ie t>em SDfan'ne bas 23ncb, Give the book to the 
 man. £>em SDian'nc is the dative case of the person, and 
 fra£ 25ttd)/ the accusative of the thing. — The following tran- 
 sitives take the dative of the person ; ge'ben, to give ; net)'; 
 men, to take from a person ; fa'gett, to say, to tell ; (V$atyUl\, 
 to tell, to relate; ant'roovten, to answer; bring'en, to bring; 
 befeb'Iett, to command; bqatyUn, to pay; f of ten, to cost; 
 btC'tCJl/ to offer; bot'gen, to lend; Ui't)(\\, to lend; glatt'ben, 
 to believe ; gon'nen, not to envy, not to grudge ; £ UVgett, to 
 complain of, to state in the form of complaint ; lie'feni, to 
 furnish ; lei'jten, to show, to render, as, SMen'jte Ici'jUn, to 
 render services; et'faffen, to remit; evune'Dent, to return, to 
 give in turn, to reply; gebie'ten, to command; gelo'ben, to 
 
 vow ; erlan'ben, to permit ; geftat'ten, to allow ; wioevra'tfyen, 
 to dissuade from : also verbs compounded with ab ; as, ab'bitten, 
 to beg pardon, ci'ncm ei'nen ftctyin ab'bitten, to beg pardon 
 of a person for a fault; ab'forfcevn, to demand from; abutting: 
 en, to force from ; ab'ratfyen, to dissuade ; ab'fd)lagen, to re- 
 fuse ; ab'fpvedjen, to give sentence against a person, to deny, 
 ei'nem et'roas ab'fpvedjm; flb'faufcn, to buy of: some verbs with 
 an; as, an'bieten, to offer ; an'rattyen, to advise; an'benten, to 
 signify ; an'fciebten, to attribute falsely ; an'^eigen, to an- 
 nounce ; and others : some with bei ; as, bei'bvingen, to impart ; 
 bei'legen, to attribute ; bei'ltieflcn, to impute: some with ent ; 
 entveiffen, to snatch away ; entjie'fyen, to take away, &c. : 
 
CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 231 
 
 some with ttn'fcCV; as, roifcClTvVtfycn, to dissuade. To these may 
 be added the reflective verbs, fid) an'mafcn, to claim, to pre- 
 tend to ; fid) ein'btlfccn, to fancy, to imagine : as, 3fd) ma'fc mif 
 tax %i'td an, I pretend to the title ; %d) biCbe mil* t>cn Um'-~ 
 jtanD cin, I imagine the circumstance. After fid) an'mafcn, 
 the genitive of the thing may be put, instead of the accusative 
 (Rule II. 3.), and then the person is put in the accusative; as, 
 
 3d) ma'fc mid) bes Xi'Ute an. 
 
 2. After intransitive verbs; as, an'fyangen, to adhere to; 
 
 an'liegen, to apply to, to solicit; gefycVren, and an'gcfy6ucn, to 
 belong to ; be gcg'nen, to meet, to happen to ; bef om'mcn, to 
 agree with, said of things that refer to health, sometimes 
 also used in a figurative sense ; befcov'jieben, to impend ; 
 bet'fallcn, to agree with a person in opinion ; bet'bommen, to 
 come near, to get at ; bci'pjttd)tcn, to coincide with in opinion ; 
 bet'ftefyen, to assist; fcanf'en, to thank ; bie'nen, to serve ; fero'; 
 fyen, to threaten ; entflic'fyen, entge'tyen, to escape ; cntfprccb'cn, 
 
 to answer to, to correspond to; and other compounds with 
 Cltt ; ein'fallen, to occur to the thoughts, or the memory ; 
 cin'gefyen, to enter the mind, to be understood; cin'rommen, 
 to enter the thoughts, to enter the mind; ctn'lcud)tcn, to be 
 evident, to appear; fol'gcn, to follow; frofy'nen, to do ser- 
 vice without pay ; gcbltfy'vcn, to be due ; gcbci'fycn, to suc- 
 ceed, to prosper; gcbov'ebcn, to obey; gefal'lcn, to please; 
 gera'ctyen, geiing'en, to succeed ; gleiVben, to be like ; gejie'; 
 
 men, to become, to befit ; bd'fcn, to help ; llltt'jCU, to be use- 
 ful, to be of use ; ob'licgen, (ci'ner ©acb'c), to apply one's 
 self to a thing — also (as an impersonal) to be incumbent 
 upon ; nntcrltc'gen, to be overcome, to yield ; feba'ben, to 
 hurt; febei'nen, to seem; fd)mct'd)C(n, to flatter; jhut'mt, to 
 check, to restrain ; tVOt'jcn, to bid defiance ; rPCt/l'Clt, to 
 check ; roei'cljen, ant?'tt>cid)en, to give way, to yield ; fid) tt?U 
 l>evfct'$cn, to oppose, to resist; rc>tt>CV|U't)en, to resist; rood's 
 roollen, to wish well ; jn'fallcn, to fall to ; jn'ty&rcn, to listen 
 to, to hear ; ju'gcfyovcn, to belong to ; Jtt'fOtttttten, to become, 
 to be suitable, to belong to, to be due ; jlt'l'Cbcn, to speak to, 
 to exhort ; and other compounds with Jit : also these imper- 
 sonals ; (££ afy'ltct, or afm'bct mil', I have a misgiving, I fore- 
 see ; &$ btiiibt', It pleases ; £>? gcbrtcfjf, It is wanting ; (£$ grant 
 mit, I am fearful ; £t? trdumt mil*, I dream ; (£t? fdiei'nct mil*, 
 or £s f6mmt mil* fcor, It seems to me; <£$ fd)iriu'Dcft mif, I 
 
232 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 am giddy ; QsS fdjatt'&cvt mix, I shudder ; &g fcevfdjfagt' mil* 
 nid)tt?, It makes no difference to me. 
 
 3. After some verbs which may also be properly used with 
 the accusative : an'? ommcn, to come upon — SDiitr, or mid), 
 t'ommt §ltvd)t an, Fear comes upon me ; 90itv, or mid), t>aud)t, 
 It seems to me (the accusative is more usual) ; 5t)tiv, or mid), 
 t'hlt, I loathe. J^ei'fcn, to bid, to desire, occurs with the da- 
 tive of the person, and the accusative of the thing — c $Btt tyat 
 Ml* t>a£ gefyft'fcn ? Who desired you to do that ? but the person 
 may also be put in the accusative, 933cv fyat bid) t>a£ gcfyei'fcu ? 
 The same may be said of lefy'ren, to teach, which either is 
 followed by two accusatives, one ,of the thing, and the other 
 of the person ; or by the dative of the person and the accu- 
 sative of the thing. 
 
 Observation. The dative expresses advantage, or disad- 
 vantage, and answers to the English prepositions to and for; 
 as, 3)ir fclnn'net t>ie ©on'ne, For thee the sun shines; 2)tt* 
 laciycn Die gcl'fccr, To thee the fields smile; £>ir fyeu'len t)ic 
 QODin'fcC, To thee (against thee) the winds howl. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 • 
 
 I did for him every thing {which) he commanded 2 me 1 . 
 
 I told him so. I advised him to 3 resist 4 their 1 flattery 2 , and 
 dissuaded him from 4 lending 5 them 1 any 2 thing 3 . 
 
 (Do) not 3 refuse 1 them 2 what they demand 2 from 1 you 1 , if 
 it belongs 2 to 1 them 1 . 
 
 You cannot 3 get 5 at 4 him 2 , as long as she defends 2 Kim 1 . 
 
 You will meet with (it will meet you) what you have 2 de- 
 served 1 ; it will do 3 you 1 good 2 . 
 
 I apply myself to this business, although it is net incumbent 
 upon me. 
 
 It seemed to me as if all that he related 2 to 1 you 1 , was aimed 
 at me. 
 
 I fancied it to myself, although I shuddered 4 at 1 the 2 
 thought. 3 
 
 to do, (ci'jicn. so, t>aS, (dem. pron.) 
 
 every thing, allet?. to advise, va'tfynt, irr. 
 
 to command, bcfefy'lcn, irr. flattery, @d)mcid)cfei', /. 1. t>. 
 
 to tell, fa'acn, to resist, wit>cv|U'I}cn. 
 
CH. 5. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 233 
 
 to dissuade, ab'ratfycn, irr. to do good, rt>of?f befom'men. 
 
 any thing, tl''gent> Ct'tt?a6. to apply one's self, ob'ltcgCit. 
 
 to lend, (ci'fycn. business, (Scfdwft', n. 3. b. 6. 
 
 to refuse, fcerroci'gmi. although, nncrrofyh 
 
 to demand, ab'foDCVU. to be incumbent, ob'Iicqcil. 
 
 if, »enn. (See Book II. Ch. 5. § 2. F.) 
 
 to belong, gefyfc'vcn. to seem, fc()ci'ucn, irr. 
 
 I can, id) faun, mix. as if, a(S ot\ 
 
 to get at, bei'fommcn. to relate, n$al}'U\\. 
 
 as long as, fo (ang <l{$, or to be aimed at, gel'tCU, irr. 
 
 folaug'. to fancy, ciu'bd&en. 
 
 to defend, Wrtfyei'fcigClt. at, t)0l\ (Dat.) 
 
 I meet, c$ begcg'net miv. thought, (8c&ant'e, m. 3. c. c. 
 
 to deserve, Vev&te'nen. I shudder, mil* fd)au't>ert. 
 
 RULE IV. 
 
 The Accusative is governed by active verbs ; as, 3>dj lic'bc 
 tttCiU 33a'ter(au&, I love my country. 
 
 Neuter verbs also may sometimes be used actively, and gov- 
 ern an accusative ; as, (Si'ucn gu'tcit ftampf fam'pfnt, To fight 
 a good fight ; where Mm'pfcn, is joined with the accusative, 
 though it is generally used without any case. 
 
 There are verbs that take a double accusative ; as, bei'fen, 
 to call ; ncu'ucn, to name; fdjcftcn, to abuse; fdnm'pfni, to call 
 by an opprobrious name. For example : %d) tyci'fe (or ncn'ltc) 
 it)U ct'ncil £effcett, I call him a hero ; (£r fdnlt (or fcfjimpfte) 
 itjtl Ci'ncn S5ctnVgcv, He called him a cheat. To which may 
 be added fra'gcn, to ask, as, (Si'ncn Ct'vrnU" fra'gcn, To ask a per- 
 son something ; but here it is as well to make use of a pre- 
 position ; as, (£t'ncn um Ct'rcaS fra'gcn, To ask a person about 
 something. Of Icty'rcn, to tench, and fyci'fcn, to command, 
 which sometimes have a double accusative, mention has al- 
 ready been made (Rule in. 3.) 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 He lived a hero's life, and died a hero's death. 
 He calls himself a self-taught (man), but others denominate 
 him a bold empiric. 
 
 to live, (c'ben. to die, jlcr'bcn, irr. 
 
 hero's life, Qd'MlxUimi, n. 3. hero's death, £cf fcCtttOfc/ m. 3. 
 a. a, b. 6. 
 
 20* 
 
234 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 to call, lten'nett. to denominate, fyei'fm. 
 
 self-taught, ftlb\V$tUt)Vt. bold, bcvrce'gCtt. 
 
 but, a'bcv. empiric, Qsmpi'rifef m. 3. a. 0. 
 others, (inhere. 
 
 § 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
 
 A. Indicative Mood. 
 
 The Indicative Mood generally stands after the subject, and 
 before the object. 
 
 Except, 
 
 1. Those instances, mentioned in Book II. Ch. 2. § 2. Rules 
 i. and n. 
 
 2. When the verb must be at the end, that is to say, not 
 only after the subject, but also after the object, and all words 
 connected with it. This is necessary, 
 
 (1.) When the member of the sentence, to which the verb 
 belongs, commences with a relative pronoun, as, t>ev, roel'djCV/ 
 TOW, VoaS ; or a relative adverb, as, tttbct*', from whence ; 
 fcavum'/ for what ; roarum', n>c$fyafb' or rocsfyal'bcn, rccsrce'gcu, 
 for which reason, for which, wherefore ; * V>0U IMn'UCU/ from 
 whence ; \T>Q, where ; and the compounds of it>0, as, reckon', 
 linger/, roomif, roomtS', &c. Examples : 2)er ©cfevifc'jteUev 
 \\\ in fdjdt'jcn, TOel'c()cr t>ie SSefSi'&mmg tcr QBafyr'fyeit ^tm 
 
 *$tt>CC'f?e fyat, That writer is to be esteemed, who has the pro- 
 motion of truth for his object. %<[) ten'tte ei'uen £D?vinn, t>n 
 fid) mit SKecfct mei'nen grcunb nennt, I know a man who justly 
 calls himself my friend. ^Ba* fcClU iaf'tCl* Uttt) fccf'fctt Stct'jcn 
 folgt, beret'tet fid) ci'ne fcbmerj'ttdjcSKcu'c, He who follows vice 
 and its charms, prepares for himself a painful repentance. 
 
 * The signification of these words as relatives, must be dis- 
 tinguished from the other meanings which they bear, either as 
 adverbs or conjunctions. 3>a'l)CV, thence, therefore ; fta'rmtt/ 
 for that reason, therefore ; roantm'/ IBCSroe'ciCH, why, for what 
 reason, cause the subject to be placed after the verb. 
 
CH. 5 ^ 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 235 
 
 The verb, in the foregoing examples, is at the end of that 
 member of the sentence, to which the relative pronouns, 
 WCfdjer/ t>CV, roeu, belong. It is thus with the adverbs alluded 
 to : for instance, 3)cv Dxt, roo id) tjtu'tt met'ncn greuno fat), 
 The place where to-day I saw my friend. ^OBofytn' man oatf 
 2(u'ge nut roen'Det, evblidt' man nidjte ate GHeno, Wherever 
 one turns one's eve, one perceives nothing but misery. The 
 verbs fafy, and tr>CU / t»Ct, are put last, in consequence of tt)0, and 
 
 roofytn'. 
 
 (2) The verb is put at the end, after interrogatives 
 (whether pronouns, adverbs, or conjunctions), when they 
 form indirect questions. Examples : (Si* frdgt mid), reel* t>ic'; 
 fen 90?ov'gcn bet 3»t)'nen roar, He asks me who was with you 
 this morning. QOBiffen @ie, n&el'cljes ^ncl) tx tyeu'te in bem 
 ©iiv'tcn (&€ ? Do you know what book he read to-day in the 
 
 garden ? ©a'gen @ie mix, roas fftr ei'nen (Bruno er fur fein 
 
 Zlus'Meibcn atl'gibt, Tell me what ground he alleges for his 
 staying out. 3Ccr, mefdjer, rOaS fat* eilt, interrogative pro- 
 nouns, serve here to form indirect questions,* and the verb 
 stands last. 3d) ton ntcl)t fa'gen, ton e$ fid) ju'getragen l)at, I 
 cannot tell how it has happened ; %d) moclj'tc ttnf'fen, Ob r-te'le 
 
 tin'ti bet fet'jigev fyeiffer 'iBit'ecruna, auf tern gel'oc fein ton 1 * 
 
 ©en, I should like to know, whether, during the present hot 
 weather, many people will be in the field. 333te, and ob, 
 constitute indirect questions, and the verb is at the end. 
 
 (3) After conditional, causal, and consecutive conjunc- 
 tions. These are: ate, t>a, bettor', t'ift, bte, bafevn'; OamiC (in 
 order that) ; Dafj, auf bag, (in order that) ; falls, tin §al'(e, (in 
 case that) ; gletdwie' ; intern' (since, because) ; nactj&cm' ; 
 nUU (when it signifies since, after — DTun CS eitt'Utat gefclje'tyCtt 
 ijr, Since it once has been done); ob, obfd)OU', obgleid)', ob- 
 WOW, frit, and fcitOem' ; fin'temat (since, whereas) ; fo 
 (when it means, if) ; fo ba(b, or fo ba(t> ate ; fo lang'e or fo 
 lang'e ate; fo wit, or fo roett ate; rodfy'renb, rodfy'reno bag; 
 
 * It is probably understood by the reader, what is meant 
 by indirect questions : but there will remain no doubt, if we 
 change some of the foregoing into direct questions, to show 
 the difference, viz. 3£rv war bn %ty\m\ ? Who was with you* 
 SBet'djeS SSud) fa$ er ? What book did he read I 
 
236 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [bOOK II. 
 
 rcetl ; mm, wmsUity, rocnnfdjon' ; wie, roicttofyf, too- 
 
 fern', tt?0 md)t. To these is to be added the comparative 
 conjunction je, which, beginning the prior member, removes 
 the verb to the end. Example : % ( £ W t>CU 2tuf ntfyt' in t>Ci* 
 ^tat>t b e m e l* f' t e, When he perceived the tumult in the 
 city; 35 e Do v' id) oni 3£alD emtd)t' fyat'te, Before I had 
 reached the wood ; b i $ oie ©on'ne Me evjtavv'ten gcl'oer auf - 
 
 IdfCJl 10 1 1* 0, till the sun shall loosen the congealed fields ; 2) a 
 Oct' (BcfanD'te in Sou'DOU an'fam, When the ambassador ar- 
 rived in London ; 3 e lano/er oev Sftnfi'fer Me'fe (Se'genjUnOc 
 b e t r a d)' t e t e, Iff' to mefyv benmn'oerte cr fie, The more the 
 artist contemplated these objects, the more he admired them. 
 
 By the force of the aforesaid conjunctions, the verb is put 
 at the end of the member of the sentence to which it be- 
 longs, and sometimes even after a subordinate member, con- 
 nected with it. For example : £>a id) oen SHann, rocl'djer fo 
 C'Oel geoadjt', Cfy're HUD lie'be, Since I honor and love the 
 man, who has thought so nobly. In this, the principal mem- 
 ber is, t>a id) oeu 90?ann efy've uuO tie'be, with which is con- 
 nected a subordinate or secondary member, n>el'd)Cl* fo e'Oel 
 9CDad)t', and the verb of the former is placed after this. It 
 need not necessarily be so ; for the sentence might also run 
 thus, 33a id) Den Miami efy've tmt> lic'be, roel'djcr fo e'oef ge- 
 t>ad)t'. It depends upon euphony and perspicuity, whether the 
 one or the other is to be preferred. 
 
 The same principles apply to the infinitive, with the preposi- 
 tion ju. The verb, influenced by the above conjunctions, may 
 be put after the infinitive ; as, QGDeil id) mid) uid)t JU ^m^'m 
 rofttt'fdjc, Because I do not like to quarrel ; or before it, ^XBed 
 id) ntd)t roun'fdjc, tniel) ju janf'en. When the infinitive, with 
 
 $U, has other words belonging to it, for instance, cases of de- 
 clension which it governs, it is preferable, on account of the 
 extent which it then assumes, to place it with its dependent 
 words after the verb, lest the sentence should become heavy 
 and intricate. Ex. 33a id) nnmfciyte, a(1emei'ue@ad) / en fobalV 
 ate mSs'Itd) in @id)'evfyett ju bvina/en, As I wished to bring 
 
 all my things in safety, as soon as possible ; here the sentence 
 would be rendered heavy by placing the verb ttntnfd)'te, after 
 the infinitive bving'eit. 
 
 The infinitive, without the preposition £U, is immediately 
 governed by the verb, as much as a case of declension ; and 
 the verb, under these circumstances, must stand after it ; as, 
 
 VBcnn n oas *3ud) fe'f cu m ^t If he wil1 read the book ' 
 
CH. 5. § 2.] 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 237 
 
 where it would be less natural to let the infinitive follow after 
 the verb, as, ^OBeiltt CV rotll MS 95 ltd) lefeit. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Whoever has a good conscience. He who understands it 
 The color with which the wall is covered. 
 Do you know what is meant by it? 
 Nobody knows whom he aims at. 
 As soon as we had recovered ourselves. 
 Unless all this be a delusion. 
 
 The more he saw of the country, so much the more he 
 disliked the thought of returning. 
 
 He is safe if he will follow my advice. 
 
 whoever, roer tlltt*. 
 
 good, $ut. 
 
 conscience, (Sermf fen, n. 3. a. 
 
 he who, roev. 
 
 to understand, fcCVfU'fyctt. 
 
 color, gar 'be, /. 
 
 with which, rDOtttit'. 
 
 wall, <2Bant>, f. 
 
 to cover, ttbfVjte'fyett, irr. 
 
 to know, rtnffeil, mix. 
 
 by it, &amit'. 
 
 to mean, mci'ncn. 
 
 nobody, nic'maut*. 
 
 at, cutf. (Ace.) 
 
 to aim, ab'jtclctt. 
 
 as soon as, fo bait) al£. 
 
 to recover one's self, fid) er< 
 (jo'ten. 
 
 unless, roofeni' ltid)t. 
 
 delusion, idw'f djimg, /- 
 
 the more, je nutjV. 
 
 of, bou. (Dat.) 
 
 country, $ant>, n. 3. b. e. 
 
 to see, fc'fyctl, irr. 
 
 so much the more, t>cf to mel)r. 
 
 I dislike, mil* mtSfdllt', irr. 
 
 thought, (Scfcauf'e, m. 3. c. C. 
 
 to return, JUVUrf't'cfyim 
 
 safe, ft'dKl*. 
 
 advice, SKatb, m. 3. b. 
 
 to follow, fol'gctt. {Dat.) 
 
 B. Subjunctive Mood. 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood, as to position, is subject to the 
 same rules, as the indicative. When it denotes a wish, or 
 surprise, it often begins the sentence ; as, (Sc'be e£ feet' J£>im'= 
 tticl! May Heaven grant it! STOcfe'te fcic ©ou'nc t>od) fd)Ci'ncn ! 
 Oh, that the sun would shine ! J^dt'tc id)S t>od) uid)t gegfauftt', 
 I should not have thought it ! This is always the case when 
 the conditional conjunction, rtfCtttl/ if, is omitted : ^a'l'C id) 
 fytcv geroc'fen, Had I been here ; for 9Bcnu id) fyicr geroe'fen 
 Vofr'Vt, If I had been here. 
 
238 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 C. Imperative Mood. 
 
 The Imperative precedes the personal pronoun, which is 
 the subject, io'bt t>U, praise thou ; lo'be tX, let him praise ; 
 io'btn fte, let them praise. 
 
 D. Infinitive Mood. 
 
 The Infinitive comes after the object, and the other words 
 of a sentence, except the indicative and subjunctive, when 
 these, for reasons assigned before, are put last. Examples: 
 St* nmnfdjt bie iatci'nifdje ©pva'dje gninb'Iid) in lev'ucn, He 
 wishes to learn the Latin language accurately, SDic'fcl* SDTauit 
 fann Sng'lifd), gvanjo'ftfd), £>cutfd), unb DcvfciW&ene an'bere 
 ©pra'cfeen *00U SttVO'pa VC'tm, This man can speak English, 
 French, German, and several other tongues of Europe, let'* 
 ttttt and ve'bcil are infinitives. 
 
 This rule affects the future tense, because it is com- 
 posed of an infinitive and the third auxiliary. The infini- 
 tive, here, is placed in the same manner, as in the exam- 
 ples above stated, that is to say, after the object and other 
 
 words ; as, 3d) roer'be mov'geu Me (Se'gcnb befe'fjen, I shall 
 to-morrow take a view of the country. SSefc'fycn is the in- 
 finitive, belonging to the auxiliary XOCt'bt, with which it 
 constitutes the future tense ; but this connexion does not al- 
 ter its position in the sentence. — When the future in the in- 
 dicative or subjunctive mood must be placed at the end, on 
 account of some preceding word, which requires that colloca- 
 tion, the infinitive that is used in forming the future must be 
 put before the auxiliary ; as, 93?an glaubt, baft ber Stai'fet 
 
 xxiit t>m gtranjo'fm gvie'&en mactVen roef'be, It is thought that 
 
 the Emperor will make peace with the French. Here the 
 infinitive mcKlVen, is before the auxiliary tKt'be. When the 
 future tense of the passive voice stands in this predicament, 
 the auxiliary verb, in the indicative or subjunctive, is often 
 put before the infinitive, which is done to prevent, by means 
 of the intervening participle, the immediate repetition of 
 roev'ben : for example, 3>d) evroav'te, H§ *oerfd)te'beuc @ad)'cn 
 atad) ttu'fevm Jpau'fe rocr'ben gebt*ad)t' focr'ben, I expect, that 
 several things will be brought to our house. 
 
 Sometimes two infinitives stand together, one of which 
 governs the other ; then the governing one should be put 
 
CH. 5. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 239 
 
 after that which is governed ; as, (St WOfl'tC fie U\d)t fyemn'= 
 fouuncn (affcit, He would not let them come in. Here lap = 
 fcit, the governing infinitive, is preceded by the other, fycrciil's 
 fcttuncu, which is governed. But this rule is not always ob- 
 served, as the following example proves ; (£tr tyat it)\\ fc()0U 
 mcfjr alt? jefyn'mat rattf'jfcn ijb'vni, He has been obliged more 
 than ten times to hear him — instead of ^6'1'Cll muf'fcn, which 
 is also used. 
 
 The infinitive is found, now and then, at the very begin- 
 ning of a sentence, and in that position bears a strong em- 
 phasis ; as, SCcm'men voiii id) jroav, Come, indeed, I will; a'bctr 
 fc&rci'ben fcarf ic() utcl)t, but write, I must not. 
 
 The infinitive may be employed, in a substantive capacity, 
 as the subject or object ; and is then placed accordingly. 
 
 E. Participles. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 When the participle, either present or past, is used as an 
 adjective, it has its position accordingly. It precedes the 
 noun, and follows the case it governs ; as, bie al'lc£ bde'bcn&e 
 ©Oit'ne, the all-animating sun ; fcct* Mm 23U§ gettof fene 
 23ftUm, the tree struck by lightning. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 The participle, when it stands in apposition, is put after 
 the words with which it is connected ; as, ba£ Vbud), i)0U 
 fcem ^a'tcv gcfd)vie'bcit, the book written by the father ; 2)er 
 al'te gcl&'fyerr, m'bet bto'fycnfc nod) fcbmei'djcfafc, fon'bcnt 
 t'tt'fyig bcfcfy'Ienb, jtitt'tc ben flu'fhlljv, The old general, neither 
 threatening nor flattering, but calmly commanding, quelled 
 the sedition. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 When combined with the auxiliary verbs, the past participle 
 has its place after the object and other words ; and is, there- 
 fore, generally found towards the end of the sentence. St* ijt 
 in ion'&on geroc'fen, He has been in London — ift gcroefen, the 
 participle gc»C'fcu at the end. %d) tja'be fycu'tc ba£ 25ud) ge-' 
 le'fai, I have read the book to-day — \)b'bt gcU'fCtt, St' UHVb 
 
240 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 mit 9ted)t etn gro'fer ?D?ann gencmnt', He is justly called a 
 
 great man. If the auxiliary, by the power of some pronoun or 
 conjunction, be removed to the end, the past participle 
 stands before it ; as, 2)ic Xfyb'ttn, Wl'd)l V>0U t>em 2)td)'ter. gc= 
 fdjil'&ert ltiCV'^CH, The deeds which are depicted by the poet : 
 the auxiliary TCCf'fccn, at the end, because of the pronoun 
 V0(i'd)t ; the participle, gefdnl'bevt, before it. %d) tt>ei£ t$, 
 
 roei( id) ten SDlann felbjt gefe'fyen t?abe, I know it, because I 
 
 have seen the man myself: the conjunction YOtii, removes the 
 verb tjiX'bt to the end, and the participle gefe'fyen, precedes it. 
 — When the past participle and the infinitive of an auxiliary 
 verb come together, the participle is placed before the infini- 
 tive; as, gcle'fen fya'ben, to have read; ge(tefrt' roev'fccn, to 
 be loved. Should it so happen, that the participle, the infin- 
 itive, and the verb definite, that is to say, either the indica- 
 tive or subjunctive, meet together at the end of a sentence, 
 the arrangement may either be thus, participle, infinitive, 
 indicative or subjunctive, £ftad)t>em' id) M$ 33lld) gck'fcit Ijft's 
 ben lt>ei*'t>e, After I shall have read the book ; or the verb 
 definite, may be put before the participle and infinitive, 
 
 Stad)&ein' id) t>a$ 23 ud) roev'&e gete'fen fya'ben. 
 
 Examples. 
 
 The lame courier. A much-promising commencement. 
 Three roasted apples. Let us all, hoping (for) the best, and 
 prepared for the worst, persevere in our undertaking. They 
 have accomplished their task. The plant which is describ- 
 ed by Linnaeus, is not the same. Before the clock shall have 
 ceased striking. 
 
 to be lame, fyinf'en. to prepare, faf'fen. 
 
 courier, 230'te, m. % a. in, in. (Dat.) 
 
 much, Vief. undertaking, Untewefy'men, n. 
 
 to promise, toevfprecb'en. 3. a. 
 
 commencement, Zhi'ftUlg/ m. to persevere, befyrtV'ven. 
 
 to roast, v&'ften. task, Idif'gabe, /. 
 
 apple *2ty'fef, m. 3. a. a. to accomplish, tootfcn'tCH. 
 
 let us, laffet nn$. plant, spflton'&e. 
 
 the best, fcas 93ep te. by, fcon. 
 
 to hope, fyoffen. to describe, tefd)vet'ben, irr. 
 
 for, anf. (Ace.) the same, (i>er, t>ie, t>a£) nam'* 
 
 the worst, t>a$ ©cfelimm'jte. liclx. 
 
CH. 5. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 241 
 
 before, c'fye. to cease striking, au£'fc()(a: 
 
 clock, ©(octc, f. gen, irr. 
 
 F. Compound Verbs. 
 
 Separable compound verbs have the particle separated 
 from the verb, when this is at the end of the sentence ; 
 and require it to be placed after the object and other 
 words, including even a relative or intermediate member 
 of the sentence. 3>cl) ncty'me 3(71* (Pcfcftenf' mit 2>an£' bat fait 
 (lit, I receive your present with gratitude ; verb an'ncfymcn, to 
 receive — the particle an, at the end. @ic fa'men in 2ln'fe ; 
 fyung Mc'fcr ©defe'e bait itkvcin', They soon agreed with respect 
 to this matter ; verb itfcevctn'fammcn. SUfy'men @ic M$ 
 23nd) mit, Take the book with you; verb mit'nefymen. (5r 
 fat} fcte'fe 35cge'(H , nl}citcH / trel'djc nun nidjt mefyr ju au'&ern 
 fin l), Vovau^', He foresaw these events which are now no more 
 to be altered. But the particle is generally put at the end of 
 the first part of a sentence if the latter part is merely con- 
 nected with it by a preposition ; as, Q;r fat) VOraut?', baf, fctc'fc 
 SJcgcfrcnfyeitcn crfol'gcn nntr'&cn, He foresaw that these events 
 would follow. In this sentence the particle i)0?(Ut6', before, 
 cannot stand after ronv'&cn. When the verb, in consequence 
 of a pronoun, or a conjunction, is brought to the end of the 
 sentence, the particle is not separated from it : as, 2)a id) 3fyt* 
 ©Cfcbcnf mit SDanf'fcavfait an'ne^me, As I received your 
 present with gratitude. The verb (M'ncbmc stands last, on 
 account of the conjunction M, and remains, for this reason, 
 united with the particle. 
 
 The infinitive mood, and the past participle have their place 
 after the object, and at or near the end of the sentence : 
 therefore the particle is not separated, except by JU, in the 
 infinitive, and by ge, in the past participle ; as, mit ]\l 
 netjmen, mit'genommen. $U, however, does not always ac- 
 company the infinitive. From what has been said, it ap- 
 pears, that the separation principally occurs in the indicative, 
 subjunctive, and imperative moods. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 May it serve to your advantage. 
 Praise him. 
 
 He tries to find the philosopher's stone. 
 
 21 
 
242 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 [BOOK II. 
 
 I shall now go to rest. 
 They hope that the war will be prolonged. 
 He predicts that one after the other will be arrested. 
 Why should we not 2 bid 4 him 1 go 3 . 
 He 3 indeed 4 can 2 not 5 flatter 1 , but he wishes to console. 
 Give up this plan ! Could I foreknow this ? They have 
 sent off the girl. He continued to urge him eagerly. 
 
 to, pu (Dat.) 
 
 advantage, 33ov'ff)eU, m. 3. 
 
 b. b. 
 to serve, tue'nen. 
 to praise, (o'bcn. 
 to try, fid) fcemiVfym. 
 the philosopher's stone, t)Cf 
 
 ©tein fret* c 2I3ct'fcn. 
 
 to find, jtn^cn. 
 
 to rest, £ttv SHu'tye. 
 
 to go, fid) bcge'ben. 
 
 to hope, ijof fen. 
 
 that, &a§. 
 
 war, XrtCg/ m. 
 
 to be prolonged, fid) itt fcte 
 
 Ung'e jic'fyen. 
 to predict, t>orau$'fagcn. 
 after, nad). (Dat.) 
 to arrest, fcerfyaf ten. 
 
 why, toatwn'. 
 
 I shall, id) foil, mix. 
 
 not, nid)t. 
 
 to go, ge'fyen. 
 
 to bid, fyei'fen. 
 
 to flatter, fd)mei / d)e[n. 
 
 I can, id) fann, mix. 
 
 indeed, fvei'Iid). 
 
 but, a'bev. 
 
 to wish, nntn'fdjen. 
 
 to console, tvo'jten. 
 
 to give up, aufgeben, irr. 
 
 plan, spian. 
 
 to foreknow, fcOVauS'imflen. 
 to send off, fort'fcljitfen. 
 girl, SDU&'djen, «. 3. a. a. 
 to continue, fort' faf^l'ttl/ irr. 
 eagerly, tyefttg. 
 to urge, ju'fe^en. (Dat.) 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 ARRANGEMENT. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 An adverb joined to an adjective, must always stand before 
 it ; as, fefyr gnt, very good ; nid)t fd)(ed)t, not bad. 
 
CH. 6.] SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. 243 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 When the adverb belongs to the verb, it is put after the 
 verb (unless the verb be at the end of the sentence, Book II. 
 Ch. 5. § 2. A.) and, in general, also after the object. (5l* ht- 
 tjan'Mit t>cn ®e'cicn|tan& foorttejf'ficlj, He treats the subject 
 excellently ; fcovtl'Cjf' lid) is the adverb. Such adverbs, how- 
 er, as denote time, (for example, oft, often ; fycUi'ftg, fre- 
 quently ; fycu'tC, to-day ; gcf'tevn, yesterday, and the like,) are 
 commonly placed immediately after the verb, and before the 
 object. Besides the adverb cannot, with propriety, be placed 
 after the infinitive, or past participle. Moreover, unless the 
 verb be at the end, the adverb cannot stand between the sub- 
 ject and the verb. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 For the sake of emphasis, the adverb may be removed from 
 its place towards the beginning of the sentence ; as, 3>d) f)<Vbc 
 fycu'te M$ $5ud) gele'fcn, I have to-day read the book ; which 
 makes the notion of tjtU'tt, to-day, more perceptible than, 3d) 
 tjil'bt M$ *8ud) fyeu'te gelc'fcn. This seems to be the reason 
 why adverbs implying time, are commonly placed before the 
 object : namely, they are thus rendered more distinct. But 
 to make the emphasis so evident that it cannot be mistaken, 
 the adverb should be put at the beginning; JFJcu'tC \)<\'b( id) t)a£ 
 STilS'tjont gcfc'fycn, To-day I have seen the rhinoceros, [n this 
 remark are not included the interrogative adverbs, such as, 
 rote, how; vpamt, when; l&awm', why; rOC6tt)C'gcn, wherefore; 
 H)0, where; which, as they can be placed nowhere but in 
 the beginning, derive no particular distinction from that po- 
 sition. 
 
 There are adverbs that in no place seem to be susceptible 
 of an emphasis, viz. those which express chance, probabili- 
 ty, and similar vague and undefined ideas — tucllcic'ot', per- 
 haps ; fecrmuttj'Iid), probably ; nwfyr'fcfceittUdj, very likely ; 
 and others. As no difference arises, in the purport of the 
 sentence, from their situation, they may be put any where, 
 even between the subject and the verb, where no other ad- 
 verb is permitted to stand. XHe'fcr SDTaun Incllctcbt' retro c$ 
 ttiffen, This man perhaps will know it ; ©cin S5rn'DiT &«£ 
 mutl)'lid) t)M ifyttt M$ gefefcric'ben, His brother probably has 
 
244 SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB. [BOOK II. 
 
 written that to him. If they have any effect when thus 
 transposed, it may be, that they rather give force to the 
 subject. 
 
 The negative, utcl)t, not, has its station commonly after the 
 object; as, 2)cv SJTauu tfylit fci'uC $P(ltcbt nicfot, The man does 
 not do his duty. Here the action of the verb is accompanied 
 by the negative. If it is to be particularly referred to the 
 subject, or object, or any other word, it must be put before 
 
 such word. £fttc()t SXeid^tfyum, fon'oent 3«fric^enljett mad)t 
 tic SD?cn'fd)CU glud'tid), Not wealth, but contentment makes 
 men happy. In this instance, the negative is applied to the 
 subject, and stands before it. iaflft \n\$ nid)t fcen 33cvlu|V fre£ 
 
 ©cijiffes, fon'oevn t>cn ^oo fo feie'lev treff'lid^er @cc'Ieute 
 
 befta'gcu, Do not let us lament the loss of the ship, but the 
 death of so many fine seamen. The negative before the 
 object. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 A very just comparison. He experienced quite a different 
 treatment. She sang this air beautifully. They wore their 
 best dresses yesterday. It is by no means decided. In 1 or- 
 der 1 to 11 ex lu tricate 12 himself 2 as 3 soon 4 as 5 possible 6 from 7 
 his 8 embarrassment 9 . He will depart to-morrow. They will 
 probably resort to this measure. He has not received your 
 letter. Do not trouble yourselves about the past, but think of 
 the future. 
 
 very, fef)t\ to decide, nUfd)Ci'DCn, irr. 
 
 just, vicl)'tig. in order, um. 
 comparison, SSei'gieid)', m. as soon as, fo ba(o a(£. 
 
 b. 6. possible, mog'lid). 
 
 to experience, erfafy'ven, irr. from, aits'. (Dat.) 
 
 quite, cjanj. embarrassment, ^BerdCgCtlfyeit, 
 different, Derfdjie'&Ctt. /. 
 
 treatment, ^cbano'lltng, /. to extricate, {?crcUl$'jiel)Ctt. 
 
 to sing, ftllg'en, irr. to-morrow, mot'fttn. 
 
 air, %'x'u, f. to depart, ab'rcifcn. 
 
 beautifully, fd)6n. probably, roafyv'fdjeittftd). 
 
 to wear, tva'gen, irr. to, jit. (Dat.) 
 
 yesterday, gcf'tcnt. measure, 9Q?aS'vcgCi, /. 
 
 dress, kith, n. 3. b. e. to resort, grei'ftlU 
 
 by no means, fei'neSrocgS. letter, SBvtcf, m. 3. b. b. 
 
CH. 7. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 245 
 
 to receive, erfyaf ten, irr. the past, t>as ^evgang'ene. 
 
 to trouble one's self, fid) 6c- but, a'bcr. 
 
 hun'mevn. to think of, betxmr'en. (Ace.) 
 
 about, um. (Ace.) the future, t>a6 ^n'tunfttge. 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
 
 When the same preposition belongs to more than one noun, 
 it need be only once expressed ; as, 93on mvi'nem 93a'ter, mil'* 
 Item SSw'&et* lint) mci'net ©d)roeftCl', From my father, my 
 brother, and my sister. 
 
 Some prepositions govern a genitive, some a dative, some 
 either a genitive or dative, some an accusative, and some 
 either a dative or an accusative. 
 
 1. Prepositions governing the Genitive. 
 
 anjiatt', instead ; as, au|tatt' 1>C6 ^Ba'terS, instead of the father. 
 &U\tt is sometimes separated from an, as, an Ktn'bes fvatt, 
 instead of a child ; in which case, this last word may also 
 be considered as a substantive, and written with a capital 
 letter, ©tatt, place. 
 
 (fyalb) is only used in compounds : particularly, ait'ferfyafb, 
 out of; as, an'ferfyalb bc£ ipan'feS, out of doors; in'nevbalb, 
 in, within ; as, in'ncvtyalb t)rci'er $a'a,e, within three days ; 
 O'bertyalb, above ; as, O'bei'fyalb fret* <&tnU, above the town ; 
 lln'ttxtyblb, below ; as, nn'tevfyalb fcci* ©taDt, below the 
 town. 
 
 I)al'ben, or fyal'bei* (when the noun has no article or pronoun 
 before it), on account of, for the sake of; as, t»e£ §Vte'DcnS 
 fyat'ben, for the sake of the peace ; Ztf'ttrti bal'bev, on ac- 
 count of age; fcei'iiet* iaf'tei* tyal'bcn, on account of your 
 vices. J^al'bcn is often joined with the genitive of the per- 
 sonal pronouns, id), I, &u, thou, lt»ir, we, &,c, gen. tnei'lter, 
 of me, frei'nev, of thee, nn'fer, of us, &,c. ; in which case the 
 final v of these genitives is either changed into t, or a t is 
 
 21* 
 
246 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. [BOOK II. 
 
 added ; as, ttiei'netfyaffcen, for my sake ; fcCt'uetfyatbeu, for 
 thy sake ; fet'ncttyalben, for his or its sake; tut'fcvtfyaibctt, 
 for our sake ; cu'vctfyalbcn, for your sake ; ity'vcttyatbcu, for 
 her or their sake. It is also joined with lt§, of that, and 
 H>e§/ of what or which ; as, feejj'fyalb, on account of that ; 
 tDCft'fyalb, on account of which or what. 
 
 tucffetts', on this side of; as, fcieffettS M glltffc^, on this 
 side of the river. 
 
 jeu'feitS, beyond, on the other side; as, jcn'fettS l>e$ ©an'geS, 
 on the other side of the Ganges. 
 
 h*aft y by virtue of; as, fvaft tttei'tteS Tlm'tCS, by virtue of my 
 office. 
 
 hut, according to, conformably ; as, [<X\lt KS O'tvigt^ttUctjett 
 33efcfyte', according to the command of the government. 
 
 mit'tcl|t or Vcvmit'tet|t, by, by means of; as, mit'tdjt or t>et*- 
 tntt'tcljt fcci'lteS ^Sci'jtatiDC^/ by means of your assistance. 
 
 ltu'gcacl)tct or o()U'geacl)tet, notwithstanding, sometimes pre- 
 cedes and sometimes follows the noun ; as, un'geacl)tet after 
 Jpiu'fccniijfe, notwithstanding all impediments ; fei'ttCS §(ei'= 
 fct? Uu'gCiUl)tCt, notwithstanding his industry. 
 
 im'rocit or ofcn'roeit, not far from ; as, un'VDCtt t)C6 £>0f'fe6/ not 
 far from the village. 
 
 fccvmo'gc, by reason or virtue of, by dint of, by means of; as, 
 V»enn6'gc fei'nei* ©etutrf , by reason of his birth ; fcerm&'ge 
 HX tt'bmtg, by dint of practice; Dei'm&'ge t>e<? giet'feS, by 
 means of diligence. 
 
 HD&fy'reuft, during; as, YO&ij'VtnP btV $tlt, during the time: 
 Itotofttnt t>c£ Sttie'geS, during the war. 
 
 Wgeu, on account of, because of. It may stand before or 
 after the noun ; 3d) tfyat Cd mei'llCS ^3a'tcrt5 iDc'gcn, I did it 
 because of or on account of my father ; VDC'gCtt fct'ueS 
 §tci'fc£/ on account of his diligence. GQDc'gCU is often 
 joined with the genitive of pronouns, like fyal'bctl ; as, met'* 
 ItetrPCgcn, for my sake ; fcefj'rocgen on account of that ; V0t§'- 
 TOCgCU/ on account of which or what, &,c. 
 
 2. Prepositions governing the Dative. 
 
 (Ut6, out of; as, a\l$ t>Ctn 55ct'tC, out of bed. 
 
 rttt'jVv, out of, without, besides ; as, au'jH' Ot'b'nitUg, out of or 
 
 without order ; atl'fct t>CC ©tat)t, out of the city or town ; 
 
 ait'fcv t>mt J^au'fC, out of the house; au'fCV \l\iv, besides 
 
 me. 
 
CH. 7. § l.j SYNTAX OP THE PREPOSITION. 247 
 
 bti, by, near; as, bet t>cm 4?ait'ff/ near the house; bet Dtr 
 
 J^aufc, by the hand, 
 cntge'gen, against, towards; as, t>em SOBin'OC Cntge'gen, against 
 
 the wind; QQBtr iDol'lcn uu'fcun gvcun'oc entge'gen ge'ijen, 
 
 We will go to meet, our friend. 
 
 gegenu'ber, opposite to; as, oem Jpau'fc gcgcmt'bcr, opposite to 
 the house. It may be separated ; as, gc'gcn mil* u'ber, op- 
 posite to me. 
 
 mit, with ; as, mit t>em 33a'tcr, with the father. 
 
 nad), I. after, behind ; 2. to or towards, with names of 
 places, and verbs expressing motion ; 3. according to, fol- 
 lowing ; as, nad) mix, after or behind me ; : l£ann gc't)Ctt 
 @ie nad) feci* @tai?t? When do you go to town? fci'ucv ©C- 
 bltrt' m\d), according to his birth ; tcm ©tro'me nac(), fol- 
 lowing the stream. 
 
 ncbft or fammt, together with ; as, ncbjt or fammt t>cm 33a'tcr, 
 together with the father. 
 
 frit, since ; as, fett t>cr $nt, since the time. 
 
 Don, from, of, by ; as, Don mir, from me, of me ; %)&$ (£>tbid)t' 
 t|t t)0tt ifym, That poem is by him. 
 
 Dor, before ; as, Dor mil*, before me. 
 
 JU, to, at, by, on, in ; as, £lt mir, to me ; £tt ion'Oon, at or in 
 London; jit Jpau'fe, at home;.ju 3£af fer, by water; jit 
 Ult'DC, on land ; Jit git fc, on foot. 
 
 jnndcl)|t', next to ; as, Si* fag mir JtmadjjV, He sat next to 
 me. 
 
 Jimn'&cr, contrary to, against; as, mir Jltttn'oer, against me. 
 
 3. Prepositions governing the Accusative. 
 
 fcltrd), through ; as, Ottrd) t>en ^aO, through the wood ; onrd) 
 bid), through you. 
 
 fur, for ; as, fur mtc(), for me; fur t>cn sprcie?, for the price. 
 
 gc'gcn, against, opposite ; as, gc'gcn DCU 'vIBinD, against the 
 wind ; gc'gcn mid), against me or towards me. 
 
 gCJt (contraction of gc'gcn), towards, is applied to few objects ; 
 as, gen ^im'mcf, towards heaven. It is also used as a nau- 
 tical phrase ; as, SftorD gen i)|t, north by east. 
 
 fonVr \ w * tnout ; as ' c ^' nt or f°" /Dcl ' VMrffo without me. 
 nm, about ; as, um ^tc ©tat^C, about the city ; urn mid), about me. 
 roi'DCr, against, in opposition to ; as, ttu'fcer mid), cud), \\)\\, ftC, 
 CS, ftC, against me, you, him, her, it, them. 
 
248 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. [BOOK II. 
 
 4. Prepositions governing the Genitive, or Dative ; and the 
 
 Genitive, or Accusative. 
 
 jufol'ge, according to, before the substantive, with the gen- 
 itive : as, JltfoCgC 3tyW SSffcfyfa', according to your com- 
 mand : but after the substantive with the dative ; as, 3^'t'Cm 
 SScfetyf Jltfot'gC, according to your command. 
 
 (dug*?, along, generally with the dative, sometimes with the 
 genitive ; as, IdugS fcem ^c'gC, along the way ; and some- 
 times, (dllgS t>C6 'IBc'geg, along the way. 
 
 ofy'lie, without, generally with the accusative ; as, ofy'ne mid), 
 without me ; but in some phrases, after the substantive, with 
 the genitive ; as, Jroei'jtte o!)'ne, without doubt. 
 
 5. Prepositions governing the Dative, or Accusative.* 
 
 an, at, in, on, with the dative ; as, an ei'nctn Or'te, in or at a 
 
 place ; as, St* ijt an al'len £>l''ten, He is at or in every place : 
 
 but, an, to, with the accusative : as, Q;r ge'fyct an ai'ic Dr'te, 
 
 He goes to every place. 
 attf, in, upon, with the dative ; as, 3)aS 23ltd) ticgt anf t>em 
 
 %tfd)'C, The book lies upon the table: but, auf, into, on, with 
 
 the accusative ; as, Sc'ge t>a£ 33lld) anf t>at ^tfcl), Lay the 
 
 book on the table, 
 fyill'tcr, behind, with the dative ; as, <Ev iji fytn'ter mil*, He is 
 
 behind me : but with the accusative, in (Er \Uilt fid) i}U\'UX 
 
 Wild), He places himself behind me. 
 in, in, with the dative ; as, (Sv i|t ill fccm ^int'mci', He is in the 
 
 room : in, into, with the accusative ; as, Qsi: gC'l)Ct ill tniS 
 
 dimmer, He goes into the room. 
 llC'bcn, next to, with the dative ; as, ®r IDOfyllt lic'fcen lltci'ticm 
 
 Jpatt'fc, He lives next to my house : but with the accusative, 
 
 in (£r £te'()et ne'fcen lltcin £ant>, He moves next to my house, 
 
 8. e. He moves into the house next to mine. 
 lYfcer, above, with the dative ; as, (Si* tttofynt lYfocr mil*, He lives 
 
 over or above me : but iVfrct', over, with the accusative, in 
 
 (£u fpving'ct u'bn mid), He jumps over me. 
 
 * If they signify motion or rest in a place, the dative is 
 used ; but when motion to a place is expressed, the accusative 
 is used. 
 
CH. 7. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 249 
 
 Urittv, among, under, below, with the dative ; as, (Jt* ift un'tcr 
 fceit ku'ttn, He is among the people ; Q;r if! lin'tCV mtr, He is 
 below me ; (Eg (tcgC un'tev Dcm 'Jt'fdK, It lies under the 
 table : but with the accusative, in (£r ge'fyet Ull'tcr t>ie *CU'te, 
 He goes among the people ; <£t* jteUt [id) uu'tcv mid), He 
 places himself below me ; 3»cl) rocv'fe C6 Ull'tei* frCU 'iifd), I 
 throw it under the table. 
 
 t)0V, before, with the dative ; as, 33ov t>eu 3ett, Before the 
 time ; 33or mtv jtaub cin 25aum, Before me stood a tree : 
 but with the accusative, in (El* gcbt t)0V Mc $fyur, He goes 
 before the door ; (£r tvitt t?or &eu SHid/tCf, He steps before 
 the judge. 
 
 jvrnfd)'eu, between, with the dative ; as, (£v ging jroifd)'cn t>tr 
 UUt> mil*, He walked between you and me : but with the 
 
 accusative, in (Er fcrdng'te fid) jroifdj'en t>id) unt> mid), He 
 forced himself between you and me. 
 
 § 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
 RULE I. 
 
 The preposition always continues with the case, and is 
 usually prefixed to it. 
 
 Jpal'bnt, fyal'bfr, entgc'gen, jttroi'&cr, are constantly put after 
 their cases. Surd), nad), gegemVbev, un'geadjtet, rce'gcn, ju, 
 jltfofgc, sometimes before, and sometimes after. See § 1. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 The preposition together with its case may be looked upon 
 in the position of words, as an adverb ; accordingly, its place 
 is after the object. 3d) fya'be ein'cn SSvtef aw? S)cutfd)'Un& 
 Cr()al'tCU, I have received a letter from Germany. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 The preposition with its case may be put before the object, 
 for the purpose of emphasis : 3>d) fya'bc atls? 2)cutfd)'tan& Cl'ncn 
 23vicf cvbal'tcu — here the words attt? 3)cutfd)1auD acquire 
 energy from their position. But the stress is most forcible, 
 when the preposition is placed at the beginning of the sen- 
 tence : 2(us £>eutfd)'Un& tya'be id) ci'ncn 33rief cvtyal'tcn, From 
 Germany I have received a letter. 
 
250 SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. [BOOK II. 
 
 RULE IV. 
 
 It cannot be inserted between the subject and the verb, un- 
 less it belongs exclusively to the former ; as, S)ct* SOTanu mtt 
 i>em blau'en SKocte t)Ht e$ gettyau', The man with a blue coat 
 (that is wearing a blue coat) has done it. 3^'UCV mit t>em 
 2>e'gCU fyat t)te %$at bCgattg'CU, That one with the sword (that 
 is, he who has the sword) has committed the deed. It is not 
 said, that the first has done it with the blue coat, or that the 
 second has committed the deed with the sword ; this wotdd be 
 a false construction. But, from the collocation of the words, 
 it is to be understood, that the one, who wears a blue coat, 
 is charged with a certain deed, and the other, who has a 
 sword, has committed the deed. Therefore, if the prepo- 
 sition, with its case, is not exclusively referred to the subject, 
 it cannot be put, where we see it in the examples adduced. 
 
 RULE V. 
 
 If an adverb and preposition meet in the same member of 
 a sentence, the adverb should come before the preposition, 
 especially, when the former consists only of one or two syl- 
 lables ; for example, St fcbveibt gut mtt fcie'fer ftc'fcCl*, He 
 writes well with this pen ; 3Btv ge'f)CU fyeu'te ttuf t>ie 3agt>, We 
 go a hunting to-day ; @ie vet'feten ci'lig tutvel) ion'&on, They 
 passed hastily through London ; (£v rotvfc mor'gcn JU mil* fom'- 
 meit/ He will come to me to-morrow. The adverbs gut, fyeu'tC; 
 Ct'lig, mof'gen, here stand before the preposition. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 Since this event. Contrary to my wishes. Opposite our 
 garden. I have searched after this circumstance in all (the) 
 records. That gentleman with the solemn air has made the 
 remark. They were soon put to flight. 
 
 since, feit. (Dat.) to search after, iMcb'fovfdjetU 
 
 event, Qh'fig'utf}, n. 3. b. 6. gentleman, JF>m*, m. 
 
 wish, * ( 2Bunfcl), m. 3. b. 6. solemn air, ItmtS'mtene, f. 
 
 contrary, jumi'Der. remark, *8cmcrTuug, /. 
 
 opposite, gegemVber. to make, nwcfe'cn. 
 
 garden, ^©av'teu, m. 3. a. a. soon, fcaffc. 
 
 circumstance, *Um'|taufc, m. to put to flight, ilt fctC gifadjt 
 
 3. b. 6. fcl)(a'gCU, irr. 
 record, ttr'ftttt&e, /. 
 
CH. 8. § 1.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 251 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 § 1. AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT. 
 
 The Conjunction fo 
 
 is employed to connect a sentence when the prior member of 
 it begins with a consecutive, causal, or conditional conjunc- 
 tion. £>a mx hi bet ^aupt'fadjc ci'nig ftnt>, fo laf'fet un$ 
 nid)t u'bci- $(ei'nigteitfn un$ cntjroci'eu, As we agree in the 
 essentials, let us not quarrel about trifles. < 333cun man fict) in 
 
 &cn SBiffcufdjaftcii aus'jetdjnen mil, fo mug man uu'uutcr- 
 
 bl*0d)C!ieu §(ci£ bcftt'jcn, If a person would distinguish himself 
 in the sciences, he must possess unceasing industry. ©0 is not 
 always required after the consecutive and causal conjunc- 
 tions, such as M, when ; a(S, as ; ttne, as ; XDtil, because : but 
 it is rarely left out after the conditional conjunctions, such as, 
 roenn, if; ofcfdjon', obgleicl)', ttcnnfdjon', roenngfeidj', although. 
 When the conditional is not given in the prior member, but 
 understood, it is common to make use of fo in the subsequent 
 member ; as, Jpat'te id) MS geroujft', fo ttW've icf) uic()t gefom's 
 men, Had I known that, I should not have come ; which stands 
 for, ^cittt icf) MS gC^ujft' Ijat'te, If I had known that; — there- 
 fore fo must be inserted, in the following member. It is to be 
 recommended after consecutive and causal conjunctions, when 
 the antecedent member is of some length, or consists of several 
 parts. ©0 is also found after the verb in the imperative mood, 
 but no conjunction ; as, SBcvtrau'e itjva, fo roti'D ei* t>iv fyet'fen, 
 Trust in him, and he will help thee. 
 
 ©0 is used when obglcicl)', obfefjou', or a similar word, 
 meaning though, although, precedes : bod), yet, or a synony- 
 mous conjunction, generally follows. Ob Cf glcict) Jung i|l, fo 
 t)at cr ooc() fcie'fe (Evfaty'ntng, Although he is young, he has 
 nevertheless great experience. 
 
252 SYNTAX OP THE CONJUNCTION. [BOOK II. 
 
 § 2. ARRANGEMENT. 
 
 RULE I. 
 
 The conjunction is, in general, placed at the beginning of 
 the sentence, and before the subject. 
 
 RULE II. 
 
 1. The following conjunctions join words and sentences 
 without changing the position of the verb. 
 
 owtv and ; as, gcu'ev, *uft, Qhr'fce, unfc QGDaf'fcr ftnt> tic Dicr 
 
 Slemcn'te, Fire, air, earth, and water are the four elements; 
 
 SSir gc'fycn unt) rc'Dcn mit ciuau'fcer, We walk and talk with 
 
 one another. 
 (Utd), also, too ; as, '•JBtl* jlnt> fi'Ofy, tmt> fie and), We are glad, 
 
 and they too; 3d) gUtl'be e£ and), I think so too; Jfpa'bcu 
 
 ©te auc() gctyoi't ? Have you heard also ? 
 
 a'bet, adciu', fon'txrn, but ; as, QBiv ftnt» bttvtxbf, a'ber 
 
 llid)t cntmu'tfytget, We are afflicted, but not dismayed ; QOBir 
 ft'a'gcn, atfein' (a'ber) nie'manb ant'roortet, We ask, but 
 nobody answers; < 2Div fyo'rcu nid)t$ (Su'tcs, a'ber aud)ltid)tS 
 S56'f eg / We near no g ood > but nothing bad : 3tid)t cr, fon'Dcm 
 ic^ 7 Not he, but I ; 3d) fya'be e6 ntdjt nut gcfc'fyen, forwent 
 
 <X\ld) get)5rt', I have not only seen it, but heard it also, 
 fcort), jct»0d)', but, nevertheless, although, yet; as, ©tc fcrob'tClt 
 
 iijm, t>0d) CV bticb jlaub^aft, They threatened him, but he 
 
 remained constant ; (£r Mei'bct &0d) mcin gmmt>, He remains 
 
 nevertheless my friend ; £r gCjtat'tCtC C$, jefcod)' (ood)) WW'- 
 
 gCtUC, He granted it, although reluctantly, 
 fccmt, for, because ; as, @ic WlffCtt eg, t>euu id) fag'tC C6 ify'ltCU, 
 
 They know it, for or because I told (it to) them, 
 ent'rocfccr, either, O'frcr, or ; as, (Snfttefcer fie ffnD (or ftn& flc) 
 
 fal'fdje grcim'fce, o'fcer offeuba'rc gcin'&C, Either they are 
 
 false friends, or open enemies. 
 M'btV, neither, nod), nor ; as, @ie fmt> ttC'bcr fytmg rig nod) 
 
 Mtv'ftig, They are neither hungry nor thirsty, 
 jraar, however, indeed ; as, ©ic ija'bcn c$ par, a'ber nid)t mit 
 
 9 f lcd)t / They have it indeed, but not with justice. 
 
 2. The conjunctions, a'ber, but, and (Utd), also, may stand 
 any where in the sentence. At the beginning, 2t'bCV mcin 
 
CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 253 
 
 55vtt'&cr roei'gcrt ftd), But my brother declines it. After another 
 conjunction, 2\i a'bct* mcin UJvu'&cr ftct) iDci'gcrt. After an 
 adverb, Slim a'bct* bcfufytt' Ct? tic fthlg'tyctt, But now prudence 
 commands it ; or after a preposition with its case, 9)iit Ote'fcn 
 
 icu'ten a'bev faun id) nictjts an'fangett/ But with these people I 
 
 can do nothing. And it makes no alteration in the influence 
 of other words upon the constitution of the sentence. Those 
 for instance, which bring the subject after the verb, retain the 
 same power, though a'bct* be inserted after them ; as appears 
 from the preceding examples. It may also be placed after the 
 
 subject, £>ie granjo'jen a'bcr l)a'6en t>cn (Ena/Idnpcvn t>cn &vtcg 
 evtlavt'. After the object, 3)ie gvanjo'jcn tya'bcn t>cit Sua/* 
 (auftCl'll DClt ftrieg a'bcr crildrt'. When not in the beginning 
 of the sentence, it commonly gives energy to the word that 
 precedes it. The personal pronouns are, generally, put be- 
 fore it, when the verb has quitted its original place ; as, 2) a Cir 
 a'bcr mcl)t fommt, But since he does not come; 2)aS tmm'fcfent 
 VDiv a'bcr nid)t, But this we do not wish ; 2)aS (ScId ttcrlang'e 
 id) a'bcr, But the money I demand. — What has been remarked 
 of a'bcv, may be applied to and) ; though perhaps we should 
 say, that cutd) has nearly, but not quite the same license of po- 
 sition. Moreover, when cutd) is placed at the beginning of a 
 sentence, the subject may be placed after the verb ; which 
 would be wrong after a'bcr. Ex. 2Iud) glaubt fctn SBa'tcr, His 
 father also believes; or 2tud) fetlt 25a' ter glanbt, Also his father 
 believes. 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 The following conjunctions, when taken relatively, require 
 the verb to be placed at the end of the sentence ; but their 
 use will be best understood by examples, as they are not al- 
 ways used as relatives. 
 
 &[$, f as, when, than, like, but. bcmnad)', ftn'temaf, whereas* 
 
 bettor', before. e'fye, before. 
 
 bi$, till. falls or im gad, in case, 
 
 ta, when. in fo fern, in so much, if. 
 
 fca, intent', as, since, whilst. nad)t>cm', after, after that. 
 
 t>aft, that. mil, tirocil, because, 
 
 anf &a§, Damit', in order that. Ob, whether. 
 
 f 2Ug has sometimes a comparative signification. 
 
 22 
 
254 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 [book II. 
 
 tt[6 ob, as if. 
 
 ttenn, if, when. 
 
 tto, fo, if. 
 
 rcoferu', fofevn', ^afevn', if. 
 
 noo nid)t, if not. 
 
 un'geactjtef, or ol)n'3ead)tet, 
 
 notwithstanding. 
 
 O 
 
 pbroofyf, 
 
 obcilctct)', j> though, although. 
 
 obfdjon', 
 
 iKmtvjleid)', J 
 
 3. The following conjunctions require the verb to be placed 
 at the end of the sentence, if used relatively ; but otherwise 
 the verb is put before the nominative. 
 
 bafyer', hence. 
 bef^alb', or ' 
 DeffyaFbCtt, therefore, 
 
 bejjroe'gen, }hv which 
 ttm fcel'imflen, | reason. 
 
 oantm', J 
 
 tt>ofycr', whence, 
 rocj^alb' or "] 
 actual' belt/ | wherefore, 
 Wcgroe'flflt/ } for which 
 urn mffroilkn, reason. 
 iMvum'/ J 
 
 4. The following conjunctions require certain others after 
 them, which frequently cause the nominative to be placed 
 after the verb. 
 
 CUt'lDCDCf, either, 
 JDe'bet*, neither, 
 VOtil, because, 
 t>a, when, 
 je, the, 
 
 foroofyf, as well, ) 
 fobalo', as soon, J 
 
 jwatr, indeed, 
 
 wenn, if, 
 
 requires O'bet*, or. 
 liod), nor. 
 
 fo. 
 fo. 
 je, or bef to, the. 
 
 ate, as. 
 
 f a'ber, atfetn', but. 
 
 bod), Den'nod), or ;ebOd)', how- 
 ever, yet. 
 
 glcicfe'roofyf, yet, for all that, 
 notwithstanding. 
 
 fyinge'geit, on the contrary. 
 
 lltd)t$ Def'tO roe'itigcr, never- 
 theless. 
 
 fo* 
 
 i 
 
 L 
 
 * Observe, the word fo is sometimes a conjunction, some- 
 times an adverb, and sometimes is used as a relative pronoun. 
 Examples. 1. As a conjunction ; ©0 it)U Uc'bct, tit (Mi) (te'beit, 
 
CH. 9. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 2,55 
 
 ttHC, §U\d)tt)k f , as, requires 
 
 fo, so, 
 
 nicfit, not, 
 
 nid)t allein', ) j 
 
 ntcbt mxv, S 
 
 obgCeicfc', 
 
 ofcfdjon', 
 
 obroot)!', 
 
 »cnn fci&ott, 
 
 roenn aud), 
 
 nneroofyC, 
 
 fo. 
 ft. 
 
 fon'oern, but. 
 fon'oevn, but. 
 
 ► although, 
 
 J 
 
 f fon Dent, 
 
 \ fon'oent aud), but also. 
 
 Cfo, so. 
 
 I fo — oodj, Den'nod), however, 
 <^ nevertheless. 
 
 I fo' nidjts bcf to roc'nigcr, nev- 
 
 [ ertheless. 
 
 As the application of conjunctions may be better learned 
 by examples than by rules, the following sentences are sub- 
 joined to exemplify their use. 
 
 2lte mv in Mono gegeffot 
 fyat'ten, (fo) ging'en n>iv fya= 
 frie'ven. 
 
 ©o rott? ate ei'ne 9to'fc. 
 
 £r ijt after ate idj. 
 
 Sr (jan'oelt ate (in vec()t'-- 
 fdjaffenev 30Taun. 
 
 lik n ten 2luf vuijv in ocr 
 ©tabt bemevf te. 
 
 (£c i\l jroar mein getno nicl)t, 
 a'fcet tod) aud) utd)t mein 
 gveuno. 
 
 2*te id) in Son'oon antam. 
 
 23i^ tie @on'ne Die erjtwt's 
 ten gef'bev auf lofen nuvt>. 
 
 2) a oer. >£o'te in Son'oon 
 anr'atn. 
 
 23om SDtov'gen fcte jnm 
 OTeno. 
 
 When we had supped, we 
 took a walk : or having sup- 
 ped, &c. 
 
 As red as a rose. 
 
 He is older than I. 
 
 He acts like an honest man. 
 
 When he perceived the tu- 
 mult in the city. 
 
 He is not my enemy in- 
 deed, but yet he is not my 
 friend. 
 
 When I arrived 'in London. 
 
 Till the sun shall loosen the 
 congealed fields. 
 
 When the messenger arrived 
 in London. 
 
 From morning till evening. 
 
 If you love (those) who love you. 2. As an adverb ; (£6 i\\ fo, 
 ix»ie id) <Kfa#t' f)a'be, It is so, as I said ; ( 2Die fo ? How so ? 3. As 
 a relative pronoun ; £>a$ 33ltd), fo (ml'd)($) id") gefaujt' fja'be, 
 The book which I have bought. 
 
256 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 
 
 [BOOK II. 
 
 £)a idj i>en SDtatm, roel'd^t- 
 fo c'bct gefyan'oelt, efy've nnt> 
 lie'k ; or, 
 
 £>a id) ben SCftann efy've imfe 
 lu'bi, wl'd)w fo e'oel a^an'-- 
 t>c(t tyat. J 
 
 2Benn er bag 53ud) le'fen 
 raid. 
 
 3d) faf? es ; fca'fyev roeis id) 
 
 2Dot?er' roif'fen jlc eg ? 
 
 ©r nutate es nid)t, t>a'vnm 
 fya'be id) e$ il)m gefaflt'. 
 
 S5et)0t y id) oen 3Ba(t> ev= 
 reidjt' fyat'te. 
 
 %[$ id) t>iefen SDtor'gen an 
 tern gender ffant), (&a*| faf) 
 id? t>ie ©oloa'tcn in t>ic &u\M 
 fom'men. 
 
 3n&em' or roeil id) an t>em 
 gen'jUv |tant>, faf) id), &c. 
 
 2Bie id) an i>em gcn'Pev 
 ftant», &c 
 
 3) a id) an t>em gcn'jler 
 ftan?\ &c. 
 
 <2Bicn>oI)t' er fet^r franf iff, 
 fo ijt Dod) nod) Jpoifmma. 
 fcorfyan'cen, bag er nne'oer anf-- 
 fommen roev'oe, (or roiro.) 
 
 3d) foertnarij'c bit ntel)t as- 
 tern' mein ipans, fon'oern and) 
 Jfpa'be nnt> (£nt. 
 
 3d) erroaf tete 3^'re %\\'= 
 funft ntd)t, fcef'to grd'fcv i|t 
 met'ne gmi'oe. 
 
 3e w'biger tag Sc'oen i|t, 
 oefto gefdftef'ter i|t eg jum 
 Stadj'fcenfen, 
 
 Qmt'rceber M|t en tod, o'oer 
 tin nm-jl e^ rcev'oen. 
 
 Since I honor and love the 
 man, who acted so nobly. 
 
 If he will read the book. 
 
 I saw it ; thence, or for that 
 reason, 1 know it. 
 
 Whence do they know it ? 
 
 He did not know it, there- 
 fore I have told (it) him. 
 
 Before I had reached the 
 wood. 
 
 When, or as, I stood at the 
 window this morning, or stand- 
 ing at the window this morn- 
 ing, I saw the soldiers coming 
 into town. 
 
 Whilst I was standing at the 
 window, I saw, &,c. 
 
 As I happened to stand, or 
 as I stood at the window, &,c. 
 
 When, or since, I stood at 
 the window, &c. 
 
 Although he is very ill, yet 
 there is room to hope that he 
 will recover. 
 
 I leave to thee not only my 
 house, but also my goods and 
 chattels. 
 
 I did not expect your arri- 
 val, the greater therefore is 
 my joy. 
 
 The more quiet life is, the 
 more fit it is for reflection. 
 
 Either thou art mad, or thou 
 wilt become so. 
 
 * $)a, in such cases, is frequently omitted and understood. 
 
CH. 8. § 2.] SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. 257 
 
 (£v fcfteu'et roe'oet' ©Ott nod) He fears neither God nor 
 
 SDten'fcfoen, roe'Det* %0t> nod) men, neither death nor life. 
 
 *e'ben. 
 
 Ob ifyrgfeid) gcfc^Vt' fctt>,fO Although you are learned, 
 
 gtebt eS fcod) (or g(eid)'rool)l) yet there is still much that you 
 
 nod) fciel, t>a$ it)v nid)t roif'fct. do not know. 
 
 Ob fie gleid) VCicl) ftUO, (0 Although they are rich, yet 
 
 f&U'HCU fte t>od) nid)C ai'Un they cannot help every body. 
 
 ictt'tcn bel'fen. 
 
 ObwotyreSunmog'licljfdjiCtt, Although it seemed impos- 
 
 nirtjttf oef'to roe'nigev Veifltd)'; sible, we nevertheless at- 
 
 teu »tv e£. tempted it. 
 
 3ntem' id) oafcon 7 fpi'ad). Whilst I was speaking of 
 
 it. 
 
 Ob evgfeidjmein^Ct'tev iff. Although he is my cousin, 
 
 fo tommt er t>od) ntd)C JU mil*, yet he does not come to (see) 
 
 me. 
 
 Sr. §at e^ entwe'tei* getfyan', Either he has done it, or he 
 
 o'oev roivD e^ nod) tfynn. will do it yet. 
 
 @te t)at mil* un'rccljt getfyan', She has done me wrong, yet 
 
 fcen'uod) will id) ityv verge' ben. I will forgive her. 
 
 ©0 (etdK'gtaitbtg er i\\, fo He is equally credulous and 
 
 tmt'log i|t er. treacherous. 
 
 @0 faug'e et* ftd) in Den Whilst he kept himself 
 
 ©d)ranr"en DCr SSefctjei'&cnfyett within the bounds of modesty, 
 
 fyielt, war id) feitl Cittfl'idjttgs I was his most sincere friend. 
 |Ur gxennb. 
 
 Ob et gletd) alt tft, fo ty\t Although he is old, he still 
 
 CI* DOd) OCU DM'Ugett ©ebrciltd)' has the perfect use of his men- 
 
 fet'ncr (Set'ftegh-dfte. tal faculties. 
 
 Sin SCmfc mnjj md)t mtv ten A child must not only hon- 
 
 33a'tcr, fon'oern and) Die Winf; or his father, but also his 
 
 UX C^VClt. mother. 
 
 ©ebafo' (al$) CStWrgefcfjIci's As soon as it has struck 
 
 gen I) at. four. 
 
 3Ud)Dem' n?ir %['U$ roofyl After having well examined 
 
 nntevfnd)t' fyat'ten. every thing. 
 
 (5'tje fcic (Sloc'feanS'gefcfolas Before the clock has done 
 
 gen t)at. striking. 
 
 3e mefyr id) ttinf'e, DeftO The more I drink, the more 
 
 metyr fya'be id) 3)ur|t. thirsty I am. 
 
 3e Idn'ger, je lie'ber. The longer, the dearer. 
 
 22* 
 
25S SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTION. TbOOK II. 
 
 L 
 
 RULE III. 
 
 Some conjunctions, when at the beginning, cause the subject 
 to be placed after the verb. They are t>a, then ; fcatycv', there- 
 fore ; Dann, fcaratlf , then ; fefflrum', for that reason ; fccmnad)', 
 folg'Iid), consequently ; fceu'UOd), jefcod)', nevertheless ; mm, 
 jcfst, now; fo, therefore ; fyiuge'gen, on the contrary ; iufcef'fett, 
 meanwhile ; inglci'd)en, likewise ; frutm, hardly ; within', 
 therefore; nod), nor ; ubcvfctcS', iVbvigcnS, besides. 2)fl frun 
 btv SDtanu, Then came the man ; SOfttfyttt' tVVt fid) fcetlt SSru'&er, 
 Consequently your brother mistakes. Excepting t>a, all of them 
 may likewise be put after the verb ; as, 3)ev SDfcltUl gfaubt 
 t>a^cr', The man thinks therefore ; %d) %rori'flt je&oct)', I doubt 
 however, gcr'nev, fo(g'lid), fyinge'gcn, intcffcn, inglei'cljen, 
 &bevbU&, lYbi'tgCttS, may even stand between the subject and 
 the verb : Set* 33erfaf jer fcv'ncr bc^aitp'tet, The author more- 
 over maintains. 2U'fO/ therefore ; fcod), but; tntW'kU, either; 
 rct'tn', neither ; £tt>ar, indeed ; are to be added to the forego- 
 ing : for when they begin a sentence, they may, like these, 
 bring the subject after the verb, though it is not necessary. It 
 is right to say, 2U'fO Dcr 95vit'&er fyat gefd)ric'bCtt, The brother 
 then has written; and, TU'fo fyat bCV 95vtl'&er gcfd)Vte'bcn. 
 Likewise thus : 2)er 35nt'&cv tjat al'fo gefcljrie'ben, and £>cr 
 25nt'fcCl* al'fo ty\t gefdjrie'fccn. By this transposition, the force 
 of the sentence may be varied, which is no small advantage in 
 composition. The word ndm'Ud), namely, which should be 
 considered as a conjunction, may be included among those 
 last mentioned : but when at the beginning of a sentence, it 
 sever causes the subject to be put after the verb. 
 
 Exercises. 
 
 If you do not go immediately. Then we rejoiced. She 
 nevertheless forgave him. Consequently his assertion rests on 
 a wrong conclusion. Namely, the question arises, whether we 
 shall remain or not. But the Tyrolese were not discouraged. 
 This supposition also may easily be refuted. 
 
 if, rocim. to rejoice, ftd) freu'ttt. 
 
 immediately, fogfeid)'. nevertheless, fccn'ltod). 
 
 to go, ge'fyen, irr. to forgive, fcerge'ben, irr. 
 
 then, t»a. consequently, fcemnad)'. 
 
CH. 9.] SYNTAX OF THE INTERJECTION. 259 
 
 to rest, bmt'fycn. or, o'i>et\ 
 
 assertion, 'QSctyaup'tMtg, /. but, a'bcr. 
 
 upon, auf. {Bat.) Tyrolese, fyvo'Uv, m. 3. a, a, 
 
 wrong, falfd). discouraged, cntmu'tfyigt. 
 
 conclusion, @(blu§, m. 3. b. t\ supposition, ^cimu'ttjUUg, /. 
 
 namely, uam'lid). also, auc(). 
 
 question, gttt'ge, /. may be, fafff fid) (literally, 
 
 to arise, CUt|iC'l)Cn. suffers itself.) 
 
 whether, ob. easily, Ictcbt. 
 
 to remain, blct'bcn. to refute, rotbcrfc'gett. 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 The interjection stands quite by itself; it neither governs 
 nor is governed by any other part of speech. Therefore, 
 the nominative and vocative, being independent cases, that is, 
 such as are not governed by a preceding word, are most proper 
 after interjections. lid) ! id) un'glfltf lidjer SOtcnfd), Ah me ! 
 unhappy mortal ! £i ! bet* ©d)vdf ! Ah! the rogue! 0! roa£ 
 fur ein ©djeu'fal ! O ! what a horrible object ! Ud) ! (ic'bcr 
 gvcunD ! Ah! beloved friend! 0! tt}m'U\ltt WXtW, Ol 
 dearest father ! 
 
 The genitive case is found after interjections : for example, 
 lid) ! DCS STlcnDcS, Ah ! the misery ! ! Dcr. gvcu'Dc, Oh ! what 
 joy ! IXd) ! DCS" Un'Dantbavcn, Ah ! the ungrateful wretch ! spfui ! 
 DCS fd)am'(ofcit 20?cn'fd)CU < Fie ! what a shameless man ! 
 
 The dative of advantage, or disadvantage, occurs after 
 certain terms, that may be called interjections, though they 
 are not strictly of that description; as, 90Bof)l tfym! Happy 
 him ! — 3Bot)t Dcm 9D?cn'fd)CU, Happy the man ! — SBcfy mil* ! 
 Woe is me ! 
 
 The position of the interjection is arbitrary ; it may be 
 placed wherever it presents itself, according to the emotion of 
 the speaker or writer. 
 
BOOK III. 
 
 PROSODY. 
 
 Prosody, containing the principles of syllabic division, 
 quantity, accent, and verse, may be considered as the syntax 
 of phonology, i. e. the doctrine of the sounds of the language, 
 the elements of which form the first part of this grammar. 
 See Book I. Part I. Ch. 4. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES.* 
 
 " In the German language the division of words into sylla- 
 bles is not founded upon derivation, but on pronunciation :• ; we 
 therefore follow the principle, Divide as you speak." f 
 
 1. The letters d), fcl), pfy, and tfy, when they form simple 
 consonants, can never be disconnected on account of any 
 alteration of the word in which they occur ; as, Xud), cloth, 
 3Mfre£ (not %ue*tyt0)-; ^CUifcf), exchange, taitsfdjcn, to ex- 
 change, (not tauf-cfoen,) ; sptyilofopf), philosopher, *pi)tlofo--p{)cn, 
 philosopers; SKatt), counsellor, 9aa-~tl)C, counsellors. 
 
 2. The consonant it before g or f is not to be pronounced 
 separately, although a vowel should follow the g or f ; 
 because the combination of n with g or f affects the pronun- 
 ciation of both letters, by giving them a nasal sound. Thus 
 the true sound of the verbs ftug'=eit, to sing, and fcanf'en, to 
 thank, would be spoiled by separating them in this manner, 
 ftn-gen, &an--fen. 
 
 * The mode of dividing words into syllables would not have 
 been ranked among the parts of prosody, if this division were 
 not founded altogether on principles of elocution. 
 
 t Heinsius's German Grammar. 
 
CII. 2.] QUANTITY. 261 
 
 3. A word compounded of several words is divided ac- 
 cording to the words of which it consists. Thus QOBcvfftatt, 
 workshop, is divided 2Bcrf--|liUt; DOllcnfcCU, to perfect, \>olI=eut>Ctt. 
 
 4. A long vowel or a diphthong, followed by a simple or 
 compound consonant, is pronounced with this consonant, if it 
 terminates the word ; as, gVUH, green ; tttcij?, most : hut if a 
 vowel with or without other letters is added to its end, the 
 consonant, which before terminated the word, becomes the 
 initial of the additional syllable ; as, gnVucv, greener ; 2Diei'« 
 fttt/ master. 
 
 5. If a short vowel is followed by a double consonant and a 
 vowel, the two consonants of which the double one consists, are 
 commonly separated in pronunciation and spelling, the first of 
 them being joined with the preceding vowel, and the second 
 with the subsequent vowel ; as, ©cl)if- ft, vessels ; '•IDct-'tCl*, 
 weather. 
 
 6. A short vowel, followed by one or more consonants and a 
 vowel, is commonly joined in pronunciation with the consonant 
 by which it is followed ; as, c 2i3ocl)=C / week ; ^Siifrfj-e, bushes ; 
 fc()er=JCH/ to jest ; gen-jhT, window. 
 
 Observation. Many German authors divide words into 
 syllables according to derivation, without regarding their pro- 
 nunciation ; and others divide partly according to the former 
 and partly according to the latter. We have in this grammar 
 endeavoured to divide every word conformably to its true pro- 
 nunciation, — taking together for each syllable so many letters 
 as are necessary to produce each of the component sounds of 
 the word. 
 
 & 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 QUANTITY. 
 
 The quantity of a syllable consists in the duration of its 
 sound. The principal difference between the ancient Greek 
 and Latin lanjzuacres and the German as well as other modern 
 languages, in respect to quantity, consists in two things. 
 First, there are in the ancient languages but two different 
 
 7 O O 
 
262 QUANTITY. [BOOK III. 
 
 times of duration by which the quantity of syllables is deter- 
 mined. They are either long or short ; and there is but one 
 kind of length and of shortness, the time of two short sylla- 
 bles being equal to one long syllable.* In German there is a 
 great variety of longer or shorter syllables : thus in the word 
 SBotymuigClt, habitations, the syllable QBol) is longer than 
 111111$, which surpasses in length the final syllable CU. 
 
 The German also differs from the ancient languages in its 
 not recognising the principle of position, that is, the effect of 
 the meeting of two consonants, by which in the ancient lan- 
 guages the preceding syllable is rendered long. For although 
 the concurrence of consonants has some influence upon quantity 
 in German, yet this influence consists in nothing else than 
 the natural effect of several consonants upon pronunciation. 
 They lengthen a syllable by obstructing its utterance. Thus 
 Cilt (indef. art.) is shorter than cin$ 7 one thing, and this is 
 shorter than C til ft, once. 
 
 To facilitate the comprehension of quantity in German, 
 three different times of duration have been adopted by 
 prosodists, the long, the short, and the middle time, which are 
 signified by these three signs, -, u, and o.t One long syllable 
 is accounted equal to two short ones : while those of middle 
 length are in themselves shorter than the former, and longer 
 than the latter ; but may sometimes be used as long, and some- 
 times as short syllables. 
 
 1. The following syllables are long: all monosyllabic nouns, 
 adjectives, and verbs (if they are not used as auxiliaries) ; 
 moreover, the radical syllable of every word, and those sylla- 
 bles which have the accent ; | as, \S3cvt, word ; gut, good ; 
 fcin (fctjtt), to exist; (Ei-frcit'ficfjcretj, something more pleasant , 
 ant'roortCll, to answer. 
 
 * Although there were syllables which were sometimes pro- 
 nounced long and sometimes short (ancipites), yet they did not 
 form a medium between long and short, but were pronounced 
 either long or short. 
 
 f This sign ( v ) is here used to signify the middle time, as 
 well as the doiditfid, i. e. either short or long. 
 
 | The nature of this case will be explained in the next 
 chapter. 
 
CH. 3.] ACCENT. 263 
 
 2. The following syllables are short : the inseparable parti- 
 cles belonging to compound verbs, as, be, cut, cmp, CV, gc, fccr, 
 JCV, (pages 108 — 110); the unaccented ending of words, as 
 t, be, tc, (i, cm, cu, ev, CS, ct ; the definite article, and some 
 adjective and adverbial endings, as, en, ltg, lid), and ifc(). 
 Examples, berci'tcu, to prepare; %it'ft, depth; (cr) lic'bct, 
 (he) loves; ir'c-cn, earthen: roafyr'licl), truly; rocibifcl), ef- 
 feminate. 
 
 3. The following syllables are of middle length : mono- 
 syllabic pronouns, numerals, prepositions, conjunctions; some 
 adverbs, interjections, and auxiliaries which consist of one syl- 
 lable ; the substantive endings, cnt>, Mlg, fcilt, nig, fcfoitft, be it, 
 hit, (see page 20) ; and the adjective, adverbial, and participial 
 endings, bar, fam, cm, icf)t, tfd)t, cub, tit, ttt, cr|t; as, 
 id), I; brei, three; fur, for; roenu, if; nun, now; C! O!; 
 (er) t?at (geliebf), (he) has (loved); $dum'lcin, little tree; 
 geijat-'mfebt, clad in armour; jUfccVbCVft, first. 
 
 Observation. It should be remembered, that this classifica- 
 tion of syllables according to their length is only an approxima- 
 tion to a correct representation of their quantity, which in 
 many cases depends on other circumstances besides those 
 before mentioned ; such as the sense of the words, the meeting 
 of certain letters, and other things, which cannot be taught by 
 rules, but must be acquired by induction, as one becomes 
 familiar with the nature of the language. 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 ACCENT. 
 
 Accent consists in laying upon a particular syllable of 
 a word, or upon a certain part of a sentence, a greater stress 
 than upon the rest. Accordingly there are two kinds of ac- 
 cent, that which is laid upon a particular syllable, and that 
 which belongs to a certain part of a sentence. In this sen- 
 tence, 2)ie @vie'd)cn maten fieg'reid), The Greeks were victo- 
 rious, the accent is to be placed on (Svie'cbcn, the Greek?, 
 if the intention of the writer is to exclude the idea that 
 the enemies of the Greeks were victorious ; but it must be 
 
264 ACCENT. [BOOK III 
 
 laid upon ficg'rcid), victorious, if he meant to assert that the 
 Greeks were not defeated, but gained the victory.* This rule 
 applies of course, as well to words of one, as of several syl- 
 lables. 
 
 In order to determine which of several syllables of a word 
 has the accent, we must, according to the above principle, 
 examine which of them is the most important. The rela- 
 tive importance of each syllable, on which the place of the 
 accent depends, is determined by the following rule. The 
 greatest stress, and consequently the accent, lies generally on 
 the radical syllable of the word, unless it be compounded 
 with another word which implies a negation or limitation of 
 the radical word. In this case the word which is joined as a 
 limitation takes the principal accent ; and the radical syllable 
 of the main word retains only a secondary accent. Thus the 
 words gc'fecit/ to give ; (ScfcU'fdJflft/ company ; and most other 
 words, have only one accent, viz. on the radical syllable of 
 each of them (§d\ fell). But in the words auf gc'beii, to give 
 up, SHci'fegefetTfdjaft, company for travelling, the original 
 words are essentially modified by the additions (Utf, SHci'fc ; 
 these therefore take the principal accent, while only a secon- 
 dary stress remains on the radical word. In speaking, the 
 principal accent is generally expressed by the falling and the 
 secondary accent by the rising inflection of the voice ; in 
 writing, the former is marked by the sign ('), and the latter by 
 the sign ('), after the last letter of the accented syllable. 
 
 It is to be observed that the accent is not moved from the 
 radical syllable of a word on account of the addition of a 
 syllable which either has no meaning by itself, or, at. least, by 
 being joined to another word, takes entirely the nature of those 
 particles which have no meaning except in connexion with 
 other words. This inseparable connexion makes them to be 
 considered as parts of the radical word, rather than as limi- 
 tations of its original meaning. Thus, with respect to com- 
 pound verbs, the inseparable particles, 6c, #C/ cut, &,c (pages 
 108 — HO), do not alter the place of the accent; while all the 
 
 * Accordingly the question, which of several words in a 
 sentence is to have the accent, cannot be determined by the 
 part of speech to which each of these words belongs, but only 
 by the degree of importance which the meaning of the sen- 
 tence assigns to each of them. 
 
CH. 3.] ACCENT. 265 
 
 separable particles, as an, on, ab, off, an£, out, produce that 
 effect. Examples : fet'jen, to place ; fccvfet'jeu, to displace ; 
 ab'fct'jCU, to depose ; ge'fyen, to go ; ilbcvge'fycu (inseparable), 
 to pass over without noticing; nbei'O/tyen (separable), to go 
 over to a different party. Those words, however, which are 
 compounded with nn, form exceptions ; because this negative 
 particle does not occur by itself, and nevertheless produces so 
 great an alteration of the sense that it generally takes the 
 principal accent ; as, fvcunfc'ltrf), friendly ; nn'fvennolicb, un- 
 friendly ; gall, case; Un'fall, accident. The verb ant'roov'ten, 
 to answer, composed of the ancient verb WCV'ten, to represent 
 in words, and the inseparable ant, forms a similar exception. 
 In some instances the sense of the sentence and euphony 
 alone can decide which of two syllables ought to have the 
 principal, and which the secondary accent; whether, for ex- 
 ample, we ought to pronounce Voffhnrimen, or tyeirfcm'mcu, 
 perfect ; nn'entbet)V lief), or ntfentbetyr'lirt), indispensable. 
 Sometimes even an unaccented syllable may be marked by a 
 particular oratorial accent ; as in this phrase, SBtC'le fya'ben 
 
 itm fcie'fe (Efy'rc fid) be'roov'bcn, a'bcv ftei'ncv l)at fie er'wotf* 
 
 ben, Many have aspired to this honor, but no one has obtain- 
 ed it. 
 
 Foreign words, which are Germanized by omitting the end- 
 ings et?, 06, tt£, ilt£, 0, a, &,c, have the accent commonly on 
 the final syllable ; as, %d)iiV (Achilles) ; Ofytnp' (Olympus); 
 ConfuUt' (consulatus) ; 93irgif (Virgilius) ; Zlpoll' (Apollo) : 
 2)ipIom' (diploma). 
 
 Observation. Accent must not be confounded with quan- 
 tity. The latter consists in the duration of the sound of a 
 syllable ; while the accent marks the degree of emphasis em- 
 ployed in pronouncing certain syllables or words. If the ac- 
 cent is on a long syllable, it has no influence upon its quanti- 
 ty. But when it happens to fall on a short syllable, the 
 accent does not actually make the syllable a long one, yet it 
 produces a similar effect on its pronunciation ; that is, the 
 rapid and emphatic manner in which the accented syllable is 
 uttered, is followed by a pause preceding the pronunciation of 
 the unaccented syllables ; and this pause, together with the 
 accented syllable, equals the time of a long syllable, according 
 to the above principles of quantity. Examples : SDTut'ter, 
 mother; QOBaffer, water. 
 
 OQ 
 
 r+'J 
 
$66 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK III 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 GERMAN VERSE. 
 
 The German verse rests on a double foundation, Rhythm, 
 or harmonious measure ; and Consonance, or agreement of 
 sounds, which is exemplified principally in rhyme. In the 
 ancient Greek and Latin poetry, rhythm alone constituted the 
 verse. For although we find rhyme sometimes employed 
 (intentionally, as it seems), it must be considered as an 
 incidental play upon certain sounds, rather than as an element 
 of versification. In German, as in other modern languages, 
 the principle still prevails, that there may be verses without 
 rhyme, but none without rhythm. Nevertheless it is certain, 
 that in some verses the rhythm, and in others the rhyme (or 
 some other kind of consonance), determines the character of 
 the verse. 
 
 § 1. Of Rhythm. 
 
 The German language is capable of imitating all the an- 
 cient Greek and Roman metres ; accordingly all the classical 
 poetry of the ancients, even the choruses of the dramatic 
 poets, have been translated into German verses of the same 
 kind. But, in indigenous German versification, a freer use 
 has been, and may be made of the rhythmical powers of the 
 language, for adapting the measure entirely to the meaning 
 of the words, without confining the poet to other rules than 
 that measurement of time to which the composer of music i3 
 likewise subjected. 
 
 1. The ancient Metres. In using the ancient metres for 
 German poetry, the above principles of quantity ought to be 
 observed. The accent has no direct influence in this kind of 
 versification ; except so far as it coincides with the principles 
 of quantity, and preserves euphony in general. 
 
 Each foot of the ancient metres may be rendered in Ger« 
 man either by one or by more words. It will be sufficient U 
 give here examples of all the feet of two and of three syl- 
 lables. 
 
CH. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 267 
 
 a. Feet of two syllables. 
 
 Spondee, - - ftnnjt'roevi, work of art. 
 Pyrrhich'ius, u u ©rbfcrit',* Sybarite. 
 Trochee, - v al'le, all. 
 Iambus, v - (BettXltf, force. 
 
 b. Feet of three syllables. 
 
 Molossus, gfcf&fyaupt'mamt, commander. 
 
 Trib'rachys, ^ o u Qtbtnt=Hit' ,* blessed. 
 
 Antibacchi'us, --u (Stu'roofyllCV, inhabitant. 
 
 Bacchi'us, u-- (Scroalt'tfyat, violence. 
 
 Amphim'acer, - v - It bergang, transaction. 
 
 Amphib'rachys, u - v ©cfufy'lc, feelings. 
 
 Dac'tylus, -w vHSan'bCvetr, traveller. 
 
 An'apsest, u u - Clamant', diamond. 
 
 The following specimens will be sufficient to illustrate the 
 use of ancient metres in German. 
 
 Hexameter and Pentameter. 
 
 — u~ u I — u — o j — I — uu|— uu I - 
 
 tyib§'M) erfcWC @cl)fac()t'ruf; n>il& fdjmettcrtm affe $vom-- 
 
 ye'ten, 
 SHafd) unc t>ev £[ang in fceu iuft, jKmn'tcn t>tc gcin'fcc reiv 
 
 an. 
 
 Suddenly sounded the battle cry ; wildly clanged all the 
 
 trumpets, 
 Quick as the clangor in the air, we rushed against the enemy. 
 
 * As every word of more than one syllable has one of these 
 long, the pyrrhichius and tribrachys can be formed only by 
 monosyllables, or by the initial or final syllables of words of 
 more than two syllables. Thus in the above examples the two 
 first syllables of ©t)bavit' form the pyrrhichius, and the three 
 first syllables of gebcncfcctt' form the tribrachys. 
 

 268 
 
 VERSIFICATION. 
 
 The Sapphic Stanza.* 
 
 [book III. 
 
 u 
 
 — — 
 
 — u u 
 
 — U 
 
 — U 
 
 u 
 
 
 
 — o u 
 
 — KJ 
 
 — U 
 
 u 
 
 — ~ 
 
 — kj *j 
 
 — V KJ 
 
 — U 
 
 — Kf 
 
 — o 
 
 Un'fer Sag'roerf en'bet frcr fKI'fc @a6'tat, 
 <2£ic t>e$ SDftt'tagtf ©litt fcie crfefjn'te ?Oton&'«ad)t. 
 ©tvcbt imt> fyoflt ! 6i6 en&'lid) t>ct? em v gen ©onn'tags 
 SDtor'gen cmpov'ttetgt. 
 
 Our daily labor the still sabbath terminates, as the desired 
 moonlight night {terminates) the heat of noonday. Strive, and 
 hope ! till finally the morning of the eternal Sunday rises. 
 
 Observation. It is an important principle particularly in 
 ancient metres, that the natural division of every verse into 
 words, should correspond in some measure with its division 
 into feet, and the general character of the verse. Thus, a too 
 frequent repetition of the amphibrachys spoils the character of 
 the hexameter ; as, 
 
 iieb'licl) evton'ten Me gto'ten, e£ fcftroefc'ten t>te Sanger im 
 
 $?rei'fe. 
 
 Sweetly sounded the flutes, the dancers moved in a circle. 
 
 This verse might be mended in this manner ; 
 
 2>ovt tbnt gl&'tenmujtf, t>ovt fdjroing'cn fid) Xfrntyv im ftrei'fe. 
 There sounds the music of flutes, there the dancers move 
 in a circle. 
 
 % The German Rhythm. The metres which are not bor- 
 rowed from the Greeks, but originally German, are on the 
 
 * The Sapphic stanza is here divided according to the sim- 
 ple mode of the old grammarians ; because we think it prefera- 
 ble to that of Ausonius. We also think that the uniform caesura 
 after the first syllable of the third foot, as we find it in the 
 odes of Horace, cannot be considered as an improvement on 
 the original metrical construction which prevails in the poeti- 
 cal remains of Sappho. 
 
CU. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 1 269 
 
 whole founded upon the same principles of quantity, and may 
 generally be analyzed into feet, like the ancient metres. But 
 these principles of quantity and metrical division are modified 
 by accent, euphony, and the sentiment that is to be expressed : 
 so that frequently the character of the verse cannot be deter- 
 mined by each of its parts, but only by the whole of a poetical 
 composition. Accordingly in native German poetry we find 
 many deviations from the above stated common rules of quan- 
 tity which ought strictly to be adhered to in imitating the an- 
 cient metres. Thus, a short syllable may be used for a long one 
 particularly when it ends in a vowel, or in a liquid consonant ; 
 as in the Iambic measure of Burger's Lenore. 
 
 3Bie fcon'tierten fcie SBrutf' en ! 
 
 How the bridges thunder ! 
 
 On the other hand, long syllables may be used for short ones, 
 particularly when, from the sense they express, they are com- 
 paratively of little importance in the sentence in which they 
 occur. Thus in Schiller's Maria Stuart, Mary says, — 
 
 2)ort Icctf cin gifefo'ev t»cn Sltadj'en an ; 
 2)iefc$ c'lenfcc galjv'jcug f Sun'tc mid) vct'ten ! 
 
 There a fisher fastens his boat to the shore ; 
 This miserable vessel micrht rescue me ! 
 
 Here the first as well as the second syllable of fcic'fcS is used 
 as short, so that this word together with the first syllable of 
 e'(cnt>e forms an anapaest, and all the emphasis falls on e'Icnfce 
 (even such a miserable skiff as this, &,c.) 
 
 But in most cases of this kind it cannot be said strictly, 
 that short syllables are used as long ones, or long syllables as 
 short ones. A good reader will take care, that the measure 
 which would be disturbed by pronouncing a certain syllable 
 according to its natural quantity, be restored by an appropriate 
 pause, or by protracting or shortening the subsequent or pre- 
 ceding words, so as to restore the general character of the 
 verse. 
 
 The most common measure is the Iambic, frequently in- 
 terspersed with the spondee or anapaest, or a pyrrhichius used 
 as an iambus. The spondee and the anapaest occur among 
 
 23* 
 
270 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK III. 
 
 the iambuses not only in the odd places, as in the Greek tri- 
 meter, but in every place. Examples, 
 
 £>an£, 2)anf fctefen freuufclidj gvu'nen 33au'men ! 
 
 (@d)illev.) 
 
 O thanks, thanks to these friendly green trees ! 
 
 u u 
 
 3a, in fcev gcr'nc fufylt fid) Die SDtarfjt 
 SJOBenn jwt ftcl) ve&'ttdj fie'ben. (CS&fye.) 
 
 Yes, at a great distance the power is felt, when two love 
 each other truly. 
 
 Sometimes the iambic measure is interrupted by a trochee, 
 for the sake of greater emphasis. 
 
 £ann id) fcodj fitv mid) feltyt nicljc fprecfc'cn, ofy'ne m$ 
 
 — o 
 
 @d)rcer m Dcrfta'gen. (©djiflev.) 
 
 I indeed cannot speak for myself without accusing you 
 grievously. 
 
 Next to the iambic, the trochaic measure is most frequent ; 
 oftentimes mixed with spondees and dactyls ; 
 
 — u u 
 
 £>ie n>eit tte'fcer em frcm'fces ikt> 
 Ills \t)v eig'nes fy&'tm (®6tl)e.) 
 
 Who like to hear the song of another, rather than their 
 own. 
 
 • The amphibrachys also not unfrequently constitutes the 
 ♦character of the verse. 
 
 <£$ fcon'nern Die J&S'fyen, es jit'tert t>ev ©teg, 
 
 5Ktd)t gvau'et t>em @d)itt'jcn auf fcbroinMcfcem 2Beg. 
 
 The heights thunder, the bridge trembles, the hunter is not 
 afraid on the dizzy path. 
 
 Other verses derive their character from the dactyle, the 
 anapaest, or other measures. Besides there is a great number 
 of mixed verses ; in some of them a regular change of cer- 
 
CH. 4. § 1.] VERSIFICATION. 271 
 
 tain feet is observed, while others, like the hymns of Pindar 
 and the choruses of the Greek drama, vary according to the 
 sentiment of the poet. 
 
 Most of the regular verses and stanzas, are the same in 
 German and in English ; particularly in modern German poetry, 
 since the bold and high-wrought versification of the twelfth 
 and thirteenth centuries has given way to simpler measures. 
 
 We will add a specimen of poetry, the rhythm of which is 
 not determined by any certain measure, but by the sense ot 
 the words alone. It is taken from Schiller's Maria Stuart 
 When the queen after a long and close imprisonment had ob- 
 tained permission to walk in the park near the castle, she 
 says to Lady Kennedy, her nurse, who vainly endeavoured to 
 follow the quick step of the queen, — 
 
 ia$ mid) t>er ucu'eu grei'fyeit genie'feit/ 
 
 iafj mid) cin SCtub fein, fei es mit ! 
 
 Xtub anf t>em gnVtteh "Sep'picb Dec Q33ic'fcn 
 
 spriVfen Den (eidyten, geflit'gelten ©clnutt. 
 
 sBin id) Dent ttn'ttern (Sefang'nijj ent|tte'gett, 
 
 §i\it fie mid) nid)t mefyr, Die tiran'rige (BruftT 
 
 iafj mid) in fooHen, in fcitr'ttigen j&Vgen 
 
 ^rtnf'en Die frci'e, lit tjimm'(i(d)c htft. 
 
 2)anr", 2)anir fcte'fen freun&'lictj gnVntn 33du'mcn, 
 
 2Me mei'netf SCet'fct^ SDTan'ern mtr berjtec'f en ! 
 
 3d) rottl mid) fret iinD glncHid) trau'men, 
 
 ^DDatnm' ang met'nem fft'fen 3Bal)n mid) roec'fen ? 
 
 Umflngt' mid) nidjt fccv roei'te £tm'metefel)oo$ ? 
 
 SDie SSfic'fe, fret unfc fef'fefl&s, 
 
 (Srgc'fycn fid) in un'gemetfnen SHan'mert. 
 
 Sort, veo Die grau'en SftVbelberge ra'gen, 
 
 gangt mei'nes SKei'cfees ©rfin'je an ; 
 
 Unt) Bie'fe ■JBofr'en, Die nacl) SJtittag ja'gcn, 
 
 ©ie fn'djen granfretdjs fer'nen O'cean. 
 
 giienfcc ^DScI't'cn ! ©eg'ier ber Sftfte ! 
 SEBcr mit eudj ttan'&erte, mit eud) fdjtf te! 
 ©rft'fet mir freuut»'(id) meivi ^n'genbfanD ! 
 3d) bin gefang'en, id) bin in 35an'Den, 
 2td), id) t>ab' Jei'nen anient (SefanD'ten \ 
 grci in ittften ijt cure 95al)Tt, 
 3()r feifc nid)t i>icfcr S^'ntgtn un'tertfyan, 
 
272 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK III. 
 
 Let me enjoy the new freedom, 
 Let me be a child, be one with me ! 
 And on the green carpet of the meadows 
 {Let me) try the light, winged step. 
 Am I arisen from the dark prison, 
 Does the sad vault no longer hold me 1 
 Let me in full and thirsty draughts 
 Drink in the free, the heavenly air. 
 
 thanks, thanks to these friendly green trees, 
 Which conceal from me the walls of my dungeon ! 
 
 1 will dream myself free and happy ; 
 Why wake me from my sweet delusion ? 
 
 Does not the wide canopy of heaven surround me ? 
 
 My looks, free and unconfmed, 
 
 Wander over immense spaces. 
 
 There, where the grey, misty mountains rise, 
 
 The boundary of my kingdom commences ; 
 
 And these clouds which hasten towards the south, 
 
 Seek the distant ocean of France. 
 
 Hastening clouds, sailors of the air, 
 
 Would that I could wander and sail with you ! 
 
 Salute for me friendly the land of my youth ! 
 
 I am imprisoned, I am in fetters, 
 
 Alas, I have no other messenger ! 
 
 Free in the air is your path, 
 
 You are not subject to this queen. 
 
 The first three lines consist of alternate dactyles and tro- 
 chees. From the fourth line the emphasis rises, as Mary con- 
 trasts her present freedom with her late imprisonment ; and 
 the metre hastens on in dactyls, to the eighth verse. In the 
 ninth verse the feeling of gratitude changes the measure 
 into the iambic, which continues to the nineteenth. From 
 the twentieth verse her desire of deliverance from captivity 
 in England, awakened by the sight of the distant mountains 
 of Scotland, and the clouds flying towards France, changes 
 the metre again into that of the first three lines, which de- 
 scribe her delight in her deliverance from her dungeon. 
 The alternate dactyles and trochees sometimes terminate 
 with a supernumerary (catalectic) syllable, as mit, ©cl)l*itt/ 
 (Sl-llft, Ulft 
 
CH. 4. § 2.] VERSIFICATION. 273 
 
 § 2. Of Consonance. 
 
 Under the word consonance we comprehend three princi- 
 pal resemblances between successive sounds of the language, 
 viz. rhyme, assonance, and alliteration. 
 
 1. Rhyme consists in the identity of certain vowels and 
 consonants. This resemblance may exist between one, 
 or two, or three syllables occurring in different words ; as, 
 ©d)ilb, shield, and 33i(t>, image; ic'kctl, life, and fle'beu, to 
 give; min'uiglid), lovely, and m'ttiglidj, intimately. 
 
 In a rhyme of more than one syllable the last may some- 
 times consist of a monosyllabic word ; as, 
 
 ©ci'ucn SOici'jkr 
 iicbt uut> pvcijt cr. 
 
 He loves and praises his master. 
 
 The rhyming syllables ought to be of the same quantity ; and 
 in rhymes of several syllables the principal emphasis should 
 be on the first. Therefore we cannot make |tcib'(id), mor- 
 tal, rhyme with Cfb(icl)', imperfect of crMci'djcn, to grow pale ; 
 but we may make it rhyme with cvb'Iicf), hereditary. 
 
 The rhyme is commonly found at the end, but sometimes 
 (particularly in ancient German poetry) also in the course of 
 the verse ; as, 
 
 %n$ dlad)t errmidn' 
 Set- ©cu'ne spradjt. 
 
 Out of the night awakes the splendor of the sun. 
 
 In a monosyllabic rhyme the beginning of the rhyming 
 syllables should not be the same, unless the two words ex- 
 press quite a different meaning. In rhymes of more than 
 one syllable this remark applies to the first of those syllables. 
 — Thus we cannot make mefy'rot, to augment, rhyme with 
 Vevmet/vcU/ to augment : but it is allowable to say, 
 
 3e'£>cr cr/lc 5DTcnfd) V»cvc()'rc 
 
 ©ie'fen ffllfo'tyxn fcer tyftidit unt> Qtyrc ! 
 
 Let every noble man revere this martyr of duty and honor. 
 
274 VERSIFICATION. [BOOK III. 
 
 We must notice here two kinds of impure rhymes which 
 occur even in the works of the best poets. They consist in 
 making to rhyme together vowels or consonants of a similar 
 but not the same sound. With respect to vowels, we remark 
 as being made to rhyme together, e, d, and 6 ; i and u ; ti and 
 ett ; as, ©e'gCU, blessing, rcd'gen, to weigh, and mo'gen, to be 
 able ; geillt), enemy; and gmtttfc, friend. In regard to con- 
 sonants, the sounds of fc and t are particularly liable to be 
 confounded ; as, thus gel'fca*, fields, and $d'Ut, palfrey. 
 
 2. Assonance consists in the rhyming of the vowels alone, 
 and consequently differs from the full rhyme by the dis- 
 crepancy between the consonants ; as, mi(t>/ mild, and ^iufc/ 
 child ; iit'be, love, and gvte'fce, peace. 
 
 Since assonance does not so evidently combine several 
 verses as rhyme, it is commonly oftentimes repeated, so that 
 frequently the same assonance connects a whole poem. — As- 
 sonance is not so frequently used as rhyme. 
 
 3. Alliteration consists in the repetition of certain conso- 
 nants particularly at the beginning of words. It is most com- 
 mon that the same consonant which begins the first verse, is 
 repeated in the course of the same, and then at the beginning 
 of the next verse. Example, 
 
 <2Bo{)t in t>e$ SBaf'fcee? 
 aBit'Detfei- Stn'famfeit 
 £6vt' id) fcen J^av'fenrlang, 
 $bxt' id) fren £ctt>'wf. 
 
 Indeed in the wildest solitude of the forest I heard the 
 sound of the harps, I heard the call of the heroes. 
 
 Alliteration, which was common in the old Scandinavian 
 poetry, is now rarer than the two other kinds of consonance. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 I. 
 
 As an exercise in reading and translating for beginners, we 
 add here a passage of the New Testament, from the German 
 version of Leander Van Esz. 
 
 acts ix. 1 — 28. 
 
 1. ©au'lus fdjnanb'te nod) ^utl? unb 2DZovi> nn'Der t>ie 
 Sung'er oes £errn, gtng ju oem D'fcerprteffet. 
 
 2. ItnD (ies fid) l>on ifym SSoK'madnsbviefe nad) 2)ama$'ftt$ 
 an Die ©miago'gen ge'ben, t'vaft wel'cfter cv SDTan'nev unD 
 gvau'en, Die ev ate ftn'tydngev Die'fev 4c^'re fftn'be, gebun'Deu 
 nad) 3cvu'faUm fftfy'ven ftnn'te. 
 
 3. 2Utf Dic'fcv SHci'fc, fd)on na'fye bet Samas'ftts, umjtvafyfre 
 ifyn plo^'lid) tin iid)t urn £im'me(. 
 
 4. Qsv fid auf Die Sv'De, unD ^v'te ci'ne ©tim'me, tie jn tfym 
 fpvad) : ©aid, ©aid, roaumV fccrfblgjV Du micb ? 
 
 5. (£v fpvad) : Jpevv ! tkv t>i|"t bit ? ©cv Jpevv fag'tc : 3d) 
 bin 2>e'fu$, ben tot i>crfol'c\e|t. £$ roivb t>ir fd)ir>ev roev'ben, 
 nn'bev ben ©tadj'cf ans'jnfcbfagen. 
 
 6. ^tt'tevnb unb angjVfceU fpvad) ev : Jpcrr, was tttlljt tot, 
 baft id) tt}ttn foil ? 
 
 7. 2)ev Jpevv ant'roortete tfym : ©te'be auf, unb ge'fye in Ote 
 <&tal>t, oa rcivb biv $tfw roev'ben, r»a$ tot flntn fotfjr. 25c* 
 jtuqt' jtan'oen fei'ne Stci'fcgefafyrten Oa; benn fte fyoYten jroav 
 Die ©ttm'me, fa'beu a'bev SRie'tnanb. 
 
 8. ©au'hts jtanb von Der Sv'be auf, fonn'tc a'ber, Da ev Die 
 2tu gen off' nete, Sftic'manb fe'tyen. 2) a naty'men flc tfyn an bev 
 Jpanb, unD let'teten ifyn nad) SJamatf'hts. 
 
 9. £>vet ^a'gc lana, fat; ev uid)t, unD natym roe'bev ©pci'fe 
 nod) 3:vanr* jtt fid). 
 
 10. 9Zuu vow ju SDamatf'htS eiu Snng'er^a'tttettS ZCnani's 
 as ; ju Dem fpvad) Dcv Jpcvv in ei'nev ©vfdjci'nnng : Ztnani'a* ! 
 £v fpvad) : £evv, fytev bin id). 
 
276 APPENDIX. 
 
 11. £>afag'te Oev £evv pi ilmt: <Befy' unberjttg'fiefj in Oie 
 fo'genannte gcva'be ©tva'fe nnO evfnn'Oige oid) in 3u'0a$ £an'* 
 fe nacb ei'nem @au'ln$ fcon $av'fu$ ; fcenn e'ben )cjt bc'tet Oie'; 
 fcv SDtann, 
 
 12. UnO f)at in ei'ncv Qsrfdm'tttmg ei'nen SD?ann, Sfta'mens 
 2(naui'a$, ju fid) fyevein'fommen gefe'^en, t>eu ifym Die £an'Oe 
 anflegt, urn tyn rcie'oev fe'fyeno jn mad)'en. 
 
 13. Hnani'aS enoie'Oevte 3fym : £erv, es fya'ben miv SSie'le 
 fcon Oie'fem 93?an'ne evjdfylt', n>ie Diet 23o'fe6 et* Oet'nen £ei'lu 
 gen ju 3>evn'falem ju'gefitgt ; 
 
 14. Uub and) fyiev fyat ev i>on Oen O'berpricftcnt S3ofl'mac(jt, 
 TXl'tt in 25au'0e jn le'gen, Oie Oei'nen Dta'men an'rnfcn. 
 
 15. 2)cv JSperv fptMd) ju ilmt: ©e'fye nnv t)in; e'ben oie'fer 
 tft miv ein aus'evlefenes ^Bcrf'jcug, mid) untev ipei'oen, fcov 
 fto'nigen nnt> ten Svin'Oevn Spracltf befaunt' ju mad)'en. 
 
 16. 2>enn id) roev'De ifym jei'gcn, roieoiel' ev fur mei'nen 9ta'- 
 men lei'Oen foil. 
 
 17. 2(nam'as gtng alfo fyin, nun in 0a£ Jpans, (eg'tc iljm 
 tic Jpdn'oe auf unt> fag'te : 23nt'Dcu ©aul ! Oev £evv, (3c'futf, 
 Oev tit* anf oem "SBe'ge, Oen on {fa'meft, evfdnen') fyat mid) gc-- 
 fanot', oamit' on nne'oev fe'ijcnfc unO \>olX oes fyei'ligen (&ti'\U$ 
 roev'oeft. 
 
 18. @ogleid)' roar's, roie roeun ©dwp'pen Don fet'nen W= 
 gen fte'lcu; ev fonn'te rote'oev fc'fyeu, jtant> anf nnO lies ftd) 
 tan'fen. 
 
 19. £)ann ag ev, nnt> fldvf'te fid) roie'oev. Sftod) ei'nige $a'g* 
 blieb ev bei Oen S&ng'cro jn X)ama$'r*u$ ; 
 
 20. UnO fogleid)' pve'oigte ev 3e'fum in oen ©mtago'gen, Oafi 
 ev Oev © o I; n vS o t' t e s fei. 
 
 21. 2£ne, Die il)n fyovten, evjtaun'ten nnO fpra'cfjcn : 3|t ev 
 e6 nid)t, Oev jn 3>evn'falem toevtifgen woll'te Oie, rocl'cbe je'nen 
 Sta'men an'vufen ? 3fa geva'Oe oa'vum ijt ev fyiefyn*' gehnn'meu, 
 nm fie in 33cvfyaft' ju nc^'men, uno aw t>ic O'bcrpvicjUr ju ftber* 
 lie'fevn. 
 
 22. ©au'lm? gewann' inoeffen im'mev mc()v an ^vafr, fo frag 
 ev Oie 3u'0en, Oie ju 3)amag'fm5 tooljn'tcn, ganj in ^3enr>iv'vuug 
 $r g 'u, inOem ev ftano^aft bcljauv'tete : oic'fev \]l Cljvtf'tms. 
 
 23. Si'ne gcvau'me Beit uad)i;er' fyici'ten Oie ^u'Ocu SRatl? 
 gufam'men, ifyn um'jtibvingcn. 
 
 24. 2t'bev il)'ve 3Iad)'^ellungeu n?uv'ocn oem ©airlue be- 
 fannt'. ^njwifcb'cn l)ielt man ^ag unO Slactt Oie Xljo'xc be= 
 fejt', um it;n ju tot'tni. 
 
 25. 2)a ual}'men it)n Oi? 3ung'ev Dcj? Sdacl)t« unO lie'fen il)tt 
 in ei'nem ^ov'be m oer SOtau'ev l}inab'. 
 
APPENDIX. 277 
 
 26. £>a er fyieranf nad) Sevu'fafcm hm, fnd)'te er ftd) an Me 
 3nng'cr an' jufd) It efen ; a'ber al'le fuvd)'tetcn tfm, gfanb'ten 
 ntc^t, &a§ et etn Sfttitg'er fci. 
 
 27. 2)a nafym fed) SSar'nafoas fei'ner an, fitfyi'te ifyn jn fcen 
 2ipof'teht nnt> crjafjl'te ify'nen, n>ie ei* anf fei'nev SKei'fc ben 
 £errti gefe'fyen nnt> bag Die'fer- jn ifym gcve'fcet, unfc rote frei'-- 
 mftttytg er. ju 2)ama$'fris fur fcen seamen 3>e'fn ftd) erfrdrt' 
 (ja'fce. 
 
 28. 25on t>er 3rtt an |tant> ev jn Scvu'fafem in focrtvau'tem 
 Itm'gattge mit ify'ncn unb keriitn'fcigte frei'mitttytg t>en Sta'men 
 Se'iU/ l>es Jfpevvn. 
 
 II. 
 
 FAMILIAR DIALOGUES. 
 
 (Sv'jUS (Sefpr&d)'. J'/rs^ Dialogue. 
 
 (Sn'ten SDTor'gen, mein £etT, or 
 
 §ttt 9t. (i- e. the family Good morning, Sir, or Mr. N., 
 
 name), grail 9t, or Madame, Madam or Mrs. N., Miss N. 
 mein gran'lein, or 3>ung'* 
 
 fei* 2ft. or Mademoiselle.. 
 
 (Sti'tcn $ag, mein £cit, K. Good day, Sir, &c. 
 
 C&u'ten 2f benfc. Good evening, 
 
 ©tt'te 9tad)t. Good night. 
 
 ^ie beftn'&en @ie fic() ? How do you do? 
 
 ©efyr roofyl, idj fcanr" e Sfy'nen. Very well, I thank you. 
 
 £s iff miv (tcb @ie jn fe'tyen. I am glad to see you. 
 
 3d) tyoffe @ie ftnb root)!, I hope you are well. 
 
 9ttd)t fe^r mo^r. Not very well. 
 
 3d) fya'be @te lang'e nid)t ge= I have not seen you for a long 
 
 fe'ijen. time. 
 
 ^O flnt) @ie gewe'fen ? Where have you been ? 
 
 24 
 
278 APPENDIX. 
 
 3d) Htt in spavin gcme'fen. I have been in Paris. 
 
 QGBie fcejtn'OCt ftd) 3fyt* §tW How does your brother do 1 
 
 $3tu'Det ? 
 
 (£x i|t jiem'Iid) tt>ol)f. He is tolerably well. 
 
 3d) glau'k, Ct beftit'tet fid) I believe he is well. 
 
 toof>(. 
 
 ©t befano' ftctj gcf tent JTbenft* He was well last night. 
 
 rt>oi)L 
 
 ^ie beftn'om ftd) 3fyt Jpevr How are your father and 
 
 SDa'tct uno 3(;'te giau mother 1 ? 
 
 Wlut'ttt ? 
 
 OKct'uc SDhtt'tet bcftil'^et ftd) My mother is not well. 
 
 nid)t rootji 
 
 ©ie befano' ftd) geftetll ffllf* She was ill yesterday morn- 
 
 nid)t roofyf. ing. 
 
 £>as tl}Ut mil* (cit>. I am sorry for it. 
 
 3wei'teS ©efptad)'. Second Dialogue. 
 
 2&as iff oic 1% ? J w hat ° cloclc 1S ll l 
 
 (56 i|? Ctn Ufyf. It is one o'clock. 
 
 (£g ijt jroMf itfyt. It is twelve o'clock. 
 
 %i '!! !•" 2K?f !"? s ^ If- 1 Ii is a <i uarter p ast tweIve - 
 
 gs i|l cm 23icv tc( auf tine. ) . H r 
 
 (£6 t|t {*alb etng. ) v 
 
 (56 i\l Otct 33tev'tc( auf eilt^. It wants a quarter of one. 
 
 &$ x\x ctn 33tcr'tet auf t>m. It is a quarter past two,, * 
 
 (£6 i\1 jroan'jig SOtinu'tCU nad) It is twenty minutes past two. 
 
 jroei. 
 
 (£6 i\\ jroan'jig SDtimt'ten t>0t* It is twenty minutes to eight. 
 
 ad)t 
 
 SBte tiki ift Cg auf jctw ? How much does it want often ? 
 
 &$ fefyft jefytt attimt'tcn ju" 
 
 (56 ift funf jig SERirot'ten auf 
 
 jefjn. 
 (56 i|t jefyn SDtttw'tttt Dot 
 
 <IBann ftnt> @ie gefom'men ? When did you come ? 
 
 > It wants ten minutes of ten. 
 
APPENDIX. 279 
 
 3d) Hm un'gefdfyr um bier I came about four o'clock. 
 
 1%. 
 
 (£g fd)htg C'fcen ftc'bcu Ufyr. It just struck seven o'clock, 
 
 ^at eg fcljou gcfcfeftl'gen? Has it already struck ? 
 
 £g wirD InxlD ftdjt fd)(a'gen. It will soon strike eight. 
 
 -3Bie t>icl fd)lagt eg jegt ? What does it strike now? 
 
 Sg mug auf bClt @d)lag ueuu It must be about striking nine. 
 
 fetn. 
 
 Sag i|l 3^'t'C £eit JW fWty' s That is your time for break- 
 jKtcreu, utd)t rcafyv ? fasting, is it not ? 
 
 Sl'tt'teg (Sefprdd)'. TVhVt? Dialogue. 
 
 ©pred)'en ©ie 2)eutfd), mcitt Do you speak German, Sir? 
 
 £ert ? 
 
 3d) fpredj'C Cg cin WC'ltig. I speak it a little 
 
 3d) tn'VfU fye eg bef'fer aft? id) I understand it better than I 
 
 eg fvredyen (ami. can speak it. 
 
 ©prceVcn ©ie mit mir. Speak with me. 
 
 SBerjte'fyeu @te mid) 1 Do you understand me? 
 
 ©jn-ed)'eu ©ie mit ifym, (u)l\) Speak with him, (her). 
 
 Jpa'be id) vidj'tig ftuVgefptodj* Did I pronounce right ? 
 
 en? 
 
 ^5ie fm'ed)'en ftfjt $l\t iDcutfcfj. You speak German very well. 
 
 ©iu& ©te in 2)eutfd)'(anD ge^ Have you been in Germany ? 
 
 roe'fen ? 
 
 Stein, Ute'mafg. No, never. 
 
 QOBie lang'c fya'fccn ©ie ge; How long have you been 
 
 fftttf ? learning? 
 
 gttnf s J3to'nate. Five months. 
 
 &*$ i\\ nut ei'nc htf'je $eit ; This is but a short time ; I 
 
 id) roun'Dcvc mid), fcaft ©ie wonder you speak so well 
 
 fd) on fo $nt fpveclj'cn. already. 
 
 SSevjtC'tyen @ie wag ©ie W- Do you understand what you 
 
 fen ? read ? 
 
 %d) Wrjte'fye mefyv afg id) ve'= I understand more than I can 
 
 fren faun. speak. 
 
 933ie nen'nen ©ie tag auf What do you call that in Ger- 
 
 SMltfd) ? man ? 
 
 iaf'fett ©ie UUg Seutfd) fpvccl)^ Let us speak German. 
 
 en. 
 
280 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 2>ag ifl ein gn'teg WliVtd eg 
 
 ju lev'nen. 
 djflit went fpvcdj'cn @ie ? 
 <2Bag fa'gen @ie ? 
 QOBofcon' fpvccl/cn @ie ? 
 @pred}'en ©ie ju miv ? 
 ©pvccb'cn @ie cin rce'nig Ian'-- 
 
 tev. 
 
 That is a good way to learn 
 
 it. 
 With whom do you speak 1 
 What do you say 1 
 Of what do you speak 1 
 Do you speak to me 1 
 Speak a little louder. 
 
 SSiev'teg ©efpvdd)'. 
 
 30<W ifl e^ fiir 3Bet'tev ? 
 gg tft fd)6n (fcbo'ncs) aBeCter. 
 ©djeint Die ©on'ne ? 
 3a, mein £evv, nnD eg ift fe(;v 
 
 roavm. 
 Sag SBet'tci* Mi ben gan'jen 
 
 c £ag [ebon geroe'fen. 
 < 2Bie i|t Da^ SBet'rer ? 
 (£g ijt nidjt ju warm nnt> nid)t 
 
 ju hit. 
 £)ag SBet'ter fyat ftdj gedn'; 
 
 fcevt. 
 (Eg ift fef)v nnn'tug. 
 S>te SBol'fen ftnD fefyv Dicf. 
 3d) furclj'te roir metj'btn Sfte'- 
 
 gen bet'om'men. 
 (£g vie'felt, eg unrfc veg'nen. 
 Qjg nnvD bait) veg'nen. 
 £g fdngt an jn veg'nen, fdjuci'* 
 
 en. 
 £g i|t fefefeclj'tes (fdjlccfct) 
 
 Sg i|t fdnmtt'jig. 
 
 £g ijt tvoe'fen, nag, veg'nid)t, 
 
 ftitvmtfd), win'&ig, vcrdn'* 
 
 t>evltd)eg ^Det'tev. 
 £>ag OBet'tev ftavr ftdj auf. 
 Sie'fev iHe'gen rcivt> bait) fcov-- 
 
 n'bev fein. 
 2Biv rcev'fcen X>on'nev fya'ben. 
 2>ev £>on'nev vollt. 
 
 Fourth Dialogue. 
 
 What kind of weather is it? 
 
 It is fine weather. 
 
 Does the sun shine ? 
 
 Yes, Sir, and it is very warm. 
 
 The weather has been fine the 
 
 •whole day. 
 How is the weather ? 
 It is neither too warm nor too 
 
 cold. 
 The weather has changed. 
 
 It is very windy. 
 
 The clouds are very thick. 
 
 I fear we shall have rain. 
 
 It drizzles, it will rain. 
 
 It will soon rain. 
 
 It begins to rain, to snow. 
 
 It is bad weather. 
 
 It is dirty (weather). 
 It is dry, wet, rainy, stormy, 
 windy, changeable weather. 
 
 The weather clears up. 
 This rain will soon be over. 
 
 We shall have some thunder. 
 
 The thunder roars. 
 
APPENDIX. 281 
 
 gftllf tc* (Scfpvad)'. Fifth Dialogue. 
 
 3&0 gc'fycn @ic fyin ? Where are you going 1 
 
 3d) ge'fye uacl) Son'Don. I am going to London. 
 
 Cf gc^t Jtact) S^Clttfcl) lant). He is going to Germany. 
 
 T23o roofynt Cf jcf?t ? Where does he live now? 
 
 <£v itoofynt in ocv ©tat)t £am He lives in the town of Hano- 
 
 no'toei*. ver. 
 
 ©V gefyt tmt'd) (t'tfccr) gran^? He is going through (by the 
 
 vetd) atad) t>Ct* @d)tt)ca$. vvay of) France to Switzer- 
 
 land. 
 
 fe i|t iat (jtt) Sdea'pcf, SKoan, He has been in (at) Naples, 
 
 QQDtCll gciDCfcn. Rome, Vienna. 
 
 SOlci'ne ©d)tt>cf tear a]? in (ju) My sister has been at Rome. 
 
 SKoan gen>e'fcn. 
 
 CDtctn S5l*U'Dcr wax in 1Lm\ltV: My brother had been in Am- 
 
 oaan' geroc'fen. sterdam. 
 
 3d) ge'fyc aaif oat? ianfc. I am going to the country. 
 
 <2Bo f oan'ancai @ie fyca: ? Where do you come from ? 
 
 3d) fom'aaac to oat ocan iati'&c. I come from the country. 
 
 3d) trom'ttie toon (atts?) DCl* I come from (out of) the city. 
 
 ©taot. 
 
 3d) fom'me ans (toon) t>cr I come out of (from) the 
 
 ©tra'fe. street. 
 
 QGBtV foan'men toon CCt* 33oVfe. We come from 'Change. 
 
 3ct) ge'lje nad) £an'fe. I am going home. 
 
 3d) foan'ane ans (toon) ret* I come from church. 
 ^tVdje. 
 
 ©ic gctyt in tic £ir'd)e. She is going to church. 
 
 £v gefyt nad) J^an'fe. He is going home. 
 
 3c() fom'anc aaas t>em jSinVaaacr. I come out of the room. 
 
 @tc tenant aaaS $n ©tat'be. She comes out of the parlour. 
 
 3c() gc'l)c in t>ic ^am'ancv, in I am going into the chamber, 
 
 t>ic ^fldj'e, ill ocn teller, into the kitchen, into the 
 
 K. cellar, &lc. 
 
 ©ie flno in OCt* ^aaat'anct*, in They are in the chamber, in 
 
 OCf ftaKtVe, in oeiat Ktl'lw, the kitchen, in the cellar, 
 
 ttt OCan ^O'fc, K. in the yard, &c. 
 
III. 
 
 GERMAN ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 %. € Ztono Gtyriftt, . • 
 
 2fntro. . . . 2Cnt»o?t, . . . 
 
 2f. $ mm Xtfkmwt, . 
 
 2Cuf[. .... Zfoffoge, . . . 
 
 2(u$g SUtSgafce, . . . 
 
 au$g. . . . ausgenommen, . 
 
 §23 25uc(), 23aut>, . . 
 
 £. Sap., or £ap. ^apitcf, or £apitef, 
 
 2) doctor, . . . 
 
 t>. f) t>a£ fyeijt, . . . 
 
 l>. i fcas iff, . . . 
 
 fcnrgf fcergleidjen, . . . 
 
 <£to Sfcangelium, . . 
 
 <£n> Siter, . . . . 
 
 f. or folg. . . folgenfc, (si?ig.) . 
 
 ff. fo(geut>e, (plur.) 
 
 gr gvau, .... 
 
 geb geboven, . . . . 
 
 gcjt gejtovben, . . . 
 
 <8v (Svof(()en, . . . 
 
 f). @. ... fyciUge @e()rifr, . 
 i?t\ £nt. . . . £err, $ernt, . . 
 3. £. ... Seftt* S^rifht*, . 
 
 I ties, 
 
 2D?, or SDtaj. . 3)?aje|tdt, . . . 
 
 SDtfcv SDtanufcHpt, . . 
 
 St. @. ... Sftacfofcfcvift, . . 
 91, $ States Sejtament, . 
 
 in the year of our 
 Lord. 
 . answer. 
 
 Old Testament. 
 . edition. 
 
 edition. 
 . except. 
 
 book, volume. 
 
 chapter. 
 . Doctor. 
 
 that means. 
 . i. e., viz. 
 
 of this kind. 
 . Gospel. 
 
 your. 
 
 } 
 
 the following. 
 
 . Lady, wife. 
 
 born. 
 . died. 
 
 a coin in Germany, 
 [groat.) 
 . Holy Scriptures. 
 
 Mr., Sir, Sirs, Messrs. 
 . Jesus Christ. 
 
 read. 
 . Majesty. 
 
 Manuscript. 
 . Postscript. 
 
 New Testament. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 283 
 
 ob ooer, . . . 
 
 SHcc SKccenfcnt, . . 
 
 SKtfyfv, . . . $Hctd)g %t)tUv, 
 
 © @ette, . . . 
 
 ©. or f. . . . ftefye, . . . 
 ©c. 23?aj. . . ©cine SDtajejfat, 
 ©t ©anct, . . 
 
 it. a. m. 
 it. o. g. 
 w. f. f. 
 u. f. m. 
 it. f. n>. 
 SB. . 
 
 
 Skater, . . . . 
 ttnt> an&ere mcfyv, 
 unt> t> erg (eid) en, 
 unt> fo fort or fewer, 
 uno fo mefyr, 
 into fo roeiter, 
 S£er£, . . . . 
 
 ton, . . 
 3eile, . . 
 jitm 25eifpie[, 
 jum Srempef, 
 
 or. 
 
 reviewer, critic. 
 
 rixdollar. 
 
 page (of a book). 
 
 see, vide. 
 
 His Majesty. 
 
 Saint. 
 
 dollar. 
 
 &c, farther. 
 
 and the like. 
 
 &c. 
 
 verse, 
 of, from, 
 line. 
 
 for example. 
 
CAMBRIDGE: 
 CHARLES FOLSOM, PRINTER TO THE UNIVERSITY. 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 "!! 
 
 14 19i 5 
 
 JAIH25 1917 
 
 30m-l,'15 
 
 / 
 
 
. ' .'» 
 
 
 
 I